JP2021045644A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characterized by display means, concerning a game machine of a pinball game machine (Pachinko machine), a rotary drum game machine (slot machine) or the like.SOLUTION: Before display of ready-to-win in a decorative pattern variation display, a mini game of a dice slot game is started, and super protrusion button performance according to the result is started in the decorative pattern variation display executed during execution of the mini game of the dice slot game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 148

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

Further, such a game table is known to have a display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a characteristic display means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple displays.
One of the plurality of displays is a mini-game.
The mini-game may start before the reach is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display.
The effect according to the result of the certain mini-game (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect") is the decorative symbol variation display that is being executed or the decorative symbol variation display that is started after the execution decorative symbol variation display. Started at,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console having a feature in the display means.

FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is the flowchart of the process, (c) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206. It is a figure explaining the effect example applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows some example that the navigation character YM of a character of a lord is taking an action with respect to a variable icon h0. It is a figure which shows some example that the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono is taking an action with respect to a variable icon h0. It is a figure which shows some example that the display mode of an icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows some example in which a navigator character YM takes action a plurality of times with respect to a variation icon h0 in one variation display of a decorative symbol. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 23, in which the navigation character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of the icon change effect. It is a figure which shows some example that a navigator character YM takes a plurality of actions with respect to a hold icon in one variation display of a decorative symbol. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 26, in which the navigator character YM takes actions on the hold icon a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows some example in which a navigator character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to a hold icon in a plurality of variable displays of a decorative symbol. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 28, in which the navigation character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of the icon change animation. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variation display of a decorative pattern executed in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which the ninja navigation character NJ of the default display mode takes an action with respect to the hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example which the navigation character NJ of a red ninja is taking an action to the hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of the icon change notice display and mode change. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in the 3rd column and after from the left in FIG. 34, and still more example of the change effect of a navigation character. It is the continuation of the example shown in the 3rd column and after from the left in FIG. 35, and is the figure which shows the other production example. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in the 3rd column and after from the left in FIG. 36. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which showed an example of an item. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 1 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 2 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 3 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 4 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 5 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 6 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 7 in chronological order. It is a transition diagram which showed an example of the transition of the screen in the pachinko machine 100. It is the figure which showed an example of the real screen transition in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition when various menus are selected in a menu screen. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 8 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 9 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 10 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 11 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 12 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 13 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 14 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 15 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 16 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 17 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 18 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on modification 1 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on modification 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on modification 3 in time series. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which a selection effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which a selection effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which the continuous hit operation effect and the button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which the continuous hit operation effect and the button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which the continuous hit operation effect and the button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production is performed during a big hit game. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a mini-game production is performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example using a variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using a variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using a variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using a variable icon. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which a timer notice effect and a frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which a timer notice effect and a frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board of a so-called right-handed machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the front of the attacker unit 2340, and FIG. 177 is a view which saw the attacker unit 2340 from the back. It is the figure which looked at the attacker unit 2340 from the back. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of the 2nd variable winning opening 235a. FIG. 6 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 176. It is a figure which shows the production example after hitting the probability change big hit. It is a figure which shows the production example after hitting the big hit with no probability change. It is a figure which shows the production example which a timer notice effect is performed during a big hit game, and is promoted to a big hit with a probability change. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example shown in FIG. 182, and further shows the first half part of the production example when V prize is succeeded in a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the latter half part of the production example when the V prize is succeeded in a big hit game, and further shows the example which notifies the prize every time there is a prize in a general prize opening during a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 184, and further shows the example which notifies the winning every time there is a winning in the attacker during a big hit game. It is the figure which showed the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 185, and further showed the production example in the jackpot game of the rank up bonus. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 186. It is a figure which showed another production example in the jackpot game of a rank-up bonus. It is the figure which showed the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 188, and further showed another production example in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 189. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 190, and further shows the production example during the big hit game to the production example during the symbol variation display during the ST period. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 191. It is a figure which shows a part of the production example in the symbol variation display during another ST period from the production example in a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 193. It is a figure which shows the production example when the general winning opening 2266 different from the unit general winning opening 2266 is won during the big hit game, and further shows the example when the irregular general winning opening is won. It is the figure which showed the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 195, and further showed a part of the example when the door opening error occurred during the big hit game. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 196. It is the figure which showed the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 197, and further showed a part of the example when the dish full tank error occurred during the big hit game. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of power failure and power recovery during a big hit game. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the machine 2000 of the holding, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. , (C) show a portable game machine 4000 including a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) includes a storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. A home-use video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, the game console according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business office. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the main body 104 is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). When the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other), and the speaker 120 can output sound. Become.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor (inner frame opening sensor) for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened is provided. ing.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 109 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a treble speaker that outputs treble) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Has been done. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like which emits light may be referred to as a lamp, and a lamp which emits light is an example of a light emitting means. Corresponds to.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate may be provided to detect that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is provided with a door-side ball passage unit capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. , The ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as the dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches a ball into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 (chance button 136) that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and an effect button. The chance button lamp 138, which is built in 136 (chance button 136) and emits the effect button 136 (chance button 136), and the ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement shop. It includes an operation button 140, a return operation button 142 that instructs the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged as cross keys, and the enter key is arranged at the center of the cross keys. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not have a door 108 with a ball storage plate, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided. When the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (may include the door 108 with a ball storage dish) is open to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the effect means provided on the front frame door 106 (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance). Button lamp 138. If the front frame door 106 is provided with an effect movable body, the effect movable body is also included), the display of the ball rental display unit, the chance button 136, the ball rental operation button 140, the return operation button 142 and It is configured so that the operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower plate full tank detection sensor can be detected. Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 in which the power supply board 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is housed is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) are attached. The door 108 may be included), and the game board 200 is configured so that the power supply voltage is supplied from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that collides the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided. The ball launch handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that invalidates the launch (injection) of the game ball accompanying the operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the operation of the player, and the player touches the ball launch handle 134. It is equipped with a touch sensor capable of detecting. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided. Further, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launch handle 134 has been operated from the state in which it has not been operated while the demo screen is being displayed, a special effect may be performed. .. For example, an effect display by a display means, an effect sound by a sound output means, a light emission effect by various decorative LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on a game board or a frame) can be mentioned. The production may be performed by four types of production means, or may be performed by one or more types of production means. Further, even if the same type of production means is used, there may be a production means that performs a dedicated production and a production means that does not (for example, the production movable body of the frame performs the dedicated production, but the production movable body of the game board is dedicated. For example, no production is performed, or the production movable body A of the game board performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body B of the game board does not perform a dedicated production. This example can be applied to other production means. It is.).

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is removable from the main body 104, and when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 4). (See FIG. 4), a payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (FIG. 4) for performing control processing related to launching a game ball. A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 4), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. A power supply including a payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180. The power supply board case 184 for accommodating the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. These first special figure display device 212 and second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. Further, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the control state will be described using the wording indicating the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the wording of the control state includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting port 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is formed. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the first special figure start port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special figure start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are opened is easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls that enter the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232 are provided, but three start ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special drawing starting ports may be provided, one second special drawing starting port may be provided, and conversely, one first special drawing starting port is provided. It may be provided and two second special figure starting ports may be provided. Further, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the game ball wins a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. In addition, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, there are a plurality of disc-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 and game nails 238. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out-sensor is a game ball that has passed through the sensors of the winning openings (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and a game that has passed through the sensors of the starting opening (1st special drawing starting port 230, 2nd special drawing starting port 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out port. The sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Director 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-like left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the inner ends of the shielding device 246 overlap each other, and the shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 indicating the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example,). A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. 2nd special figure for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the starting port 232 and a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory. The drive circuit 334 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. , The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 detects the pressing of various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc., the effect button 136 (chance button 136), and the various buttons that make up the operation key unit 137. The detection signal from the button sensor 426 is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a CPU 504. VDP (Video Display Processor) 516 that reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And, are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal plate (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. When it is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, nine types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure I", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get the ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds, it is a real 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that you can expect to get a ball in one round, but you can not expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 4 out of 15 rounds It is a real 4R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in the round, but cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to get a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and if the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the 101st time is non-electric. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5B, six types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure f", are shown, and five types of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and "Special Figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”), 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns with the same number other than "3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 1-Den-sama-Decoration 1", "Decoration 4-Den-sama-Decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 5D shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal drawing display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as the reserved number storage area for the special figure. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is turned on (indicating that the operation has been performed). In other words, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number value for winning a normal figure that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value, the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 5 (a) is on, and the 2R jackpot flag is on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure e, and the loss flag is on, the special figure f. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), a 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and a lost symbol (special figure e). Confirmation display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). (3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the normal map high probability state (normal map probability change). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting port 232 until the game balls are entered. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game regarding the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, the special figure 2 start information is deleted. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested with priority over hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special drawings may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, etc. The command type can be specified), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and timers selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command that includes information indicating a number, etc., it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc., and the winning effect start command and end. In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Including presence / absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit is used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are on hold. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main control unit timer interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 51, a special figure look-ahead process is performed within the winning opening winning process. In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special figure). The figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored in the special figure. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the rank of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Compare with the number of pre-reads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Further, the process of step S303 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is specified. FIG. 2 Preliminary determination is made prior to the winning / failing determination process in the related lottery process (step S229). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, the advance determination of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. Further, this pre-judgment process may be performed using a special table for pre-judgment instead of the table used for the hit / fail judgment.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Further, the process of step S311 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, the advance determination of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. Further, this pre-judgment process may be performed using a special table for pre-judgment instead of the table used for the hit / fail judgment.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-reading result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the look-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figures 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, "special figure I" (off) is stored in the storage area "hold 1" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I" is stored in the storage area "hold 2" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Out of place) is remembered.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 9B, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 9C shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result and the special figure fluctuation time are preliminarily determined, and these information are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as the pre-reading result information. Can be sent.

Next, refer to FIG. 10 for the hit / fail determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for hit / fail determination, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for hit / fail determination. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in the case of the special figure high probability state, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. , Refer to the low probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 10 (b). Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result. It can also be applied to the winning / failing determination table used in the special drawing per lottery process in step S801 of FIG. 53 (b), which will be described later.

Similarly, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, when the special figure is in the high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to, and the special figure is in the low probability state. In that case, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. When the hit / fail judgment result of the big hit is incorrect, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value are used as the basis. , Select the winning / failing judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected. It can also be applied to the small hit determination table used in the special figure small hit lottery process in step S803 of FIG. 53 (b), which will be described later.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / failing determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to, and the special figure is based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop symbol of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, the result is a small hit. If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b) is referred to, and based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is a special figure. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed is set in the special symbol display device.

The special figure determination table of this example may also be used for determining the symbol in the special figure state update process of FIG. 53 (a), and the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is used in the display symbol lottery process of step S708. When deciding, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to, and based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 1 by the special figure per lottery process in step S707 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the display symbol data of special figure 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is converted to the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation according to the detection result. A process of changing to the effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 following step S413, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S417 following step S415, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S443 following step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S509, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S503.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543, which is next to step S541, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S555, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 forms image data information (coordinate axes of VRAM 518, image size) constituting the display image in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to VRAM 518 in step S551. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S561, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative members constituting the effect device 206 so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 cannot be visually recognized. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown in the drawings. It is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side thereof, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a manner mounted on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is notified that the symbol variation is being displayed. When the symbol confirmation is being displayed (the symbol is stopped), the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigator character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the hold icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and N specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, pre-reading notice, notice in the symbol variation display, and hold of symbol variation display are accumulated). It may be displayed at the time of the effect (such as the effect sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the display mode is changed according to the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol variation display. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as the variable icon, or the variable icon may be expressed as moving. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed as stopped. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, “4” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

Further, the background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, the rules may be changed (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → ... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved or rotated in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest accessory 224E is lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, the first large board behavior character 224Ga, which is one of the movable objects, is given the letters "Large", and the second is given the letters "Board". The large board behavior character 224Gb, the third large board behavior character 224Gc with the characters "shake", and the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd with the characters "Mai" are arranged. Each of these 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Further, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a Senryo box accessory 224H, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. .. The Senryo Box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo Box accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryo box accessory 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special symbol is stopped, but blinks or is turned off while the special symbol is changing. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured so as to be able to slide and move in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. It should be noted that the effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured so as to be able to perform all of them, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured so that it can be done. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. Or, the production operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured so that the effect operation can be performed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may operate, and one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. 1 Only the decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. The front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is covered with decorative members constituting the effect device 206, and is configured so that a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L cannot be visually recognized. The decorative member may be made transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be made visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown in the drawings. It is omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The variation icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 14B, the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round patternless and white display mode), but the game is played. The display mode may change depending on the progress. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The combination is displayed as stopped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second reserved number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. In this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, the rules may be changed (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → ... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be in a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14B is the upper end of the family crest accessory 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryo Box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices, family crest accessory 224E, and Senryo box accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each production movable body is made visible.

Further, in FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

15 (A1) to 15 (A2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, when the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 15 (A1), the mode shown in FIG. 15 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, from the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, until the characters "large", "board", "swing", and "mai" are first facing the front. Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the Senryo box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are the Senryo box accessory. Compared to the case where it does not overlap with 224H, it is considered to be more difficult to see. It should be noted that the Senryo box accessory 224H may be configured so as not to overlap the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the 1000-car box accessory 224H and may be configured to overlap the 1000-car box accessory 224H.

In FIG. 15 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL may be made easier to see by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 or various lamps. ..

15 (C1) to 15 (C4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (C1) to 15 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided instead of the family crest accessory 224E. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is set below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has an elevating arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm. The elevating arm can be elevated by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and the posture extending in the horizontal direction is the initial posture of the LED array. The LED provided in the LED array may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls the lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing so, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs change during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 15 (C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

FIG. 15 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display screen is more difficult to see than in the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 15 (C3) shows how the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. LED arrays are accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 15 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. May be good. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 15 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced to guide the light. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to see.

15 (E1) to 15 (E2) show that the family crest accessory 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM are considered to be more difficult to see than when they do not overlap. After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest accessory 224E is rotated in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest accessory 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. It can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a).

FIG. 15 (F1) shows how the Senryo box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the Senryo Box accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped because the Senryo box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this production example, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the family crest accessory 224E is not operated so that the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. Further, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the evacuation operation may be performed to move the family crest accessory 224E further downward.

In FIG. 15 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved by sliding so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is also scrolled. That is, with respect to the background image, the area that was not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N were slid to be visually recognized by the sliding movement. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to make a display that has become. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward and moves to the second position. 3 The decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown that the display straddles the device 208N. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the enlarged first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the enlarged left symbol. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed only, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. 15 (I1) to 15 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (I1) to 15 (I2), the above-mentioned POV display 224I is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to a position where the LED array overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and rotates constantly. It is shown that the character "heat" is displayed after reaching the speed and rotating at a constant speed.

In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

15 (K1) to 15 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4), the outer circumference of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 15 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

FIG. 15 (K2) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide and move to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a unified display. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest accessory 224E moves downward from the initial position to the evacuation position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2'), the displays on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid and moved without scrolling. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. It may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 15 (K3) to 15 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other and counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are rotating together in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 15 (K4) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N match the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. A display is performed that rotates around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may appear that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated, but the displayed image is not rotated.

FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modified example of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, on the sub-display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right side to the left side, but a part of it overlaps with the sub display device 208S and is sub. It is said that it is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the display device 208S. As shown in FIG. 15 (L1'), the display image (background image, Sabohani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

FIG. 15 (M1) shows the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the characters "large", "board", "shaking", and "mai" are in front of each other, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. It has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub-display device 208S which has moved to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the above. At this time, the sub-display device 208S performs a cut-in display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, indicating that a predetermined advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 step by step, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step. ..

In FIG. 16, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) can also be applied. Further, in the following, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the light guide plate IL are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image (coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the second UI unit 281, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 16 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are shown by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the start of fluctuation in the special symbol display device → the start of blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the start of fluctuation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → decoration It is performed in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet. The symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may start at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 starts. May start, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol has started.

In FIG. 16 (3), it is shown that the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second reserved number display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 16 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14). At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 16 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The display starts. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is completed. 1 The movement animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

FIG. 16 (7) shows how the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is high.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon has changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is increasing. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to "No", or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "No". In addition, there may be cases where the effect of promoting from the previously displayed notice (for example, "opportunity") to the later displayed notice (for example, "extreme heat") (for example, "no") is not performed. .. In addition, the navigation character notice is not only a notice in the symbol variation display, but also a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters appearing in the production of the pachinko machine 100). , Explanation of the stage of the production, etc., also called tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is composed of a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Intense heat", and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed and the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat" may be the same, or after the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed, in the balloon. The display may be updated to "super heat", or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat". As described above, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 16 (9) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13), the game is played. It is shown that a person is pressing the effect button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navigation character notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the above operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 16 (14), in the old man's conversation image CI2, instead of the operation promotion notification image, "it is intense heat". Character may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 16 (17). 7 ”is displayed as a stop and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to indicate that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16 (17) to 16 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be adopted. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to 16 (21), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 fluctuates. While leaving the icon h0, the frame is out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed in the second UI unit 281 (in the production example shown in FIG. 16 (20), the hold icon h11) are also framed out. .. The start of the movement display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started. After the frame-out display of each image in the above is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, both the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior may be performed. There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is not performed, or only the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior is performed. Even if the operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or even if both the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il are not performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. It should be noted that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions, respectively, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The start of movement of the four large board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIGS. 16 (22) to 16 (24), it is better to perform a series of productions performed by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL. It may be configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit than when no production is performed.

FIG. 17 (26) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (27) follows a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Animation is displayed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28) displays the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT, indicating that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (31), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the jackpot reliability is high. A notice production will be performed. The cut-in image CI3 of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect has been started since the development into super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (37), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. It should be noted that the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after the development of super reach. In addition, the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach, or after developing into super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image. At the same time, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed without being performed. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display shown in FIG. 17 (38) may not be performed and the effect may be lost, and further, the effect may be lost. After the effect display is performed, the revival effect may be displayed so that the effect display that becomes a big hit may be performed. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, in FIG. 17 (39), the Senryo box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. It is shown that it is. Further, after that, FIG. 17 (40) shows how the light guide plate IL is emitting light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. However, it can be set as appropriate. In addition, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

FIG. 17 (41) shows how the light guide plate IL has finished emitting light. After that, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the Senryo box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd move toward the initial position, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene in which the display was interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 17 (47), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". The swaying fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative patterns of. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. .. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 did not receive the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol determination has stopped, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since the jackpot game was started as a jackpot by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the "special bonus" and the game. It has been notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini right-handed display instructing right-handed is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit right is displayed, and then the first round is started as shown in FIG. 18 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is done. Further, a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and "1R", which is the current round, is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villas may be displayed.

After that, when the jackpot game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 18 (56) shows that the jackpot game is completed and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the jackpot end effect. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability change big hit, the game state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support) after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed to that effect, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state with electric support.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (warning display) for calling attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4) is performed. In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state that is not in the electric support is completed, or the big hit regardless of the situation where the big hit is made. It may be displayed whenever the game is finished.

FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the probabilistic state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probabilistic state with electric support, and the decorative symbol is also displayed in a different display mode from the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold icons of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and the display mode (here, the shape) is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be identified at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2. In addition, in FIGS. 18 (58) to 18 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is held. The icon is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 18 (58) to 18 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for easy explanation, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probabilistic state with electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive villas are displayed below the mini right-handed display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, a "bonus x 1" indicating that fact is displayed.

Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60) instructs the player to strike right. Right-handed notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters "Please right-handed" are displayed on the translucent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps with the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state in which the first jackpot game is completed and shifted, but it may be displayed even in the electric support state in which the jackpot game other than the first jackpot game is completed and shifted. For example, it may be displayed every time the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is hitting left. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize. In some cases, it may be determined that a left-handed hit has been made and a right-handed hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 18 (62). In addition, the mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

In FIG. 18 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is held for four times. That is, in the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special drawing 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 of the special drawing 2 are turned on. Is displayed. Further, also in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

FIG. 19 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (48). In addition, in FIGS. 16 to 17, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol has been described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state and is in the middle. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not determined that the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is either a substantial 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "bonus" and the player. It is informed that it is either a real 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 19 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the decorative symbol is lost. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It is left and hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 19 (41b) to 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from the lower part of the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not determined that the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b) displays the variable icon erasing animation. In the variable icon erasing animation display, the variable icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 19 (46b), an animation display is performed in which the variable icon h0 disappears. The variable icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

20 to 30 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 are examples of effects executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machines 100 capable of executing the effect examples shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 are shown in other drawings. Various effects can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 20 to 30, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N may be used. In this case, the second decorative symbol display device 208L may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 20 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 19 and the technical idea shown in other drawings can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 and the technical idea thereof. On the contrary, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 193 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

Although the description in FIGS. 20 to 30 can be applied to any of the production examples in this specification, it is preferable to apply to the production examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as an effect icon is taking an action on the variable icon h0.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, first, in FIG. 20A, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”). -"Decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a).

Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 20 (a). In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20A is displayed in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least part of it is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the part of the kimono) may be displayed in blue. This navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in FIG. 20A, the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 4, and the first holding icon h11, the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. ing. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each hold icon is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that.

Further, FIG. 20A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 remains displayed. is there. The variable icon h0 disappears at the timing when the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. The display of the navigation character YM does not disappear even at the timing of the final display, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed even during the final display.

In FIG. 20B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the first hold icon so far is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the hold icons h1 to h3 and the variable icons h0 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. become. The navigation character YM has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation).

In FIG. 20 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 20 (d), waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in FIG. Is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is blue, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. Further, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 20E has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 20 (f). The initial posture may be returned at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 20 (c) and ended immediately before FIG. 20 (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (h). In, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed is still displayed, and the navigation character YM is also continuously displayed. The variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 described above, the Ath effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the Ath color (blue) changes the default display mode variation icon to the Ath color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Subsequently, the second example shown from the left in FIG. 20 may be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, and duplicated description may be omitted. In the following description, the description overlapping with the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 may be omitted, but the description in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 applies. In the second example from the left in FIG. 20, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as those in the figure (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the default (white) variation icon h0 of the display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20F, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. At least a part of the variable icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in red. The variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. On the other hand, the mode of the variable icon h0 after the change (red mode) is different from the kimono mode (blue mode) of the navigation character YM. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 20 described above, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the first color (blue) is the variable icon of the default display mode, and the second B. This is an example of changing the color (red) of (red) with the second frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the frequency A and the frequency B in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 may be higher in the frequency A than in the frequency B, or in the A. The frequency of the second B may be higher than the frequency, and the frequency of the first A and the frequency of the B may be the same.

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 20 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, and duplicated description may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 20, the figures (a) to (d) are the same as those in the figure (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the default (white) variation icon h0 of the display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is the same blue smoke image as the kimono of the navigator character YM, and the variable icon h0 is more visible than before it was covered. It's getting harder. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the default (white) display mode. In this way, even if the icon is covered with the effect image Eh0, it may not only change but may not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the icon display mode changes can be classified as a success animation, and an animation in which the icon display mode does not change can be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, the display mode of the covered icon may be changed without fail. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (c), the combination of lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

Subsequently, the example shown in the upper half of the right end of FIG. 20 may be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 20, and duplicate explanations may be omitted. In FIG. 20 (c) shown at the left end, the variable icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be the blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (c) is a blue display mode, and in FIG. 20 (d1), the navigation of the lord in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The character YM swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (d1) is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in blue. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (e1), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is an effect image Eh0 which is a blue smoke image which is the same as the kimono mode of the navigator character YM and also the display mode of the variable icon h0. The covered and variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f1), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in blue before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 has changed to a mode different from the effect image Eh0 and the kimono mode (blue mode) of the navigation character YM. In this example as well, after that, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice.

Subsequently, the example shown in the lower half of the right end of FIG. 20 may be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 20, and duplicate explanations may be omitted. In FIG. 20 (c) shown at the left end, the variable icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be the blue display mode. In addition, although the navigation character YM of the lord was in a display mode wearing a blue kimono, it may be in a display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (c) is a blue display mode, and the navigator character YM of the lord is a display mode wearing a red kimono. In (d2), the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono swings a sword toward the variable icon h0 of the blue display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (d2) is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, the part of the kimono) may be displayed in red. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (e2), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a blue smoke image which is the same as the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 is covered from before being covered. It is difficult to see. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f2), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the blue display mode. The variable icon h0 has the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) that the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 20 are examples in which the variable icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies when the hold icon is targeted.

Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, and red have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes for expressing the player's advantage and the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is the white or unpatterned aspect (A aspect), the blue or diagonal line pattern aspect (B aspect), the green or diamond pattern aspect (C aspect), the red or the like. The pattern becomes higher in the order of the lattice pattern (D), the golden or vertical line pattern (E), and the iridescent or horizontal line pattern (F) becomes the highest. .. A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0, but each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. That is, the white color in the example described with reference to FIG. 20 may be replaced with blue color. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the blue color in the example described with reference to FIG. 20 may be replaced with white or green. For example, the navigator character YM of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be displayed in a white kimono, may be in a green kimono, or may be in a blue color. The effect image Eh0, which is the display mode of, may be a white display mode or a green display mode. Alternatively, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be a display mode wearing a red kimono, or may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono. The effect image Eh0, which may have a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono or a blue display mode, may have a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow. It may be a color display mode. The modes can be broadly divided into green and diamond-shaped patterns (the first aspect) and the following aspects (the first group, which is a group of the A aspect, the B aspect, and the C aspect), and red and red. It can be divided into the above-mentioned aspect (the second group which is a group of the D aspect, the E aspect, and the F aspect) of the lattice pattern (the D aspect). Here, the mode belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the second group, and the mode belonging to the second group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the first group. On the other hand, it may be possible to switch the modes within the first group and also to switch the modes within the second group. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the difference in size and number. Further, the advantage of the player is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that the premier production is likely to be started, or that the jackpot confirmation production is started. It may be easy. It also includes the fact that it is easy to perform an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear. The matters relating to the embodiments described in this paragraph are the same in the previous examples and in the subsequent examples.

Further, the mode of each icon may be the mode of the entire icon (entire area) or the mode of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIG. 20, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action on the variable icon h0.

The example shown at the left end of FIG. 21 will be mainly described with differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. The navigator character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a).

In FIG. 21 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 21 (c), the navigator character YM, which had been in the initial posture until then, faces the variable icon h0 in the white display mode. It changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 21 (d), waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in FIG. The icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice. It means that there was.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21 described above, the Ath effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the Bth color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode, and the Ath color (A). This is an example of changing to blue) with the Cth frequency (probability).

Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 21 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21, and duplicated description may be omitted. In the second example from the left in FIG. 21, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as those in the figure (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the default (white) variation icon h0 of the display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 21 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to the red display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 has changed to the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and also has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 21 described above, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode, and the second B. This is an example of changing the color (red) of (red) with the D-th frequency (probability). It should be noted that, for example, the variable icon h0 in the green display mode may be used instead of the variable icon h0 in the default display mode. In this case, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the display mode of the third color (green), and the third color (red). ) Is an example of changing with the D-th frequency (probability).

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 21 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21, and duplicated description may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 21, the figures (a) to (d) are the same as those in the figure (a) to (d) described above, and the red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the default (white) variation icon h0 of the display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 21 (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in gold, which is the same display mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed to. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the third example from the left in FIG. 21 described above, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode, the Cth. This is an example of changing the color (gold) of E with the frequency (probability) of E. Here, the relationship between the frequency C in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21, the frequency D in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 21, and the frequency E is the frequency D. The relationship may be> E-th frequency> C-th frequency. Alternatively, the frequency of the D may be less than the frequency of the E, or the frequency of the D may be equal to the frequency of the E. Further, the frequency of the Cth may be 0.

Further, the frequency D may be the frequency B in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 20, or the frequency A in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20> the frequency C. There may be.

Next, the example shown at the right end of FIG. 21 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 21, the figures (A) to (E) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and the display is wearing a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the mode lord turns to the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 21 (O), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (or), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (ku), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 21 are examples in which the variable icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIG. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold color. It may be a display mode of, or it may be a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 21, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing some examples in which the display mode of the icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, first, in FIG. 22A, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 22A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to.

In FIG. 22B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22B, the hold number of special figure 1 is 1, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 22C, the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the blue effect image Eh0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

In FIG. 22D, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (e), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the Ath color (blue) with the Fth frequency (probability).

Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 22 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, and duplicated description may be omitted. In the second example from the left in FIG. 22, FIGS. (A) to (B) are the same as those in the same figures (a) to (b) described above, and the default (white). The variation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 22C, the icon change animation is started in a state where no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and at least a part of the variable icon h0 is an effect image of a red smoke image. Covered by Eh0, the variable icon h0 is less visible than it was before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22D, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. In this example as well, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (E), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 22 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the Bth color (red) with the Gth frequency (probability).

Next, an example shown below will be described. In FIG. 22 (B'), the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed, and in the following figure (C'), the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the variation icon h0 is red. It is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a smoke image of the above, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22 (D'), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in blue before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It's changing. In this example as well, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. In this example as well, after that, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice.

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 22 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, and duplicated description may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 22, the figures (a) to (b) are the same as those in the same figure (a) to (b) described above, and the default (white). The variation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 22 (c), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22 (d), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the effect image Eh0, which is a gold display mode. It has changed to. In this example as well, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (e), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the third example from the left in FIG. 22 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the Cth color (gold) with the Hth frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the frequency of the F in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, the frequency of the G in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 22, and the frequency of the H is the frequency of the F. There may be a relationship of> G-th frequency> H-th frequency.

Next, the example shown at the right end of FIG. 22 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. Even in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 22, FIGS. (A) to (I) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (c) described above, and the default (white) display mode is used. The fluctuation icon h0 of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 22 (c), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22 (E), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (O), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. 22 (E), the player's expectation for a big hit Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 22 are examples in which the variable icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, each mode of the variable icon and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. 22. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a blue display mode, may be a green display mode, a white display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the effect image Eh0 which was the display mode of gold may be the display mode of rainbow color, and in this case, the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change may be the display mode of gold. However, it may be displayed in rainbow colors. Further, the effect image Eh0, which has been displayed in gold, may have a red display mode, a white display mode, a blue display mode, or a green display mode. It may be.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 22, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, first, in FIG. 23A, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23A, the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 23A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 23B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation).

In FIG. 23 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 23 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in the following figure (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the red smoke image and fluctuates. The icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is red, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. That is, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 23E has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 23 (f). The initial posture may be returned at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 23 (c) and ended immediately before FIG. 23 (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (h), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (i), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 23 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 23 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in red before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. are doing. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 23 (k) and ended immediately before FIG. 23 (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (l) to the figure (m)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example described above, the first icon change animation is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state is reached, or before the first stop is performed, and the second icon change animation is It is started after reaching the reach state, that is, during the reach state. The start timing of the icon change animation, that is, the start timing of the icon change effect is not limited to this example, and may be the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display indicating the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed. It may be time, it may be when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0, it may be when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, and the variable display of the decorative icon is finished. It may be the time (when the stop is displayed). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. Later, during or after the operation of the effect movable means such as the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryo box accessory 224H. The start timing of the icon change effect described here is the same for the icon change effect described before, and the same applies to the icon change effect described later.

Further, in the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the icon display mode changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation described here is not twice but once. That is, it can be considered that the start is started from FIG. 23 (c) and the end is just before (immediately before returning to the initial posture) of FIG. The navigation character YM may disappear once between FIGS. 23 (g) and 23 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 23 (g), disappears immediately after the figure (g), is redisplayed immediately before the figure (k), or is redisplayed in the figure (k). In this case, the delimiter between the two icon change animations becomes clear.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 23 will be mainly described with differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 23, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigation character YM of the display mode is changed to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 23 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23F, the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

23 (H) to 23 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. Same as in Fig. (L), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono faces the variable icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls out the sword. The pose changes to a swinging pose, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 23 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but again, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the icon display mode did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations continued in one variable display of a decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 23, in which the navigation character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol. ..

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 24 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 24, FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM of the display mode is changed to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 24E, at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

24 (h) to 24 (l) have been described above, except that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. Same as in Fig. (L), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono faces the variable icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls out the sword. The pose changes to a swinging pose, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 24 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to the golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It's changing. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failed animation in which the icon display mode did not change, whereas the second icon change animation changed the icon display mode. It was a successful anime. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 24 will be mainly described with differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 24, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 24 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to the red display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It's changing. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 24 (H) to 24 (L) are the same as those of FIGS. 24 (h) to (l) described above, and the display mode is wearing a red kimono after reaching the reach state. The navigator character YM of the lord of the palace turns to the variable icon h0 of the red display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 24 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose mode has changed is a false notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the icon display mode changed, whereas the second icon change animation changed the icon display mode. It was a failure animation that did not. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variable icon, the navigator character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but even if it is a big hit and is a true notice. Good. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, in one variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 23, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), an example shown in the left half of FIG. 24, the above. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after the failed animation is displayed in (hereinafter referred to as "failed successful example"), and an example shown in the right half of FIG. 24, in which the successful animation is displayed first and then fails. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is highest when continuous success cases are performed. High, followed by successful and unsuccessful cases, then successful and unsuccessful cases, and lowest consecutive unsuccessful cases (successful and unsuccessful cases> successful and unsuccessful cases) Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be lost (the jackpot probability is 0%), or it may be a jackpot (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the one variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed three times or more.

Further, if the change in the display mode fails, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image, which is the default color, may always be displayed, or conversely, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image may be displayed. It may be possible to succeed in changing the display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing two examples of the icon change effect.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed and the icon change effect using the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 22 are 1 of the decorative symbols. This is an example performed in the variable display of times.

First, in FIG. 25 (a), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 2 in the state where the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 25A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to.

In FIG. 25B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 25 (c), the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the red effect image Eh0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

In FIG. 25D, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or gold). In this example, no icon is displayed and the navigation character YM is not displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, but even when the navigation character YM is displayed, the decorative pattern fluctuates. A certain period during display (for example, a period during super reach, a period during dark display when the display screen goes black, and a period during which the display of the navigation character YM overlaps with other displays (notice display or error display). In), the navigation character YM may be hidden or invisible, and even in such a case, the icon change animation as shown in FIG. 25 (c) may be executed.

In FIG. 25 (e), one ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the second hold icon h12 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0.

In FIG. 25 (g), there is one more ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in this example, the navigation character YM appears or disappears depending on the number of reservations. That is, when the number of holds is N (here, N = 3), the navigator character YM appears (display starts), and when the number of holds is M (here, M = 2), the navigator character YM disappears (display ends). To do). The relationship between N and M in this condition of the navigation character YM may be N> M, and may be N = 4, M = 1, and the like. It should be noted that this condition can be applied to the previous examples, and this condition can be applied to the subsequent examples, but it does not have to be applied. In FIG. 25 (h), the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono appears in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Then, the navigation character YM is provided with a balloon indication that "one more is on hold and the tank is full". Further, in FIG. 25 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. The navigator character YM may appear in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may appear in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the navigator character YM appears after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state is reached, or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state is reached, that is, during the reach state. You may. Further, it may appear at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, it may appear when the display indicating the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed, or when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0. It may appear when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, or it may appear when the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (when the stop display is displayed). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. It may appear later, during or after the operation of the effect movable means such as the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryo box accessory 224H. The appearance timing of the navigation character YM described here can be applied to the examples described before, and can also be applied to the examples described thereafter.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (i), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 25 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 25 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in red before being covered by the effect image Eh0, changes to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. are doing. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed is changed only once, but even if the change is performed a plurality of times. Often, even in the icon change effect using the navigation character YM, only one change is made, but a plurality of changes may be made.

In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 25, the icon change animation using the navigation character YM is performed twice in one variable display of the decorative symbol, but in the first and second times, the navigation character YM is used. This is an example in which the display mode is different.

First, in FIG. 25 (A), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 while the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 25A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 25B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation).

In FIG. 25C, the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 25 (D), waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM, and in the following figure (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is a blue smoke image similar to the kimono mode of the navigator character YM. The effect image Eh0 is covered, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is blue, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. The variable icon h0 also changes in the same manner as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (G) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (F), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 25 (F). The initial posture may be returned at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 25 (C) and ended immediately before FIG. 25 (G) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (FIG. It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (D) to the figure (E)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (H), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In FIG. 25 (H), the navigation character YM is covered with the effect image EYM, which is a red smoke image, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The navigation character YM0 may be partially covered by the effect image EYM, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EYM. In FIG. 25 (I), the effect image EYM disappears, and the navigation character YM, which was a display mode wearing a blue kimono before being covered with the effect image EYM, has a red display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to. The change effect of the navigation character YM, which is an effect icon, may be started in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may be started in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the change effect is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state, or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state is reached, that is, during the reach state. May be done. Further, it may be started at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, it may be started when the display indicating the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed, or the timer of the timer notice becomes 0. It may be started at times, it may be started when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, or it may be started when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished (at the time of stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. It may be started later, during or after the operation of the effect movable means such as the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryo box accessory 224H. The start timing of the change effect of the effect icon (navigation character YM in this case) described here can be applied to the examples described before, and can also be applied to the examples described thereafter.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (I), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. In the following figure (J), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 25 (K), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 25 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is the same red smoke image as the changed mode of the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variable icon h0 is before being covered. It is more difficult to see. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in blue before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. It's changing. The variable icon h0 also changes in the same manner as the effect image Eh0. Even in this second time, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (blue in this case)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 25 (K) and ended immediately before FIG. 25 (O) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (L) to the figure (M)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In addition, when the effect icon (navigation character YM in this case) is changed and the display mode of the effect icon is changed, the change effect of the display mode of the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon) is always performed. You may. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon) may be changed to the same display mode as the display mode of the changed effect icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example described above, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the first display mode and the icon change effect by the effect icon of the B display mode are performed in one variable display of the decorative symbol. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the first display mode is changed only once, but may be changed a plurality of times. In the icon change effect by the effect icon of the second display mode, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

The example described with reference to FIG. 25 was an example targeting the variable icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIG. 25. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, or may be a display mode wearing a green kimono. Alternatively, it may be a display mode wearing a red kimono, a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM takes actions on the hold icon a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, first, in FIG. 26A, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 26A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 26B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation).

In FIG. 26 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 26 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord. This wave motion passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 26E, at least a part of the first variable icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 26 (f), the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 26 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 26 (c) and ended immediately before FIG. 26 (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating (FIG. FIG. It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (h), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (i), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 26 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings the sword toward the left side, and in FIG. 26 (l). , Waves are oscillating from the sword. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 26 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time. It has changed to. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the first reserved icon h11 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 26 (k) and ended immediately before FIG. 26 (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (l) to the figure (m)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation described here is not twice but once. That is, it can be considered that the start is started from FIG. 26 (c) and is finished immediately before the figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may disappear once between FIGS. 26 (g) and 26 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 26 (g), disappears immediately after the figure (g), is redisplayed immediately before the figure (k), or is redisplayed in the figure (k). In this case, the delimiter between the two icon change animations becomes clear.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 26 will be mainly described with differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 26, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left and swings with the sword pulled out, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. This wave motion passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 26F, the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

26 (H) to 26 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. -Same as in the figure (l), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono changes to a pose that turns to the left, pulls out the sword and swings. , Waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 becomes more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 26 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but again, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. 1 The variable display of the decorative symbol performed after the hold is exhausted (the variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next) may be lost or may be a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 has not been performed, and in the next variable display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. Highly sexual.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations continued in one variable display of a decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 26, in which the navigation character YM takes actions on the hold icon a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 27 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 27, FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings, and extends from the sword of the navigator character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variable icon h0. Waves are oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (e), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 27 (f), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

27 (h) to 27 (l) have been described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. -Same as in the figure (l), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono changes to a pose that faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings. , The wave motion that passes from the sword of the navigation character YM, passes through the variable icon h0, and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 27 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to a mode. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failure animation in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a successful anime that changed. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 27 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 27, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung to the left, and extends from the sword of the navigator character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variable icon h0. Waves are oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 27 (F), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to a mode. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 27 (H) to 27 (L) are the same as those of FIGS. 27 (h) to (l) described above, and the display mode is wearing a red kimono after reaching the reach state. The navigator character YM of Noden-sama turns to the left and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and the wave motion that extends from the sword of the navigator character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variable icon h0. It is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 becomes more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 27 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next) performed after the first hold is digested. That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a failed animation that did not change. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

As described above, in FIGS. 26 and 27, as the embodiment, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. For example, the hold icon that was in the white display mode may be in the blue display mode, the green display mode, the red display mode, or the gold display mode. It may be a mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono. Further, the hold icon is not limited to the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 may change. Furthermore, the display mode of the plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of one or more hold icons may change.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the look-ahead notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, in one variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 26, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), an example shown in the left half of FIG. 27, the above. An example in which a success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed in (hereinafter referred to as "failure success example"), and an example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, the success animation is displayed first and then fails. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is highest when continuous success cases are performed. High, followed by successful and unsuccessful cases, then successful and unsuccessful cases, and lowest consecutive unsuccessful cases (successful and unsuccessful cases> successful and unsuccessful cases) Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be lost (the jackpot probability is 0%), or it may be a jackpot (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the one variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed three times or more.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, first, in FIG. 28A, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 28A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 28B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation).

In FIG. 28 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 28 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord. This wave motion passes through the variable icon h0, further passes through the first hold icon h11, and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 28E, at least a part of the second variable icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 28 (f), the effect image Eh2 disappears, and the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh2, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. The second hold icon h12 also changes to the same mode as the effect image Eh2. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 28 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 28 (c) and ended immediately before FIG. 28 (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (FIG. FIG. It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 28 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons such as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (i), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. When the number of holds becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 28 (i).

From FIG. 28 (j) to FIG. 28 (l), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 28 (m), the second icon change animation is performed with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing. It has been started. In FIG. 28 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 28 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time. It has changed to. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the first reserved icon h11 before the change (here, red)). As shown in FIG. 28 (o), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in a plurality of variable displays of decorative patterns. Further, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by the icon change animation is a hold icon representing the same hold, but may be a hold icon representing a different hold (the same applies to the following examples). For example, in the second icon change animation, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 28 (m), which was the third hold icon h12 in FIG. 28 (f), may be changed.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 28 will be mainly described with differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left and swings with the sword pulled out, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0, further passes through the first hold icon h11, and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. Subsequently, in FIG. 28 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 28F, the effect image Eh2 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 28 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the two hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 28 (I).

28 (J) to 28 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. -Same as in the figure (l), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues in the state where the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and in FIG. 28 (M), the icon changes for the second time in that state. The animation has started. In FIG. 28 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 28 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but again, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 28 (O), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the first hold is exhausted. The variable display of the decorative pattern to be performed (the variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next) may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 has not been performed, and in the next variable display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. Highly sexual.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations continued in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 28, in which the navigator character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 29 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 29, FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings, and from the sword of the navigator character YM, passes through the variable icon h0 and also passes through the first hold icon h11. 2 A wave that extends to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 29 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 29 (f), the effect image Eh2 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 29 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 29 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the two hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 28 (I).

In the following FIGS. 29 (j) to (l), FIG. 28 (i) described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. ) ~ Same as in the figure (l), with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 29 (m), the second icon remains in that state. The change animation has started. In FIG. 29 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 29 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to a mode. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). As shown in FIG. 29 (o), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failure animation in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a successful anime that changed. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 29 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 29, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. 28 (a) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings, and from the sword of the navigator character YM, passes through the variable icon h0 and also passes through the first hold icon h11. 2 A wave that extends to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 29 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 29 (F), the effect image Eh2 disappears, and the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh2, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh2. It has changed to a mode. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 29 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 29 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 29 (I).

The following FIGS. 29 (J) to (L) are the same as those of FIGS. 28 (i) to (l) described above, and the decorative symbol fluctuates with the display of the navigation character YM disappeared. The display continues, and in FIG. 29 (M), the second icon change animation is started in that state. In FIG. 29 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 29 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 29 (O), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a failed animation that did not change. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, in FIGS. 28 and 29, as the embodiment, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. For example, the hold icon that was in the white display mode may be in the blue display mode, the green display mode, the red display mode, or the gold display mode. It may be a mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono. Further, the hold icon is not limited to the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 may change. Furthermore, the display mode of the plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of one or more hold icons may change.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the look-ahead notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, in a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols (hereinafter, "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), an example shown in the left half of FIG. 29, the above. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after the failed animation is displayed in (hereinafter referred to as "failed successful example"), and an example shown in the right half of FIG. 29, in which the successful animation is displayed first and then fails. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is highest when continuous success cases are performed. High, followed by successful and unsuccessful cases, then successful and unsuccessful cases, and lowest consecutive unsuccessful cases (successful and unsuccessful cases> successful and unsuccessful cases) Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be lost (the jackpot probability is 0%), or it may be a jackpot (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the icon change animation is performed only once in the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, but the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times. That is, even if the icon change animation is performed a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol, and further, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times in the multiple variable display of the decorative symbol. Good.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing two examples of icon change animation.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 30 is an example in which the icon to be changed in the icon change animation is easily recognized.

First, in FIG. 30 (a), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 30A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 30B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation).

In FIG. 30 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 30 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave motion here extends to the front of the second hold icon h12 so as to avoid the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11. Further, an arrow extends from the tip of the sword toward the second hold icon h12. Since the wave motion shown in FIG. 28D passes through the variable icon h0 and also passes through the first hold icon h11, the variable icon h0 can be seen as a change target, and the first hold icon h11 can also be seen as a change target. .. On the other hand, the wave motion shown in FIG. 30 (d) does not occur because the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are avoided, and the second hold icon h12 is the change target by the display of the arrow. It is clearer that there is.

In FIG. 30 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 30 (f), the effect image Eh2 disappears, and the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh2, is red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh2. The display mode has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or gold). After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 30 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears).

In FIG. 30 (g), there is one ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 30 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Has been done. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done.

In FIG. 30 (j), the variable display of the decorative pattern continues, and in FIG. 30 (k), the second icon change animation is started, and the navigator character YM, which was in the initial posture, turns to the left and pulls out the sword. It changes to a swinging pose. In the following FIG. 30 (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave motion here extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 so as to avoid the variable icon h0. Further, an arrow extends from the tip of the sword toward the first hold icon h11. Since the wave motion shown in FIG. 30 (l) also avoids the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is not considered to be a change target, and the first hold icon h11 is a change target by the display of the arrow. Has become clearer.

In FIG. 30 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 30 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as that of the effect image Eh1. It has changed to. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 30, the effect icon (navigation character YM) of the display mode A (display mode wearing a blue kimono) is the display mode B (red kimono) shown in FIG. 28 and the like. This is an example in which it is easier to recognize the icon to be changed than the effect icon (navigation character YM) of the display mode (display mode wearing).

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 30 is an example in which the hold icon whose display mode has changed becomes a variable icon and the display mode changes again.

First, in FIG. 30 (A), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (A), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 30A shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 30B, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (B), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation).

In FIG. 30C, the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 30D, waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono. The wave motion here passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 30 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 30F, the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (F), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 30 (F). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears).

In FIG. 30 (G), there is one ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (H), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 30 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Has been done. The variable icon h0 is an icon in which the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed due to the previous fluctuation has changed, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (J), a reach state is formed, and the character display of “reach” is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 30 (K), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 30 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 30 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in red before being covered by the effect image Eh0, changes to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. are doing. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 30, the icon change effect is performed only once for the hold icon, but may be performed a plurality of times. Further, the icon change effect is performed only once for the variable icon, but may be performed a plurality of times. That is, after the icon change effect is performed once or a plurality of times for a certain hold icon, the hold icon becomes a variable icon, and the icon change effect may be performed once or a plurality of times for the variable icon as well. You may.

In the above explanation, the navigator character YM appears when the number of holds is N (here, N = 3) and disappears when the number of holds is M (here, M = 2). , It may be always displayed. However, although it is always displayed, the navigation character YM may disappear or disappear for a certain period during the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, during the period during super reach, during the period when the display screen is blackened, and during the period when the display of the navigation character YM overlaps with other displays (notice display and error display), the navigation character YM is used. It may disappear or disappear. Further, it may be displayed during the big hit game, or may not be displayed during the big hit game. Further, when the number of reserved special symbols is 0 and the symbol variation display (variation display of decorative symbols) is completed, a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as “demo display”) is displayed. That is, the demo display is a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display may be displayed in a stopped display state. Examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a video demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display. The navigation character YM may also be displayed in these demo displays. Further, during the display period of the demo display, the navigation character YM in all display modes may be displayed, or only the navigation character YM in the display mode belonging to the first group may be displayed. That is, only the navigation character YM in the display modes of white, blue, and green may be displayed. Alternatively, during the display period of the demo display, only the navigation character YM in the white display mode may be displayed, only the navigation character YM in the blue display mode may be displayed, or the navigation in the green display mode may be displayed. Only the character YM may be displayed. Furthermore, only the navigation character YM in the red display mode may be displayed.

Further, although the description is limited to the production example using the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as the production icon, the production icon is not limited to the navigation character YM of the character of the lord, and the bomber icon I3 shown in FIG. 106 and the like. Further, it may be various icon change notice icons shown in FIG. 119 (b).

Further, the icon to be changed may be a variable icon or a hold icon. When it is a hold icon, it may be the first hold icon, the second hold icon, the third hold icon, or the fourth hold icon. .. Further, the type of the mode of the icon to be changed may be the type of the hold icon or the variable icon shown in FIG. 119 (a).

In the above description, "display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, variable icon h0 or hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode] is displayed. In the end, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red].
A certain icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red].
When the display mode of the certain icon does not change to the second display mode even if the effect icon of the fourth display mode changes a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, , Fig. 20 (f2)]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a result different from the prediction of the player who predicts that the display mode will change to the second display mode.

Here, one aspect may be only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. , It may be a partial combination.

Further, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain aspect, or the whole area may be displayed in the certain aspect.

In addition, the icon in the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain mode.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

In the above description, "display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, variable icon h0 or hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode] is displayed. In the end, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red].
A certain icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red].
When an effect of changing a certain icon in the first display mode is performed during a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 22 (D')]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even if the change effect by the effect icon is not performed, and the player's interest may be improved.

Here, one embodiment may be only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of character, all or a part of a character, or a combination of all of them. , It may be a partial combination.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good. Further, if an effect of changing a certain icon in the first display mode is performed during a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

In addition, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode].
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode.
The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with the first frequency [for example, , Ath frequency (Ath probability)] [for example, FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [for example, , Bth frequency (Bth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (H)],
A game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

The frequency referred to here may be a probability (hereinafter, the same applies).

In the above description, "display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, variable icon h0 or hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode] is displayed. In the end, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red].
A certain icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 20 (f1)]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even from the change effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, so that the player's interest can be improved. There is.

Further, in some embodiments, only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, and all or part of the character may be used, or a combination of all of these may be used. It may be a combination of some.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

Further, "The above-mentioned icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode].
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode.
The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with the first frequency [for example, , Ath frequency (Ath probability)] [for example, FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [for example, , Bth frequency (Bth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (H)],
A game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "The above-mentioned icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode.
When a certain icon of the fifth display mode [for example, a golden display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed. In the end, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the expectation of jackpot is high],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with a third frequency [for example, , Cth frequency (Cth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the second display mode at a fourth frequency [for example, , D-th frequency (D-th probability)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (A) to 21 (H)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the fifth display mode with a fifth frequency [for example, , E-th frequency (E-th probability)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c)],
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
A game table characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "A game table characterized in that the third frequency is 0. ] Was also explained.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the third frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "For the certain icon, even if the effect icon is not displayed, the sixth frequency from the default display mode to the first display mode [for example, the fifth frequency (the third probability). ], [For example, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e)],
The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [for example, a G-frequency (G-probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 22 (A) to 22 (E)],
The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [for example, a fifth frequency (H probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, Fig. 22 (A) to Fig. 22 (E)],
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
A game table characterized in that the sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The certain icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] that may be displayed more than once.
In the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of the certain icons are displayed, the display mode of the certain icon to be changed is changed.
The effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon of the third display mode is the object of the change, rather than the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. It is characterized in that it is easy to recognize which of a plurality of displayed icons the icon is [for example, the wave motion and the arrow shown in FIG. α11 (d) and FIG. The game table. ] Was also explained.

Here, the certain icon to be changed may be one or a plurality.

In addition, "The display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as" demo display ") may be displayed.
The demo display is displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display [for example, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214] is stopped and displayed. It is a display that may be displayed,
A game table characterized in that the effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed during the display period of the demo display. ] Was also explained.

Here, examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display.

Further, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not due to the difference in the displayed dialogue, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is the difference in the dialogue. It does not have to be the difference between the presence and absence.

Well, the display means may be a means for always displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display"). Further, the demo display may be a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display is always displayed in a stopped display state. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demo display.

In addition, "The display means is a change effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, an MG icon, a huge panda, and a" navigation character change "by an old character. It is a means that may be displayed,
After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed.
When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 75 (Fig. 75). A 3-1) to the same figure (A 6-1), FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), and FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure. (K 1-3-4), meter production shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (2-2-1) to FIG. (2-2-3)],
If a second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. 75 (A3-2). -1) to the same figure (A 3-2-2), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-3b2)]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the change effect display. Further, the change effect display may be always displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.

Further, "During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon is changed one or more times by the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode, and the variable display is being displayed. In addition, the display mode of the certain icon may be changed one or more times depending on the effect of the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (P)]. A featured game console. ] Was also explained.

Further, "During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon may be changed a plurality of times by the effect of the effect icon [for example, FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (a) to FIG. p)], a game console characterized by this. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, while the effect icon is displayed, the change in the display mode of the certain icon succeeds both the first time and the second time, and the variation display is displayed. There is a case of termination (hereinafter referred to as "first case") [for example, FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (p)],
While the effect icon is being displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change in the display mode of the certain icon fails the first time and succeeds the second time, and the variation display is displayed. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), it may end [for example, FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (p)].
While the effect icon is being displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change in the display mode of the certain icon is successful the first time and fails the second time, and the variation display is displayed. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as the "third case") [for example, FIGS. 24 (A) to 24 (P)],
When the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, and the change of the display mode of the certain icon fails both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends. (Hereinafter referred to as the "fourth case") [for example, FIGS. 23 (A) to 23 (P)],
In the third case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the fourth case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display],
In the second case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the third case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display],
The first case is characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is finally more likely to be definitely displayed than the second case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display]. Game table. ] Was also explained.

The description of the game table here is when the display mode of a certain icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed once. It will be a limitation on the ease of jackpot.

In addition, "While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times while the effect icon is displayed, and the variation display is displayed. A game table characterized in that the display mode of a certain icon may be changed once or a plurality of times in a state where the effect icon is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (p)]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned aspect is a certain color [for example, red].
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain color.
A game table characterized in that a certain icon in the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, an area inside the edge line]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain color. In addition, the icon in the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be the entire area displayed in the certain color.

In addition, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 77 (1) to 12 (12), an example shown in FIG. 30 and the like]. A featured game console. ] Was also explained.

The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over a continuous symbol variation display.

In addition, "The display means is a means on which a third change animation may be displayed.
The third change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the effect icon without the effect of another icon [for example, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 78 (U17) or the like]. ,
The third change animation is an animation in which at least an effect image [for example, smoke image] of the certain aspect [for example, red] is displayed [for example, FIGS. 79 (e2) to 3-2). ], A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the third change animation is always displayed. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. You may.

Further, "The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode].
A certain icon of the sixth display mode is changed by the effect icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a red kimono]. When the effect is performed, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] [for example, FIG. 21 (F)]. The stand. ] Was also explained.

When an effect of changing a certain icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always shifts to the second display mode. It may change.

In addition, "The display means is a means on which a fourth change animation may be displayed.
The fourth change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (9) to 11 (11) and 20 (c) to (f)). , Fig. 20 (C) -Fig. (F), etc.]
The display means is a means in which an invariant animation may be displayed.
The particle animation is an animation that does not change the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (I 4-1) to (I 6), 20 (c) to (f)). Etc.], a game table characterized by being. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the fourth change animation is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the particle animation.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0] may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the symbol variable display being executed.
A game table characterized in that the certain icon is the variable icon. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the variable icon is always displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display that is started later.
The hold icon is an icon displayed according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized in that the certain icon is the hold icon. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the hold icon is always displayed.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ] Was also explained.

In the above description, "display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0] may be displayed.
The display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the symbol variable display being executed.
The hold icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display that is started later.
The hold icon is an icon displayed according to the number of holds.
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
The case where the variable icon of the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] is displayed is larger than the case where the variable icon of the first display mode [for example, the blue display mode] is displayed. , Finally, it is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the expectation of jackpot is high],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the variable icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The effect icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25]. (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red].
The variable icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red].
When an effect of changing the hold icon is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the hold icon changes to a display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode [for example, FIG. 26 (f)] is a game table. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, after the change of the hold icon, the hold icon of the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode may be displayed, and the player's interest may be improved. ..

Here, one aspect may be only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. , It may be a partial combination.

The display means may be a means on which the variable icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means in which the hold icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when the effect of changing the variable icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon may be changed to the second display mode without fail. .. Further, when the effect of changing the hold icon is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, even if the display mode of the hold icon is always changed to the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode. Good.

In addition, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono].
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode].
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode.
The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the variable icon.
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the first display mode with the first frequency [for example, the first. Frequency of A (probability of A)] [for example, FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the second display mode with a second frequency [for example, a first. Frequency of B (probability of B)] [for example, FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (H)],
A game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode.
The case where the variable icon of the fifth display mode [for example, the golden display mode] is displayed is larger than the case where the variable icon of the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] is displayed. , Finally, it is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the expectation of jackpot is high],
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the first display mode with a third frequency [for example, a third display mode]. Frequency of C (probability of C)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (h)],
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the second display mode with a fourth frequency [for example, a fourth. Frequency of D (probability of D)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (A) to 21 (H)],
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the fifth display mode with a fifth frequency [for example, a fifth. Frequency of E (probability of E)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c)],
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
A game table characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "A game table characterized in that the third frequency is 0. ] Was also explained.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the third frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The variable icon has a sixth frequency from the default display mode to the first display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed [for example, a third frequency (fth probability)]. [For example, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e)],
The variable icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [for example, a G-frequency (G-probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 22 (A) to 22 (E)],
The variable icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [for example, an H frequency (H probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e)],
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
A game table characterized in that the sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "the variable icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] that may be displayed in plurality.
In the effect of changing the variable icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of the variable icons are displayed, the display mode of the variable icon to be changed is changed.
The effect of changing the variable icon by the effect icon of the third display mode is more effective than the effect of changing the variable icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. A game console characterized in that it is easy to recognize which of the plurality of displayed variable icons is the variable icon [for example, the wave motion and the arrow shown in FIG. α11 (d) and FIG. 6 (l)]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as" demo display ") may be displayed.
The demo display is displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display [for example, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214] is stopped and displayed. It is a display that may be displayed,
A game table characterized in that the effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed during the display period of the demo display. ] Was also explained.

Here, examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display.

Further, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not due to the difference in the displayed dialogue, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is the difference in the dialogue. It does not have to be the difference between the presence and absence.

Well, the display means may be a means for always displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display"). Further, the demo display may be a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display is always displayed in a stopped display state. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demo display.

In addition, "The display means is a change effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, an MG icon, a huge panda, and a" navigation character change "by an old character. It is a means that may be displayed,
After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed.
When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 75 (Fig. 75). A 3-1) to the same figure (A 6-1), FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), and FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure. (K 1-3-4), meter production shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (2-2-1) to FIG. (2-2-3)],
If a second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. 75 (A3-2). -1) to the same figure (A 3-2-2), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-3b2)]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the change effect display. Further, the change effect display may be always displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.

Further, "During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variable icon is changed one or more times by the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode, and the variable display is displayed. The display mode of the variable icon may change one or more times depending on the effect of the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (P)]. Game table to play. ] Was also explained.

Further, "During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variable icon may be changed a plurality of times due to the effect of the effect icon [for example, FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (p). )], A game console characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, while the effect icon is displayed, the change of the display mode of the variation icon succeeds both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends. (Hereinafter referred to as "the first case") [for example, FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (p)],
While the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon fails the first time and succeeds the second time, and the variation display ends. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as "second case") [for example, FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (p)],
While the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon succeeds the first time and fails the second time, and the variation display ends. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as "third case") [for example, FIGS. 24 (A) to 24 (P)],
When the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon fails both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends ( Hereinafter, there is also a “fourth case”) [for example, FIGS.
In the third case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the fourth case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display],
In the second case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the third case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display],
The first case is characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is finally more likely to be definitely displayed than the second case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display]. Game table. ] Was also explained.

The description of the game table here is when the display mode of the variable icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed once. It will be a limitation on the ease of jackpot.

In addition, "While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon changes one or more times while the effect icon is displayed, and the effect is displayed while the variation display is displayed. A game table characterized in that the display mode of the variable icon may change once or a plurality of times while the icon is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (p)]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned aspect is a certain color [for example, red].
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain color.
The game console characterized in that the variable icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, an area inside the edge line]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain color. Further, the variable icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain color.

Further, the certain aspect may be a display aspect using a certain character, or may be a display aspect using a certain kind of pattern.

In addition, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 77 (1) to 12 (12), an example shown in FIG. 30 and the like]. A featured game console. ] Was also explained.

The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over a continuous symbol variation display.

In addition, "The display means is a means on which a third change animation may be displayed.
The third change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the effect icon without the effect of another icon [for example, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 78 (U17) or the like]. ,
The third change animation is an animation in which at least an effect image [for example, smoke image] of the certain aspect [for example, red] is displayed [for example, FIGS. 79 (e2) to 3-2). ], A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the third change animation is always displayed. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. You may.

Further, "The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode].
The effect of changing the variable icon of the sixth display mode by the effect icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a red kimono]. When the above is performed, the display mode of the variable icon may change to the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] [for example, FIG. 21 (F)]. ] Was also explained.

When an effect of changing the variable icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon always changes to the second display mode. You may.

In addition, "The display means is a means on which a fourth change animation may be displayed.
The fourth change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the change icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (9) to 11 (11), 20 (c) to (f), FIG. 20 (C) to 20 (F), etc.]
The display means is a means in which an invariant animation may be displayed.
The invariant animation is an animation that does not change the display mode of the variable icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (I 4-1) to (I 6), FIG. ], A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the fourth change animation is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the particle animation.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ] Was also explained.

Next, the icon change effect will be further described. The icon change effect referred to here changes the hold icon, the variable icon, the mini item icon displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the notice icon, the mini game icon, and the icon change notice icon. It is a production.

FIG. 31 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 31 (a) shows the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol which is lost without reaching the reach state. FIG. 3B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variable display of a decorative symbol that becomes a big hit or a miss after reaching a reach state.

In FIG. 31 (a), after the start (variation start) of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. It shows the flow. In the following description, the order of stopping the decorative symbols is, in principle, the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but the order is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop are performed at the same time depending on the notice (the change notice or the look-ahead notice), the production of the mini game, the pseudo-ream, etc., or the number of holds, or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are set to "((. It may be expressed by the period of "11)". In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example in which the product is not in the reach state, the branch numbers in the drawing are "Fig. XX (11) -1", "Fig. XX (11) -2", ... Etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 31 (a), the effects that can be combined as various effects may be performed during the period shown in "(11)" (for example, a notice of disappointment). In addition, during the period from the 2nd stop to the 3rd stop and the period from the 3rd stop to the final stop, a pseudo-ream production and chance announcement (pre-reading notice) by stopping the same color (same type) symbol will be performed. May also be possible. This is a concept that can be applied to each of the production examples of the embodiments described so far.

In FIG. 31 (b), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol is removed or a big hit after the formation of the reach state, the transition to the super reach (SP reach), and the derivation of the result of the reach effect. The flow from the fixed stop to the end of the big hit game is shown. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of "(1)", and the period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to SP reach is represented by the period of "(2)". The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of the reach effect is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the derivation of the result of the reach effect to the definite stop is "(4)". , And the period from the fixed stop to the end of the jackpot game may be represented by the period of “(5)”. In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example in which the jackpot or the miss is reached after the reach state is reached, the branch numbers in the drawings are "Fig. XX (2) -1", "Fig. XX (2) -2", and so on. "Fig. XX (3) -1", "Fig. XX (3) -2", etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the explanation in the present embodiment, in the period of "(1)", various notices including a mini game and a look-ahead notice, and a pseudo-ream may be produced, and in the period of "(2)". , A notice or group notice by displaying a normal reach or cut-in image may be given, and during the period of "(3)", a notice of chance up during SP reach or a notice by displaying a cut-in image may be given. In the period of "(4)", shaking fluctuation, revival jackpot production, wipe display, etc. may be performed, and in the period of "(5)", the production during the jackpot game is performed, and the jackpot is also performed. Probability change notification, hold consecutive villa notification, etc. may be performed during the game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and the embodiment described below, each notice or effect executed may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. Further, it may be configured so that these notices and effects may be combined, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect). Good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the parts described by the same branch number can be appropriately replaced.

32 to 37 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 are effects executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machines 100 capable of executing the change effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 are various types shown in other drawings. The production is also feasible. Further, in FIGS. 32 to 37, although the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are also provided, these are not shown, but are shown in FIGS. 32 to 37. The production example may be a production example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third decorative symbol display device 208LN are not provided. Further, in FIGS. 32 to 37, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 31 and the technical idea shown in other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 32 to 37, and the technical idea thereof. On the contrary, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 31 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

Although the description in FIGS. 31 to 37 can be applied to any of the production examples in this specification, it is preferable to apply to the production examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 31.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example in which the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode takes an action on the hold icon.

First, in FIG. 32 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7”) is completed. It is displayed as stopped. Although the second decorative symbol is not displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. α (a), it may be displayed.

Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (a). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and various displays such as icons and mini items are performed on the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 32 (a), the ninja navigation is performed. The character NJ is displayed. The navigation character is also a kind of display of the effect icon, and is also a kind of icon change notice display. The navigator character is also a display for notifying that one of the icons may change, and the animation using this navigator character may actually change one of the icons.

The ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (a) is displayed in the default display mode, and may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. Ninja Ninja Navi Character NJ has a plurality of types of display modes, and the default display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. Here, the default display mode is a white display mode, which may be hereinafter referred to as a white display mode. Further, as the above-mentioned plurality of types of display modes, white or unpatterned mode (A mode) and blue or diagonal line pattern mode (B mode) are used to represent the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit. ), Green or diamond pattern (C), red or checkered pattern (D), golden or vertical line pattern (E), iridescent or horizontal line pattern (E) Fifth aspect) is prepared. Among these modes, the mode in which the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit are the lowest is the A aspect, and the B aspect, the C aspect, the D aspect, and the E aspect. The number increases in order, and the F-th aspect becomes the aspect in which the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit are the highest. In addition, the advantage of the player referred to here is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that the premier production is likely to be started, or that the jackpot confirmation production is performed. May be easy to get started. It also includes the fact that it is easy to perform an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the difference in size and number.

Further, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in FIG. 32 (a), neither the number of holds of special figure 1 nor the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, and neither the hold icon nor the variable icon is displayed. Therefore, the white ninja navigation character NJ may be displayed even during the period when the decorative pattern is not variablely displayed, and may be displayed even during the period when the number of holds is 0. is there. Even if the ninja navigation character NJ has another display mode (for example, a red display mode, etc.), it may be displayed during the period when the decorative pattern is not variablely displayed, and the number of holds may be increased. It may be displayed in the period of 0. Alternatively, only the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, may be displayed during the period when the number of holds is 0. In this case, during the period when the number of holds is 1 or more and the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (the period of stop display or confirmation display), the ninja navigation character NJ in a display mode other than the default display mode. May also be displayed. Further, during the period when the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, it may be displayed only in the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, regardless of the number of reservations.

Further, a second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (0) -1, and the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. It has been notified that there is.

In FIG. 32 (11) -1, one ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -1, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default (white) display mode is displayed for a moment. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 1 for a moment. In FIG. 32 (11) -2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the number of holds is 0, the message display "Welcome" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the start of the fluctuation is celebrated. Further, in FIG. 32 (11) -2, the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed, and the icon which was the first hold icon h11 displayed for a moment earlier is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. It is displayed as a variable icon h0. This variable icon h0 is also a default (white) display mode.

In FIG. 32 (11) -3, one ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230 again, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -3, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is 1. During the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 32 (11) -2, the ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230 in succession, and the first decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 32 (11) -4. In the device 208L, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, four hold icons (first hold icon h11 to fourth hold icon h14) are displayed, and in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number of special figure 1 is displayed. It is 4. Further, the message display "Hold MAX" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ. All four hold icons are hold icons in the default (white) display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 32 (11) -5, the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 7" has begun to sway and fluctuate. The white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 32 (11) -6, the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is changed. In the following figure (11) -7, which is not formed, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 32 (11) -8, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

In the following FIG. 32 (11) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. are doing. As a result, three hold icons, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the first hold icon so far is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icons h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and this navigation character is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. The ninja navigation character NJ has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front, but the ninja navigation character NJ may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation). In the following FIG. 32 (11) -2, the message display "Attention to me" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the icon change effect is started. That is, the start timing of the icon change effect here is after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but may be the same as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, it can be said that it is after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the first stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the start of the reach effect. .. This icon change effect is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ. In the following FIG. 32 (11) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ that has been displayed in the effect icon display area DIS until then. However, it moves to the upper left corner, and in the following figure (11) -4, the white ninja navigator character NJ is throwing three shurikens toward the production display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (white in this case). In FIG. 32 (11) -5, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. Only a part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered by the effect image EHI, or all of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0. In FIG. 32 (11) -6, the effect image EHI disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of any of the three hold icons h11 to h13, and the three hold icons h11. ~ H13 all remain in the default (white) display mode. In this way, even if the icon is covered with the effect image EHI, it may not only change but may not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the icon display mode changes can be classified as a success animation, and an animation in which the icon display mode does not change can be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image EHI, the display mode of the covered icon may be changed without fail. Further, even if the shuriken flies to a completely misplaced place, disappears in the middle, or reaches the effect display area 208d, the effect image EHI may not occur. In this case, Will also be a failed anime. However, the icon may change even if it is not covered by the effect image EHI, and if the icon changes, it becomes a successful animation.

In FIG. 32 (11) -7, the white ninja navigation character NJ, which had previously moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the production icon display area DIS, and is said to be "sorry" on the right base icon bIr. A failure message display has been added. The icon change effect (animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ) is an effect performed in the period of FIGS. 32 (11) -2 to 32 (11) -7, but is moved from the effect icon display area DIS. It can be regarded as a production that is performed only while it is being performed (Fig. (11) -3 to Fig. (11) -6), or from the time the shuriken is thrown until the effect image EHI disappears (Fig. It may be regarded as an effect performed only (11) -4 to immediately before (11) -6 in the same figure), or it may be regarded as an effect performed only while the effect image EHI is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 32 (11) -8, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -6, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In (11) -7, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIGS. 32 (11) -11, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

In the following FIG. 32 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is Completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. The message display "reach" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (2) -1.

However, as shown in FIG. 32 (4) -1, in the third stop, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped instead of "decoration 2", and "decoration 2"-"decoration 3" which is a combination of lost decorative symbols "-" Decoration 2 "is shaking and fluctuating. Then, in FIG. 32 (4) -2, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2" is performed.

Here, the hold icon also has a plurality of types of display modes similar to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the default (white) display mode is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. This is a display mode. Further, as a plurality of types of display modes in the hold icon, as the display mode of the look-ahead notice, a white or non-patterned mode (A mode), a blue or diagonal line pattern mode (B mode), a green or diamond pattern pattern. (C), red or checkered pattern (D), golden or vertical line pattern (E), iridescent or horizontal line pattern (F) It is prepared. Among these modes, the mode with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the aspect A, which is higher in the order of the second aspect, the C aspect, the D aspect, and the E aspect. Then, the fifth aspect becomes the aspect in which the expectation of the big hit is the highest (for example, the aspect in which the big hit is confirmed).

FIG. (11) -6'shown at the right end of FIG. 32 is a different example from FIG. (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in FIG. Of the two hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default (white) display mode to the blue display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6'is an example of a successful animation, but the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is lower than that in the case where the display mode is changed to red.

Further, both the figure (11) -6'' shown at the right end of FIG. 32 and the figure (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in the figure (11) -5 disappears are also shown in the figure (11). ) -6'is another example, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6'' is also an example of a successful animation, and the expectation of a big hit is higher than that in the case of changing to the blue display mode (in the case of FIG. 32 (11) -6'). The degree (reliability) is high, but not 100%.

As described above, the icon change effect, which is an animation using the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode, may succeed in changing the icon or may fail. The icon change effect, which is an animation using the blue (second aspect) ninja navigation character NJ, is more than the icon change effect, which is an animation using the white (Ath aspect) ninja navigation character NJ. , The probability of succeeding in changing the icon increases, and in the icon change production, which is an animation using the green (Cth aspect) ninja navigation character NJ, the blue (Bth aspect) ninja navigation character NJ is used. The probability of succeeding in changing the icon is even higher than the icon change effect that is the animation used.

Similarly, the variable icon h0 is also provided with the same plurality of types of display modes as those in the aspect A to the aspect E. Even in the display mode of the variable icon h0, the default (white) display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. In addition, each display mode is a display mode of a notice (so-called normal notice) regarding a big hit in the variable display currently being performed, and represents the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit. That is, the mode in which the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the lowest is the mode A, and the mode increases in the order of the Bth mode, the Cth mode, the Dth mode, and the Eth mode. The mode of F is the mode in which the expectation of the big hit is the highest (for example, the mode in which the big hit is confirmed).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is taking an action on the hold icon.

Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 32 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

33 (0) -1 to (11) -3 in the second column from the left in FIG. 33 (0) -1 to (11) in the second column from the left in FIG. Same as up to -3, all three hold icons h11 to h13 are in the default (white) display mode, and the variable icon h0 is also in the default (white) display mode. Further, in FIG. 33 (11) -2, the message display "Attention to me" is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ, and the icon change effect is started. In the following FIG. 33 (11) -3, the white color is displayed. Ninja navigation character NJ has moved to the upper left corner.

In FIGS. 33 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the effect image EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before it was covered. Only a part of the navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH, or the entire navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIGS. 33 (11) -5, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which had been displayed in white before being covered by the effect image EIH, has changed to a red display mode. The mode of the effect image EIH is different from the display mode of the navigator character NJ after the change, but the same mode (here, red) may be used.

In the following FIG. 33 (11) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ is throwing three shurikens toward the production display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIGS. 33 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. Only a part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered by the effect image EHI, or all of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (here, red). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0. In FIGS. 33 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. .. That is, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation that always changes one or more of the hold icon and the variable icon. Here, the mode to be changed (the mode after the change) may be the same mode as the navigation character NJ, that is, the mode may be predetermined in red, or the mode after the change may not be predetermined. However, the mode is changed so that the reliability of the jackpot is increased. Therefore, it may be changed to a rainbow-colored mode in which the jackpot is confirmed. Further, in the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, the mode may be changed to the same mode as the mode of the effect image EHI covering the icon. Even if the animation uses the red ninja navigation character NJ, it may be intentionally provided in the case where the animation fails (the mode of the icon does not change).

In FIG. 33 (11) -9, the red ninja navigation character NJ, which had previously moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the production icon display area DIS, and "I did it" on the right base icon bIr. The display of the success message is added. In this example, the navigation character change effect is also performed in the icon change effect. It is also possible to consider the icon change effect and the navigation character change effect separately. In this case, the navigation character change effect is shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -3 to (11) -5. The icon change effect is shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Further, the change effect of the navigation character may be performed in the effect icon display area DIS, or conversely, may not be performed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIGS. 33 (11) -10 to (11) -13, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ is red, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is also red. Except for this, it is the same as Fig. 32 (11) -8 to Fig. (11) -11 described above, and is a combination of lost decorative patterns, "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2". Is confirmed and displayed.

In the following FIG. 33 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is Completed. As a result, the hold icon display area HIS displays two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, and the variable icon display area CIS has been the red first hold icon h11. The icon is displayed as the variable icon h0. Although the red variation icon h0 is displayed in FIG. 33 (1) -1, the red variation icon h0 is larger than the variation icon h0 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 32 (1) -1. , Larger than the hold icon. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default (white) display modes. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. The red ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (2) -1 is provided with a red message display of "super heat" instead of a message display of "reach".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started, and at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. , Sabohani overlap. It should be noted that the navigation character does not overlap with the navigator character, and the navigator character may overlap with at least a part of the cactus. Further, the Sabohani may overlap at least a part of the "super heat" message display, and conversely, the "super heat" message display may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. In the following FIG. 33 (2) -3, a red message display "SP development" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and it is notified that the red ninja will develop into super reach. In addition, when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display. In this example, even if the Sabohani group notice is started, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the navigation character remain, but when the Sabohani group notice is started, the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4 At the same time, the display of the hold icon disappears, and the variable icon h0 may disappear together with the pedestal hs0. In addition, the navigation character may also disappear. Furthermore, even if the hold icon or the like disappears, only the navigation character may be continuously displayed.

Subsequently, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (3) -1 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, the message display "Swordsman Reach" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role is overlapped with the red ninja navigation character NJ, at least a part of the navigation character NJ may be overlapped with the swordsman of the enemy role.

As shown in FIG. 33 (3) -2, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a large button image 136ab, which is a large image imitating the chance button 136, with the development of super reach. This big button image 136ab overlaps all of Yoshimune and the swordsman who face each other, which is displayed as a production display of Super Reach, and Yoshimune and the swordsman are not visible. Further, the big button image 136ab also overlaps with at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, the deca button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, in the deca button image 136ab, the character of "push" that promotes the operation is displayed in a large size according to the size of the deca button image 136ab. Furthermore, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of "It's a big button" instead of the message display of "Swordsman Reach".

In FIG. 33 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -4, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136ab disappears and the display is switched to the strong cut-in image CIs. The strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigator character NJ, and the navigator character NJ is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, the strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before the overlap. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of "strong cut-in" added instead of the message display of "big button", but the message display of "swordsman reach" has been added again. May be good.

Normally, an operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs) is performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the operation valid period elapses. It may be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -5, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role is displayed with the characters "win", and the first decoration is displayed. In the substantially center of the symbol display device 208L, "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is planned to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Is notified.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol, which has been reduced and displayed under the second hold number display, is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation. .. Although no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, a message display saying "It's a big hit" may be added. If the hold icon or variable icon has disappeared, it will be restored and displayed at this timing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The red variation icon h0 is erased at the timing of this confirmation display. The red variable icon h0 is a true notice. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ. That is, in this example, until the variation display started in FIG. 33 (1) -1 is completed, which corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed (the first hold icon h11 at the timing of FIG. 33 (11) -8). , The red ninja navigator character NJ continues to be displayed, and when the corresponding variation display ends and is confirmed and displayed, the red ninja navigator character NJ returns to the default display mode.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the icon change notice display and mode change.

The example shown at the left end of FIG. 34 is an example of selecting the type of the icon change notice display from the demo display. In FIG. Is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. Further, the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 34 (0) -1. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 34 (0) -1 is displayed in the default display mode.

If a new symbol variation display is not started within a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed while the special symbol is held at 0, the first decorative symbol is displayed. A demonstration display is displayed on the device 208L. In the demonstration display, the pattern demo display in which the combination of the decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed continues to be displayed while the background screen in which the symbol variation was displayed disappears, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed disappears and the symbol variation is displayed. There is an animation demo display that switches from the background screen and displays a dedicated animation. In addition, the design demo display or the dedicated background screen may be displayed. Although the animation demo display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (0) -2, the animation demo display may be displayed via the symbol demo display, or the symbol demo display may be displayed. The animation demo display may be displayed without going through. In the animation demo display shown in FIG. 34 (0) -2, an animation in which the model title of the pachinko machine is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is notified that the menu screen is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated at the lower part. There is.

In FIG. 34 (0) -3, the chance button 136 is operated, and the menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This menu screen is the same as the option menu screen shown in FIG. 65 (15). In FIG. 34 (0) -3, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. .. Further, on the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, among the operation key units 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Further, among the chance button 136 and the cross keys, the designs of the cursor icon cs and the up and down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

When the down key 137d is operated once while the menu screen is displayed, the cursor icon cs that was previously displayed on the effect customization icon moves down by one, as shown in Fig. 34 (0) -4. Then, this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon lights up in red. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, the character selection screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as shown in FIGS. 34 (0) -5. Is displayed. In the character selection screen shown in FIGS. 34 (0) -5, the character of the lord, the character of the bancho, and the character of the ninja are all displayed in the default display mode, and the currently selected character of the lord is displayed. , The selection frame CF is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated twice, the selection frame CF moves and the selection frame CF is displayed on the ninja character. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -7, the character selection determination screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character selection determination screen is displayed in FIG. 34 (0) -6. Of the three characters shown in (1), only the ninja character is displayed in a large size, and a large message display of "Leave it to me" is added. After that, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L returns to the screen before the animation demo display is displayed, and is placed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIGS. 34 (0) -8. Is displayed with the white ninja navigation character NJ added with the message "Thank you".

In the selection of characters by the player, the type of character can be selected, but the display mode of each character cannot be selected, and the display mode of each character becomes the default display mode. However, on the character selection screen shown in FIGS. 34 (0) -5, a character having a mode different from the default display mode is automatically displayed, and when that character is selected, the character is selected from the beginning in a mode different from the default display mode. It may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, or when the character that was the default display mode on the character selection screen is switched to the character selection determination screen shown in FIGS. 34 (0) -7, the default display is displayed. The character may be automatically changed to a character having a mode different from the mode, and may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the beginning in a mode different from the default display mode, or the default display up to the character selection determination screen. When the character in the mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the character may be automatically changed to a character in a mode different from the default display mode. In these cases, the display mode is internally determined by the lottery regarding the production.

The second example from the left in FIG. 34 is an example in which the type of the icon change notice display is selected from the variable display of the decorative symbol, and (0) -1 in the second column from the left in the same figure is also a special figure. The variable display of the decorative symbol is completed when the number of pending decorations is 0, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. (0) -1 to (11) -2 in the second row in FIG. 34 are the same as those in FIGS. 32 (0) -1 to (11) -2, and one ball starts winning a prize. There is, and the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -2, a tutorial display indicating that the character of the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key is displayed.

In FIG. 34 (11) -3, the cross key is operated, and the navigation character BC of the default display mode is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the character of the Bancho is determined as the navigation character, and the message display of "Yosha" is added to the navigation character BC of the Bancho.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 34 (11) -4, the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped. In this example, the character of the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key during the fluctuation until the first stop is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Until then, the above tutorial display is displayed, but the first When stopped, the above tutorial display disappears. It should be noted that the character change of the navigation character by the cross key operation during the fluctuation may be possible until the second stop is performed, or until the transition to the reach state is performed, or from the start of the fluctuation display. It may be possible for a certain period of time, or it may be possible until the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 34 (11) -5, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In the following figure (11) -6, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIGS. 34 (11) -7, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

The examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34 are diagrams showing an example of the change effect of the navigation character. In this example as well, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reserved special symbols is 0, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. The third column (0) -1 in FIG. 34 and the fourth column (right end) (11) -10 in the same figure are shown in FIGS. 32 (0) -1 to the second column (11) in the same figure. Same as up to -2, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In each case, the three hold icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIGS. 34 (11) -10, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display "Attention to me" is added. Here, instead of the icon change effect targeting the hold icon and the variable icon, the change effect targeting the ninja navigation character NJ has been started.

In FIGS. 34 (11) -11, the white ninja navigator character NJ does not move to the upper left corner, and at least a part of the ninja navigator character NJ is on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Covered by the effect image EIH, the navigator character NJ is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIGS. 34 (11) -12, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which was displayed in white before being covered by the effect image EIH, is displayed above the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. The display mode has changed to red. The mode of the effect image EIH may be the same as the display mode of the navigator character NJ after the change (here, red). A message display such as "hot" is added to the navigation character NJ that has changed to the red display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 34 (11) -13, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In -14, the second stop is performed, in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In the following figure (11) -15, the third stop is performed. The stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIGS. 34 (11) -16, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the variable display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon and the variable icon is not started.

In the following FIG. 34 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is Completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Whether the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, or the variable icon h0, the display mode is the default (white) display mode. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34, and still another example of the change effect of the navigation character.

In FIG. 35 (1) -2, which continues from FIG. 34 (1) -1, the icon change effect is started, and in the following FIG. 33 (11) -3, the red ninja navigation character NJ is displayed in the effect icon display area. Moving from DIS to the upper left corner.

In FIGS. 35 (1) -4, the red ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left throws three shurikens toward the production display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIGS. 35 (1) -4, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and at least a part of each of the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. Flash effect image Covered by EHI. As a result, at least a part of each of the two hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0 is covered by the flash effect image EHI, and the respective icons h11, h12, and h0 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. ing. Only a part of these three icons h11, h12, and h0 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). The flash effect image EHI covers only the variable icon display area CIS of the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS, and only the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. In FIGS. 35 (1) -5, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three icons h11, h12, and h0, only the variable icon h0 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode, and the size is also increased. It's getting bigger. It should be noted that the size may remain the same and only the color may change, or conversely, the color may be the same and the size may be increased. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ here is a successful animation. In Fig. 35 (1) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ, which had been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the production icon display area DIS, and "I did it" on the right base icon bIr. The display of the success message is added.

Fig. 35 (1) 7-10 to Fig. (4) -2 are the same as those of Fig. 33 (1) -2 to Fig. (4) -2 described above. A group notice was given, then it developed into a super reach and a big button production was performed during the swordsman reach, and finally, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" which is a combination of big hit decorative patterns. Is confirmed and displayed. The ninja navigation character NJ, which was in the red display mode, returns to the white display mode at the timing of this definite display.

The examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35 are diagrams showing other examples of the change effect of the navigation character. In this example as well, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reserved special symbols is 0, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 35 to (11) -4 in the fourth column (right end) in the same figure are (0) -1 in FIG. Same as up to -4, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In each case, the three hold icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 35 (11) -2, only the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the message "Attention to me" is added. There is. Subsequently, in FIG. 35 (11) -3, the one-piece white ninja navigation character NJ is moved from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner.

In FIG. 35 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the three effect images EIH, and the navigation character NJ is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 35 (11) -5, the three effect image EIHs disappear, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which had been displayed in one white color before being covered by the effect image EIH, has the same white color. It is increasing in the body. That is, the same number of white ninja navigation characters NJ as the number of reserved special figures are displayed. The number of effect image EIHs is the same as the number of pending special figures.

In the following FIG. 35 (11) -6, each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ throws one shuriken toward the production display area 208d, and a total of three shurikens fly toward the production display area 208d. I'm going at. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). In FIGS. 35 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. Only a part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered by the effect image EHI, or all of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0.

In FIGS. 35 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. .. That is, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. Further, in FIG. 35 (11) -8, at least a part of each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ is covered with a large number of three or more effect images EIH, and the three white ninja navigation characters are covered. Each NJ is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. In addition, each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIGS. 35 (11) -9, many effect images EIH disappeared, the three white ninja navigator characters NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappeared, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS became A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed, and a success message "I did it" is added on the right base icon bIr. Of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ, only one may be the red ninja navigation character NJ. Moreover, the position of the red ninja navigation character NJ may be the right end according to the position of the changed hold icon, and by doing so, the icon to be changed depending on the mode and display position of the navigation character NJ and the icon to be changed. The display mode after the change can be suggested (notified) by the navigation character NJ.

In this example as well, the navigation character change effect is also performed in the icon change effect, and the icon change effect and the navigation character change effect can be considered separately. In this case, the navigation character change effect. The effects are shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -3 to (11) -5, and the icon change effects are shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Further, in this example, in FIG. 35 (11) -9, the three white ninja navigator characters NJ are returned to the one white ninja navigator character NJ, but the three white ninja navigator characters are returned. The NJ may continue to be displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS as it is.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35, and other production examples.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 36 (11) -10 following FIGS. 35 (11) -9, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 7" is performed. Is temporarily stopped, the second stop is performed in the figure (11) -11, and the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is not formed here either. In (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIGS. 36 (11) -13, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the variable display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon and the variable icon is also performed.

The example shown in the second column from the left in FIG. 36 is a diagram showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. FIG. 36 (11) -4'is an example different from FIG. 35 (11) -4, which continues from FIG. 35 (11) -3, and at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is , Covered by a plurality of effect images EIH, the navigator is more difficult to see than before it was covered. Only a part of the navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH, or the entire navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 36 (11) -5', all of the plurality of effect image EIHs are erased, and the navigation character is displayed in which the display mode is changed to red and the display size is also increased. Here, although the plurality of modes (color and size) are changing at the same time, the plurality of modes (color and size) may change at different timings. Further, the ninja navigation character NJ may remain white and only the display size may change significantly. Further, the size of the display size corresponds to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit, and the larger the size, the higher the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit.

In the following FIG. 36 (11) -6', a large red ninja navigation character NJ is throwing a shuriken toward the production display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIGS. 36 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. Only a part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered by the effect image EHI, or all of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red).

In FIG. 36 (11) -8', the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 displays the ninja navigation character NJ from the default (white) display mode. It has changed to the same red display mode as the mode. Further, in FIGS. 36 (11) -8, the large red ninja navigation character NJ is covered with a large number of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The large red ninja navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 36 (11) -9', many effect images EIH disappeared, the large red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappeared, and the original right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS was displayed. The white ninja navigation character NJ that has returned to the size of is displayed, and a success message "I did it" is added on the right base icon bIr.

The examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 36 are diagrams showing an example of a preview animation using a navigation character. From (11) -1 to (1) -3 in the third column from the left in FIG. 36, the number of holds in FIG. 1 does not decrease from 4 to 3, but decreases from 3 to 2. Except for the points, it is the same as (11) -8 at the lower end of the third row in FIG. 35 to (11) -2 in the fourth row in FIG. 35, and the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 36 (1) -1. In the display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and two hold icons h11 and h12 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. Further, in FIG. 36 (1) -2, a white ninja navigation character NJ with a message display "Attention to me" is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. ..

In the following FIG. 36 (1) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner, and in FIG. 36 (1) -4, the mini game is started. That is, a large message display indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ that has moved to the upper left corner when the chance button 136 is pressed and a 3 roll is rolled. Subsequently, in FIGS. 36 (1) -5, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed, and the button effect is started. .. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIGS. 36 (1) -5 is provided with a "press" message display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIGS. 36 (1) -6, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (1) -7, the image of the third roll of the dice is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed as "Yoshia". The message display is added first, and then the message display of "extreme heat" is added (FIGS. 36 (1) -8). In this example, you're hitting a mini-game. In FIGS. 36 (11) -9, the image of the third roll of the dice disappears, and the white ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner returns to the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. .. The message display of "super heat" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ that has returned to the effect icon display area DIS. The animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ from Fig. 36 (1) -4 to Fig. 36 (1) -9 described above is not an animation that changes the icon, but a decorative pattern that is currently being performed. This is a preview animation about the big hit in the variable display. Here, it is foretold that the possibility of a big hit is high because the image of the third roll of the dice is displayed, and it is a notice animation by a mini game.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 36 (1) -10, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -11, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started. Before the start of the Sabohani group notice, or at the same time as the start of the Sabohani group notice, and after the start of the Sabohani group notice, the change effect of the navigation character is performed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The ninja navigation character NJ, which had been displayed in white until now, has changed to a red display. The change of the navigator character may be performed when hit in the mini game, or may be performed regardless of the result of the mini game. In addition, the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until then, has also changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. Has changed to a combined display mode. The change in the display mode of the variable icon may also be performed when the mini-game is hit, or may be performed regardless of the result of the mini-game. Further, in FIG. 36 (2) -2, a red message display "icon change" is added on the right base icon bIr. The change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is after the end of the change effect of the navigation character, but may be before the start of the change effect of the navigation character, or even during the execution of the change effect of the navigation character. Good.

As shown in FIG. 36 (2) -2, Sabohani overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It should be noted that the navigation character does not overlap with the navigator character, and the navigator character may overlap with at least a part of the cactus. Further, the message display of "icon change" overlaps with at least a part of the message display of "icon change", but conversely, the message display of "icon change" may overlap with at least a part of the message display of "icon change". Further, although the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed and the Sabohani do not overlap, the Sabohani may overlap at least a part of the variable icon h0, and conversely, the variable icon h0 may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. May overlap. When the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the decorative design is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display.

In the following FIG. 36 (2) -3, a red message display of "premier" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and it is notified that the premier production will be started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (3) -1, the super reach (swordsman reach) production is started before the premiere production, and the screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. There is. In addition, the message display "Swordsman Reach" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role is overlapped with the red ninja navigation character NJ, at least a part of the navigation character NJ may be overlapped with the swordsman of the enemy role. Further, although at least a part of the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is overlapped with the swordsman of the enemy role, at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role may be overlapped with the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (3) -2, the premier production is started from the middle of the swordsman reach production. The premier effect here is an effect in which the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged and displayed, and an image in which the red character V is combined with the pattern of the character riding a motorcycle is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. , The image overlaps with the scene where the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy are cut off, and the display of the swordsman reach production is more difficult to see than before the overlap. With the premiere production, the big hit will be confirmed or almost confirmed.

When the premiere effect is completed, the image that has been displayed large in the center of the screen is reduced and displayed again as the variable icon h0 (FIGS. 36 (3) -5). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role is displayed with the characters "win", and the middle symbol is displayed in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in, and it is notified that "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbols. At least a part of the redisplayed variable icon h0 overlaps with the display of "decoration 2" which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 36.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (4) -1 following FIG. 36 (3) -5, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second hold number display is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation. .. Although no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, a message display saying "It's a big hit" may be added. The variable icon h0 is also displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing of this confirmation display. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ.

In addition, in FIGS. 36 (1) -4 to (1) -9, the preview animation by the mini game is executed instead of the animation of changing the icon while using the white ninja navigation character NJ. , An icon-changing animation may also play a mini-game that may or may not succeed. That is, if the mini game is successful, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and if the mini game is unsuccessful, the white ninja navigation character NJ is changed to the red ninja navigation character NJ. The white ninja navigator character NJ remains the white ninja navigator character NJ.

Here, to summarize the animations that can be executed, it is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ, and the variable icon and the hold icon may be changed from the default mode to the notice mode (No. A). It is classified into an animation (animation) and an animation (for example, a preview animation) that has nothing to do with the mode change in the first place, and as a result, an animation that does not change from the default mode to the preview mode (animation B). can do. In addition, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, which always changes the variable icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the notice mode (Cth animation), has nothing to do with the mode change in the first place. It can also be classified into an animation (first animation) that is an animation that does not exist (for example, a preview animation) and that does not change from the default mode to the advance mode as a result. Further, by changing the display mode of the navigation character, it can be classified into a successful animation (Eth animation) and a failing animation (Fth animation). Further, even if they are the same preview animation, the preview animation that does not change the display mode of the navigation character (G animation) and the preview animation that does not change the display mode of the variable icon or the hold icon (H). It can also be classified into (animation). Further, there is also an animation (the first animation) in which the variable icon or the hold icon may be changed from the default mode to the notice mode without using the navigation character. Examples of the first animation include the animations shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e), the animations shown in FIGS. 22 (A) to 22 (E), and the animations shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (a). An animation in which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, such as the animation shown in (e), is applicable.

Here, the G-th animation and the E-th animation may be animations in which the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, or a part (for example, the first part) may be used. (Including part) may be an animation performed in the same manner. Further, the G-th animation may be an animation in which the variable icon or the hold icon is not changed from the default mode to the notice mode.

In addition, the third animation and the D animation may be animations in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be used. It may be common, or the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from the red ninja navigation character NJ may be common.

Further, the third animation and the Dth animation may be animations in which a part of the animation is performed in the same manner. Further, the C-th animation and the D-th animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, the first animation and the third animation may be animations in which navigation characters are used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be common in common. Alternatively, the display (for example, a character or an icon) displayed separately from the navigation character may have the same type, color, shape, or size.

Further, the first animation and the third animation may be animations in which a part is performed in the same manner. Further, the first animation and the third animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, the first animation and the Hth animation may be animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, they may be common in that the navigation character is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the navigation character are common. You may be.

Further, the D animation and the H animation may be animations in which a part of the animation is performed in the same manner. Further, the D animation and the H animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, in the example of changing the hold icon in FIGS. 32 to 37, the variable icon may be changed instead of the hold icon, and in the example of changing the variable icon in FIGS. 32 to 37, the variable icon may be changed instead of the variable icon. You may change the hold icon.

Further, none of the examples shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 was an example of changing the icon of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, but instead of the hold icon or the variable icon, the icon of the mini item Etc., various icons may be changed.

In the above description, "A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rise item UpI icon]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a red variable icon h0, and a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] in a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, the red aspect].
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game].
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6''-. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7 and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9].
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9. It is the icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 to FIG. 35 (1) -6].
A game table, wherein the certain display is a display selected by a player from a plurality of types of displays [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -5 to FIG. (0) -8]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, the player can be entertained by giving a notice on the display selected by the player.

Here, the first animation is an animation in which the displayed first icon may not be changed to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. This is an animation that always changes the icon to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

In addition, "The first aspect is the default aspect, and
The first aspect is the aspect that is most likely to be displayed in the certain display than the other aspects including the second aspect.
A game table characterized in that when the player selects the certain display, the first display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 34 (0) -6 to (0) -8]. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The above-mentioned display may be selectable even during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is performed [for example, FIGS. 34 (11) -2 to (11) -3". ], A game table featuring that. ] Was also explained.

For example, it can always be selected in the period after the decorative symbol variation display is started and before the reach state is reached, but it may not be selectable in the period after the reach state is reached.

Further, the certain display may be a display that can be selected even during the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is being performed. That is, it may be selectable at any time during the entire period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, the certain display may be a display that can always be selected.

It should be noted that the certain display may be a display that is always selected during the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, "The above-mentioned display is a display that can be selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.
The game table is characterized in that a certain condition is such that the demonstration display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -2]. ] Was also explained.

Here, as the certain condition, a plurality of conditions may be prepared. For example, in addition to the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain jackpot game is in progress (for example, during a jackpot game with probability variation, during a jackpot game without probability variation, during a round, or during an interval between rounds). It may be a condition that the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times, and the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times without intervening the jackpot game. May be the condition.

Further, as the certain condition, only one condition may be prepared. One of the conditions may be a condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain big hit game is being played, or the cumulative number of times the decorative symbol variation display is executed. It may be a condition that the number of times of execution of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times without intervening the big hit game.

Further, the demonstration display is a display displayed in a state where the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. More specifically, it is a display that starts when a predetermined time elapses after the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed without holding the special symbol, and the symbol that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Examples include a demo display and a video demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display.

It should be noted that the certain display may be a display that is always selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.

In the above description, "A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rise item UpI icon]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a red variable icon h0, and a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] in a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a second display using the certain display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] in the second mode [for example, the red mode]. It is a means that can display animation,
The display means is a third animation that changes the first display to the second display [for example, a character change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -4 to (11) -5, FIG. 34 ( 11) -11 to the character change animation shown in Fig. (11) -12, Fig. 35 (11) -4 to the character change animation shown in Fig. (11) -5, Fig. 36 (11) -4'to Fig. (11) The character change animation shown in -5'] is a means that can be displayed.
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game].
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6''-. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7 and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9].
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9. Icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (1) -2 to (1) -6, icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9, FIG. 36 (11) -4'. ~ Icon change animation shown in Fig. (11) -9'].
The second animation may be started to be displayed after the display of the third animation is started [for example, the icons shown in FIGS. 35 (1) -2 to (1) -6). A game table characterized by being a change animation]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, the certain display can be noticed.

Here, the first animation is an animation in which the displayed first icon may not be changed to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. This is an animation that always changes the icon to the second icon.

Further, the second display may be displayed from the beginning in addition to the case where the second display is changed from the first display by the third animation. That is, the certain display may appear (start display) in the second aspect.

Further, the second animation may be an animation whose display is always started after the display of the third animation is started.

Further, the display of the second animation may be started before the display of the third animation is started. In this case, the first display is displayed, and the second display different from the second display of the second animation that was started earlier is displayed by the third animation. The first display may be changed.

Further, the first display may be started after the display of the third animation is started. In this case, after the first display is displayed, a scene in which the first display is changed to the second display is displayed. Further, the first display may be started at the same time as the display of the third animation, or may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. There may be.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. Further, the first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

Further, "The third animation is a decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -1 to (11) -13. The same decorative symbol variation as the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -1 to 36 (11) -13 and the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 36 (11) -4'to (11) -9'. A game table characterized in that the display may be started in the display. ] Was also explained.

The display of the third animation may always be started in the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

Further, "The third animation is a decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 34 (1) -1 to 35 (4) -2]. A game table characterized in that the display may be started in a decorative symbol variation display different from the above [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 34 (11) -9 to (11) -16]. ] Was also explained.

For example, the third animation may start to be displayed in the decorative symbol variation display before the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started, and the third animation may start to be displayed. The scene changed to the second display in the above and the second animation may be displayed in the same decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed in different decorative symbol variation displays. Good.

The display of the third animation may always be started in a decorative symbol variation display different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

Further, "The third animation is an animation in which a mini-game that may succeed or fail is played, and the mini-game succeeds and the first display is changed to the second display. ,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth animation.
The fourth animation is a game table in which the mini-game is played, the mini-game fails, and the first display does not change to the second display. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the fourth animation.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the fifth animation.
The fifth animation is an animation that does not change the first display to the second display.
The fifth animation is an animation related to a notice [for example, the animation shown in FIGS. 36 (1) -2 to (1) -9].
The fifth animation and the third animation are game consoles characterized in that certain items [for example, the point that the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used] are common. .. ] Was also explained.

Here, the fifth animation may be an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon.

Further, as an example of "a certain matter", a character appearing, a background image, a part of a scene, a display having the same color, shape, and size, and the like can be mentioned.

Further, the fifth animation and the third animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the fifth animation and the third animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice) that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed without directly connecting to the big hit. The "directing" here may be a highly reliable SP reach production of a big hit. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a big hit.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the fifth animation.

In the above description, "A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rise item UpI icon]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a red variable icon h0, and a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] in a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a second display using the certain display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] in the second mode [for example, the red mode]. It is a means that can display animation,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game].
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6''-. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7 and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9].
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9. It is the icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 to FIG. 35 (1) -6].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a sixth animation using the first display.
The sixth animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon.
The sixth animation is a game table characterized in that it is an animation related to a notice [for example, the animation shown in FIGS. 36 (1) -2 to (1) -9]. ] Was explained.

Here, the sixth animation is an animation using the first display, but the first display may be an animation that does not change to the second display.

Further, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice) that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed without directly connecting to the big hit. The "directing" here may be a highly reliable SP reach production of a big hit. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a big hit.

Further, the sixth animation may be an animation related to a tutorial, not an animation related to a notice. For example, it may be an animation explaining the production, or an animation explaining an operation method (for example, how to hit left or right).

Further, the sixth animation and the first animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that the "first display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the "first display". May be common.

Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animations in which a part including the first portion is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be a means for always displaying a sixth animation using the first display.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a seventh animation using the second display.
The seventh animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon.
The seventh animation is an animation related to notice,
A game console characterized in that the seventh animation is easier to display than the sixth animation. ] Was also explained.

Here, the seventh animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that the "second display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the "second display". May be common.

Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

In addition, the first animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from "a certain display". May be common.

Further, the first animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part of the animation is performed in the same manner. Further, the first animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from "a certain display". May be common.

Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the seventh animation using the second display.

In the above description, "A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rise item UpI icon]. And
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a red variable icon h0, and a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] in a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, the red aspect].
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game].
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6''-. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7 and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9].
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9. It is the icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 to FIG. 35 (1) -6].
The display means is a means capable of displaying an eighth animation that does not use the certain display.
The eighth animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the animation shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) and FIG. 22 (A). -The animation shown in FIG. 22 (E) and the animation shown in FIGS. 22 (A) to (E)]. ] Was explained.

Here, the eighth animation is an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the eighth animation is the displayed first icon. May be an animation that may or may not be changed to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be a means for always displaying the eighth animation that does not use the certain display.

In addition, "One or more icons may be displayed as the first icon.
One or more icons may be displayed as the second icon.
The game table is characterized in that the second icon is a more reliable icon as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon. ] Was also explained.

Here, the first animation may be an animation that may change a plurality of displayed first icons to the second icon, and the second animation is displayed. It may be an animation that changes a plurality of the first icons into the second icons.

In addition, one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the first icon, and one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the second icon.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of icons is a third icon [for example, a blue (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a blue variable icon h0, and a blue meter rising item UpIb icon. ], And
One or more icons may be displayed as the third icon.
The third icon is a more reliable icon as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon.
The second icon is a more reliable icon as a notice regarding a big hit than the third icon.
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the third icon [for example, FIGS. 32 (11) -2 to (11) -6'to the same. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the third icon. Further, the first animation may be an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the third icon.

Further, "The second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the third icon. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the first particle animation using the first display.
The first unchanged animation is an animation in which the first display is displayed but the displayed first icon fails to be changed to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11). ) -2 to the icon change failure animation shown in the figure (11) -6 to the figure (11) -7]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the first animation is an animation that may include a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is , Is an animation including a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the first particle animation using the first display.

Further, "the first unchanged animation is characterized in that, for example, [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -5] is the same animation as the first animation. Game table. ] Was also explained.

Here, the display means is a means capable of displaying a second invariant animation using the second display, and although the second invariant animation displays the second display, It may be an animation that fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon. Furthermore, the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second animation up to the middle.

Alternatively, conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed without fail. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may be changed to the second icon without fail.

Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. You may.

Further, the failing animation may be an animation in which the effect display is displayed, and the display mode has not changed even though the effect display is displayed. That is, the animation in which the effect display is not displayed and the first icon does not change to the second icon may be excluded. However, the failing animation may include an animation in which the effect display is not displayed and the first icon does not change to the second icon. Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon displayed according to the number of holds.
The first icon is the first hold icon [for example, the white (default) hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 32 (11) -1 and the like].
The game table is characterized in that the second icon is a second hold icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h1 shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -8 and the like]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means on which a variable icon may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the decorative symbol variable display being executed.
The first icon is the first variable icon [for example, the white (default) variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 and the like].
The game table is characterized in that the second icon is a second variable icon [for example, the red variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 35 (1) -5 and the like]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "The decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. A game table characterized in that the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner. ] Was also explained.

Here, the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. The jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner.

Further, "The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 32 (0) -1 to (4) -2]. A game table characterized by being. ] Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that may be displayed during the predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may be between, or may be a display that may disappear temporarily.

Further, the second display may be a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. Further, the second display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that may be displayed during the predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may be in between, or may be a display that may disappear temporarily.

Further, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. Further, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display, or during the predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display. However, it may be a display that may disappear temporarily.

It should be noted that the first display may be a display that is always displayed straddling a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays.

In addition, "For a certain period of time, the first display may be displayed.
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the number of holds is 0 [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -1, FIG. (0) -8]. A game table to play. ] Was also explained.

Here, in a certain period, the second display may be displayed, and the certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of holds is 0. Good.

The first display may always be displayed during the certain period.

Further, "the game table is characterized in that one or more of the color, the pattern, the size, and the shape are different between the first aspect and the second aspect. ] Was also explained.

Therefore, only one of the colors, patterns, sizes, and shapes may be different, all may be different, or a combination of two or three may be different. May be good.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the first aspect is an aspect including a display relating to the operation means, and during the display of the first display, When the operation means is operated, the display may change from the first display to the second display.

Further, before the display of the first animation is started, it may be notified that the displayed first icon is in a state where it is easily changed.

Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fourth icon, and the fourth icon is an icon in a display mode suggesting that the icon itself may change, and the fourth icon. Icon may change to the second icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or other animation.

Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fifth icon, and the fifth icon is an icon in a display mode indicating that the fourth icon has failed to change. The fourth icon may change to the fifth icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or other animation.

The display means is a means capable of displaying the second invariant animation using the second display, and the second invariant animation displays the second display although it is displayed. It may be an animation that fails to change the first icon to the second icon.

Here, on the contrary, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed without fail. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may be changed to the second icon without fail.

Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. You may.

Further, the second immutable animation may be the same animation as the second animation until the middle.

Further, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 38 to 57 are used only for the description of the examples shown in FIGS. 38 to 57, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. Priority is given to the reference numerals 38 to 57.

First, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (1). At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and the normal figure hold number aa5. , The fourth symbol aa6 of the general drawing is displayed. Special figure 1 hold number aa1 is a display indicating the number of holds of special figure 1 by a number, special figure 2 hold number aa3 is a display showing the number of hold of special figure 2 by a number, and special figure 2 hold number aa5 is a display representing a normal figure. It is a display showing the number of holdings of. Further, a variable icon display area c capable of displaying a variable icon is provided in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right side of the variable icon display area c is the hold icon display area. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (1), the special figure 1 hold icon a1, a2, a3, a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1, b2, b3 Are displayed side by side in this order so as to alternate from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of this example is a winning order variable machine in which a mechanism for alternately winning a game ball at the special drawing 1 starting port and the special drawing 2 starting port is provided on the game board, and the hold is exhausted in the winning order. .. Further, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A tutorial display, a message display, or the like is displayed in the display area d, and a character string image of "preparing" is displayed when there is no particular content to be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (38). FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIG. 38 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 8", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 38 (2) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol are started as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). There is. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 displayed in the hold icon display area becomes the change icon c1 and moves to the change icon display area c. Then, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 move to the left.

FIG. 38 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

FIG. 38 (4) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 38 (5) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be started, or the conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 38 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the character image of the grandfather (hereinafter referred to as "grandfather") g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 38 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 38 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 38 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the character image of the palace (hereinafter referred to as “the palace”) g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 38 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the palace g1 and the grandfather g2.

FIG. 38 (11) shows a state in which the character name display (hereinafter, referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image of “Den” is started to be displayed. The character name display h1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 38 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 38 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 38 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 38 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the palace g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the palace g1.

FIG. 38 (16) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the palace g1, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 38 (16), a character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 38 (17) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 38 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

FIG. 38 (18) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 38 (18), a character string image of "morning weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 38 (19) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 38 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

FIG. 38 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 38 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 38 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 38 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 38 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 38 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 38 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

FIG. 38 (28) shows a state in which the character name h2 including the character image of "old man" is started to be displayed. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 38 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 38 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 38 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 38 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the old man g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the old man g2.

FIG. 38 (33) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the grandfather g2, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 38 (33), the character image of "O" is displayed.

FIG. 38 (34) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 38 (34), the character string image of "lunch" is displayed.

FIG. 38 (35) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 38 (35), a character string image of "the weather at noon" is displayed.

FIG. 38 (36) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 38 (37) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after the conversation notice display is completed.

FIG. 38 (38) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the following illustrations are omitted, in this example, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is started after this. The reach effect may not be started after the conversation notice display is completed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example has a first display (first serif notice display shown in FIG. 38 (19)) and a second display (second serif shown in FIG. 38 (36)). Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the palace g1 displayed in FIG. 38 (19), the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1. The second display includes the grandfather g2, the balloon display i2, the dialogue display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2, which are displayed in FIG. 38 (36). The first display and the second display display the first conversation notice display. In addition, the first display and the second display of this example are notice displays of the change. Further, in this example, the first display is displayed after the grandfather g2 is displayed in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (8). The old man g2 may be displayed before the display of the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed by notifying that the second display including the grandfather g2 will be displayed. It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 (1) to 39 (38). 39 (1) to (38) show production examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 39 (1) to 39 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 39 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIGS. 39 (7) to 39 (10) show a state in which the palace g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 39 (10) to 39 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, before the dialogue display of the palace is displayed in FIG. 39 (19), the palace g1 is displayed from the beginning, and other characters such as the grandfather g2 are not displayed. In this way, the old man g2 may not be displayed before the display of the first display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (1) to 40 (38). FIGS. 40 (1) to 40 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 40 (1) to 40 (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 40 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the character image of the princess (hereinafter referred to as "princess") g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 40 (24) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 40 (25) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 40 (26) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the right. Old man g2 is moving to the right.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 40 (27) to 40 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (27) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 40 (36). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the characters are different when the second display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 40 (36). It may be possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 (1) to 41 (38). 41 (1) to (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 41 (1) to 41 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the princess g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 41 (7) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 41 (8) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 41 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 41 (10) to 41 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 41 (10). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the characters are different when the first display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 41 (10). It may be possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (1) to 42 (38). 42 (1) to (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 42 (1) to 42 (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (25), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 42 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 42 (27) shows a state in which Princess g3 is stopped.

FIG. 42 (28) shows a state in which the character name h3 including the character image of “princess” is started to be displayed. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 42 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 42 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

FIG. 42 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

FIG. 42 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

FIG. 42 (33) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the princess g3, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 42 (33), the character image of "afternoon" is displayed.

FIG. 42 (34) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 42 (34), a character string image of “afternoon weather” is displayed.

FIG. 42 (35) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 42 (35), a character string image of “afternoon weather” is displayed.

FIG. 42 (36) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "rain mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 42 (37) and 42 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example has a first display (first serif notice display shown in FIG. 42 (19)) and a second display (second serif shown in FIG. 42 (36)). Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the palace g1 displayed in FIG. 42 (19), the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1. The second display includes the princess g3, the balloon display i3, the dialogue display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3, which are displayed in FIG. 42 (36). The first display and the second display display the first conversation notice display. In addition, the first display and the second display of this example are notice displays of the change. Further, in this example, the grandfather g2 is displayed in FIGS. 42 (6) to (8), and then the grandfather g2 is displayed in FIGS. 42 (23) to (25). ) Is a notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, it is possible to surprise the player by making a different character when the conversation notice display is displayed by performing a hobby notice that displays the old man g2 that does not appear in the conversation notice display. , It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 (1) to 43 (38). FIGS. 43 (1) to 43 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 43 (1) to 43 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the old man g2 is first displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 43 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 43 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 43 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 43 (10) to 43 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (6) to 43 (10), the character image changes twice during the character movement animation (during the movement display), and the movement display of the three character images is displayed. In this example, the grandfather g2, the princess g3, and the palace g1 are displayed in this order, but the princess g3, the grandfather g2, and the palace g1 may be displayed in this order. Further, the number of character images displayed during the moving display of the character image may be four or more.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (38). FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 44 (7) shows a state in which the palace g1 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the palace g1 is moving to the left. Old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 44 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 44 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 44 (10) to 44 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 44 (6) to 44 (10), three characters make a round in the order of the character image, the palace g1, the grandfather g2, the princess g3, and the palace g1 during the character movement animation display. Is displayed. It should be noted that during the character movement animation display, four or more characters may be displayed so as to make one round, or one and a half rounds may be made. Further, a plurality of character images may be displayed so as to make a round during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 44 (23) to (27).

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 (1) to 45 (38). FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 45 (7) shows a state in which the palace g1 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the palace g1 is moving to the left. Old man g2 is moving to the left. It should be noted that the palace g1 may be changed to the grandfather g2 when the entire palace g1 shown in FIG. 45 (6) is not displayed.

FIG. 45 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 45 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 45 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped after the grandfather g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the grandfather g2 is moving to the left. It should be noted that the grandfather g2 may change to g1 after or at the same time as the stop.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 45 (11) to 45 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 45 (6) to 45 (10), three characters make a round in the order of the character image, the lord g1, the old man g2, the princess g3, the old man g2, and the lord g1 during the character movement animation display. Is displayed. The character may change in the order of princess g1, grandfather g2, and princess g3, and then change in the reverse order of princess g3, grandfather g2, and princess g1. It should be noted that during the character movement animation display, four or more characters may make a round and be displayed so as to change in the opposite direction to the round. Further, during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 45 (23) to (27), a display in which the character changes as shown in FIGS. 45 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 (1) to (38). FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the old man g2 is first displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 46 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the left. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 46 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 was moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 46 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the palace g1 changes is displayed while the palace g1 is moving to the left. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the palace 1 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the palace g1.

FIG. 46 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped after the facial expression of the palace g1 is changed. An animation may be displayed in which the facial expression of the palace g1 changes after or at the same time as the palace g1 stops. Further, in this example, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the palace g1 displayed in the conversation notice shown in FIG. 46 (19) is longer than the display period of the grandfather g2. As described above, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the character displayed in the conversation notice display may be the longest.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 46 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 46 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 46 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 46 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the palace 1 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the palace g1.

FIG. 46 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped. An animation may be displayed in which the facial expression of the grandfather g2 changes after the grandfather g2 stops or at the same time as the grandfather g2 stops.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 46 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (38) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. As in this example, a display in which the character's mode (for example, facial expression) changes may be displayed while the character's movement animation is displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 (1) to 47 (40). FIGS. 47 (1) to 47 (40) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the state shown in FIG. 47 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 41 (36), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 47 (2) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 47 (3) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 47 (4) shows a state in which a pseudo-ream decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208a. The decorative design of the pseudo-ren is displayed when the effect display of the pseudo-ren is performed. The pseudo-ream is an effect of performing a pseudo-variation as if the change display of the decorative symbol was performed a plurality of times during one special figure change game, and is a notice effect of the change. After the decorative symbol of the pseudo-ren is displayed, the second variation display of the decorative symbol (the second of the pseudo-ren) is started.

FIG. 47 (5) shows a state in which the second pseudo-ream has been started. Further, the movable body 700 has moved upward and stopped. Further, during the second execution of the pseudo-ream, "x2" is displayed in the display area d, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream is being executed.

FIG. 47 (6) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

FIG. 47 (7) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 47 (8) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display is started. The first conversation notice display is the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 47 (1). If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display may be started, or the second conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability. You may.

FIG. 47 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the princess g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 47 (10) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 47 (11) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 47 (12) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 47 (13) shows a state in which the princess g3 is stopped. The character movement animations shown in FIGS. 47 (9) to (13) are shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10), 40 (6) to (10), 41 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 42 (6) to (10), FIGS. 43 (6) to (10), FIGS. 44 (6) to (10), FIGS. 45 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 46 (6) to (10). An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

FIG. 47 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h3 is started to be displayed. The character name display h3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 47 (15) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 47 (16) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

FIG. 47 (17) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

FIG. 47 (18) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

FIG. 47 (19) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the princess g3, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 47 (19), a character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 47 (20) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 47 (21), the character string image of "afternoon" is displayed.

FIG. 47 (21) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 47 (21), a character string image of “afternoon weather” is displayed.

FIG. 47 (22) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "rain mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 47 (23) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

FIG. 47 (24) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 47 (25) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 47 (26) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 47 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 47 (28) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 47 (29) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 47 (30) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

FIG. 47 (31) shows a state in which the character name h2 including the character image of “old man” is started to be displayed. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 47 (32) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 47 (33) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 47 (34) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 47 (35) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the old man g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the old man g2.

FIG. 47 (36) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the grandfather g2, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 47 (36), the character image of "O" is displayed.

FIG. 47 (37) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 47 (37), the character string image of "lunch" is displayed.

FIG. 47 (38) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 47 (38), a character string image of "the weather at noon" is displayed.

FIG. 47 (39) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display. Further, the aspect of the balloon display i2 has changed from white to blue, and the aspect of the character name display h2 has changed from white to blue. The jackpot reliability is set higher for blue than for white. In this way, in the second conversation notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

FIG. 47 (40) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the following illustrations are omitted, in this example, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is started after this.

In this example, after the first conversation notice display (first conversation notice display) shown in FIG. 47 (1) is displayed, the second conversation notice display (second conversation notice display) is displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (39). Conversation notice display) is displayed. In this way, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed within one special figure variable game. It should be noted that the higher the number of conversation notice displays, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (1) to 48 (38). FIGS. 48 (1) to 48 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (1) to 48 (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 48 (16) to 48 (18) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display is moving from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the inside of the balloon display h1 on the left side. In this way, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

FIG. 48 (19) shows a state in which the dialogue display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (32), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 48 (33) to 48 (35) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display is moving from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the inside of the balloon display h2 on the left side. In this way, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

FIG. 48 (36) shows a state in which the dialogue display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (37) and 48 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the movement animation of the dialogue display is displayed. In this way, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 (1) to 49 (38). FIGS. 49 (1) to 49 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to 49 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 49 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 49 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 49 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 49 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the character image of the palace (hereinafter referred to as “the palace”) g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 49 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 49 (6) to 49 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the palace g1 and the grandfather g2.

FIG. 49 (11) shows a state in which the character name display (hereinafter, referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image of “Den” is started to be displayed. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 49 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 49 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 49 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 49 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the palace g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the palace g1.

FIG. 49 (16) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the palace g1, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 49 (16), a character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 49 (17) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 49 (17), the character string image of “morning” is displayed.

FIG. 49 (18) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 49 (18), a character string image of "morning weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 49 (19) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as dialogue display. In this example, as compared with FIG. 38 (19), the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 49 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

FIG. 49 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 49 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 49 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation is displayed in which the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

FIG. 49 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. In addition, the old man g2 is displayed overlapping the palace g1 and a part of the balloon display h1.

FIG. 49 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 49 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 49 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped, the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are stopped.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 49 (28) to 49 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the first display of the lord j1 or the like moves at the start of the display of the second display of the old man g2 or the like in the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (38). FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation is displayed in which the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

FIG. 50 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. In addition, the old man g2 is displayed overlapping the palace g1 and a part of the balloon display h1.

FIG. 50 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 50 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 has moved to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have stopped.

FIG. 50 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

In the states shown in FIGS. 50 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed, as in the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (32). In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping with the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display. In this example, the moving animation of the second display such as the grandfather g2 in the conversation notice display overlaps with the first display such as the palace j1 and is displayed.

50 (32) to (35) show a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display h2, similar to the state shown in FIGS. 38 (32) to (35).

FIG. 50 (36) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display. In this example, the dialogue display in the balloon display h2 and the balloon display h2 is displayed so as to overlap the dialogue display in the balloon display h1 and the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 50 (37) and 50 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 50 (37) and 50 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the second display of the old man g2 and the like in the conversation notice display overlaps with the first display of the palace j1 and the like.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 (1) to 51 (38). FIGS. 51 (1) to 51 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to 51 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

51 (6) to (10) show a state in which the character movement animation is displayed as in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10). In this example, the display sizes of the old man g2 and the old man g1 are displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (10).

51 (11) to (19) show a state in which the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed as in FIGS. 38 (11) to (19). In this example, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to 38 (19).

FIG. 51 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

FIG. 51 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 51 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 51 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

FIG. 51 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 51 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 51 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 51 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped and the animation in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is completed. The display sizes of the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are the same as those shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (36).

Since the states shown in FIGS. 51 (28) to 51 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to 38 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the first display of the grandfather g1 etc. in the conversation notice display is enlarged and displayed until the second display of the grandfather g2 etc. is started, and the grandfather g1 etc. is displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 51 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h2. In this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is the balloon display. The display size may overlap with a part of h2.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (38). FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 52 (1) shows the same state as in FIG. 49 (1).

FIG. 52 (2) shows a state in which the timer notice display j is started to be displayed. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer notice display j performs a countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (for example, an operation of a movable body or a predetermined notice display) is performed. Before the countdown is started, a character string image of "Attention!" Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

52 (3) and 52 (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 49 (3) and 49 (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

FIG. 52 (5) shows the same state as in FIG. 49 (5).

FIG. 52 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started as in FIG. 49 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started at the same time as the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a 40-second countdown display is performed.

In FIGS. 52 (6) to 52 (19), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 49 (6) to (19), and in this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 52 (6) to 52 (19), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap with the characters of the lord g1 and the grandfather g2, the character name display h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue display. For example, in FIGS. 52 (14) and later, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is invisible.

52 (20) and 52 (21) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

FIG. 52 (22) shows the same state as in FIG. 49 (5).

FIG. 52 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 49 (23). Further, in FIG. 49 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer notice display j is 36.99 seconds.

In FIGS. 52 (24) to 52 (36), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 49 (24) to (36), and in this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 52 (24) to 52 (36), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap with the character of the grandfather g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the dialogue display. For example, in FIG. 52 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is invisible.

52 (37) and 52 (38) show the same state as in FIGS. 49 (37) and 49 (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. In this way, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer notice display j, another display (ball removal error display, door opening error display, other notice display, hold icon change effect display) or the like may be displayed. Further, as shown in the timer notice display j, the length of the display period of the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 52 (6) to (10) is the length of the character g1 and the character name shown in FIGS. 52 (19) to (36). It is shorter than the length of the display period of the conversation notice display including the display h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 (1) to 53 (38). FIGS. 53 (1) to 53 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 53 (1) shows the same state as in FIG. 49 (1).

FIG. 53 (2) shows a state in which the movable body k is moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the display of the conversation notice display is started. The movable body k may move back and forth in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, such as up, down, left, and right, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach effect.

53 (3) and 53 (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 49 (3) and 49 (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 52 (3) and 52 (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

FIG. 53 (5) shows the same state as in FIG. 49 (5).

In FIGS. 53 (6) to 53 (19), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 49 (6) to (19). At least a part of h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue display becomes invisible to the player.

53 (20) and (21) show the same state as in FIGS. 49 (3) and 49 (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 53 (20) and 53 (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

FIG. 53 (22) shows the same state as in FIG. 49 (22).

FIG. 53 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 49 (23). In FIGS. 53 (24) to (36), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 49 (24) to (36). At least a part of h1, h2, balloon display i1, i2, and dialogue display becomes invisible to the player.

FIG. 53 (37) shows the same state as in FIG. 49 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. In this way, the movement effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (1) to 54 (38). FIGS. 54 (1) to 54 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 54 (1) to 54 (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 54 (1) shows the same state as in FIG. 49 (1).

FIG. 54 (2) shows a state in which the pattern display m is displayed by the light guide plate arranged in front of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a light guide plate is arranged in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the pattern display m can be displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate. As shown in FIGS. 54 (2) to 54 (37), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the display on the decorative pattern display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (36), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the palace g1 and the second display such as the grandfather g2.

FIG. 54 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the pattern display m is erased. In this way, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 (1) to 55 (38). FIGS. 55 (1) to 55 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since FIGS. 55 (1) to 55 (5) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the inside of the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the square frame are set to white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability. In FIG. 55 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding the grandfather g2 is displayed in white. The conversation notice display of this example is the same as the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 except that the character is displayed in the square frame.

FIG. 55 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 55 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in green.

FIG. 55 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 was moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the palace g1 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 55 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 56 (6) to 56 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the palace g1 and the grandfather g2. The inside of the square frame surrounding the palace g1 is displayed in white. In this way, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue, and white. The order of color changes can be set arbitrarily. This color change is performed during the character movement animation.

The states shown in FIGS. 55 (11) to 55 (21) are displayed in which the palace g1 is surrounded by a square frame, and the inside of the frame is white, except that the inside of the frame is white. ) Is the same as the state shown in), so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136.

FIG. 55 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in white.

FIG. 55 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 55 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in green.

FIG. 55 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 55 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

In the states shown in FIGS. 55 (28) to (36), except that the old man g2 is surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is blue, FIGS. 38 (28) to (36). ) Is the same as the state shown in), so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 55 (37) and 55 (38) show the same state as in FIGS. 38 (37) and 38 (38). In this example, the character of the conversation notice display is displayed in the frame, and the inside of the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The jackpot reliability is set by the color in the frame.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 (a1) to 56 (a20). 56 (a1) to 56 (a20) show production examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since FIGS. 56 (a1) to 56 (a5) show the same states as those shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 56 (a6), the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. Unlike the character, the character name display displays the character name of the conversation notice display from the beginning.

FIG. 56 (a7) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moving to the left. In addition, the balloon display i1 has started to be displayed.

FIG. 56 (a8) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 56 (a9) shows a state in which the old man g2 changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 was moving to the left. The lord g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 56 (a10) shows a state in which the palace g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

56 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (22).

FIG. 56 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 56 (a12), the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the left.

FIG. 56 (a15) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 56 (a16) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed.

FIG. 56 (a17) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 56 (a18) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 or the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

56 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and 38 (38). As in this example, the movement animation of the character name display or the balloon display may be displayed during the movement animation of the character. Further, the balloon displays i1 and i2 may include the serif display from the beginning of the display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 (b1) to 56 (b20). FIGS. 56 (b1) to 56 (b20) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. 56 (b1) to (b5) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 56 (b6), the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. Unlike the character, the character name display displays the character name of the conversation notice display from the beginning. Further, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction below the character. The insides of the three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b6), a square image on the left and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The square image on the left is white and the square image in the middle is blue. These square images also move to the left with the character.

FIG. 56 (b7) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b7), the left square image, the middle square image, and a part of the right square image are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 56 (b8) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

FIG. 56 (b9) shows a state in which the old man g2 changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 was moving to the left. The lord g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b9), the left square image is white, the middle square image is blue, and the right square image is green.

FIG. 56 (b10) shows a state in which the palace g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. In addition, the inside of the frame of the palace g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame display. In this way, in the conversation notice display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in one of the colors of the three squares displayed during the movement animation of the character. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability.

56 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (22).

FIG. 56 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 56 (b12), the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the left. The inside of the character name display h2 is displayed in blue. Further, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction below the character. The insides of the three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b14), a square image on the right side and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The square image on the right is green and the square image in the middle is white. These square images also move to the right with the character.

FIG. 56 (b15) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b7), a square image on the right side, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the left side are displayed. The square image on the right is white, the square image in the middle is green, and the square image on the left is blue. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 56 (b16) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b16), the square image on the right is blue, the square image in the middle is white, and the square image on the left is green. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 56 (b17) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b17), the square image on the right is green, the square image in the middle is blue, and the square image on the left is white.

FIG. 56 (b18) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. In addition, the old man g2 is displayed with the inside of the frame surrounded by a blue frame display. In addition, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. These display colors are white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability.

56 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and 38 (38). The three square images displayed during the movement animation of the character are candidate display of the display color in the frame surrounded after the character is stopped. As in this example, the display color candidates in the frame surrounded after the character is stopped may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (a1) to 57 (a5). 57 (a1) to 57 (a5) show production examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. 57 (a1) to (a5) show the character movement animations shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 57 (a1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. Old man g2 appears and is moving to the left.

FIG. 57 (a2) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 57 (a3) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. While moving to the left of the old man g2, the lord g1 is displayed. The palace g1 is displayed on the left side of the grandfather g2, and a part of the palace g1 is displayed overlapping with the grandfather g2. In addition, for example, the transmittance of g1 is displayed as 50%. Both lord g1 and grandfather g2 move to the left.

FIG. 57 (a4) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. A part of it is displayed on the old man g2, overlapping the palace g1. Further, the old man g2 is displayed, for example, with a transmittance of 50%. Both lord g1 and grandfather g2 move to the left.

FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, the number of characters may increase during the movement animation of the characters. In this example, the number of characters is increased by one, but may be two or more. Further, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Further, one character may be displayed so as to overlap the whole of another character.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (b1) to 57 (b5). FIGS. 57 (b1) to 57 (b5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. 57 (b1) to (b5) show the character movement animations shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 57 (b1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 have appeared and are moving to the left. The palace g1 is displayed on the left side of the grandfather g2, and a part of the palace g1 is displayed overlapping with the grandfather g2.

FIG. 57 (b2) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the palace g1.

FIG. 57 (b3) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the palace g1 is displayed overlapping with the old man g2.

FIG. 57 (a4) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the palace g1.

FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. Overlapping characters may alternate between one character and another.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (c1) to 57 (c5). FIGS. 57 (c1) to 57 (c5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. 57 (c1) to (c5) show the character movement animations shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 57 (c1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. The lord g1, the old man g2, and the princess g3 have appeared and are moving to the left.

FIG. 57 (c2) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased.

FIG. 57 (c3) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. The old man g2 has been erased.

FIG. 57 (c4) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, the characters may be erased one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (d1) to 57 (d5). FIGS. 57 (d1) to 57 (d5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. 57 (d1) to (d5) show the character movement animations shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 57 (d1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. The lord g1, the old man g2, and the princess g3 have appeared and are moving to the left.

FIG. 57 (d2) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Chibi princess g4 is displayed in place of palace g1, and ninja g5 is displayed in place of princess g3. The characters may be completely replaced from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

FIG. 57 (d3) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Ninja g4 has been erased.

FIG. 57 (d4) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. The old man g2 has been erased.

FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. Princess Chibi g4 has stopped.

As in this example, multiple characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, another character is displayed in place of one character during the character movement animation, then the characters are sequentially erased, and finally. One character may remain in. Further, a plurality of characters may be erased at one time.

FIG. 57 (e) shows a table used when determining the conversation notice display to be executed in the effect control process. For example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 38 is "conversation notice 1", and the conversation notice shown in FIG. 39 is "conversation notice 2". The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute an arbitrary conversation notice from a plurality of conversation notices. Further, for example, a plurality of conversation notices such as "conversation notice 1" and "conversation notice 2" can be combined and executed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 can display the dialogue notice display during the conversation notice display of this example, and can display the conversation notice display of this example in combination with the dialogue notice display.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is included in one conversation notice when any of a plurality of effects (not shown) shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 57 (e) is selected. It is possible to display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 38 to 57 as the first balloon display and then display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 38 to 57 as the second balloon display. is there. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is included in one conversation notice when any of a plurality of effects (not shown) shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 57 (e) is selected. After displaying a balloon display in which a plurality of elements of any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 38 to 57 are combined as the first balloon display, any one of FIGS. 38 to 57 is displayed as the second balloon display. It is possible to display a balloon display that combines a plurality of elements of the balloon display. Further, when any one of the plurality of effects (not shown) shown in "***" of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 57 (e) is selected, the pachinko machine 100 has 3 or more as 1 conversation notice. It is possible to display the balloon display of. Further, the pachinko machine 100 displays the symbol variation once when any of a plurality of effects (not shown) is selected in the “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 57 (e). It is possible to display two or three or more conversation notices during the period. Further, the pachinko machine 100 displays the balloon display or the conversation notice when the execution conditions of other effect display, error display, or movable body effect operation described in the embodiment or drawing are satisfied. And the operation can be performed.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a dialogue notice display. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute a preparatory notice effect and a timer advance notice effect. For example, the preparatory notice effect or the timer notice effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect shown in FIG. 59. For example, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 120. For example, like the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 120 (k), the display size is different from the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 120 (b) and 120 (e) (the display size is small and the display size is large). The display may be displayed to display the conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 38.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 120. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) to 120 (f), in the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the movement distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the movement distance of the balloon display f2. And the conversation notice display may be displayed. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 38.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 120. For example, the movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is terminated at the time shown in FIG. 120 (e), and a part of the balloon display f2 is displayed overlapping with other displays to give a conversation notice. The display may be displayed. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 38. The pachinko machine 100 may display the conversation notice display by stopping and displaying at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 38 at a position where they are overlapped with another display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 120. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) to 120 (f), when the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is started, a movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward is performed, and FIGS. 120 (r) to 120 (r) As shown in (t), when the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends, the display of the balloon display starts and ends so that the balloon displays f1 and f2 perform a moving animation of moving to the right. The movement direction of the balloon display may be different depending on the case of. The pachinko machine 100 may move at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 38 in different directions when the display starts and when the display ends.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute a pseudo continuous effect. For example, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57. (B1)
A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays.
One of the plurality of displays is the first display (for example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 (19)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 (36)).
The first display is a display including the first line (for example, the morning weather is a "sunny mark").
The first display is a display including the first character (for example, palace g1).
The second display is a display including a second line (for example, the weather at noon is a "cloudy mark").
The second display is a display including a second character (for example, grandfather g2).
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second character may be displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the game console with this configuration, the player expects that the second display may be displayed by foretelling that the second display including the second character will be displayed. It may be possible to improve the interest of the player. (B2)
The game console described in B1 above.
A game table characterized in that a third character (for example, princess g3) may be displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the game console with this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player by making a different character when the first display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the character that does not appear in the first display. , It may be possible to improve the interest of the player. (B3)
The game console described in B2 above.
One of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 47 ()).
The third display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is a "rain mark").
The third display is a display including the third character (for example, princess g3).
A game table characterized in that the third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 47 (9)). By making the third character appear in the third display instead of the second display, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be improved. (B4)
The game console described in B3 above.
One of the plurality of displays is the first conversation notice display (for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 47 (1)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second conversation notice display (for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 47 (39)).
The first conversation notice display is a display including the first display.
The first conversation notice display is a display including the second display.
The second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, the player's surprise can be surprised by making the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display, and the player's interest can be enjoyed. May be improved. (B5)
The game console described in B4 above.
A game table characterized in that, during a period in which a certain symbol variation display is displayed, the second conversation notice display may be displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, the player's surprise can be surprised by making the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display, and the player's interest can be enjoyed. May be improved. (B6)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B5 above.
One of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, character movement animation).
The first animation display is displayed before the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of a character.
The first animation display is a display including the first character.
The first animation display is a display that may include the second character.

According to the game console having this configuration, the second character is displayed in the first animation display, so that the player can expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. You may be able to do it. (B7)
The game console described in B6 above.
A game table characterized in that the first character and the second character are displayed at the same time at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display.

According to the game console having such a configuration, it may be possible to make the player infer which character the first display is displayed and entertain. (B8)
The game console according to B6 or B7 above.
In the first animation display, the game console is characterized in that the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character.

According to the game console having such a configuration, it may be possible to make the player think that the first display is displayed by the second character and entertain. (B9)
The game console according to any one of B6 to B8.
One of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (for example, character movement animation).
The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display.
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of the character.
The second animation display is a display including the second character.
The second animation display is a display that does not include the first character.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, there are cases where the character appearing in the first display can be made to appear and the player can play the game without awakening. (B10)
The game console described in B9 above.
A game table characterized in that the number of characters in the second animation display is smaller than the number of characters in the first animation display.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player by increasing the accuracy rate of the character's prediction by the player by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display. (B11)
The game console according to B9 or B10 above.
A game console characterized in that the first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first displayed character in the first animation display. By reducing the number of character candidates in the second display, it may be possible to increase the accuracy rate of the character's prediction by the player and entertain the player. (B12)
The game console according to any one of B9 to B11.
The game table is characterized in that the length of the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the length of the display period of the first display. (B13)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B12 above.
The first display is a display including a first color (for example, white).
The second display is a display including a second color (for example, blue).
The reliability of the first color is different from the reliability of the second color.
A game table characterized in that a display including the second color may be displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, by notifying the reliability of the second display, the reliability when the second display is displayed can be expected, and the interest of the player can be improved. May be possible. (B14)
The game console described in B13 above.
A game table characterized in that the reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.

According to the game console having such a configuration, it may be possible to expect the player to display the second display by increasing the reliability of the second display displayed later. (B15)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B14.
A game table characterized in that the first dialogue is displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the game console having this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect the first character to appear by the first line. You may be able to do it. (B16)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B15.
The first display is a display including the first name (for example, "Den").
The first name is the name of the first character.
A game table characterized in that the first name is displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the game console having this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect the first character to appear by the first name. You may be able to do it. (B17)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B16.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, chance button 136)
A game table characterized in that the second display is displayed when the operating means is operated during the display of the first display. (B18)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B17.
A game table characterized in that the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed. (B19)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B18.
A movable body (for example, a movable body k) that can be moved to a position that overlaps the display means is provided.
A game table characterized in that the movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display. (B20)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B19.
A game table characterized in that a display may overlap with at least one of the first display and the second display. (B21)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B20.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100). (B22)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B20.
The game table is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000, 2000).

The first display may overlap with other displays, and the area where the first display overlaps with the second animation is such that the first display overlaps with the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, the second animation can be focused on by greatly overlapping the first display during the second animation, and the relevance to the first display is ensured during the display of the second display. You may be able to.

The area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second display. In this case, the second animation can be focused on by greatly overlapping the first line during the second animation, and the relevance to the first line is ensured during the display of the second display. You may be able to.

There may be cases where the dialogue of the conversation notice does not match.

A plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order in the first animation, and a certain character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation.

In the first animation, a plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order, and the order may go around in the first animation.

In the first animation, a plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order, and the order may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation.

In the first animation, a plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order, and each character may perform the animation in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and a certain character may change in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the characters are reduced by one or a plurality in the first animation.

After the display of the second display, the reach effect corresponding to the second character may be shifted.

A conversation notice display is performed for each pseudo-variation display, a first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo-variation display, and a second conversation is performed in the second pseudo-variation display after the first pseudo-variation display. A notice may be displayed.

The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variation display, a part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body.

A part of the first conversation notice display may overlap with the timer notice display, and a part of the second conversation notice display may overlap with the timer notice display.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 82, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 58 to 82 are used only for the description of the examples shown in FIGS. 58 to 82, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in 58 to 82.

<Item type>
Next, the types of items included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an item.

Here, the item is a general term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the items related to this embodiment are roughly divided into two types, a custom item and a non-custom item. Can be separated. A custom item is an item that allows a player to modify (customize) the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of a pachinko machine according to his / her preference. Further, the non-custom item is an item in which the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine 100 cannot be modified (customized), but a predetermined profit is given to the player.

The pachinko machine 100 is configured to grant the item to the player when the item granting condition set for each item is satisfied. When a custom item is assigned, the player can display the pachinko machine 100 by performing a setting operation of the assigned custom item using the effect customization screen (see FIG. 67 (q), etc.) described later. , Voice, function, various probabilities, etc. can be modified (customized) according to one's taste. Further, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (for example, a profit advantageous to the player such as a notice, a look-ahead notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

In the example shown in FIG. 58, for example, the item granting condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is granted. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) during the normal game of the pachinko machine 100 according to one's own preference. In addition, when the item granting condition of item D (holding pedestal custom 1), item E (holding pedestal custom 2), or item F (holding pedestal custom 3) is satisfied and the item is granted, the pachinko machine It is possible to modify (customize) a part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) in 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed under the hold icon) according to one's preference.

In addition, when the item granting condition of "heat" is satisfied and the item is granted, the player is given a notice 1 indicating that the result of the fluctuation is "hot (high expectation)". Can obtain information on the winning result of the variation (for example, information that the winning result of the special figure variation game is a hit or the possibility of winning is high). In addition, when the item granting condition of "super heat" is satisfied and the item is granted, a notice 2 indicating that the result of the fluctuation is "super heat (extremely high expectation)" is given. As a result, the player can obtain information on the winning result of the variation (for example, information that the winning result of the special figure variation game is a big hit or the possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect executed in connection with the entry of a ball into the meter increase entrance 227, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of gauges (10 pieces) ( A meter having a scale) is displayed, and one ball is displayed at the meter increasing entrance 227, and the gauge of the meter is turned off (reduced) by one each time it enters (details will be described later).

By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine the number of balls that have entered the meter increase entrance 227 and whether or not the meter gauge is full (determined at the meter increase entrance 227). It is possible to grasp whether or not a number (10 in this example) of balls has entered. The mode of the meter increase effect is not limited to this example, and for example, even if one ball is displayed at the meter increase entrance 227 and one meter gauge is lit (increased) each time the ball enters. Good.

Further, the item granting effect is an effect executed in connection with the item granting, and in the present embodiment, when the gauge of the meter is full (a predetermined number at the entrance for increasing the meter 227 (this example). Then, when 10) balls enter), it is determined that the item granting condition is satisfied, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display that the item has been granted, the type of the item, etc. (Details will be described later). By executing such an item granting effect, the player can grasp that the item has been granted, the type of the item, and the like. The item granting conditions and the mode of the item granting effect are not limited to this example. For example, the number and types of items that have already been acquired may be displayed, and the items are special (rare items). There is) may be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 1>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

The first embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation. The game state shown in FIG. 59 (a) is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is being executed (during the symbol change). Further, in this example, there is a reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 3 and the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 3. , It is shown numerically that the number of pending games of the normal map fluctuation game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 6 due to the display of 6 hold icon PIs. 9 gauges were turned off and 1 gauge GG was turned on, and 9 balls entered the meter increase entrance 227 due to the meter increase effect (1 more ball). If you enter, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such a symbol variation, when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 59 (b), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 59 (c) 1 After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, the character display CD2 of "full tank" is performed instead of the meter display as shown in FIG. 59 (d). By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

The following state shown in FIG. 59 (e) is a state in which the item granting effect has been started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 59 (e) to 59 (g). While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 59 (h), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule. After performing the animation display, as shown in FIG. 59 (i), as information about the item, the item name (item A in this example) IN display and the item description IT (item A description in this example). (The content is omitted in the figure)) is displayed.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variable display of the decorative symbol, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at least one of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It overlaps the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

The following state shown in FIG. 59 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. In this example, when the information about the item (in this example, the item name and the description of the item) is displayed in the item granting effect, the button is displayed over the period shown in FIGS. 59 (j) to 59 (m). Perform the production.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the button effect in front of the display related to the item addition effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol, at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item addition effect. It overlaps at least a part of the display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the operation by the operating means and the effective time thereof, and the variable display of the decorative pattern and the item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect.

In this button effect, the appearance of the selection display SG that allows a specific selection from multiple options (in this example, selection of whether or not to set the acquired item) and the chance button 136 in which the reception of operations is effective is imitated. Of the button image BG1 including the image and the character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the appearance of the left / right key for which operation reception is effective is imitated. The operation valid period display TG including the button image BG2 and the meter display indicating the period during which the reception of the operation by the operating means (chance button 136 and the left and right keys in this example) is valid is displayed. As shown in FIG. 59 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 59 (m). , By highlighting the "Yes" option, you will be notified that the "Yes" selection has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

The following state shown in FIG. 59 (n) is a state in which the button effect is finished and the item grant effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resuming, when a specific selection (in this example, the selection to set the acquired item) is made from a plurality of options in the button effect, FIGS. 59 (n) to (p) are shown. After performing an animation display that moves the image including the item name from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while gradually reducing the image for the period shown in (1), the item is not set. It is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player by performing the character display CD3 of "item A is being set" instead of the character display CD1.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the second embodiment in chronological order.

The second embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the SP (super) reach fluctuation. In the second embodiment, the variable game of the special figure develops from the normal symbol variation to the SP reach variation over the period shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (b), followed by FIGS. 60 (c) to 60 (c). During the period shown in FIG. 6 (r), the SP reach effect is executed in addition to the SP reach fluctuation.

During such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 60 (e). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), the character display CD2 of "full tank" is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

Since the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect are the same as in the first embodiment except that the SP reach is fluctuating, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 60, and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description thereof is omitted, the item is given by displaying the display related to the item giving effect in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the meter over the period shown in FIGS. 60 (h) to (q). At least a part of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect and the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the SP reach effect and the visibility of the meter can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

Further, by displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in front of the display related to the item granting effect over the period shown in FIGS. 60 (k) to 60 (o), at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified of the progress of the variable game, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily suspended. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering the effect.

Further, over the period shown in FIGS. 60 (l) to 60 (o), the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol are displayed in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item giving effect. As a result, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative pattern are overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item addition effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the button effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified of the progress of the variable game, the operation by the operating means, and the effective time thereof. In addition to being able to do so, there are cases where the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach effect and the item giving effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment in chronological order.

The third embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the symbol is changing (while the symbol is stopped and displayed). The gaming state shown in FIG. 61A is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is not executed (during non-symbol variation). In this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 0, the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0, and the number is normal. Figure It is shown numerically that the number of pending games is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 0 by not displaying the hold icon PI. As shown, nine gauges have been turned off and one gauge GG has been turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If you do, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such non-symbol variation, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 61 (b), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 61 (c). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the character display CD2 of "full tank" is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

Since the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect are the same as in the first embodiment except that the SP reach is fluctuating, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description thereof will be omitted, the item is given by displaying the display related to the item giving effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol over the period shown in FIGS. 61 (j) to (m). At least a part of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a part of the stop display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern stop fluctuating can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 4>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order.

In the fourth embodiment, the item granting effect is started during the symbol fluctuation based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the non-symbol change (while the symbol is stopped and displayed). This is an example of During the non-symbol variation shown in FIG. 62 (a), as shown in FIG. 62 (b), one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, and in the following FIG. 62 (c), it was lit. A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the non-symbol change shown in FIG. 62 (c), as shown in FIG. 62 (d), based on the ball entering the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230). Then, in FIG. 62 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

During such a symbol variation, when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 62 (f), it is lit as shown in the following FIG. 62 (g) 1 After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, the character display CD2 of "full tank" is performed instead of the meter display as shown in FIG. 62 (h). By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

The following state shown in FIG. 62 (e) is a state in which the item granting effect has been started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 62 (i) to 62 (k). While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 62 (l), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule. After displaying the animation, the item image IG including the character display of "heat" is displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (m). In this item image IG, the item granting condition of "heat", which is a non-custom item, is satisfied, and the result of the special figure variable game is "hot (high expectation)" (the winning result of the special figure variable game is high). It indicates that it is a hit or that there is a high possibility of a hit).

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variable display of the decorative symbol, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at least one of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It overlaps the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

In the following state shown in FIG. 62 (n), the item granting effect is finished and the SP reach is started. In this way, if the display related to the item granting effect is erased before the start of the SP reach, the visibility of the SP reach is not hindered, so that the player can accurately follow the progress of the variable game. It may be possible to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 5>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol fluctuation in the state where the number of holds is full. This is an example of starting the item granting effect based on what has been done (the gauge of the meter is full).

The gaming state shown in FIG. 63A is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is being executed (during symbol variation). In this example, there is a reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 3, the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 4, and the number is normal. Figure It is shown numerically that the number of pending games is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 7 due to the display of 7 hold icon PIs. Is shown, 6 gauges are turned off, and 4 gauges GG are turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, 6 balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (4 more balls are left). If you enter, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such a symbol variation, when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 63 (b), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 63 (c) 4 A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 63 (c), as shown in FIG. 63 (d), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230), followed by FIG. 63. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is numerically indicated that the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown. In the lower display area, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is increased from 7 to 8 by displaying 8 hold icon PIs, and the tank is full. It is shown that

In this example, when the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is full (8 in this example), the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode. It is configured. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase effect is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced by N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) each time one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227. Therefore, in this example, N is set to 2 and it is called a double mode.

The state shown in FIG. 63 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect has shifted to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227, the three lights are lit as shown in the following FIG. 63 (h). Performs a meter increase effect that turns off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (i), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, one gauge that was lit is turned off as shown in FIG. 63 (j). By doing so, the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off is executed, and the right to erase the other gauge can be carried over to the next game or later. Subsequent meter increase effects, item grant effects, and button effects are the same as in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effects are in the increase mode (double mode), and thus are the same in FIG. 63. The reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, an example is shown in which the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol fluctuation when the number of holdings is full. The mode may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the above condition is satisfied, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. In addition, when the item grant condition is satisfied (when the gauge of the meter is full), the right to erase the gauge of the meter is configured to be carried over to the next game or later, but it is configured so that it cannot be carried over. Alternatively, the number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment in chronological order.

In the sixth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation, and a plurality of items (this example) are started in this item granting effect. Then, it is an example of giving two kinds of custom items). Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are given in the item giving effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. At the same time, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the item giving effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), after performing an animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, FIG. 64 (i) shows. As shown, as information on two types of items, display of item names (item A and item B in this example) IN1 and IN2 and description of the item (in this example, description of item A and item B (contents in the figure). Is omitted)) IT1 and IT2 are displayed. In addition, the item to be given in the item giving effect may be 3 or more types.

The following state shown in FIG. 64 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. In the button effect related to this example, the selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item A or item B) and the reception of the operation are effective. Of the button image BG1 including an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the reception of the operation is effective. The operation validity period display TG is displayed, which consists of a button image BG2 that imitates the appearance of the left and right keys, and a meter display that indicates the period during which the reception of operations by the operation means (chance button 136 and the left and right keys in this example) is valid. ..

As shown in FIG. 64 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the option of "item A" temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (m). By highlighting the option of "Item A", the selection of "Item A" is confirmed (among the acquired item A and item B, the item A is selected to be set) is notified. To do.

The following state shown in FIG. 64 (n) is a state in which the button effect is finished and the item grant effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIG. 64 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, the item A is selected from the acquired item A and item B). Over the period shown in (n) to (p), an animation display is performed in which the image including the item name is gradually reduced and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved from the center to the lower display area. After that, it is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player by performing the character display CD3 of "item A being set" instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set".

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 7>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment in chronological order.

In the seventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation, and a plurality of items (this example) are started in this item granting effect. Is an example of assigning a custom item and a non-custom item). Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are given in the item giving effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 65. At the same time, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the item giving effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 65 (h), after performing an animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, FIG. 65 (i) shows. As shown, as information on two types of items, the item name (item A in this example) IN display and item description (in this example, item A description (contents omitted)) IT1 display and " Display the item image IG including the character display of "heat". The non-custom item given in the item giving effect may be another non-custom item described with reference to FIG. 58 (for example, pending change, model description 1-3, loss, etc.).

The state shown in FIG. 65 (j) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. Since the subsequent item giving effect and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 65, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, the demo screen in the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transitions in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions in chronological order, and FIG. 68 shows various menus selected on the menu screen. It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition when it is done.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to display at least a demo screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 66 (a). It is configured to be possible. The demo screen is a screen that starts to be displayed when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during non-symbol fluctuation. In this example, the menu screen, volume adjustment screen, or brightness adjustment is performed. Display the top menu screen that can be changed to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted while the demo screen is being displayed, the display of the menu screen on which various menus can be selected is started.

If the operation of the second operation means (right key in this example) or the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the demo screen (or brightness adjustment screen) is displayed. , The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, etc. is started, and while the demo screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is being displayed, the fourth operating means (up key in this example) or the fifth operation means. When the operation of the operation means (lower key in this example) is accepted, the display of the brightness adjustment screen capable of adjusting the brightness of various lamps 418, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like is started.

In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (right key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, a meter display indicating that the volume is raised by one step and the volume is raised by one step is displayed. If the operation of the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume is lowered by one step and the meter display suggests that the volume is lowered by one step. To execute. When the operation of the fourth operation means (up key in this example) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display suggesting that the brightness is increased by one step is executed. , When the operation of the fifth operation means (down key in this example) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is lowered by one step and the meter display suggesting that the brightness is lowered by one step is executed. To do.

Furthermore, when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected while the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen is being displayed, the demo screen is started to be displayed, and the symbol variation display is displayed. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / Menu screen>
FIG. 66B is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to this example is composed of four menus: production customization, mobile terminal interlocking service, initialization, and return to the demo screen. When each menu is selected, the production customization screen and mobile terminal It is configured to transition to the linked service screen, initialization confirmation screen, and demo screen.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 67, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) was detected during the non-symbol variation shown in FIG. 67 (a), the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 67 (b) was displayed. Since the display was started and the operation of the fifth operation means (down key 161d in this example) was accepted as shown in FIG. 67 (c) during the display of this demo screen, FIG. 67 (d) The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in is started.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), the operation of the fifth operation means (down key 161d in this example) was accepted during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, so that FIG. 67 (f) shows. As shown, the brightness is lowered by one step and the meter display suggesting that the brightness is lowered by one step is executed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (g), the fourth operating means (in this example, the upper key 161c) is executed. ) Has been accepted, and as shown in FIG. 67 (h), the meter display indicating that the brightness has been increased by one step and the brightness has been increased by one step is being executed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (i), the operation of the second operation means (right key 161a in this example) was accepted while the brightness adjustment screen was displayed, so that the brightness adjustment screen was replaced. , The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67 (j) has started. Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (k), the operation of the second operating means (right key 161a in this example) was accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen, and thus is shown in FIG. 67 (l). As described above, the meter display suggesting that the volume is raised by one step and the volume is lowered by one step is executed.

Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) was detected while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67 (l) was being displayed, the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 67 (m) was started to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 67 (n), since the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) was accepted during the display of this demo screen, the menu screen shown in FIG. 67 (o). Is starting to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (p), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) was accepted with the effect customization menu temporarily selected on this menu screen. , The display of the production customization screen has started. Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (r), the operation of the second operation means (right key 161a in this example) was accepted during the display of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 67 (q). The light display is displayed to move to the next selectable item (item P in this example), and with the item P temporarily selected, the first operation is performed as shown in FIG. 67 (t). Since the operation of the means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is enabled, and the character "Item P is being set" is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile terminal interlocking service screen>
FIG. 66C is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the mobile terminal interlocking service screen. The mobile terminal interlocking service screen according to this example is composed of six menus: trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

For example, when the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 68 (b), the display of the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1) is started, and the mobile terminal interlocking service is started. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, when new registration is selected on this trial play screen after starting the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1-1). The display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1-2) is started.

Further, when the password input menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b2), the password as shown in FIGS. 68 (b2-1) and FIG. 68 (b2-1-1). The display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, a screen for notifying the password input error is displayed as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1-2). On the other hand, when the correct password is input, the display of the screen notifying the completion of the password input is started as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1-3).

Further, when the data save menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b3), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-1) is started to be displayed, and this confirmation screen is started. When "Yes" is selected in the above, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-2) is started, and "End" is selected during the display of the two-dimensional code display screen. In that case, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-2-1) is started.

Further, when the data clear menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b4), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b4-1) is started to be displayed, and this confirmation screen is started. When "Yes" is selected in the above, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b4-1-1) is started. Further, when the quick start menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b5-1) is started, and the display of the start screen is started in FIG. 68 (b5-1). When the menu of "Return to menu screen" is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 8>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment in chronological order.

In the eighth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the demo screen (top menu screen) is being displayed. The gaming state shown in FIG. 69A is a state in which the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-symbol change. Further, in this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 0 and the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0. , It is shown numerically that the number of pending games of the normal map fluctuation game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 0 by not displaying the hold icon PI. As shown, nine gauges have been turned off and one gauge GG has been turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If you do, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

While displaying such a demo screen (top menu screen), as shown in FIG. 69 (b), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. 69 (c). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge that was lit, as shown in FIG. 69 (d), "full tank" is used instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect of performing the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

The subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect are the same as in the first embodiment except that the demo screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, and thus are the same in FIG. 69. The display related to the item addition effect is before the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen) for the period shown in FIGS. 69 (e) to (n), although the description thereof will be omitted while adding a reference. By displaying in, at least a part of the display related to the item addition effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the demo effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the demo screen (top menu screen).

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen). , Operations related to button effects (in this example, setting of items acquired by the player) rather than operations related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, operations for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment). It is configured to give priority to accepting operations).

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the operation related to the button effect (this example). Then, assuming that the player has accepted the operation for setting the acquired item), the corresponding process is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 69 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the demo screen (top menu screen) ) Is displayed), when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted, the operation related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu, adjusting the volume, or adjusting the brightness). Is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the demo screen (top menu screen). ) (In this example, an operation for selecting a menu, adjusting the volume, or adjusting the brightness) may be accepted, and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 9>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the ninth embodiment in chronological order.

In the ninth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. This is an example. Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the menu screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 70, and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item addition effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen for the period shown in FIGS. 70 (e) to 70 (n). At least a part of the display related to the item addition effect overlaps with at least a part of the display related to the menu screen. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen, the menu screen is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service, etc.). It is configured as follows.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player). The corresponding process is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item) is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 70 (n) (the timing when the button effect is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted in, it is assumed that the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service or the like) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, It may be configured to perform the corresponding processing on the assumption that the operation for selecting the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service or the like has been accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 10>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the tenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the tenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. This is an example of Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item addition effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment for the period shown in FIGS. 71 (e) to 71 (n). At least a part of the display related to the item addition effect overlaps with at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment, the volume adjustment is related. It is configured to preferentially accept operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for adjusting the volume). ..

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player). The corresponding process is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item) is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 71 (n) (the timing when the button effect is not displayed and the volume adjustment is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted in, it is assumed that the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, the operation for adjusting the volume) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, It may be configured to perform the corresponding processing on the assumption that the operation for adjusting the volume) has been accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 11>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the eleventh embodiment in chronological order.

In the eleventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 68. This is an example. Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 72. In this example, the display related to the item granting effect is before the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen for the period shown in FIGS. 72 (g) to 72 (n). By displaying at, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is overlapped with at least a part of the two-dimensional code. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional code is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is given priority over the operation (in this example, the operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen). It is configured.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game). Assuming that the person has accepted the operation for setting the acquired item), the corresponding process is performed, but the timing (button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) shown in FIG. 72 (n). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at (timing), it is assumed that the operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, the operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), the operation related to the two-dimensional code ( In this example, it may be configured to perform the corresponding processing on the assumption that the operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) has been accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 12>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the twelfth embodiment in chronological order.

In the twelfth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item using the effect customization screen. Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 73, and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item addition effect is displayed in front of the display related to the effect customization screen for the period shown in FIGS. 73 (e) to 73 (o). So, at least a part of the display related to the item addition effect is overlapped with at least a part of the effect customization screen. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect customization screen.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen, the effect customization screen is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation (in this example, the operation for determining the item to be set on the effect customization screen). It is configured in.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game). Assuming that the person has accepted the operation for setting the acquired item), the corresponding process is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 73 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing), it is assumed that the operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, the operation of determining the item to be set on the effect customization screen) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the effect customization screen (this example). Then, on the effect customization screen, the operation of determining the item to be set) may be accepted, and the corresponding process may be performed.

Further, in this example, with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 73 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 73 (m). Even when the "Yes" option is highlighted, the acquired item is not set immediately, and the menu screen is displayed again as shown in FIGS. 73 (q) to 73 (u). When the mobile terminal interlocking service screen is selected and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (v), the item acquired in the item grant effect (item A in this example) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 13>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the thirteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item immediately by operating the button effect.

Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the twelfth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 74, and the description thereof will be omitted. j) -When the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 74 (l) with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during the button production shown in FIG. 74 (k), FIG. 74 As shown in (m), by highlighting the "Yes" option, it is notified that the selection of "Yes" has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while the effect customization screen is displayed, item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the display effect customization screen as shown in FIG. 74 (i).

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 14>
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the fourteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 14th embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. After that, the point of setting the item using the effect customization screen is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 73, but in this example, the effect customization screen is set in front of the display related to the item addition effect. By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item grant effect (in this example, all gauges of the meter).

With such a configuration, the visibility of the effect customization effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the item grant effect is temporarily increased. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by reducing the amount to. It should be noted that at least a part of the effect customization screen may be configured so as not to overlap with at least a part of the display related to the item grant effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 15>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 15th embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. This is an example of continuing the item granting effect even when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect customization screen. Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in the above-described 12 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 76, and the same reference numerals are given. The description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, during the item granting effect shown in FIG. 76 (k), as shown in FIG. 76 (l), the ball entered the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230). , In the following FIG. 76 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item granting effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item granting effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not hindered.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 16>
Next, the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the 16th embodiment in chronological order.

In the 16th embodiment, the point that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 59. Same as 1, but in this example, the item is displayed across two fluctuations, the fluctuation and the next fluctuation.

Specifically, after the fluctuation ends during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 77 (k) and the symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 77 (l), the special figure 2 is held. A new variable game has been started based on. Then, the button effect is continued even in the next symbol change following the symbol change in which the item grant condition is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 77 (m), the button effect is based on the acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 136. Is finished, the item granting effect is resumed, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. If the item can be displayed across a plurality of symbol fluctuations as in this example, the item granting effect will not be interrupted when the symbol fluctuation is stopped or started, and the player's willingness to play the game. May be sustainable. The symbol variation that continues to display the item is not limited to two times, and may be three or more times, or may not be a continuous symbol variation.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 17>
Next, the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the seventeenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 17th embodiment, the point that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation is described with reference to FIG. 59. Same as 1, but in this example, the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 can be detected even during the execution of the item granting effect, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the meter increase effect is executed. ing.

Specifically, during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 77 (j), as shown in FIG. 77 (k), the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227 was detected, so that the following FIG. 77 (l) is followed. ), The meter increase effect of advancing the gauge of the meter is started while the item is displayed by the item grant effect. If the meter can be increased while the item is displayed as in this example, the player's motivation to play may be further increased. In addition to making it possible to increase the meter while the item is being displayed, it may be possible to satisfy the item grant condition (the meter gauge may be full). In this case, the right to grant the item may be configured so that it can be carried over to the next game or later.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 18>
Next, the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the eighteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 18th embodiment, the mini-game is executed based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and the item granting effect is started after the mini-game is completed. To do. FIG. 79 (e) shows a state in which the mini game is started. In this example, the display area for displaying the gauge of the meter is enlarged, and the Amidakuji is executed in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

The start position of the character in the Amidakuji of this example may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, may be determined based on the player's selection operation, or may be determined based on the player's selection operation. Regardless, the result may be predetermined. In addition, the sign of "x" in the result of Amidakuji is off, the image imitating the capsule means the acquisition of the item, the letter E means the acquisition of the item E, and when the letter E is reached. Is configured to announce the items to be acquired. If the pattern or color of the image that imitates the capsule is different from the usual one, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, there may be multiple types of mini games, and the item may be different depending on the type of mini game. The ease of acquisition and the appearance rate of specific items may differ.

In this example, since the result of the mini-game (Amidakuji) is an image imitating a capsule, the item giving effect using the image is started, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. With a configuration like this example, it may be possible to entertain the player without getting bored with the period from the establishment of the item granting condition to the display of the item.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first modification will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the first modification in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, "the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227" is used as an opportunity for the meter increasing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "the meter increasing entrance 227" is used. Conditions other than "ball entry" may be used as an opportunity to increase the meter. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (b), the meter increases when a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230) during non-symbol variation. The effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 80 (c) to 80 (e), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230) during the symbol variation. In some cases, a meter increase effect may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (e) to 80 (g), the hold icon PI1 in the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 in the second display mode based on the look-ahead result of the variable game. In some cases, the meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 80 (i) to 80 (l), the meter increase effect may be executed when the pseudo-ream is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (m) to 80 (o), even if the meter increase effect is executed when the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted during the execution of the button effect. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 80 (p), the meter increase effect may be executed when the reach is executed, or when the SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (q). The meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIG. 80 (r), the meter increase effect may be executed when the notice display (display of the character image of the princess in this example) is executed. ..

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second modification will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the second modification in chronological order.

The point at which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed is shown in FIG. 71. It is the same as the tenth embodiment described with reference to, but in this example, even when the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example). , The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation for adjusting the volume).

Specifically, while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 81 (c) is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 81 (d), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, the following FIG. 81 ( As shown in e), after performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge that was lit, the meter is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (f). Instead, by executing the meter increase effect of displaying the character "full tank" CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls entered the meter increase entrance 227, and the item granting condition was satisfied. Is notified.

The following state shown in FIG. 81 (g) is a state in which the item granting effect is started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 81 (g) to 81 (i). While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 81 (j), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule. After performing the animation display, as shown in FIG. 81 (k), as information about the item, the item name (item A in this example) IN display and the item description IT (item A description in this example). (Details omitted)) is displayed.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item addition effect on the back side of the display on the volume adjustment screen, at least a part of the display on the volume adjustment screen is displayed at least on the display related to the item addition effect. It overlaps a part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information regarding the volume adjustment, and the visibility of the item giving effect is temporarily increased. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering it.

Further, in this example, the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 81 (n), the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a). When the operation of is accepted, the display for switching the temporary selection of "Yes" and "No" is executed during the button production without executing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example). Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is accepted, the display for switching the temporary selection of "Yes" and "No" is executed during the button production without executing the process of lowering the volume by one step.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during the button effect, after the button effect is completed, FIG. 81 (r) s) Over the period shown in the figure (u), the item name is gradually reduced and displayed, and an animation display is performed in which the item name is moved from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area. Instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set", the character display CD3 of "item A being set" is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third modification will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the modified example 3 in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, "the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227" is set as the condition for establishing the item grant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "the meter increasing entrance 227" is used. Conditions other than "ball entry" may be used as the conditions for establishing the item grant. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c), the cumulative number of balls that have entered the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls acquired during the jackpot game) is a predetermined number (in this example). An item may be given when the number exceeds 10,000 balls), or when a specific operation is accepted by the operation means as shown in FIGS. 82 (d) to 82 (h) (in this example, the above). An item may be given to the key (when the operation is accepted in the order of key 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b).

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means is , The effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 73, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 71, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67) is a means capable of displaying the effect setting display. It is a display including settings (for example, item setting shown in FIG. 73, volume setting shown in FIG. 70, brightness setting shown in FIG. 67), and the effect being displayed during the display of the effect setting display. In addition to the setting display, a display including one setting (for example, the setting of item A shown in FIGS. 71 and 73) (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”; for example, the item shown in FIGS. 71 and 73) The gaming table is characterized in that a display suggesting that the item has been added (display of item name IN and display of item description IT) can be displayed on the display means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, during the display of the effect setting display, it is possible to display the first display including the setting of 1 in addition to the effect setting display being displayed. It may be possible to entertain the player even while it is being displayed.

Further, a count display means (for example, the gauge GG of the meter shown in FIG. 59 (a) or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or the amount increases or decreases is provided, and the display of the count display means is a certain count display (hereinafter, , "First count display". For example, a display in which all 10 gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 59 (c) and the like, and a character display of "full tank" shown in FIG. 59 (d) and the like CD2). When becomes, the first display is displayed on the display means, and the display by the count display means may be a display that can be changed during the non-symbol variation display period.

With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so that the player may be able to play without getting bored. In addition, the player may not be awakened even if the hold of the variable game is removed.

Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means, and the second display is a notice. (For example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of "heat" shown in FIG. 62 (m) or the like).

With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 79) is executed. You may.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player for the period until the first display is displayed.

Further, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 59 (l) and the like) is provided, and the display means displays the operation means during the display of the first display (hereinafter, "first operation". "Display". For example, the means capable of displaying the button effect shown in FIG. 59 (j) and the like, and the first operation display is the valid period display of the operation means (for example, FIG. 59 (j) and the like). The display may include the operation validity period display TG) shown in.

With such a configuration, the player can participate by operating the operating means even while the first display is displayed, the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the display of the first display, the effect setting display may be deleted.

With such a configuration, the first display can be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's motivation to play may be enhanced.

Further, when the first display is displayed on the display means, the settings that can be selected in the effect setting display (for example, the setting of the item shown in FIG. 73) may be increased.

With such a configuration, the choices by the player can be increased, and the player's motivation to play may be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 (o) to 82 (r), when the ball enters a predetermined game area during the display of the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) (for example, for increasing the meter). When a ball enters the entrance, when the ball enters the starting port or the winning opening, the first display (for example, the player displays item A) is displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. The display suggesting that it has been acquired) can be displayed on the display means, and a setting (for example, item A) corresponding to the first display is added to one or more settings in the effect setting display. It may be displayable on the display means.

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment. For example, the symbol variation starts while the item appearing during the non-symbol variation is displayed. In some cases, the item does not have to be erased. Further, even if the symbol changes during the display of the custom display and the item, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. Further, even if the meter is difficult to see (or cannot be seen) while the custom display is displayed, an item may appear when the meter is full. Also, the item may appear after the meter is full during non-symbol fluctuation.

In addition, an item indicating reliability may appear after the meter, which is partially stored during non-symbol variation, fills up during symbol variation. In addition, items indicating reliability (heat, intense heat, etc.) may be more likely to appear when the symbol changes than when the symbol changes, or may not appear when the non-design changes. Further, the button effectiveness meter (operation effective period display) may be displayed during non-symbol fluctuation. You can also cancel (or not cancel) the display of the demo screen to display the item, cancel the menu display (or do not cancel), or display the item. You may cancel (or do not cancel) the display of the 2D code to display the item.

In addition, the meter may be accumulated at a moment other than passing the ball. In addition, there may be an increase mode in which the amount of increase in the meter increases more than usual. Further, in this case, it may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the hold is full or the electric support ends. Also, the item may appear after the mini-game when the meter is full. In addition, the item may appear even during SP reach. Further, the period of the reach button effect and the period of the customizable button effect may overlap, and the button may be effective for the other effect rather than one. In addition, the items that appear may change depending on the game state, each stage, and the timing.

In addition, when an item appears while the customization screen is displayed, the display of "?" On the customization screen may be changed (additional display of the item), or when the customization screen is redisplayed without changing it. In addition, the display of "?" On the customize screen may be changed. Further, the item to appear may be announced, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may easily appear, or the color may be changed with the passage of time. Further, the item may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, the meter may be accumulated during the display of the item, or the meter may be configured to fill up with one type of trigger.

In addition, display devices other than the decorative pattern display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or more single-color or full-color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display devices, etc. The meter display may be performed only on the reel (drum) type display device, the leaf type display device, the plasma display, or the projector), or the meter display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and other display devices, respectively (for example). , When the ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, the meter display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the meter display of the other display device increase by the same amount of increase), one for the decorative symbol display device 208 and the other display device. It may be used as a count display means for displaying a meter.

Further, the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means for determining whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of roles has been won or not, and a reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for controlling the stop related to the stop and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the internally won combination. A slot machine provided with a determination means for determining whether or not, and a payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined winning mode. It is also suitable for such as.

Further, the game console according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 136. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 83 to 136 are used only for the description of the examples shown in FIGS. 83 to 136, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in 83 to 136.

Next, an example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85.

FIG. 83 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 83A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 83A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the character form of a merchant is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In FIGS. 83 to 85, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 is emitting light, it is shown in light black, and when the light emitting means is not emitting light, it is shown in white.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 83 (b) following FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 83 (b), FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 moves from the initial position substantially forward in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 2 is located at the initial position. There is. Since the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols aa5, a part of the fourth symbol aa6 of the tutorial, and the button notice display h110. It overlaps with a part of the ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Since the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of.

FIG. 83 (d), which follows FIG. 83 (c), shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 is moved downward.

FIG. 83 (e), which follows FIG. 83 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 is moved downward. When the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the variable icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal error display are newly displayed. The other part of h111 and the like are overlapped by the movable body 1. The movable body 1 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any of these displays. It may not overlap with the display of one.

In FIG. 83 (f) following FIG. 83 (e), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 1 on the front side falls in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of transforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed.

FIG. 84 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 84A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 84A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the character form of a merchant is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 84 (b) following FIG. 84 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

FIG. 84 (c) following FIG. 84 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 moves from the initial position to substantially the front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1 is located at the initial position. There is. By locating the movable body 2 substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, and the button notice. It overlaps a part of the display h110, a ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Since the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of.

FIG. 84 (d), which follows FIG. 84 (c), shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable portions 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture.

FIG. 84 (e), which follows FIG. 84 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable portions 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. As the movable body 2 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. The movable body 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, or any of these displays. It may not overlap with the display of one.

In FIG. 84 (f) following FIG. 84 (e), the movable body 2 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of dropping and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect example shown in FIG. 83 is performed, and this effect example is performed. In some cases, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 83 is performed than in the case where it is performed.

FIG. 85 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 85A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 85A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the character form of a merchant is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 85 (b) following FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 85 (b), FIG. 85 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously start moving from the initial position and are simultaneously positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 hold number aa3, and the second of the special figure 2. 4 symbol aa4, number of reserved symbols aa5, part of the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram, part of the button notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113. It overlaps with a part of. Further, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, and these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of any one of them. The timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different. Further, even if the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timings may be the same, or the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. However, the timing of the end of movement may be different.

Following FIG. 85 (c), FIG. 85 (d) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and the pair of the movable body 2 is paired. Each of the movable parts 23 of the above is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture. The timing of starting the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

Following FIG. 85 (d), FIG. 85 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and the pair of the movable body 2 is paired. Each of the movable parts 23 of the above is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. By deforming the movable bodies 1 and 2, a part of the hold icon ab1 to ab3, a part of the variable icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal The other part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Further, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with the display other than these. It may not overlap with the display of any one of the displays of. The timing of the end of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

In FIG. 85 (f) following FIG. 85 (e), after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, the movable body 1 starts and ends moving to the initial position at the same time. It shows a state in which each of the light emitting means of 2 and 2 is turned off at the same time. The operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 returning to the shape before the deformation may be started at different timings or may be ended at different timings. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even if the start timing of the operation of returning to the previous shape is the same, the end timing may be different. Further, the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, or the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. May be good. Further, even if the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position is different, the timing of the end of the movement may be the same, or to the initial position of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Even if the movement start timing is the same, the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, both movable bodies are simultaneously dropped in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of deforming at the same time is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the effect example shown in FIG. 83 or the effect example shown in FIG. 84 is performed. It is preferable that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the effect example shown in FIG. 83 or the effect example shown in FIG. 84 is performed than when the present effect example is performed. There may be cases.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94, a movable body 90 and an example of an effect using the movable body 90 will be described.

The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 and a rotation shaft d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. , And a motor m2 and a rotation shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-shaped horizontally long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3, and the movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, an LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion. It has 90c3.

The LED substrates 90a2 of the movable body 90a are provided with light emitting diodes a11 to a35 arranged in an array of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2 rows and 1 column, 3 rows and 1 column, and 2 rows and 6 columns). , And no light emitting diode is provided in the 3rd row and 6th column). The LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b is provided with light emitting diodes b1 to b4 along the outer circumference of the arc portion, and the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c is provided with the light emitting diodes c1 along the outer circumference of the arc portion. ~ C4 is provided. The light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be composed of light emitting diodes of all monochromatic colors (same color or different colors), or may be partly monochromatic light emitting diodes and some other full color LEDs. , All may be composed of full color LEDs. Further, a light source other than the light emitting diode may be used for the light emitting diode (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a.

The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (g) show step by step the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on or the like. In FIGS. 87 to 93, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the case where they are turned on is shown in light black. Further, in FIGS. 87 to 93, the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 are not shown.

FIG. 87A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The movable body 90 can be moved in the vertical direction by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting die. A cable connected to the movable body 90 may be arranged behind the arm portion so as not to be visible to the player. Further, the character string "preparing" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 87 (a), FIG. 87 (b) shows that the movable body 90 is moved and located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c. It shows the state where the light emitting diode is lit. Further, the display of the character string "preparing" is overlapped by the movable body 90.

FIG. 87 (c) following FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 87 (d) following FIG. 87 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 87 (d), in FIG. 87 (e), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 87 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 87 (d).

FIG. 87 (f) following FIG. 87 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 87 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 87 (d).

FIG. 87 (g) following FIG. 87 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (n) show a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 90.

FIG. 88A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 88 (b) following FIG. 88 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been removed. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

FIG. 88 (c) following FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 88 (d) following FIG. 88 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 88 (e) following FIG. 88 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 88 (d).

FIG. 88 (f) following FIG. 88 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 88 (d).

FIG. 88 (g) following FIG. 88 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

In FIG. 88 (h) following FIG. 88 (g), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

In FIG. 88 (i) following FIG. 88 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, the light of a part of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) overlapped by the movable body 90b becomes visible.

In FIG. 88 (j) following FIG. 88 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b becomes visible.

In FIG. 88 (k) following FIG. 88 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 88 (l) following FIG. 88 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c becomes visible, and the movable body 90 becomes visible. The light of all the light emitting diodes provided is visible.

Following FIG. 88 (l), FIG. 88 (m) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c each return to their original postures at the same time. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 88 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 88 (l). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 88 (i) to 88 (l).

Following FIG. 88 (m), FIG. 88 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 89 to 92 is performed.

An example of an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIGS. 89A to 89N show stepwise production examples using a modified example of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction in the movable body 90a.

FIG. 89A shows a modified example of the movable body 90 located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 89 (b) following FIG. 89 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been removed. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

FIG. 89 (c) following FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 are simultaneously moved upward. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

FIG. 89 (d) following FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 move further upward at the same time and stop at a target position. When the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a22 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped. The light of ~ a35 is visible.

Following FIG. 89 (d), FIG. 89 (e) shows a state in which all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are moving downward at the same time. There is. Due to the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

FIG. 89 (f) following FIG. 89 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c are returned to their original positions at the same time. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

FIG. 89 (g) following FIG. 89 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

In FIG. 89 (h) following FIG. 89 (g), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

Following FIG. 89 (h), FIG. 89 (i) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b by moving only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

FIG. 89 (j) following FIG. 89 (i) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at a target position. When the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light of the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a is lighted. Is visible.

Following FIG. 89 (j), FIG. 89 (k) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c by moving only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

FIG. 89 (l) following FIG. 89 (k) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at a target position. When the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light of the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a is lighted. Is visible.

FIG. 89 (m) following FIG. 89 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c are returned to their original positions at the same time. ing. After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to their original positions at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be returned to their original positions. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 89 (i) to 89 (l).

FIG. 89 (n), which follows FIG. 89 (m), shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

An example of an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (n) show step by step an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

FIG. 90A shows a state in which a modified example of the movable body 90 is located at an initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 90 (b) following FIG. 90 (a), after the movable body 90 moves and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are set. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3, c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

FIG. 90 (c) following FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1 and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 90 (d) following FIG. 90 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 90 (e) following FIG. 90 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 90 (d).

FIG. 90 (f) following FIG. 90 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 90 (d).

FIG. 90 (g) following FIG. 90 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

In FIG. 90 (h) following FIG. 90 (g), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4, c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

In FIG. 90 (i) following FIG. 90 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 90 (j) following FIG. 90 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 90 (k) following FIG. 90 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 90 (l) following FIG. 90 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting dides c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 90 (m) following FIG. 90 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c each return to their original postures at the same time. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 90 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 90 (d). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the movements of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 90 (i) to 90 (l).

FIG. 90 (n) following FIG. 90 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

An example of the effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (l) show an example of an effect using the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the variable icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (b) following FIG. 91 (a), the final display of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the variable icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (c) following FIG. 91 (b), the decorative symbol variation display due to the digestion of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the character string display of "press the button!", The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and the button operation notice effect is performed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the variation icon ad3 of the character mode of the merchant, a part of the character string display of "press the button!", The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed by the movable body 90. It is overlapped.

In FIG. 91 (d) following FIG. 91 (c), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the sun's image is displayed. The image is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character aspect of the merchant, and a part of the image of the sun are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (e) following FIG. 91 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach effect is produced. Has been started. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern and a part of the variable icon ad1 of the character aspect of the merchant are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (f) following FIG. 91 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the SP reach effect display by the character display of the palace displaying the character string "Battle!" Is started, and the decorative symbol display device is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of the palace is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (g) following FIG. 91 (f), the SP reach effect is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination of symbols is reduced and a temporary stop display is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the character string of "win" and the confrontation scene between the character of the palace and the enemy character are completed, and the effect display that the character of the palace wins is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the effect display that the character of the lord won is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (h) following FIG. 91 (g), "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (i) following FIG. 91 (h), the first R jackpot game effect display of the 15R special jackpot game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The jackpot stop symbol "decoration 7" is displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character string "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right, and the payout during the jackpot game is displayed on the left. The character string of "80 balls" indicating the total number and the character string of "number of big hits: 1" indicating the number of big hits are displayed in the lower right. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the 1R jackpot game effect display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (j) following FIG. 91 (i), the character string "Dito" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the 15R special jackpot game is completed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the character string of "Dito" is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (k) following FIG. 91 (j), the state shifts to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable display, a character string of "Right-handed!", A pattern indicating that right-handed is to be right-handed, a variable icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. .. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern variation display, a part of the character string "Right-handed!", A part of the pattern that clearly indicates right-handed, a part of the variation icon ad4, and special figure 2 are reserved. A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 91 (l) following FIG. 91 (k), the electric support state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display, the character string of "door opening error", the character string of "ball full tank error", the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon ac2 of the look-ahead notice mode are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of "door opening error", a part of the character string of "ball full tank error", a part of the variation icon ad5, and a special figure 2 hold icon of the look-ahead notice mode. A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in this effect example, the movable body 90 may be located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and gaming states. The movable body 90 may overlap all of the displays shown above, or the display overlapped by the movable body 90 may not overlap.

An example of the effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 92A shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 for the advance notice effect of the button operation, so that the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 is performed. Shown. Even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 may be performed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. .. The series of effects shown in FIG. 92A may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is not performed. May be done. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

FIG. 92B shows a state in which the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 is performed after the end of the countdown by the advance notice effect of the countdown. The series of effects shown in FIG. 92B may be used as a notice of the change or as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is not performed. When the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed. When the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is performed. It may be configured to be easily displayed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

An example of modification of the appearance of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. 93. The movable body 90 is located behind the game plate 125 having the game nails.

FIG. 93A is an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30a at the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate shape, and has a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 can be visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In some cases, a part of the movable body of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. In some cases, a part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

FIG. 93B is an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30b at the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a vertically long rectangular notch in a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are formed through the cutout portion of the structure 30b. It is visible. In some cases, a part of the movable body of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. In some cases, a part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

FIG. 93 (c) shows an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30c at the initial position. The structure 30c is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is invisible to the player because it overlaps with the structure 30c. By arranging the transmissive liquid crystal device in the structure 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structure 30c may be easily visually recognized during non-display rather than during display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

A modified example of the position and moving motion of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 94.

FIG. 94A is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. The liquid crystal display device a208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

FIG. 94B is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. The transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in the rear and front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The figure on the left side in FIG. 94 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle figure in FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the movable liquid crystal display device c208 is moved downward. The figure on the right side in FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 moves to the front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 moves downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. The movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

Next, an example of production using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. The structure 247 used in the production examples of FIGS. 95 to 105 is a structure having a substantially circular shape on the front surface and a family crest pattern on the surface thereof, and can be moved in the vertical direction. Further, in FIGS. 95 to 104, the left side view shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle figure shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left side figure, and the structure 247. It shows the case of seeing through. The figure on the right is an outline for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, Sabohani's character display SB or sun display su1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible depending on the angle of the player's line of sight. It is a figure. In the figure, the line of sight in which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by ◯, and the line of sight in which the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by x. The shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 in this example are such that a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 has a predetermined line-of-sight angle (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the normal game posture of the player) may be calculated and designed so as not to be visible. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 95 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 95A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 95A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 95 (b) following FIG. 95 (a), during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the Sabohani character display SB is displayed on the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 95 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. A part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In this example and the description of the player's line of sight in the example shown below, the term "substantially front" is defined as "substantially front" when the angle of the line of sight is within ± about 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. , Approximately diagonally above is defined as approximately diagonally above when the line-of-sight angle is + about 20 ° or more, and substantially diagonally below is defined as approximately diagonally below when the line-of-sight angle is −about 20 ° or less. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the explanation of the player's line of sight, substantially diagonally above means that the position of the line of sight is higher than substantially the front, and substantially diagonally below means that the position of the line of sight is lower than that of substantially front.

In FIG. 95 (c) following FIG. 95 (b), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state of FIG. 95 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 95 (c), FIG. 95 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves upward. The upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 95 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 95 (d), FIG. 95 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 96 to 104 is performed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. One or more movements may allow the player looking substantially from the front to see at least a portion of the Sabohani character display SB, which may overlap the structure 247. While moving and displaying the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position, the decorative symbol display device 208 moves at least one or more of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. As a result, the player who is looking from substantially the front may be able to see at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

FIG. 96 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 96A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 96A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 96 (a), FIG. 96 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 96 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 96 (b), FIG. 96 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 96 (c), FIG. 96 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 96 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 96 (d), FIG. 96 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 96 (e), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then it overlaps with the structure 247 again. This is an example of moving the display to the position where it is to be displayed. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 104 is performed.

FIG. 97 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247 and the structure 50t. The structure 50t is a structure composed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game table is displayed on the surface thereof. The figure on the left side of FIG. 97A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 97A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 97 (a), FIG. 97 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 97 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 97 (b), FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 97 (c), FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 97 (d), FIG. 97 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern. In the state of FIG. 97 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, whereas the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlaps with the structure 50t. This is an example of moving to a position. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 98 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 98A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 98A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 98 (a), FIG. 98 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. There is. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable icon ad1.

Following FIG. 98 (b), FIG. 98 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The lower right part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247.

FIG. 98 (d), which follows FIG. 98 (c), shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 98 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 98 (d), FIG. 98 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where it overlaps, and then the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247. This is an example of moving display to. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 99 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 99A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 99A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 99 (a), FIG. 99 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. There is. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable icon ad1. Further, the character display SB of the Sabohani in this example is a display larger than the character display SB of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 98 and the like.

Following FIG. 99 (b), FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The lower right corner of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that overlaps the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon a3. ing.

Following FIG. 99 (c), FIG. 99 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The substantially lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 99 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 99 (d), FIG. 99 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247.

As described above, in this example, the movement display is performed from the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the advance notice of the change does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where a part of the Sabohani character display SB overlaps. This is an example of later performing a movement display at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247, and a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is an production example that is always visible to the player from a substantially front line of sight. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 100 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 100A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 100A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 100 (a), FIG. 100 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 100 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 100 (c) following FIG. 100 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire sun display su1 is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The display su1 of the sun is a display used as a notice of the fluctuation. In the state of FIG. 100 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1 and the character display SB of Sabohani, whereas the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

In FIG. 100 (d) following FIG. 100 (c), an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws the sun display su1 upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su1 moves upward. Indicates the state in which the animation display is displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon a3.

In FIG. 100 (e) following FIG. 100 (d), the sun display su1 is upward while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the animation display that moves to is displayed. The display su1 of the sun is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the sun display su1 used for the advance notice of the fluctuation are displayed at the positions where they overlap with the structure 247, only the sun display su1 is displayed at the structure 247. This is an example of moving the display to a position that does not overlap with. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 101 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 101A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 101A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 101 (a), FIG. 101 (b) shows the entire Sabohani character display SB and the sun at a position overlapping the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Display The entire su1 is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displays used as a notice of the fluctuation. In the state of FIG. 101 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun, whereas the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and at least a part of the display su1 of the sun.

Following FIG. 101 (b), FIG. 101 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the sun display su1 move upward. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 101 (c), FIG. 101 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which only the sun display su1 moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon a3. In the state of FIG. 101 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above can see the sun display su1. The whole can be seen.

In FIG. 101 (e) following FIG. 101 (d), the sun display su1 is further lowered while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the animation display that moves to is displayed. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. A player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1, whereas a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above can see at least a part of the sun display su1. ..

As described above, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the advance notice of the fluctuation are displayed at the positions where they overlap with the structure 247, the character display SB of Sabohani and the display of the sun are displayed. This is an example in which the movement display is performed at a position where su1 does not overlap with the structure 247, and then the movement display is performed at a position where only the sun display su1 overlaps with the structure 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 102 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 102A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 102A, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to radiate out from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the character display SB of Sabohani used as a notice of the fluctuation, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani.

Following FIG. 102 (a), FIG. 102 (b) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, substantially the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. However, it is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved and displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state of FIG. 102 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, but from substantially diagonally above. The viewing player can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and a part of the effect image ef1.

In FIG. 102 (c) following FIG. 102 (b), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is displayed moving upward so that it appears from the bottom. In the state of FIG. 102 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 102 (c), FIG. 102 (d) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 95 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 102 (d), FIG. 102 (e) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves further upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character display SB of Sabohani and the effect image ef1 are displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, but the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed. Is displayed at a position where is not overlapped with the structure 247, and the effect image ef1 accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where is not overlapped with the structure 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 103 shows three production examples using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 103A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 103 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character display h113 of the palace and the balloon display h114 of the character string "If you find a character, you have a chance!" Are the decorative symbols. It is displayed so that it partially overlaps. The balloon display h114 of the character string "If you find a character, chance!" Is a display for notifying the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change.

In FIG. 103 (b) following FIG. 103 (a), the entire character display SB of the Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. Further, the character string "Character is appearing!" Is displayed on the balloon display h114. The character string "Character is appearing!" May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed at the same time as the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state of FIG. 103 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 103 (b), FIG. 103 (c) is an enlarged display of the Sabohani character display SB displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character string "Character is expanding!" Is displayed on the balloon display h114. The character string "Character is being expanded!" May be displayed before the start of enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed at the same time as the start of enlargement, or may be displayed after the start of enlargement. In the state of FIG. 102 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

As described above, in this example, before the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the fluctuation is displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the display for notifying that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed is displayed. After displaying the character display SB of Sabohani at the position where it overlaps with the structure 247, a display is performed to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed, and the position where it overlaps with the structure 247. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani displayed in is enlarged and displayed, and a display is performed to inform that the character display SB of Sabohani is enlarged and displayed. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the size of the enlarged Sabohani character display SB, the easier it is to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 103 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 103 (A) shows the character display SB1 and the Sabohani 2 of the Sabohani 1 which is a notice display of the change at a position where the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the structure 247. The character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 103 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, whereas the player is viewed from substantially diagonally above. The player is able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change are displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. is there. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping the structure 247, the easier it is to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 103 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In FIG. 103 (A), the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1, which is a notice display of the variation, is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. At a position overlapping the structure 50t, the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 which is a notice display of the change is displayed. In the state of FIG. 103 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, whereas the player is viewed from substantially diagonally above. A player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1, and a player who is looking from substantially diagonally below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change is structured. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapping the body 50t. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping the plurality of structures, the easier it is to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

FIG. 104 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 104A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 104A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 104 (a), FIG. 104 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 104 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

FIG. 104 (c), which follows FIG. 104 (b), shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 104 (c), FIG. 104 (d) shows a state in which the structure 247 is moved upward and is positioned so as to overlap the character display SB of Sabohani displayed in the substantially center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 104 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below is the character display SB of Sabohani. At least part of it is visible.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and then moved and displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and then the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped by the structure 247 by moving the body 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. May be good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved after the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is the notice display, but the Sabohani character display SB is always displayed in accordance with the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB. The structure 247 may be moved so as to overlap, or the structure 247 may be moved first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani may be performed later.

FIG. 105 shows an example of production using the structure 247. FIG. 105A shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at positions where they overlap with the structure 247. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 105 (b), the structure 247 is visually recognized from diagonally upper left to lower right. The player who is visually recognizing the structure 247 from the front can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1, but cannot visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the player who visually recognizes the structure 247 from diagonally upper left to lower right can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. By displaying the effect image ef1 in this way, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is visually recognizing from the front. In addition, the production of this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 104 is performed. May be good.

Next, an example of the effect using the hold icon and the variable icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. The arrows in the drawings of FIGS. 106 to 115 are for explaining the locus and the moving direction of the hold icon and the fluctuating icon, but the locus and the movement of the hold icon and the fluctuating icon on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed as a display indicating the direction of.

FIG. 106 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 106 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 106 (h) and (i) are produced after FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (g), and FIGS. 106 (j) after FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (i). FIG. 106 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 106A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 106 (b), which follows FIG. 106 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 106 (b), FIG. 106 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the increasing animation is displayed.

FIG. 106 (d), which follows FIG. 106 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 106 (e), which follows FIG. 106 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 106 (f) following FIG. 106 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be. Further, the notice display m1 may be a notice display for notifying that the operation effect display will be performed, or may be a notice display for notifying that the SP reach effect will be performed.

In FIG. 106 (g) following FIG. 106 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 106 (g), FIG. 106 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

FIG. 106 (i), which follows FIG. 106 (h), shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (j) and 106 (k).

In FIG. 106 (j) following FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 106 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Then, the hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 106 (k) following FIG. 106 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. Is. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. When the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 107 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 107 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 107 (h) to (j) are produced after FIGS. 107 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 107 (k) to 107 (g) after FIGS. An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (j). FIG. 107 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the figures are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 107A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 107 (b) following FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 107 (b), FIG. 107 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the increasing animation is displayed.

FIG. 107 (d) following FIG. 107 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 107 (e), which follows FIG. 107 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 107 (f) following FIG. 107 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. The pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 most recently has a vertically long rectangular hold icon (hereinafter, "going out hold icon") in which the character string "going out" is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. "Is sometimes called.) Is displayed. In addition, instead of the hold icon while going out, a lighter-colored hold icon with a default shape may be used.

In FIG. 107 (g) following FIG. 107 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 107 (g), in FIG. 107 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4- It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

In FIG. 107 (i) following FIG. 107 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the pedestal before the movement is completed, and the pedestal is displayed on the pedestal. , The hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap with the hold icon while going out.

In FIG. 107 (j) following FIG. 107 (i), the on-going hold icon is erased on the decorative symbol display device 208.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (k) to 107 (m).

In FIG. 107 (k) following FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 107 (g) ends in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Will be done. On the pedestal on which the on-going hold icon is displayed, a hold icon re-appearance animation in which the hold icon in the mode (default mode) of the notice display m1 overlaps with the on-go hold icon and reappears is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 107 (l) following FIG. 107 (k), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is before moving. It shows the state displayed on the pedestal. FIG. 107 (m) shows a state in which the hold icon while out of the office is erased.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. In this example, a hold icon of another mode is temporarily displayed in place of the hold icon being moved. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

FIG. 108 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 108 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 108 (h) and (i) are produced after FIGS. 108 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 108 (j) after FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown. <Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (i). FIG. 108A shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 108A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 108 (b), which follows FIG. 108 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 108 (b), FIG. 108 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the increasing animation is displayed.

FIG. 108 (d) following FIG. 108 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 108 (e), which follows FIG. 108 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 108 (f) following FIG. 108 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a temporary movement animation of the hold icon is displayed, in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or is used as a notice of the change. It may be a display that is displayed.

In FIG. 108 (g) following FIG. 108 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed most recently. It is displayed in. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 108 (g), FIG. 108 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

In FIG. 108 (i) following FIG. 108 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed, and the special figure 1 is shown. The hold icon a3 indicates the state displayed at the position before the movement. Further, the temporary movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 (j) and 108 (k).

In FIG. 108 (j) following FIGS. 108 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 108 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. The special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears. The hold icon reappearance animation and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 move toward the original pedestal. A temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3, but the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation. It may appear to overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 108 (k) following FIG. 108 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Then, the temporary movement animation of the hold icon b3 of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 ends, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. In this example, the hold icon on the right side is temporarily displayed instead of the hold icon being moved, and when the hold icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position. .. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

FIG. 109 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 109 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 106 (h) and (i) are produced after FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (g), and FIGS. 106 (j) after FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (i). In FIG. 109 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 109A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 109 (b), which follows FIG. 109 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 109 (b), FIG. 109 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 109 (d), which follows FIG. 109 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 109 (e), which follows FIG. 109 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 109 (f) following FIG. 109 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of Gase.

In FIG. 109 (g) following FIG. 109 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 109 (g), FIG. 109 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "preparing" is still displayed.

Following FIG. 109 (h), FIG. 109 (i) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (j) and 109 (k).

In FIG. 109 (j) following FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 109 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Recently, the hold icon re-appearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. Further, the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string "preparing" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

In FIG. 109 (k) following FIG. 109 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the false notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice that the decorative symbol variation display changes again is performed. There is no example.

FIG. 110 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

In FIG. 110A, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 110A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 110 (b), which follows FIG. 110 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 110 (b), FIG. 110 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the increasing animation is displayed.

FIG. 110 (d) following FIG. 110 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 110 (e), which follows FIG. 110 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 110 (f) following FIG. 110 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 110 (g) following FIG. 110 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 110 (g), FIG. 110 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 110 (h), FIG. 110 (i) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

FIG. 110 (j), which follows FIG. 110 (i), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 110 (k) following FIG. 110 (j), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 110 (l) following FIG. 110 (k), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

In FIG. 110 (m) following FIG. 110 (l), a re-movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 110 (m), FIG. 110 (n) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the re-movement animation is completed. There is.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is repeated a plurality of times. This is an example of doing this. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. When the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 111 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

In FIG. 111 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 111A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 111 (a), FIG. 111 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 111 (b), FIG. 111 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the increasing animation is displayed.

FIG. 111 (d), which follows FIG. 111 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 111 (e), which follows FIG. 111 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 111 (f) following FIG. 111 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 111 (g) following FIG. 111 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 111 (g), in FIG. 111 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 111 (h), FIG. 111 (i) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

FIG. 111 (j), which follows FIG. 111 (i), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 111 (k) following FIG. 111 (j), the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 111 (l) following FIG. 111 (k), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

In FIG. 111 (m) following FIG. 111 (l), a re-movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 hold icon b3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 111 (m), FIG. 111 (n) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the re-movement animation is completed. There is.

As described above, this example is an example in which pseudo continuous notice using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 is performed a plurality of times in one fluctuation. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. If the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 112 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

In FIG. 112 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 112A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 112 (a), FIG. 112 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 112 (b), FIG. 112 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the increasing animation is displayed.

FIG. 112 (d), which follows FIG. 112 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 112 (e), which follows FIG. 112 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 112 (f) following FIG. 112 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 112 (g) following FIG. 112 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 112 (g), FIG. 112 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "preparing" is still displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 112 (h), FIG. 112 (i) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

In FIG. 112 (j) following FIG. 112 (i), the reach effect by "decoration 4" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string "reach!" Is displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

FIG. 113 shows a stepwise example of the effect using the variable icon.

FIG. 113A shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 113A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 113 (b), which follows FIG. 113 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 113 (b), FIG. 113 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the increasing animation is displayed.

FIG. 113 (d) following FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 113 (e), which follows FIG. 113 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 113 (f) following FIG. 113 (e), the variable icon ad1 is changed from the variable icon display area 280 during the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a movement animation that pops out and moves as a notice display m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, the variable icon is not displayed on the pedestal of the variable icon display area 280. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a look-ahead notice. You may.

In FIG. 113 (g) following FIG. 113 (f), the notice display m2 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 113 (g), in FIG. 113 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m2 returning to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4-decoration 4” is displayed. -It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 113 (h), FIG. 113 (i) shows a state in which the movement animation of the decorative symbol display device 208 returning to the position of the variable icon display area 280 with the notice display m2 as the variable icon ad1 is completed. ..

In this way, in this example, when the variable icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates. .. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. In addition, not only the variable icon of the default mode but also the variable icon of the mode other than the default mode may be used as the notice display m2 of this example. Shown.

In FIG. 114 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 114A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 114 (b), which follows FIG. 114 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 114 (b), FIG. 114 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the increasing animation is displayed.

FIG. 114 (d), which follows FIG. 114 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 114 (e), which follows FIG. 114 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 114 (f) following FIG. 114 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 114 (g) following FIG. 114 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 114 (g), FIG. 114 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed.

FIG. 114 (i), which follows FIG. 114 (h), shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

FIG. 114 (j) following FIG. 114 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are completed. ..

FIG. 114 (k), which follows FIG. 114 (j), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 114 (l) following FIG. 114 (k), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 114 (m) following FIG. 114 (l), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 2" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 114 (m), FIG. 114 (n) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is displayed.

FIG. 114 (o), which follows FIG. 114 (n), shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

FIG. 114 (p) following FIG. 114 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, the hold icon moves to the left, the hold icon moves to the left, and the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208. The hold / change icon movement animation ends. There is.

FIG. 114 (q), which follows FIG. 114 (p), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 114 (r) following FIG. 114 (q), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 114 (s) following FIG. 114 (r), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 7" temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 7" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 8" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 114 (s), FIG. 114 (t) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is finished and the decorative pattern variation display is displayed.

In FIG. 114 (u) following FIG. 114 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed, and the “decoration 7” is shown. Reach production is done.

In this way, this example is an example in which a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display while the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol is displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the reach effect is developed. is there. The notice display that appears the first time and the second time in this example is used as a look-ahead notice, and the notice display that appears the third time is used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

FIG. 115 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

In FIG. 115 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character of the palace. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 115A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the hold icon in the form of the character of the palace may be used as a look-ahead notice.

Following FIG. 115 (a), FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the form of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 115 (b), FIG. 115 (c) shows the appearance of the character of the palace in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates a state in which the increasing animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

FIG. 115 (d), which follows FIG. 115 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 115 (e), which follows FIG. 115 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 115 (f) following FIG. 115 (e), while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a special figure. 1 and 2 Hold icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out of special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2, and special figure 2 hold icon A movement animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special drawings 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. The notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b3, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 all have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display, or it may also be used as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 115 (g) following FIG. 115 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1', the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2', and the notice display c3 changes to the notice display c2'. The notice display c3'indicates the changed state. The notice displays c1'to c3' are all in the same display mode, and are in a display mode in which the large-displayed character of the lord is fighting by pulling out the Japanese sword. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed, the notice display c1'fights against the "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. A battle animation in which the notice display c2'fights the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208b, and the notice display c3'fights the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed.

In FIG. 115 (h) following FIG. 115 (g), the notice display c1'changes to c1, the notice display c2' changes to c2, and the notice display c3' changes to c3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice display c3 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. The moving animations of the notice displays c1 to c3 that return to the position are displayed, and the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed.

In FIG. 115 (i) following FIG. 115 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special figure 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation of returning to the position before the movement and returning the notice display c3 to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is executed.

In this way, in this example, when a plurality of hold icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of notice displays during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 114 is performed. If the number of hold icons used as the notice display in this example is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 136.

FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (c) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 116 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 112A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 116 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace is displayed in the substantially center of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 116 (b) following FIG. 116 (a), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are the same, but the width and the height are different. It may be different, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 117.

FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 117 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 117A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 117 (a), FIG. 117 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 117 (b), FIG. 117 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state. The balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon part and the pattern of the clear mark until the state immediately before the stop display is displayed in the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon part is displayed). So, after stopping and displaying at the center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or even if the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark are all displayed at once. Good. Further, other balloon displays may have the same configuration.

In FIG. 117 (d) following FIG. 117 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 117 (e) following FIG. 117 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the right edge of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon display f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the clear mark on the balloon display f1 may overlap with the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap with the balloon display f2. ..

FIG. 117 (e) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon display f1 is simultaneously moved to move upward and the balloon display f2 is moved to the left at the same time.

Following FIG. 117 (e), in FIG. 117 (f), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the right edge of the screen moves to the left, is displayed in the substantially center of the screen, and the balloon f1 moves upward. A moving animation is performed to show the state displayed at the upper center of the screen.

Following FIG. 117 (f), FIG. 117 (g) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 117 (h) following FIG. 117 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 may overlap with the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the portion other than the character string of the balloon portion may overlap with the balloon display f3. The width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and the height are different. It may be different, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

Further, FIG. 117 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, a movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 moves to the right are performed at the same time.

Following FIG. 117 (h), in FIG. 117 (i), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the left edge of the screen moves to the right, is displayed in the substantially center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward. The movement animation is performed, and it is displayed at the upper part of the center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 shows the state of being erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, after this frame, in the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character, the balloon display f3 may be erased after the balloon display f2 is erased, and the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 are displayed. It may be erased at the same time, or the balloon display f2 may be erased after the balloon display f3 is erased. Further, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the nth time of the pseudo continuous display (n is an arbitrary number). ) May be erased before the start, or may be erased before the temporary stop display is displayed. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to gradually become thinner and fade out on the spot, and are the same as the balloon display f1 of the character of the palace. After displaying the moving animation that moves upward, it may be erased so as to come out from the upper edge of the screen, or it may be erased so as to come out from the direction at the time of each appearance. The same may apply to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. In addition, the balloon display described in this example and the following drawings has each configuration of the balloon display (weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) pattern, character string display, frame, character name display, character. In each of the facial images), at least a part of each configuration may be animated, only a part may be animated, or the whole may be animated. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark is rotated may be displayed, an animation display in which the display of the character string blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character is lip-synching may be displayed. , The entire balloon display may be moved while displaying one or more of the animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark is rotated, the animation display in which the character string display is blinking, and the animation display in which the character is lip-synching. Further, the display of the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, and an animation display in which the character lip-syncs may be displayed during the period when the number of characters displayed in the character string is increasing. The animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which the operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original display may be repeated after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the gloss display moves or changes may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display in each configuration of the balloon display may overlap with a part of other animations in each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or the whole may be translucent.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 118 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 118A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 118 (a), FIG. 118 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 118 (b), FIG. 118 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

In FIG. 118 (d) following FIG. 118 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 118 (e) following FIG. 118 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

In FIG. 118 (f) following FIG. 118 (e), the movement animation of moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Following FIG. 118 (f), FIG. 118 (g) is displayed so that the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character appears from the right edge of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 118 (g), FIG. 118 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right edge of the screen is moved to the left by performing a movement animation and is displayed in the substantially center of the screen.

Following FIG. 118 (h), FIG. 118 (i) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 118 (j) following FIG. 118 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon displays f1 and f2 show a state in which a movement animation of moving upward at the same speed is being performed. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 118 (k) following FIG. 118 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the movement animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper part of the screen. It is displayed.

Following FIG. 118 (k), FIG. 118 (l) is displayed so that the balloon display f3 by the character of the princess appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 118 (l), FIG. 118 (m) shows a state in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the left edge of the screen is moved to the right by performing a movement animation, and is displayed in the substantially center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 119.

FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 119 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 119 (a), FIG. 119 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 119 (b), FIG. 119 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

Following FIG. 119 (c), in FIG. 119 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 119 (e) following FIG. 119 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the right edge of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon display f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 119 (e), FIG. 119 (f) shows a state in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right edge of the screen is moved to the left by a moving animation, and is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. .. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. Since the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1, the character string of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character of the palace and the character image of "Den" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

In FIG. 119 (g) following FIG. 119 (f), after the movement animation of moving the balloon display f2 to the left is completed, the movement animation of the balloon display f1 moving upward is started. In FIG. 119 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the character string “morning weather” hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion are shown. Approximately the upper half of is visible. At a certain timing between FIGS. 119 (f) and 119 (g), the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 is in a state where a part of the pattern of the sunny mark is displayed and the character string is not displayed. Become.

In FIG. 119 (h) following FIG. 119 (g), the movement animation of moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Following FIG. 119 (h), FIG. 119 (i) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 119 (j) following FIG. 119 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

Following FIG. 119 (j), FIG. 119 (k) shows a state in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the left edge of the screen is moved to the right by performing a movement animation, and is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. .. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. Since the balloon display f3 has priority over the balloon display f2, the character string "Morning weather is" displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the pattern of the cloudy mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the old man's character and the character image of the "old man" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

Following FIG. 119 (k), FIG. 119 (l) shows a state in which a movement animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 119 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the character string “morning weather” hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, the pattern of the cloudy mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion are shown. Approximately the upper half of is visible. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 118 (m) following FIG. 119 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the movement animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen. Has been done.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 120. 120 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 120 (n) to (q) are produced after FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (m), and FIGS. 120 (r) to 120 (r) after FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (m). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
In FIG. 120 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the figures are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 120A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 120 (b) following FIG. 120 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figures 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 120 (c) following FIG. 120 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 120 (d) following FIG. 120 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 120 (e) following FIG. 120 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 120 (e), in FIG. 120 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 120 (f), FIG. 120 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 120 (h) following FIG. 120 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 120 (h), in FIG. 120 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 120 (i), FIG. 120 (j) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 120 (k) following FIG. 120 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f4 by the character of Sabohani is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f4 is a character image of "honey" displayed at a position where the character image of Sabohani and the character image of Sabohani overlap, and a character string and a pattern of "Lance when reaching reach" are displayed. It is a display including a blowout part. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f4 is configured to be substantially half of the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the like.

FIG. 120 (l) following FIG. 120 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon part f4 that appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where it has fully appeared, and the movement to the upper part of the balloon display f3 is temporarily interrupted and stopped. Further, substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 120 (m) following FIG. 120 (l), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Indicates a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

FIG. 120 (n), which follows FIG. 120 (m), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f2 to f4 is restarted and the balloon display f5 appears from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon portion in which the character image of "Gale" and the character string and pattern of "Gale" are displayed on the face image of the character of Gale and the face image of the character of Gale. It is a display that includes. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f5 is configured to be substantially twice that of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the like.

In FIG. 120 (o) following FIG. 120 (n), the balloon displays f3 to f5 are scrolled and erased so that the balloon display f3 comes out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 120 (p) following FIG. 120 (o), the balloon displays f4 and f5 are scrolled, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 120 (q), which follows FIG. 120 (p), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The entire balloon display f5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. <Example of pattern 2>
In FIG. 120 (r) following FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (m), the balloon display f5 is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen, and the balloon display f2 to be stopped and displayed in FIG. 120 (m). It shows a state in which a movement animation for moving f3 to the right at the same time is displayed. That is, in this example, after the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f1 to f4 upward in order, the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f2 to f5 to the right is performed.

In FIG. 120 (s) following FIG. 120 (r), the balloon display f2 to f5 is scrolled to the right, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to come out from the right edge of the screen at the same time. ..

Following FIG. 120 (s), FIG. 120 (t) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. The entire balloon display f5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of pattern 2 of the above is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 121. 121 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 121 (k) and (l) are produced after FIGS. 121 (a) to (j), and FIGS. 121 (m) after FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (j). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
In FIG. 121 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the figures are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 121A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 121 (b) following FIG. 121 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 121 (c) following FIG. 121 (b), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 121 (d) following FIG. 121 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 121 (e) following FIG. 121 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 121 (e), in FIG. 121 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 121 (f), FIG. 121 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 121 (h) following FIG. 121 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 121 (h), in FIG. 121 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 121 (i), FIG. 121 (j) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 121 (k) following FIG. 121 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

FIG. 121 (l) following FIG. 121 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 that reappears from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at a substantially center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
Following FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (j), FIG. 121 (m) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. Is deleted, and the balloon display f1'appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scrolled downward. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part.

FIG. 121 (n) following FIG. 121 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1'and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1'appearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f2 may be erased, and a pseudo continuous notice effect or reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. Good.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of pattern 2 of the above is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 122.

FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 122 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 122A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 122 (b) following FIG. 122 (a), a balloon display f1'by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 122 (b), FIG. 122 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 122 (d) following FIG. 122 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1'on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It shows a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge a person to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 122 (e) following FIG. 122 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 122 (e), in FIG. 122 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. Is performed, the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1'has stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 122 (g) following FIG. 122 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps with the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at the positions to be displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 122 (h) following FIG. 122 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. While the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed, the movement animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f2 is not displayed and is erased above the position where the balloon display f1'is displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon display f1'with priority over the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving behind the balloon display f1 in a scroll display, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured so that the overlapping part of'is not displayed. In this case, since the face image of the grandfather character and the character image of the grandfather in the balloon display f2 do not overlap with the balloon display f1', they are scrolled to the position of the upper end of the screen. In this way, in this example, when a balloon display with high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with low jackpot reliability is prioritized and deleted so that the balloon display with high reliability is left on the screen. It is configured.

In FIG. 122 (i) following FIG. 122 (h), the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed, and the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen is moved upward by performing a movement animation to display the balloon. f3 indicates a state in which the display is stopped at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 123.

FIGS. 123 (a) to 123 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 123 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 123A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 123 (b) following FIG. 123 (a), a balloon display f1'by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 123 (c) following FIG. 123 (b), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 123 (d) following FIG. 123 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 123 (e) following FIG. 123 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. After the balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. In this example, since the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen and then the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. Appears to overlap in half.

Following FIG. 123 (e), FIG. 123 (f) shows a movement animation in which substantially the lower half of the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2, and both move upward. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 123 (g) following FIG. 123 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 123 (h) following FIG. 123 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (the character string of "Today's weather is", the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part) is the balloon part of the balloon display f2 ("Today's weather is"). Overlapping a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part, the balloon part of the balloon display 2 (the character string of "Today's weather" or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part) ) Is configured to overlap a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of "Today's weather", the pattern of the rain mark, and the frame part of the balloon part), but other than this. There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters may overlap in the blowout portion. There may be cases where the blowout portion overlaps with the character's face image, and there may be cases where the character image of the character's name overlaps with the blowout portion.

Following FIG. 123 (h), FIG. 123 (i) shows a position where a movement animation of moving the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward is performed and the upper end of the balloon portion f1 and the lower end of the balloon portion f3 fit on the screen. Indicates a state in which the movement animations of the balloon displays f1 to f3 are interrupted or ended. After that, the balloon displays f1 to f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. Further, in this example, two balloon displays are overlapped, but two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the larger the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. It may be. Further, in this example, the overlapping degree of each balloon display is configured to be equal, but the overlapping condition of each balloon display may not be equal. For example, the overlapping area of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be smaller or larger than the overlapping area of the balloon displays f2 and f3. Further, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 124.

FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 124 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 124 (b) following FIG. 124 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 124 (c) following FIG. 124 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 124 (d) following FIG. 124 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 124 (e) following FIG. 124 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward is displayed. Further, the balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced. Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction ratio may be different for each configuration.

Following FIG. 124 (e), in FIG. 124 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 124 (g) following FIG. 124 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 124 (h) following FIG. 124 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, although the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before moving upward, the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction degree of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the reduction degree of the balloon display f1. Further, either one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced to be larger or smaller than the other, or the structure for reducing the balloon display f1 and f2 may be different from each other.

FIG. 124 (i), which follows FIG. 124 (h), shows a state in which the animation of moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or terminated to display a stop display. After that, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 125.

FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (k) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 125 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 125A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 125 (b) following FIG. 125 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 125 (c) following FIG. 125 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 125 (d) following FIG. 125 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 125 (e) following FIG. 125 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f1'by the character of the palace is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part.

Following FIG. 125 (e), in FIG. 125 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. Is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1'indicates a state in which the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f1'are the same, they may be configured differently. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 125 (f), FIG. 125 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f1'is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1'. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 125 (h) following FIG. 125 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , An animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, an animation is performed in which the balloon display f1'changes to the balloon display f1a. In the animation, as the balloon part of the balloon display f1'expands and the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a appears instead. .. In addition, the balloon display f1a is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and the pattern of "SP reach confirmed". It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move upward and be erased in response to a change in the new balloon display f1', but for example, it is moved to either the left or right direction and erased. It may be overlapped by the balloon display f1a that has changed without moving, or it may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

In FIG. 125 (i) following FIG. 125 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to fit within the frame of the screen.

In FIG. 125 (j) following FIG. 125 (i), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f1a on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Indicates a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 125 (k) following FIG. 125 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The character string of "SP reach confirmed" is deleted and the character string of "full rotation reach confirmed" is displayed. The character string of "full rotation reach confirmation" is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of "full rotation reach confirmed" includes decorative symbols, character images of the palace, hold icons, variable icons, special figure 1 hold number aa1, special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, special figure 2 hold number aa3, and special figure. There may be cases where the display of the fourth symbol aa4 of 2 or the number of reserved symbols aa5, the display of the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure, the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the display other than these is overlapped.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. After that, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 126.

FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 126 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 126 (b) following FIG. 126 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the princess character display m3 is displayed from the left edge of the screen. The character display m3 of the princess overlaps with the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure. There is.

Following FIG. 126 (b), FIG. 126 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character in the palace of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 126 (d) following FIG. 126 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps substantially the entire face image of the character in the palace of the balloon display f1 and the character image of the princess. It is displayed to do. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

In FIG. 126 (e) following FIG. 126 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. In addition, an animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed on the character part on the left side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the character part on the left part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to overlap.

Following FIG. 126 (e), in FIG. 126 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps the character part in the middle part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the character part in the middle part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to do.

Following FIG. 126 (f), FIG. 126 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 is the character part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, the pattern part of the sunny mark, and the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character part on the right side and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. Further, the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 126 (h) following FIG. 126 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 has a cloudy mark pattern on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 and rain on the right part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3. It is displayed so as to overlap the pattern part of the mark and a part of the face image of the grandfather character.

Following FIG. 126 (h), in FIG. 126 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation of moving to the right, and is erased so as to come out from the right edge of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the grandfather character. After that, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 127.

FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 127 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 127A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 127 (b) following FIG. 127 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, it shows a state in which the structure 247 has moved substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to see the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 127 (b), FIG. 127 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 127 (d) following FIG. 127 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player In FIG. 127 (e), following FIG. 127 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. By pressing, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the old character appears from the bottom of the screen. It is displayed to do. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 127 (e), in FIG. 127 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

Following FIG. 127 (f), FIG. 127 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 127 (h) following FIG. 127 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, and a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

Following FIG. 127 (h), in FIG. 127 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and the rain mark of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but while the structure 247 is located at the initial position. The balloon display may be configured to move, or the balloon display may be configured to move while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 128.

FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 128 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 128A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 128 (b) following FIG. 128 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays light emitting a smiling character. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 128 (c) following FIG. 128 (b), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 128 (d) following FIG. 128 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

In FIG. 128 (e) following FIG. 128 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the sunny mark, and the cloudy mark of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

Following FIG. 128 (e), in FIG. 128 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the sunny mark, and the cloudy mark of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

Following FIG. 128 (f), FIG. 128 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

In FIG. 128 (h) following FIG. 128 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, a part of the rain mark pattern, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

Following FIG. 128 (h), in FIG. 128 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and the rain mark of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emitting panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying light emission, but only while the light emitting panel is not displaying light emission. , The balloon display may be configured to move.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 129.

FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 129 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 129 (b) following FIG. 129 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 129 (b), FIG. 129 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is over a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, the whole character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, and all the characters of "the lord". I'm wrapping.

In FIG. 129 (d) following FIG. 129 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is over a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, the whole character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, and all the characters of "the lord". I'm wrapping.

In FIG. 129 (e) following FIG. 129 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps almost all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, a part of the character of "Den", and a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2. ..

Following FIG. 129 (e), in FIG. 129 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, almost the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the grandfather character. It overlaps a part of the image.

Following FIG. 129 (f), FIG. 129 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, almost the entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the grandfather character, and the button notice display. It overlaps with all of h110 and operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 129 (h) following FIG. 129 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps with almost the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the old character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and a part of the character image of "princess". There is.

Following FIG. 129 (h), in FIG. 129 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, a part of the face image of the old character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the whole character string, and the rain mark. A part of the picture of the princess, a part of the face image of the princess character, and a part of the character image of "princess" overlap.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display is displayed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is hold display, hold icon, variable icon, notice icon, icon area display, decorative symbol, fourth symbol, mini decorative symbol, notice display, look-ahead notice display, tutorial display, pseudo-continuous display, reach. Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive villas display, number of acquired balls display, number of acquired sheets display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of a light amount adjustment display, a button press display, an error display, a ball removal display, a door open display, and an abnormality occurrence display.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 130.

FIGS. 130A to 130H show step by step an effect example using the balloon display.

In FIG. 130 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 130A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 130 (b) following FIG. 130 (a), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. The balloon display f1'displays the character image of "Den" and the character string and pattern of "Pseudo-ream chance!" Displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including a blowout part. The balloon display f1'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 130 (c) following FIG. 130 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 130 (d) following FIG. 130 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1'on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It shows a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge a person to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 130 (e) following FIG. 130 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2'by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1'moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2', the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man character and the face image of the old man character, the character string of "pending change", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 130 (e), in FIG. 130 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. An animation is performed, the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2'is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1'was stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 130 (f), FIG. 130 (g) shows a state in which the cloudy mark pattern displayed on the balloon display f2'is moving toward the special FIGS. 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab. There is.

In FIG. 130 (h) following FIG. 130 (g), the cloudy mark pattern displayed on the balloon display f2'is replaced with the special figure 1 hold icon a4 in the default mode and displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a4. Has been done. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f2' may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be changed. May be good.

The effect of this example is an example in which continuous advance notice is performed by the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1'is used for the notice of the change, and the balloon display f2'is used for the look-ahead notice. Further, in this example, the pattern of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon. The notice icon used may be moved to the inside of the balloon part and displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon part may be overwritten with the notice icon. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 131.

FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display. Further, in FIGS. 131 to 133, the sub liquid crystal a208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal b208 is provided on the right side.

In FIG. 131 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 131A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 131 (a), FIG. 131 (b) is a balloon display by the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). At the same time that a part of f1 appears, it blows out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (the part at the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed so that another part of the display f1 appears. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which the character string "Morning weather is" and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f1 is the face image of the character of the palace and the palace. The character image of "Den" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part are applicable.

In FIG. 131 (c) following FIG. 131 (b), a part of the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are simultaneously turned upward. A moving motion animation is displayed, indicating a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen.

In FIG. 131 (d) following FIG. 131 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

Following FIG. 131 (d), in FIG. 131 (e), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, a part of the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the portion having the same height as the boundary portion between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed to do. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which the character string "Morning weather is" and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f2 is the face image of the grandfather character and the grandfather. The character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part correspond to it.

In FIG. 131 (f) following FIG. 131 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 that appears from the lower part of the screen is performed. A movement animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a movement animation in which the other part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed to stop the display at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the other part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A movement animation that moves upward is performed and a stop display is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

In FIG. 131 (g) following FIG. 131 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are placed at positions that overlap a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2. It is displayed.

In FIG. 131 (h) following FIG. 131 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, an animation is displayed in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the other part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, on the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which the character string "Afternoon weather is" and a picture of a rain mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess. The character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part correspond to it.

Following FIG. 131 (h), in FIG. 131 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f3 that appears from the lower part of the screen is performed. A movement animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a movement animation in which the other part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed to stop the display at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, the other part of the balloon display f3 is displayed. A movement animation that moves upward is performed, and the display is stopped at the center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 132.

FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using the balloon display.

In FIG. 132 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 132A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 132 (a), FIG. 132 (b) is a balloon display by the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed that f1 appears. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 132 (c) following FIG. 132 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 132 (d) following FIG. 132 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 132 (e) following FIG. 132 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

In FIG. 132 (f) following FIG. 132 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is moved upward. A movement animation of moving toward is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 132 (f), FIG. 132 (g) temporarily suspends the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the above, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 132 (h) following FIG. 132 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 that has already been erased is displayed so as to appear reduced according to the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

In FIG. 132 (i) following FIG. 132 (h), the animation of moving toward the balloon display f2 and f3 is continuously performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 is performed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is animated to move downward, and the balloon display is displayed at the bottom of the sub liquid crystal b208 so as to be accumulated. As described above, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased by the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is full of balloon displays, the old balloon display may be deleted, the new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. You may want to erase half of the balloon display.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. It may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208, or may be configured to have the same size.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 133.

FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 133 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 133A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 133 (a), FIG. 133 (b) is based on the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the same height as the boundary portion between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 133 (b), FIG. 133 (c) shows a state in which a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

FIG. 133 (d), which follows FIG. 133 (c), shows a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, while the stop display is being displayed, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

In FIG. 133 (e) following FIG. 133 (d), the next variation is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

In FIG. 133 (f) following FIG. 133 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen faces upward. A moving animation is being performed. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 133 (g) following FIG. 133 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

In FIG. 133 (h) following FIG. 133 (g), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

FIG. 133 (i), which follows FIG. 133 (h), shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 133 (h), even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the balloon display f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f3 appears from the lower part of the screen. ..

In FIG. 133 (j) following FIG. 133 (i), the next variation is started, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is continuing.

In FIG. 133 (k) following FIG. 133 (j), the balloon display f1 to f3 is continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f6 appears from the lower part of the screen. There is. The balloon display f6 is the character image of "Chibihime" displayed on the face image of the character of Chibihime and the face image of the character of Chibihime, and the character strings of "Evening weather" and "Reach?" It is a display including a balloon part where the pattern of the sunny mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of this example is a display used as a notice that reach will be performed in the fluctuation.

In FIG. 133 (l) following FIG. 133 (k), the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is erased. When the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed, the scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or terminated.

FIG. 133 (m), which follows FIG. 133 (l), shows a state in which the reach effect of "decoration 4" is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, this example is an example in which the balloon display continues to be displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. Further, even during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

The production of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

FIG. 134 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 134 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 134 (i) to (k) are performed after FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (h), and FIG. 134 (i') is shown after FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (h). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of ~ (l') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (k).

FIG. 134 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 134A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 134 (b) following FIG. 134 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 134 (c) following FIG. 134 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 134 (d) following FIG. 134 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 134 (e) following FIG. 134 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. Second, the second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. In addition, there may be a case where three or more same balloon displays are continuous.

Following FIG. 134 (e), FIG. 134 (f) shows a movement animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 134 (f), FIG. 134 (g) simulates the chance button 136 at a position where the scroll display of both balloon displays f1 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with both balloon displays f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 134 (h) following FIG. 134 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , An animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and just before both balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the balloon display f1b is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f1b is the character image of the character of the palace and the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. What you can see and underneath is a display that includes a balloon that displays the character string and pattern of "It is wise but foolish to see." Further, the balloon portion of the balloon display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 134 (i) following FIG. 134 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 134 (j) following FIG. 134 (i) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled.

FIG. 134 (k), which follows FIG. 134 (j), shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (i') to 134 (l').

FIG. 134 (i'), which follows FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (h), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon portion f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon portion f1b may be stopped once or a plurality of times.

Following FIG. 134 (i'), FIG. 134 (j') shows on the decorative symbol display device 208 the operation expiration date display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. The state in which h112 is displayed is shown.

In FIG. 134 (k') following FIG. 134 (j'), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the balloon portion f1b that has been stopped is restarted. Scroll.

FIG. 134 (l'), which follows FIG. 134 (k'), shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. After that, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. Further, the button notice effect may be performed every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, or the button notice effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings of "When all of them are on top of a person, they look foolish and wise, and what is below are wise and foolish." May be scrolled or not all scrolled. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 135.

FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (g) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 135 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 135A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 135 (a), FIG. 135 (b) is displayed so that two balloon displays f1 appear at the same time from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. .. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

Following FIG. 135 (b), FIG. 135 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that balloon displays f2 and f3 appear at the same time from the right edge of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. In addition, the balloon display f1 above and below has started an animation of moving to the left at the same speed.

Following FIG. 135 (c), FIG. 135 (d) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 135 (d), FIG. 135 (e) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 135 (f) following FIG. 135 (e), an animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 exit from the left end in the order of appearance. It is the state just before being erased. Further, in this example, the animation in which all the balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed is performed, but the animation in which the balloon displays move in different directions at different speeds may be performed. In addition, the balloon display used for the notice of the change or the look-ahead notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the notice of the change or the look-ahead notice, or may be moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

Following FIG. 135 (f), FIG. 135 (g) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and exits from the left end in the order of appearance. It shows the state after being erased. After that, the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that started to be displayed at the same time are displayed at the same time, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may end at, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may move faster than the other. Further, although the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 that started to be displayed at the same time are displayed at the same time, one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be displayed before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may move faster than the other.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 136.

FIG. 136A is an example of an effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 136A is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2, the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f2 cannot be visually recognized at the same time.

FIG. 136 (b) is an example of an effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 136B is an example of moving the balloon display f1 upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, it may be possible to simultaneously visually recognize the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f2.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described.

(E1)
A first movable means (eg, movable body 90a) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
A second movable means (eg, movable body 90b) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
First light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
A game table provided with a second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (b) and 87 (d)).
The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (b) and 87 (d)). Game table.

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(E2)
The game console described in e1
In the first state, the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game table characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(E3)
The game console according to e1 or e2.
The first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).

(E4)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e3.
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(E5)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e4.
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (d)). A game table to play.

(E6)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e5.
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34).
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 86).
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game table characterized in that, in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(E7)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e6.
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 86).
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(E8)
The game console described in e7.
A game table characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(E9)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e8.
The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(E10)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e9.
The game table is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(E11)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e10.
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is inactive (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e)).

(E12)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e11.
A substrate (eg, LED substrate 90a2) is provided (see, eg, FIG. 86 (b)).
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).

(E13)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e12.
A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided.
The first movable means is a means capable of operating behind the game board (see, for example, FIG. 93).

(E14)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e13.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(E15)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e13.
The game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

In addition, it should be noted.
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second light emitting mode. The same light emission mode may be used in both states. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means. -The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. -A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. Good.

(F1)
A first movable means (eg, movable body 90a) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
A second movable means (eg, movable body 90b) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
First light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
A game table provided with a second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
The first light emitting means is a means covered with a first cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
The game table is characterized in that the second light emitting means is a means covered with the first cover (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(F2)
The game console described in f1
In the first state, the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game table characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(F3)
The game console according to f1 or f2.
The first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).

(F4)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f3.
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(F5)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f4.
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (d)). A game table to play.

(F6)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f5.
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34).
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 86).
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game table characterized in that, in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(F7)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f6.
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 86).
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(F8)
The game console described in f7.
A game table characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(F9)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f8.
The first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, a cover portion 90b3) (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the second cover (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(F10)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f9.
The game table is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(F11)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f10.
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is inactive (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e)).

(F12)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f11.
A substrate (eg, LED substrate 90a2) is provided (see, eg, FIG. 86 (b)).
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).

(F13)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f12.
A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided.
The first movable means is a means capable of operating behind the game board (see, for example, FIG. 93).

(F14)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f13.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(F15)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f13.
The game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both of the two states. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means. -The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. -A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. Good.

(G1)
With the first movable means (for example, movable body 1),
A game table equipped with a second movable means (for example, a movable body 1).
The first movable means is a means capable of performing a first action (for example, a downward moving action) (see, for example, FIG. 83 (c)).
The second movable means is a means capable of performing a second operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 84 (c)).
The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 83 (a)).
The position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means that has performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)). A featured game console.

The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the player's interest may be improved.

(G2)
The game console described in g1
The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)). A game table featuring that.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means even during the execution of the second operation.

(G3)
The game console according to g1 or g2.
In a state where at least a part of the first movable means and a part of the second movable means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the other part of the second movable means is visible from the front. A featured game console.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means.

(G4)
The game console according to any one of g1 to g3.
A display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided.
The game table is characterized in that the position of the display means is located behind the position of the second movable means that has executed the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)).

It may be possible to change the appearance of the display means.

(G5)
The game console described in g4
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first error display (for example, the display of the character string "please pull out the ball") (see, for example, FIG. 85 (b)).
At least a part of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)). The game table.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the first error display.

(G6)
The game console described in g5.
The first error display is a ball-excluded display (see, for example, FIG. 85 (b)).

It may be possible to change the appearance of the ball-less display.

(G7)
The game console according to any one of g1 to g6.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(G8)
The game console according to any one of g1 to g5.
The game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

In addition, the direction in which the first movable means moves in the first movement may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first movement may be a fall, and the components in the front-rear direction and the like. The orientation may include at least one of a left-right component and a vertical component. -The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second movement may be upward, left, right, or downward, and the first movement may be a fall, which is a component in the front-rear direction or a left-right direction. The orientation may include at least one of the components of the above and the components in the vertical direction. -Both the first operation and the second operation may be executed at the same time, one may be executed after the other is executed, or only one or the other may be executed. -After both the first and second movements have been performed, both the first and second movable means may return to their initial positions at the same time, one returning and then the other. May be good. -While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate. -During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means. -During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the second movable means. -Even if the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may produce a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means. Good.

(H1)
A first movable means (eg, movable body 90a) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
A second movable means (eg, movable body 90b) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
First light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (see, eg, FIG. 86),
A game table provided with a second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
In the initial state, at least a part of the first movable means and the second movable means overlaps with the structure (for example, the structure 30a) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (a)). , A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(H2)
The game console described in h1
In the first state, the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game table characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(H3)
The game console according to h1 or h2.
The first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).

(H4)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h3.
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(H5)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h4.
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (d)). A game table to play.

(H6)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h5.
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34).
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 86).
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game table characterized in that, in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(H7)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h6.
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 86).
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(H8)
The game console described in h7,
A game table characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(H9)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h8.
The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3).
A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a)).

(H10)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h9.
The game table is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(H11)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h10.
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is inactive (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e)).

(H12)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h11.
A substrate (eg, LED substrate 90a2) is provided (see, eg, FIG. 86 (b)).
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).

(H13)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h12.
A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided.
The first movable means is a means capable of operating behind the game board (see, for example, FIG. 93).

(H14)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h13.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(H15)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h13.
The game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both of the two states. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means. -The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. -A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. Good.

(I1)
Display means (for example, decorative pattern display device 208) and
A game console equipped with a structure (for example, a structure 247).
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display (for example, the character display SB of Sabohani) at the first position (for example, the lower center of the display area) (see, for example, FIG. 95 (c)).
At least a portion of the structure is located at a position that overlaps a portion of the display means (see, eg, FIG. 95).
The game table is characterized in that the first display displayed at the first position is a display that may overlap with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 95 (c)).

It may be possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of playing by changing the direction in which the game table is viewed, and to improve the interest of the player.

(I2)
The game console described in i1
The structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 104).
The game table, which is displayed at the first position, is a display that does not overlap the structure after the structure is moved.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I3)
The game console described in i1 or i2.
The display means is a movable display means.
The game table, which is displayed at the first position, is a display that does not overlap with the structure after the display means is moved.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I4)
The game console according to any one of i1 to i3.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, a central portion of a display area).
The game table is characterized in that the first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 95 (e)).

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I5)
The game console described in i4.
A game table characterized in that the first display may be displayed at the second position after being displayed at the first position (see, for example, FIG. 95).

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I6)
The game console according to any one of i1 to i5.
The first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 95).

The appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I7)
The game console according to any one of i1 to i6.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(I8)
The game console according to any one of i1 to i6.
The game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

In addition, ・ The first display may be a look-ahead notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variation. It may be an icon display, a character display, or an error display. -The first display displayed at the second position may overlap with the structure. -The first display displayed at the second position may overlap with the structure after the display means is moved. -The structure may be provided with display means, may be provided with an LED substrate, or may be movable. -The display means may be movable. -The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed at the rear while the transmissive liquid crystal display is being displayed. -The structure may be a light emitting panel, and the first display may be made at the rear during the light emitting display of the light emitting panel. (Drawing) -Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap-The notice display does not overlap from the first position where it overlaps the structure. Example of moving to the second position and then moving to the first position-The notice display overlaps with the structure. It does not overlap from the first position. After moving to the second position, it overlaps with other structures. Move to 3rd position / Notice display does not overlap with structure Example / Notice display always overlaps from 4th position Moves to 1st position and then moves to 5th position Visible example-The notice display is displayed in the first position where it overlaps the structure, and the other notice display moves to the second position where it does not overlap.-The notice display is displayed in the second position, etc. Example of moving the notice display to the first position-Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, and the effect display can be seen first-The notice display An example of giving a notice of the notice display before it is displayed at the first position that overlaps the structure, an example of the notice display appearing enlarged ・ The notice display is displayed at the second position, and the structure is moved or An example in which the notice display of the second position is hidden by the movement of the display means (j1)
A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons.
One of the plurality of icons is a hold icon.
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter, referred to as a "first animation" (for example, a movement animation of the notice display m1)) may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that a first effect display (for example, a pseudo continuous variation effect) may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the display of the first animation (see, for example, FIG. 106).

It may be possible to attract the player's attention to the decorative pattern variation display and improve the player's interest.

(J2)
The game console described in j1
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a variable icon.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of hold icons and variable icons.

(J3)
The game console described in j1 or j2.
The first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 115 (f) and 115 (g)).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j3.
The first animation is an animation including a movement display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (f) to 106 (i)).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j4.
The first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (f) and 106 (g)).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j5.
The first animation is an animation including an increased display of the icons (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (j) and 106 (k)).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7)
The game console described in j6.
A game table characterized in that the increase display in one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (see, for example, FIG. 110).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of one icon more.

(J8)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j7.
The first effect display is a pseudo-continuous variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 106 (h)).

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J9)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j8.
The first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 112 (j)).

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J10)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j9.
The first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display.

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J11)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j10.
The first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in the icon display area (for example, special figures 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab) (see, for example, FIG. 107 (f)).
Another display (for example, an icon displaying the character string "preparing") may be displayed in the icon display area during at least a part of the display period of the first animation (for example, an icon displaying the character string "in preparation"). A game table characterized in that (see FIG. 107 (g)).

In some cases, the display of the icon display area can attract the attention of the player.

(J12)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j11.
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by two or more of the icons (hereinafter, referred to as "second animation") may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 115 (f)).
A game table characterized in that the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the display of the second animation (see, for example, FIG. 115 (h)).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of two or more icons more.

(J13)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j12.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

In addition, ・ The icon does not have to be moved and nothing is displayed in the original icon display area, the temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or other icons are moved (packed). It may be displayed. -If the icon is moved and then displayed again (returned) in the original icon display area, it may be displayed in an increased manner, may be displayed so as to overlap with another icon display, or may be displayed in another icon. May be displayed to dismiss. -The decorative symbol may change after the first animation, may be erased (destroyed), may shift from the shaking fluctuation display to the fluctuation display, or a special symbol may be temporarily stopped in the middle symbol. May be good. -The first production display does not have to be performed after the first animation. -The first animation may be performed multiple times during one decorative symbol variation display. -The first animation may be performed multiple times with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays. -An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa. -The first animation may be easier to perform in the case of the hold full tank than in the case of the hold non-full tank, or vice versa. -A notice may be displayed suggesting that the first animation will be performed. -A count notice display (timer effect) suggesting the start time of the first animation may be performed. -The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or variable icon is digested. -The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.

(Drawing) -FIGS. 106 to 115 are examples in which the hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol variation display re-variates (pseudo-ream) while the out-of-order symbol swings and fluctuates. FIG. 107 is an example of displaying a temporary icon on the hold pedestal while the hold icon is moving. -Fig. 108 is an example of returning to the original position when the hold icon behind is packed and returned while the hold icon is moving. -Fig. 109 is an example of a ghost effect that does not develop even if the hold icon collides. FIG. 110 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation a plurality of times with one fluctuation. -Fig. 111 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation in one fluctuation. FIG. 112 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon. -Fig. 113 is an example in which the variable icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol. -Fig. 114 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with each other over a plurality of fluctuations and develops into reach. -Fig. 115 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons collide with a decorative symbol at the same time to reach a reach.

(K1)
A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays.
One of the plurality of displays is the first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).

Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing the line of sight, he / she can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.

(K2)
The game console described in k1
The display means is a means capable of displaying the movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation" (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 117 (d)). ), (E)),
The first movement animation may be displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and 117 (e)). Amusement table.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(K3)
The game console described in k2
The display means is a means capable of displaying the movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement animation" (for example, movement animation moving to the left)).
A game table characterized in that the second balloon display is displayed after the second movement animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4)
The game console described in k2 or k3.
After displaying the other movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "third movement animation" (for example, movement animation moving to the right)), the first balloon is displayed in the first display area. The display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (b), (c)).
The game table is characterized in that the first movement animation and the third movement animation may move in different directions of the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 117).

It may be possible to raise the player's expectation by changing the direction of movement by the movement animation.

(K5)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k4.
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.

(K6)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k5.
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).

In some cases, the second balloon display in the foreground can attract the player's interest.

(K7)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k6.
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace).
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the palace).
A game table characterized in that the character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 134 (f) and 134 (g)).

It may be possible to increase the player's expectation by continuously displaying the balloon display of the same character.

(K8)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k7.
Equipped with an operating means (for example, chance button 136)
When the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and 117 (e)). A game table characterized by that.

It may be possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

(K9)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k8.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(K10)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k8.
The game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the balloon display may be moved or disappeared while being overlapped with other displays (for example, notice, error display, ball-out display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after the movement display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be heard at the same time or in order. -The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half. -It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played in reverse or the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). -A part of the redisplayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the characters may change to characters with high expectations). -When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with high expectation may remain and the other balloon display (balloon display with low expectation) may disappear preferentially. -The balloon display may be enlarged, or the characters in the balloon display may be displayed outside the frame of the balloon display. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -Characters may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display. -The balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. -A balloon display may be used to give a pre-reading notice. -A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means is used as the other. The balloon display may be moved to, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

(Drawing) -Fig. 116 is an example of a conversation notice. -Fig. 117 shows an example of conversation notice.-The appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears moves vertically (the animation of the new balloon and the animation of the old balloon move at the same time). -Fig. 118 shows an example of a conversation notice-the appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is an example of vertical movement (example of timing modification-animation of an old balloon and then an animation of a new balloon). -Fig. 119 is an example of a conversation notice-the appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is an example of vertical movement (an example of timing modification-an animation of an old balloon after an animation of a new balloon). -Fig. 120 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example of the appearance animation moving vertically, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, and double. -Fig. 121 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a disappeared character returns, and an example in which the content changes when the character returns. -Fig. 122 is an example of a conversation notice-a specific balloon (for example, a balloon with a high degree of expectation) is not deleted. -Fig. 123 shows an example of conversation notice and an example of overlapping balloons. -Fig. 124 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which an old speech bubble is reduced. -Fig. 125 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which balloons of the same character are continuous, an example in which the balloon is enlarged, and an example in which the content of the balloon protrudes from the balloon. -Fig. 126 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the notice character is moving. -Fig. 127 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves while a movable body is in operation. -Fig. 128 shows an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves while the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light. -Fig. 129 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves while the first display is displayed. -Fig. 130 is an example of a conversation notice-a balloon is a look-ahead notice (the hold icon changes to a look-ahead icon). -FIG. 131 is an example of a conversation notice-an example in which a character and a balloon are displayed on separate display means. -Fig. 132 shows an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves to another display means. -Fig. 133 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon is displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.

(L1)
A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays.
One of the plurality of displays is the first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
While displaying the second balloon display, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (e) and 117 (f)). Game table.

By displaying the first balloon display in a different display area even while the second balloon display is being displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the two balloon displays, so that the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the player's interests. Can be improved.

(L2)
The game console described in l1.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation" (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 117 (d)). ), (E)),
The first movement animation may be displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and 117 (e)). Amusement table.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(L3)
The game console according to l1 or l2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement animation" (for example, movement animation moving to the left)).
A game table characterized in that the second balloon display is displayed after the second movement animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(L4)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l3.
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.

(L5)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l4.
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).

In some cases, the second balloon display in the foreground can attract the player's interest.

(L6)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l5.
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace).
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the palace).
A game table characterized in that the character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 134 (f) and 134 (g)).

It may be possible to increase the player's expectation by continuously displaying the balloon display of the same character.

(L7)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l6.
Equipped with an operating means (for example, chance button 136)
When the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and 117 (e)). A game table characterized by that.

It may be possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

(L8)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l7.
One of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (see, for example, FIG. 120 (q)).
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 120 (n)).
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same,
A game table characterized in that the width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (see, for example, FIG. 120 (q)).

By changing the width of the balloon display, it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

(L9)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l8.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(L10)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l8.
The game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the balloon display may be moved or disappeared while being overlapped with other displays (for example, notice, error display, ball-out display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after the movement display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be heard at the same time or in order. -The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half. -It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played in reverse or the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). -A part of the redisplayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the characters may change to characters with high expectations). -When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with high expectation may remain and the other balloon display (balloon display with low expectation) may disappear preferentially. -The balloon display may be enlarged, or the characters in the balloon display may be displayed outside the frame of the balloon display. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -Characters may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display. -The balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. -A balloon display may be used to give a pre-reading notice. -A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means is used as the other. The balloon display may be moved to, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.

It should be noted that each event (each effect) can be a combination of a part or all of a certain event (a certain effect) and a part or all of another event (another effect).

Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.

Each event (each effect) may only be executed in series.

Each event (each effect) may only be executed in parallel.

Here, serial execution means that a certain event (a certain effect) ends and then another event (another effect) starts, and parallel execution means a certain event (or another effect). It suffices if there is a state in which an event (another effect) and another event (another effect) are performed at the same time, and the start timing and end timing of a certain event (a certain effect) and the start timing of another event (another effect) And the end timing can be combined as appropriate.

Further, each event (each effect) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or serially only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without distinguishing between states. ..

A certain state may be a state of transition by a player operation or a state of transition without a player operation (for example, a state of transition after a player operation without a player operation). In that case, it may be the final opportunity or the first opportunity.)

Here, "shifting without relying on the player's operation" may be a transition based on a lottery, a transition corresponding to a control state, or a combination of both. It may be.

Here, the "lottery" may be a lottery related to the advantage to the player, or may be a lottery not related to the advantage to the player.

Here, the "control state" may be a state related to the advantage to the player or a state not related to the advantage to the player (for example, the control state 1 and the control state 2). Therefore, the advantage to the player may be different or may not be different.)

To specifically explain the states in which the advantages to the player are different, in the case where there are the control state 1 and the control state 2, if the advantage is different by staying in the control state N itself, the staying itself In the case of, the advantage is not different, and there may be a difference in the advantage after staying, and any of them may be used.

The image used in the explanation of each figure (each event (each production)) is an image for explanation, and of course, another image may be used, for example, an image of a lord (male character). It is also possible to replace it with an image of a princess (female character).

Further, even if the image explaining a certain effect and the image explaining another effect are the same image, the image explaining the other effect is replaced with another image, and then the image is described as a certain effect. It is also possible to perform other effects in parallel and / or in series.

Further, when an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, it is not possible to execute them in parallel and / or in series, but to execute them alternately. May be good.

In addition to the cases where the images are the same, there are cases where the timings are the same (for example, both are in the process of super reach) and the locations are the same (for example, both are on hold display areas), but the same applies in this case as well.

Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, the first half and the second half of the super reach may be executed in series, and even if the locations are the same, they may be executed in parallel at different locations. It may be executed in series with the first half and the second half of Super Reach at the same place.

Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (effect means).

A certain means (effect means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).

Each event (each effect) performed by each of the plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices) may be performed by one device (effect device).

Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (plural effect devices).

The devices (directing devices) include display devices such as the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, movable bodies 700, 702, and the like. Movable body can be mentioned.

In addition, each event (each effect) may be described by taking one device (effect device) as an example. For example, in the case of notification, it is applied to another device (effect device) capable of notification. Is possible.

Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be configured to be feasible with a plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices).

Further, in the case where a plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices) are configured to be feasible, a part or all of the characteristics of a certain notification may be applied to each of the plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices).

Each configuration in each event (each effect) may be merely an example, and even if only one of each event (each effect) has a configuration, the other configuration may be provided. It may be possible to combine after complementing the above, or it may be possible to combine after deleting a certain configuration provided only on one side.

Further, the combination may be denied due to the difference in configuration.

FIGS. 137 to 158 are diagrams that stepwise show an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 137 to 158, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Although FIGS. 137 to 158 show the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208, it may be provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL is provided on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the family crest accessory 224E is arranged, but another effect movable body 224 is provided. A POV display or the like may be arranged.

FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step an example of a button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 1 are displayed. All of h13 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, it is difficult to open the electric chew, and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is held. The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display in 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -3), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -4), the second stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (2) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (2) -2), it is shown that the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the weak Sabohani group notice in which the number of Sabohani SBHN is smaller than the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice. Has been done. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given. In addition, "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is also informed that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. .. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -2), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the button is displayed. It notifies that the notice by the production (hereinafter, may be referred to as "normal button production") has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. At this time, the character "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the lord Along with the close-up image, a cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Game" in the balloon is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not decorated around the characters "game" in the balloon, and is a big hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It suggests that the reliability of is low. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached along with the characters "chance", which fuels expectations for a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -5), the family crest accessory 224E rises and the upper end portion overlaps with the decorative pattern display device 208, and the judge moves up and down to incite whether or not it becomes a big hit. It is shown that the previous role is being produced. In the present embodiment, the effect of the family crest accessory 224E is used as the effect of the fanning before the judge. However, the display of the decorative pattern display device 208 is used to display the effect of the fanning before the judge. May be good.

However, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is an abbreviation. In the center, the "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it is shown that the family crest character 224E has finished the effect of fanning the pre-judgment character, and the family crest character 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". The situation is shown. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI1b) is displayed as a result of operating the effect button 136 in the button effect by the effect button 136, and then the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) is displayed. It is shown that the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols is displayed without the judgment effect of confirming the big hit by.

FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (B (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -3) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4). , It is shown that a new button production is started. This button effect is a super protrusion button effect in which the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed, and in the button effects in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -3), the effect button 136 is displayed. It is another button effect that is started when it is operated. This super-protruding button image 136aS is a button image schematically showing a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, and a character display of "press" is added downward together with the grandfather's character. is there. Further, at this time, the characters "extreme heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. That is, it is suggested that when this super protruding button effect is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. The effect button 136 may vibrate, or may vibrate and rotate when the effect button 136 protrudes. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the super protrusion button effect is performed by the display of the super protrusion button image 136aS and the protrusion operation of the effect button 136. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the character string is different between the character display in the operation promotion display displayed in the normal button effect and the character display in the operation promotion display displayed in the super protruding button effect. It should be noted that the wording may be different from the wording directly instructing to "press" the effect button 136. For example, in the first button effect, the character display of "press" is displayed and then executed. In the second button effect, the character display of "super press" may be displayed, the character display of "hard press" may be displayed, or the character display of "blow" may be displayed. In addition, when the super protruding button effect is performed, it may be made to be a big hit without fail. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is different from the position where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed, and when the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed, the display position is different. , The remaining time display meter MT is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated to start the effect button 136 at the timing when the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed, but the first button is displayed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the effect button 136 may be started to project, and then the super project button effect may be started, or the super project button effect may be started to start the super project button image. The protruding operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -6), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started. The state is shown. As the judge effect, a judge effect of confirming the big hit indicating that the big hit is confirmed and an off-judge effect indicating that the hit is out of order are prepared. It should be noted that the off-judgment effect may be an effect in which it is confirmed that the effect will be off, or an effect in which a big hit may be obtained by the reverse effect after that. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the judge production is a production that directs whether or not it will be a big hit. In this jackpot confirmed judge production, the family crest accessory 224E rises to a position that overlaps the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light guide plate IL emits light to imitate the face of the lord. An effect that appears on the display device 208 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that this judge effect is not limited to the one started by the button operation in the button effect, and may be executed, for example, after the judge's pre-judgment effect. Further, the judge effect may be performed following the other types of effects described in the present embodiment, or the judge effect may be suddenly started without any warning. Further, although the judge effect is performed before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, it may be started at a timing other than before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. For example, the decorative symbol variation display may be started. It may be executed at the timing immediately after the start of. In addition, the judge effect may be performed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. For example, by executing the judgment effect during the big hit game, it is notified that the game state after the big hit game will be in a probable change state. It may be set to do so, or it may be notified that a pending ream chan will occur.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (B (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 is projected as a new button effect (super protruding button effect). Is started, and when the protruding effect button 136 is pushed in this button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed and it becomes a jackpot. It is shown.

Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the second button is operated as compared with the case where the effect button 136 is operated and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed in the first button effect. It is shown that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the production is started.

138 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (A (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 138 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -2) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -2). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing during the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -4), a state during the operation valid period of the effect button 136 and immediately before the operation valid period elapses is shown.

After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached along with the characters "chance", which fuels expectations for a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -6), the judge's pre-judgment fanning effect is performed.

However, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is an abbreviation. In the center, the "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it is shown that the family crest character 224E has finished the effect of fanning the pre-judgment character, and the family crest character 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". The situation is shown. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the button effect by the effect button 136, the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI1b) is displayed, and then the effect is movable. It is shown that the combination of the out-of-order decorative patterns is displayed without the judgment effect of the big hit confirmation by the body (family crest character 224E).

FIGS. 138 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (B (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 138 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -4) are the same as those of FIGS. 138 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation valid period in the first button effect starts, when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, any effect is performed as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -5). The production of Super Reach continues without being disturbed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -6), the judge's pre-judgment fanning effect is performed.

However, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is an abbreviation. In the center, the "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it is shown that the family crest character 224E has finished the effect of fanning the pre-judgment character, and the family crest character 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". The situation is shown. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the operation response effect by the effect button 136 is not executed when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the button effect by the effect button 136. Then, after that, the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols is displayed without performing the judge effect of confirming the big hit by the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E).

139 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 139 (A (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 139 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -4). , It is shown that a new button production is started. This button effect is a deca button effect in which the deca button image 136aL is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect in FIGS. 139 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). It is another button production that is started with the opportunity. The deca button image 136aL is a button image that is larger in size than the button image 136a of the default aspect and is displayed over the entire display screen. It is suggested that when this big button effect is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). In this embodiment, the case where the super protruding button effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the big button effect is performed, but the case where the big button effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit. You may do so. In addition, when a big button effect is performed, it may be a big hit. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed at a position overlapping substantially the center of the deca button image 136aL, which may make it easier to pay attention to the remaining time display meter MT. .. The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -6) produces a judge effect of confirming the jackpot. It is shown how it will be started.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (A (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, a new button effect (deca button effect) in which the deca button image 136aL is displayed is started, and the effect button 136 in this button effect is started. When is operated, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed to show how the jackpot is achieved.

139 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 139 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 139 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -3) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4). , It is shown that the lever production is started. That is, it is shown that an effect that requires an operation of an operation means (effect lever 136V) different from the effect button 136 is being performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "extreme heat" are displayed, suggesting that the reliability is high. That is, this lever effect is a lever effect in which the lever image 136Va is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3). It is a production using another operation means that is started with this as an opportunity. This lever image 136V is an image imitating the effect lever 136V. It is suggested that when this lever effect is performed, it is easier to get a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). In the present embodiment, the case where the lever effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the super protruding button effect is performed, but the case where the super protruding button effect is performed is a big hit. It may be easy to become. In addition, when a lever button effect is performed, a big hit may be made without fail.

After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -6) produces a judge effect of confirming the jackpot. It is shown how it will be started.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (B (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the lever image 136Va is displayed and the lever effect using another operation means is newly started. When the effect lever 136V is operated, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed to show how the jackpot is achieved.

FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, the effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -2) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -2). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing during the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -4), a state during the operation valid period of the effect button 136 and immediately before the operation valid period elapses is shown.

After that, when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -5), the effect of super reach continues without any effect being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -6), the judge's pre-judgment fanning effect is performed.

In this production example, since it is a production pattern in which a judge production is scheduled to be performed, a judge production in which a big hit is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -7), is performed after the judge's pre-judgment production is performed. Is started.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -8) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (A (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, if the production button 136 is not operated in the first button production and the operation valid period has elapsed, the second button production is not started, but the production movable body (family crest accessory 224E). ) Is performed, and then a combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot is displayed to show that the jackpot may be a jackpot. In the case of this effect example, if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the first button effect, FIGS. 137 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5). The super protruding button effect shown in is started.

FIGS. 140 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, another effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 140 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -4) are the same as those of FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, after the operation valid period in the first button effect starts, when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5). In the decorative pattern display device 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with a close-up image of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a having a higher reliability of the jackpot than the weak cut-in is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -6), the judge's pre-judgment fanning effect is performed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "hot" is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

In this production example, since it is a production pattern in which a judge production is scheduled to be performed, a judge production in which a big hit is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -7), is performed after the judge's pre-judgment production is performed. Is started.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -8) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (B (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, if the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect and the operation valid period has elapsed, the second button effect is not started, but the cut-in image is displayed instead. The displayed effect is performed. After that, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the big hit is displayed to show that the big hit may be obtained. In the case of this effect example, if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the first button effect, FIGS. 137 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5). The super protruding button effect shown in is started. In this effect example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect, but the weak cut-in image CI1b May be displayed.

FIGS. 141 (A (1) -1) to 141 (A (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 141 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, another effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 141 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -4) are the same as those of FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, after the operation valid period in the first button effect starts, when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -5). It is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is full again and the button effect is restarted. That is, it is shown that the second button effect may be started when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the first button effect. At this time, the button image 136a, which is the default mode, is continuously displayed, and the characters "One more chance" are displayed at the upper part of the display screen to notify that the second button effect has been started. In addition, the characters "Make sure to press" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character, and the operation of the effect button 136 is strongly promoted. After that, the second operation validity period is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -6), as shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -7), the judgment effect of confirming the big hit is started. It is shown. As a result, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -8) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (A (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect and the operation valid period elapses, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT becomes full again and the button effect is restarted. It is shown. That is, it is shown that the second button effect may be started when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the first button effect. Then, when the production button 136 is operated in the second button production, a judge production is performed in which the production movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed and the jackpot becomes a jackpot. It is shown.

FIGS. 141 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (B (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 141 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -1), after developing into a super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device. At 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, the projecting button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. The protruding button image 136aP1 schematically represents a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, but unlike the super protruding button image 136aS, the mode in which the grandfather character is not added is considered. It is suggested that when this protruding button effect is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). In addition, the case where the super protruding button effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the protruding button effect is performed, but the case where the protruding button effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may be the same. Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "press" is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the projecting button effect is performed by the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 and the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when a protruding button effect is performed, a big hit may be made without fail. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is different from the case where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed or the case where the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed. When the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the protrusion button effect is started and the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started, but after the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started. , The protrusion button effect may be started, or the effect button 136 may be started after the protrusion button effect is started and the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started to be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and the effect button 136 in the projecting button effect in FIGS. 141 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3). This is another button effect that is started when is operated. Further, at this time, although the effect button 136 has been pushed once, it is in a state of protruding upward again, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. In this production example, when the production button 136 protrudes in the protrusion button production as the first button production, the production button 136 does not vibrate, and the production button 136 in the super protrusion button production as the second button production. The effect button 136 may vibrate when the Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "super heat" are displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated to start the effect button 136 at the timing when the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed, but the first button is displayed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the effect button 136 may be started to project, and then the super project button effect may be started, or the super project button effect may be started to start the super project button image. The protruding operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -6), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started. The state is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, instead of the button image 136 which is the default mode, the protruding button image 136aP1 in which the effect button is projected is displayed and the effect button 136 is projected. When a button effect is performed and the effect button 136 is pushed during the execution of this projecting button effect, a new button effect (super projecting button effect) in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 projects again is displayed. ) Is started, and when the protruding effect button 136 is pushed in this button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed and the jackpot becomes a jackpot. The situation is shown.

FIGS. 142 (A (1) -1) to 142 (A (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 142 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -1), after developing into a super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device. At 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, the super protrusion button effect in which the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "press" is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the super protrusion button effect is performed by the display of the super protrusion button image 136aS and the protrusion operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the super protruding button effect is performed, it may be made to be a big hit without fail.

Further, in the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image 136aS is started to be displayed, but the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. After that, the super protrusion button effect may be started, or the effect button 136 may be started after the super protrusion button effect is started and the super protrusion button image 136aS is started to be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super protrusion button effect in which the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed, and is an effect button in the super protrusion button effect in FIGS. 142 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 142 (A (3) -3). This is another button effect that is started when 136 is operated. That is, it is shown that the super protruding button effect is performed again as the second button effect in response to the operation of the operation button in the super protruding button effect as the first button effect. At this time, although the effect button 136 has been pushed in once, it is in a state of protruding upward again, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "super heat" are displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the super-projection button effect to super-project more than when the effect button 136 is operated to start the super-projection button effect during the execution of the project button effect. When the button effect is performed again, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the super protruding button effect to super. It is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode when the effect button 136 is operated and the super project button effect is started during the execution of the project button effect than when the project button effect is performed again. Alternatively, the effect button 136 may be operated during the execution of the super projecting button effect to perform the super projecting button effect again, or the effect button 136 may be operated during the execution of the projecting button effect to produce the super projecting button effect. The reliability of the jackpot may be the same as when is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated to start the effect button 136 at the timing when the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed, but the first button is displayed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the effect button 136 may be started to project, and then the super project button effect may be started, or the super project button effect may be started to start the super project button image. The protruding operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -6), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started. The state is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (A (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, instead of the button effect by the button image 136 which is the default mode, the super protrusion button effect in which the super protrusion button 136aS is displayed is performed, and the super protrusion button is performed. If there is a push operation of the effect button 136 during the execution of the effect, the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed and a new super protrusion button effect in which the effect button 136 protrudes again is started, and the effect button protruding in this button effect is started. When 136 is pushed in, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed to show how the jackpot becomes a jackpot.

FIGS. 142 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (B (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 142 (B (1) -1) to FIG. (B (3) -1) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -1), after developing into a super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device. At 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, the weakly projecting button effect in which the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. The weakly protruding button image 136aP2 schematically represents a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, but is said to be smaller in size than the protruding button image 136aP1. When this weakly protruding button effect is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the normal button effect is performed, but it suggests that the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the protruding button effect is performed. Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "press" is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the weak protrusion button effect is performed by the display of the weak protrusion button image 136aP2 and the protrusion operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when a weak protruding button effect is performed, a big hit may be made without fail. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is the same position as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed, but it may be displayed at a different position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the weak projecting button effect is started and the display of the weak projecting button image 136aP2 is started, but the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. After that, the weak protrusion button effect may be started, or the effect button 136 may be started after the weak protrusion button effect is started and the weak protrusion button image 136aP2 is started to be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and is an effect button in the weak projecting button effect in FIGS. 142 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3). This is another button effect that is started when 136 is operated. Further, at this time, although the effect button 136 has been pushed once, it is in a state of protruding upward again, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "super heat" are displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated to start the effect button 136 at the timing when the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed, but the first button is displayed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the effect button 136 may be started to project, and then the super project button effect may be started, or the super project button effect may be started to start the super project button image. The protruding operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is not vibrated in the weakly protruding button effect, and the effect button 136 is vibrated in the super projecting button effect. However, the effect button 136 is also vibrated in the weakly projected button effect. It may be performed, or the effect button 136 may not be vibrated in the super protruding button effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -6), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started. The state is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (B (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, instead of the button image 136 which is the default mode, the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 in which the effect button is projected is displayed and the effect button 136 is projected. A weakly protruding button effect is performed, and if the effect button 136 is pushed during the execution of this weakly projected button effect, the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 is projected again as a new button effect (super). (Protruding button effect) is started, and when the projecting effect button 136 is pushed in this button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is displayed. It is shown that it will be a big hit.

FIGS. 143 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (A (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 143 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -1), after developing into a super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device. At 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, the weakly projecting button effect in which the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. In the weakly protruding button effect in this effect example, the blue effect EFB in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 emits blue light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in blue. In that respect, the mode is different from the weakly protruding button effect shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2). Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "press" is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a projecting button effect in which the projecting button image 136aP1 is displayed, and the effect button 136 is displayed in the weak projecting button effect in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). It is another button effect that is started when it is operated. In the protruding button effect in this effect example, the red effect EFR in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the protruding button image 136aP1 emits red light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in red. , The mode is different from the protruding button effect shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2). Further, at this time, although the effect button 136 has been pushed once, it is in a state of protruding upward again, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "super heat" are displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated and the effect button 136 is started to be displayed at the timing when the effect button image 136aP1 is displayed in the first button effect. When the effect button 136 is operated in, the effect button 136 may be started to project, and then the project button effect may be started, or the project button effect is started and the project button image 136aP1 is displayed. After that, the protruding operation of the effect button 136 may be started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -6), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started. The state is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (A (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, a weakly projecting button image 136aP2 in which the effect button protrudes and emits light with a blue effect is displayed instead of the button image 136 which is the default mode. A weakly protruding button effect in which the button 136 protrudes is performed, and if the effect button 136 is pushed during the execution of this weakly projected button effect, the protruding button image 136aP1 that emits light with a red effect is displayed and the effect button 136 is displayed. A new button effect (protruding button effect) that protrudes again is started, and when the protruding effect button 136 is pushed in this button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a big hit. A combination of decorative patterns is displayed to show how a big hit is made.

FIGS. 143 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (B (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 143 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). An effect pattern different from the effect pattern, in which the button effect is not started even at the timing when the first button effect is started, and the button effect is started after a predetermined time is delayed. There is. It should be noted that FIGS. 143 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, after developing into a super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -1), the first button is displayed as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -2). It is shown that the button production is not started even when the production is started. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, creating a sense of incongruity that the first button effect is not started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -3), it is shown that the operation is valid if the first button effect is started, and a question is asked with "button" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. A mark is displayed, suggesting that the first button effect was not started.

After that, the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -4). This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed. The button effect was not started at the timing when the first button effect was started, but the button effect (super) after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is shown that the protruding button effect) may be started. At this time, the characters "Kitter" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the button effect has been longing for the start. In this effect example, the button effect is not started at the timing when the first button effect is started, and the button effect is started with a delay of a predetermined time, so that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In addition, as in this effect example, when the button effect is started with a delay, the super protruding button effect may be always started, and in this case, a big hit may be made.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -6), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started. The state is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (B (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the button effect is not started even when the first button effect is started, and the button effect (super protruding button effect) is performed at the timing when a predetermined time elapses (delays) thereafter. When the effect button 136, which is projected in this button effect, is pushed in, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed to make a jackpot. It is shown.

FIGS. 144 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 144 (A (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, when the button is operated in the first button effect and the second button effect is started, an animation in which the mode of the button image gradually changes is performed. It should be noted that FIGS. 144 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -4), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , The word "attention" is displayed and the button animation starts. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 144 (A (3) -4) to (A (3) -6), an animation in which the button image 136a gradually protrudes is displayed, and then the button image 136a protrudes. The state of transformation into the button image 136aP1 is shown. At this time, a red effect EFR that emits red light is displayed around the upper surface of the protruding button image 136aP1. In addition, the remaining time display meter MT is also shown to be full at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -6) as the gauge portion turns red and the remaining amount of the gauge increases. .. As a result, it is produced that the second button effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -7), the protruding button effect as the second button effect is started. This protruding button effect is another button effect that is started when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect in FIGS. 144 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). is there. In the protruding button effect in this effect example, the red effect EFR in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the protruding button image 136aP1 emits red light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in red. Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is in a protruding state, which encourages the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "press" is displayed, prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect to start the button animation, and the effect button 136 is projected at the timing when the button animation ends and the protrusion button effect as the second button effect starts. Although the operation is started, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 may be started at the timing when the button animation starts, or the effect button 136 may be projected after the protrusion button effect as the second button effect is started. The operation may be started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -8), as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -9), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started. The state is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -10) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (A (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the button animation is started and the button image is changed, and when the change of the button image is completed, the second button effect (protruding button) is performed. It is shown that the production) is about to begin. Then, when the protruding effect button 136 is pushed in the protruding button effect as the second button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is displayed. It is shown that it will be a big hit. The button animation described above is not limited to the one executed only in this production example, and may be executed in other production examples as well.

In the present embodiment, two states, a normal button state, which is the default state, and a button state, which is the default state, have been described as the button mode. For example, it is shown in FIG. 144 (B) (a). In contrast to the default state, as another state, the effect button 136 as shown in (b) of the figure (B) may be in a vibrating state, or the state of the figure (B). The effect button 136 as shown in (c) may vibrate and may be further rotated. That is, when the state of the effect button 136 shown in (a) of FIG. 144 (B) is set as the first state, the state of the effect button 136 shown in (b) of FIG. 144 (B) or the state of the effect button 136 (B) The state of the effect button 136 shown in (c) can be said to be the second state, and when the state of the effect button 136 shown in (b) of FIG. 144 (B) is set to the first state, the same figure. The state of the effect button 136 shown in (c) of (B) can also be referred to as the second state.

FIG. 145 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 145 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 145 ((1) -1), three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of these three special figures 1 are displayed. Are all displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 145 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because it is in a state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed. Is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device 212 The symbol variation display in is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -3), it is shown that the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that some kind of effect is started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -4) shows that the “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, has started. At this time, the characters "mini game" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the start of the mini game. When the "dice slot game" is started, an explanation display of "roll the dice with the button" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the operation valid period to roll the dice. It is shown that the mission is to make the combination of (designs) a specific combination, and when the mission is completed, the advance notice production according to the combination of the dice rolls is started. Specifically, in the production example shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -4), when the combination of the dice rolls of "4-5-6" is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. Is started, and when the combination of the dice rolls of "5-5-5" is displayed, the button icon is stocked to announce that the button effect will be started, and "1-1-1" is displayed. When the combination of dice rolls is displayed, it is a notification that it is a notice of intense heat. In addition, other types of dice roll combinations may be displayed and other types of notices (for example, hidden notices) may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -5), the variable display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below each of the three dice in the variable display. It is displayed, and the characters "3 consecutive hits" are displayed at the upper part of the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "start" is displayed to notify that the mini game has started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -7) is displaying fluctuations in the left column. The design of the dice is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed in the upper center of the display screen changes from "3 consecutive hits" to "2 consecutive hits", prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -9) is displaying fluctuations in the middle row. The design of the dice is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed in the upper center of the display screen changes from "double hit" to "last", prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 one more time.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -11) is displaying fluctuations in the right column. The dice symbol of is stopped and displayed, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice rolls of "5-5-5" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -12), the characters "Button stock confirmed!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the button icon BTN and the button icon BTN are displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. The characters and the characters "waiting" are displayed, and a notice is given that the button effect will be started at least once.

After that, when the mini-game ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -13) enlarges the decorative symbol and moves and displays it in the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 145 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 145 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -2), the characters "Activate!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button effect is started. After that, as shown in FIGS. 145 ((3) -3) to (3) -4), a button effect start animation is displayed in which the button icon BTN expands and moves to the center of the display screen. Then, when the button effect start animation is completed as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -4), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -5). At the same time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and it is notified that the advance notice by the button effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. At this time, the character "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 uses the weak cut-in image CI1b. Is displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached along with the characters "chance", which fuels expectations for a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -8), the family crest accessory 224E rises and the upper end portion overlaps with the decorative pattern display device 208, and at the same time, it moves up and down before the judge to incite whether or not it becomes a big hit. The character fanning production is performed.

However, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially in the center. Is displayed with "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and is notified that the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it is shown that the family crest character 224E has finished the effect of fanning the pre-judgment character, and the family crest character 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 145 ((4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". It is shown. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 145 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the production button 136, the button icons foretelling that the button production is performed are stocked, and then one stocked button icon is digested. It is shown that the button effect is performed.

FIG. 146 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect pattern of the mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 146 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 146 ((1) -1), three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of these three special figures 1 are displayed. Are all displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 145 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because it is in a state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed. Is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

Further, in this production example, the characters "x1" and "waiting" are displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM together with the button icon BTN, and it is notified that the button production will be started at least once. To. That is, it is shown that the button icon BTN has been stocked before the previous symbol change display, and the pre-reading notice has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device 212 The symbol variation display in is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -3), it is shown that the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4) shows that the “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, has started. When the "dice slot game" is started, an explanation display of "roll the dice with the button" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the operation valid period to roll the dice. It is shown that the mission is to make the combination of (designs) a specific combination, and when the mission is completed, the advance notice production according to the combination of the dice rolls is started. Specifically, in the production example shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4), when the combination of the dice rolls of "4-5-6" is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. Is started, and when the combination of the dice rolls of "5-5-5" is displayed, the button icon is stocked to announce that the button effect will be started, and "1-1-1" is displayed. When the combination of dice rolls is displayed, it is a notification that it is a notice of intense heat. In addition, other types of dice roll combinations may be displayed and other types of notices (for example, hidden notices) may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -5), the variable display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below each of the three dice in the variable display. It is displayed, and the characters "3 consecutive hits" are displayed at the upper part of the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -7) is displaying fluctuations in the left column. The design of the dice is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed in the upper center of the display screen changes from "3 consecutive hits" to "2 consecutive hits", prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -9) is displaying fluctuations in the middle row. The design of the dice is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed in the upper center of the display screen changes from "double hit" to "last", prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 one more time.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -11) is displaying fluctuations in the right column. The dice symbol of is stopped and displayed, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice rolls of "5-5-5" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -12), the characters "Button stock confirmed!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the button icon BTN displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM is 1. The display of the character "x1" indicating that the item is in stock changes to "x2", and a notice is given that the button effect will be started at least twice.

After that, when the mini-game ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -13) enlarges the decorative symbol and moves and displays it in the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 146 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -2), the characters "Activate!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and "x2" indicating the number of stocks of the button icon BTN. The character display of "" changes to "x1", and it is notified that one button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is started. After that, as shown in FIGS. 146 ((3) -3) to (3) -4), a button effect start animation is displayed in which the button icon BTN expands and moves to the center of the display screen. Then, when the button effect start animation is completed as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -4), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -5). At the same time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and it is notified that the advance notice by the button effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. At this time, the characters "press" are displayed above the button image 136a, prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -7), instead of displaying the cut-in image, a new button effect is produced. Is shown to be started. This button effect is a deca button effect in which the deca button image 136aL is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect in FIGS. 146 ((3) -5) to (A (3) -6). It is another button production that starts as an opportunity. At this time, the light emitting mode of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the effect button 136 to emit light changes. For example, what was emitted in blue in the first button effect is red when the second button effect is started. It emits light.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -9) starts the judge effect of confirming the big hit. The state is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern display shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -10) is displayed. In the device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "x1" and "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still in stock. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". ing. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the effect EF1 is displayed so as to cover the entire button icon BTN, and it is shown that the button icon BTN is erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 146 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the stock of the button icon BTN is deleted when it remains, but the stock of the button icon BTN is not erased and remains displayed. May be good. Further, the timing at which the button icon BTN is deleted is not limited to the one performed during the shaking fluctuation as described above, and may be, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game or after the jackpot game is completed.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the production button 136, the button icon BTN for notifying that the button production is performed is stocked, and then one stocked button icon BTN is stocked. It is shown that it is digested and the button production is performed. Further, in this effect example, a new button effect (deca button effect) is started by operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the effect movable body. A judge effect is performed in which (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols for the big hit is displayed to show how the big hit is made. Further, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but it is shown that only one button icon BTN is digested. The button icon BTN may be digested one by one each time the button effect is performed.

FIG. 147 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect pattern of the mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 147 ((1) -1) to ((3) -6) are the same as those of FIGS. 146 ((1) -1) to ((3) -6). Omit. Further, as shown in FIG. 147 ((1) -1), also in this production example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon spans a plurality of symbol variation displays. It is shown that the BTN stock display is being performed.

In this production example, when the production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -6), a new button production is started as shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -7). It is shown. This button effect is a super protrusion button effect in which the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 147 ((3) -5) to (3) -6). It is another button production that starts with that as an opportunity. It is suggested that when this super protruding button effect is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the normal button effect or the big button effect is performed. Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the super protrusion button effect is performed by the display of the super protrusion button image 136aS and the protrusion operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the super protruding button effect is performed, it may be made to be a big hit without fail.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated to start the effect button 136 at the timing when the super protrusion button image 136aS is displayed, but the first button is displayed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the effect button 136 may be started to project, and then the super project button effect may be started, or the super project button effect may be started to start the super project button image. The protruding operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -8), as shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -9), the judgment effect of confirming the big hit is started. It is shown. In this judge production, the family crest accessory 224E rises to a position where it overlaps the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light guide plate IL emits light to imitate the face of the lord. The production that appears on top of each other is performed. As a result, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern display shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -10) is displayed. In the device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "x1" and "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still in stock. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 ((4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". ing. Further, in this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased, and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In this production example, it is digested in the symbol variation display after the jackpot game is completed. That is, it can be said that a pre-reading notice is given for the symbol variation display that is started after the big hit game. After that, as shown in FIG. 147 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the production button 136, the button icon BTN for notifying that the button production is performed is stocked, and then one stocked button icon BTN is stocked. It is shown that it is digested and the button production is performed. Further, in this effect example, a new button effect (super protruding button effect) is started by operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the effect is produced. A judge effect is performed in which the movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot is displayed to show how the jackpot becomes a jackpot. Further, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but it is shown that only one button icon BTN is digested.

FIG. 148 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect pattern of the mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 148 ((1) -1) to ((1) -3) are the same as those of FIGS. 146 ((1) -1) to ((1) -3). Omit. Further, as shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -1), also in this production example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon spans a plurality of symbol variation displays. It is shown that the stock display of BTN is performed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -4) shows that a “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, has been started. In the production example shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -4), when the combination of the dice rolls of "4-5-6" is displayed, the pre-reading notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is started, and " When the combination of the dice rolls of "5-5-5" is displayed, the button icons are stocked to announce that the button effect will be started, and the dice rolls of "1-1-1" are rolled. When the combination is displayed, it suggests that some notice will start.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -5), the variable display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below each of the three dice in the variable display. It is displayed, and the characters "3 consecutive hits" are displayed at the upper part of the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -7) is displaying fluctuations in the left column. The design of the dice is stopped and displayed, and "1" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed in the upper center of the display screen changes from "3 consecutive hits" to "2 consecutive hits", prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -9) is displaying variations in the middle row. The design of the dice is stopped and displayed, and "1" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed in the upper center of the display screen changes from "double hit" to "last", prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 one more time.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -11) is displaying fluctuations in the right column. The dice symbol of is stopped and displayed, "1" is displayed, and the combination of the dice rolls of "1-1-1" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -12), the characters "Big button stock confirmed!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the button in the default mode displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. A protruding button icon BTP is displayed above the icon BTN, and a notice is given that the protruding button effect or the super projecting button effect will be started.

After that, when the mini-game ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -13) enlarges the decorative symbol and moves and displays it in the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 148 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In this production example, the stocked protruding button icon BTP is overlapped with the decorative symbol, which makes it more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the decorative symbol. Here, the protruding button icon BTP may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -2), it is shown that the super reach is continuing, but in this production example, the button icon BTN is digested and the button production is performed. There is no notification that it will be started. After that, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -3), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed without digesting the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP, and is below the button image 136a. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed on the screen, and the button effect is started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. At this time, the characters "press" are displayed above the button image 136a, prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, when the effect button 136 was operated at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -5), it was displayed in the vicinity of the protruding button icon BTP. The display of "x1" is changed to the character of "activate", and it is notified that the protruding button icon BTP is digested. After that, as shown in FIGS. 148 ((3) -6) to (3) -7), the button effect start animation is displayed in which the protruding button icon BTP moves to the center of the display screen while expanding. At this time, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed below the button image 136a becomes "0", and the display is also performed to move to the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, after the protruding button icon BTP becomes the protruding button image 136aP1 as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -7), the character of the grandfather or "press" as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -8). The character "ja" is added and the image changes to the super protruding button image 136aS, and it is notified that the super protruding button effect as a new button effect has been started. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes. The timing at which the effect button 136 protrudes may be the timing at which the display of the button effect start animation is completed, the timing before the display of the button effect start animation starts, or the button effect start. It may be the timing after the display of the animation is started and before it is completed, or it may be the timing when the super protruding button image 136aS is changed after the display of the button effect start animation is completed. The timing may be after the change to the protruding button image 136aS. It should be noted that the effect start animation may or may not be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -10) starts the judge effect of confirming the big hit. It is shown how it is done.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern display shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -11) is displayed. In the device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "x1" and "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still in stock. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". ing. Further, in this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased, and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In this production example, it is digested in the symbol variation display after the jackpot game is completed. That is, it can be said that a pre-reading notice is given for the symbol variation display that is started after the big hit game. After that, as shown in FIG. 148 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the production button 136, the protrusion button icon BTP foretelling that the protrusion button effect or the super protrusion button effect is performed is stocked, and then the button icon is displayed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect that is started without being digested, it is shown that the stocked protruding button icon BTP is digested and a new button effect (super protruding button effect) is performed. ing. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed to show how the jackpot becomes a jackpot. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but it is shown that only the protruding button icon BTP among the protruding button icon BTP and the button icon BTN is digested.

FIG. 149 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect pattern of the mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 149 ((1) -1) to ((3) -1) are the same as those of FIGS. 148 ((1) -1) to ((3) -1). Omit. Further, as shown in FIG. 149 ((1) -1), also in this production example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon spans a plurality of symbol variation displays. It is shown that the stock display of BTN is performed.

As shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -2), after the super reach is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "x1" displayed in the vicinity of the button icon BTN is "activated". It changes to a character, and it is notified that the button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is started. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -3), the button icon BTN is deleted and the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed without executing the button effect start animation. At the same time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the button effect is started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. At this time, the character "press" is displayed above the button image 136a, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 149 ((3) -4) to ((3) -10) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 149 ((3) -4) to ((3) -10) are shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -10), except that the button icon BTN is not displayed in stock. ) -4) to the same as the effects shown in the figure ((3) -10), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the judge effect shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -10) is completed, the light emission from the light guide plate IL is completed, the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -11), the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. "Decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 ((4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". ing. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the production button 136, the protrusion button icon BTP foretelling that the protrusion button effect or the super protrusion button effect is performed is stocked, and then the button icon is displayed. One BTN is digested, and the first button effect is started without performing the button effect start animation. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the stocked protruding button icon BTP is digested, the button effect start animation is performed, and then a new button effect (super protruding button effect) is performed. .. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed to show how the jackpot becomes a jackpot. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, and the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP are digested and executed, respectively. Further, in this effect example, at the start of the first button effect that is started by digesting the button icon BTN, the button effect start animation is not executed, and the protruding button icon BTP is digested and started. At the start of the second button effect, it is shown that the button effect start animation is executed. As a result, it may be possible to draw attention to a more promising effect among the button effects executed a plurality of times. In this production example, the button effect start animation by the button icon BTN may be performed when the first button effect is started.

FIG. 150 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect pattern of the mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 150 ((1) -1) to ((2) -1) are the same as those of FIGS. 148 ((1) -1) to ((2) -1). Omit. Further, as shown in FIG. 150 ((1) -1), also in this production example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon spans a plurality of symbol variation displays. It is shown that the BTN stock display is being performed.

After that, after the reach effect was started as shown in FIG. 150 ((2) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((2) -2) gave a notice of the weak sabohani group. It is shown that it is. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, indicating that the timer notice is started. On the timer notice display TM1, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and it is announced that a certain notice effect will be started after 30 seconds.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "28:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -2), it is shown that the super reach is continuing, but in this production example, the button icon BTN is digested and the button production is started. No notification is given. After that, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -3), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed without digesting the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP, and is below the button image 136a. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed on the screen, and the button effect is started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. At this time, the characters "press" are displayed above the button image 136a, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "17:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -3).

After that, when the effect button 136 was operated at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -5), it was displayed in the vicinity of the protruding button icon BTP. The display of "x1" is changed to the character of "activate", and it is notified that the protruding button icon BTP is digested. After that, as shown in FIGS. 150 ((3) -6) to (3) -7), the button effect start animation is displayed in which the protruding button icon BTP is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. At this time, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed below the button image 136a becomes "0", and the display is also performed to move to the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, after the protruding button icon BTP becomes the protruding button image 136aL as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -7), the grandfather character is added as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -8). The image changes to the super protruding button image 136aS, and it is notified that the super protruding button effect as a new button effect has been started. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes. The timing at which the effect button 136 protrudes may be the timing at which the display of the button effect start animation is completed, the timing before the display of the button effect start animation starts, or the timing at which the button effect start animation starts. It may be the timing after the display of the animation is started and before the display is completed, or the timing may be changed to the super protruding button image 136aS after the display of the button effect start animation is completed, or the super. It may be the timing after the change to the protruding button image 136aS, or it may be the timing when the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and becomes “00:00”. Further, in this effect example, the super protruding button effect was started as the second button effect, but the operation validity period was not started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -8), "04:17" is displayed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer display being counted down in the timer notice display TM1, the effect button 136 in the super protruding button effect, which is the second button effect, can be operated. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -9), the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer notice is moved from the upper left corner to the center of the display screen for the second time. It is suggested that it corresponds to the button effect of. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is also continued, and "02:26" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -9). As a result, it may be easy to grasp the timing when a certain advance notice effect is started.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -10) and "0:00" is displayed on the timer display, it is below the super protruding button image 136aS. The characters "press" are added, and the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the super-protruding button effect as the second button effect is started. The timer notice display TM1 is subsequently erased.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -11), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -12) starts the judge effect of confirming the big hit. It is shown how it is done.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern display shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -13) is displayed. In the device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "x1" and "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still in stock. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". ing. Further, in this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased, and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In this production example, it is digested in the symbol variation display after the jackpot game is completed. That is, it can be said that a pre-reading notice is given for the symbol variation display that is started after the big hit game. After that, as shown in FIG. 150 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the mini-game being performed by operating the production button 136, the protrusion button icon BTP foretelling that the protrusion button effect or the super protrusion button effect is performed is stocked, and further, the reach effect is achieved. When is started, a timer notice is given. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect that is started without the button icon being digested, the stocked protruding button icon BTP is digested and a new button effect (super protruding button effect) is performed. The situation is shown. After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the effect button 136 in the second button effect can be operated. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) operates, and then a combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is displayed to show how the jackpot becomes a jackpot. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but it is shown that only the protruding button icon BTP among the protruding button icon BTP and the button icon BTN is digested.

FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to 151 (A (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of a selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1) are the same as those of FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -1), after the super reach effect is started, the selection effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -2). The situation is shown. When the selection effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect explanation display MS1 stating "Emergency notification! The final judge effect is determined by the button effect" to notify that the selection effect is started. The effect explanation display MS1 overlaps with the reduced decorative pattern.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -3) displays the option display SL1. In the option display SL1, the button image 136a and the protruding button image 136aP1 in the default mode are displayed side by side, and the button image 136a is surrounded by the cursor CSL represented by the blue broken line in a square shape. It is done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -4), the option display SL1 displays a mode in which the protruding button image 136aP is surrounded by the cursor CSL. At this time, the display mode of the cursor CSL changes to a red broken line, and the characters "heat" are displayed on the left and right, and as a result of the selection effect, the protruding button is more than the case where the button image 136a is selected. It has been reported that when the image 136aP1 is selected, it is more likely to be a big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -5), it is shown that the button operation display BT1 is displayed so as to overlap the option display SL1. In the button operation display BT1, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the characters “press!” Are displayed below the remaining time display meter MT, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. In this selection effect, either the button image 163a or the protruding button image 137aP1 in the option display SL1 is selected by operating the effect button 136.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -6) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -7) is displayed. In the device 208, the button operation display BT1 is erased, and in the option display SL1, the cursor CSL surrounds the protruding button image 136aP1 and notifies that the protruding button image 136aP1 is selected. That is, it is shown that the protrusion button effect is foretold to start. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the selection production is performed as the first button production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -8), when the option display SL1 is erased and the selection effect is completed, the process returns to the super reach effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -9), the button effect is started. In this effect example, as a button effect, a projecting button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 selected in the selection effect is displayed is started. In this protruding button effect, the red effect EFR in which the periphery of the upper surface of the protruding button image 136aP1 is emitted in red is displayed, and the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is displayed. It is represented in red. Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. In addition, the characters "super heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the projecting button effect is performed by the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 and the projecting operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the protruding button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 selected in the selection effect as the first button effect is displayed is performed as the second button effect. When this protruding button effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the protrusion button effect is started and the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started, but after the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started. , The protrusion button effect may be started, or the effect button 136 may be started after the protrusion button effect is started and the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started to be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -10), as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -11), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started. The state is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -12) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and the button effect using the button image selected in the selection effect is performed as the second button effect. There is.

The button image that can be selected by the option display SL1 displayed in the selection effect in the present embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and an option display SL1 of a type different from the above-mentioned one may be displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 151 (I), a selection effect may be performed in which the option display SL1 including the button image 136a and the deca button 136aL of the default mode is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 151 (II). A selection effect may be performed in which the option display SL1 including the button image 136a and the lever image 136V in the default mode is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 151 (III), the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed. A selection effect may be performed in which the option display SL1 for selecting from three or more button images including the protruding button image 136aP1 and the lever image 136Va is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 151 (IV), the default A display mode of at least the remaining time display meter including the remaining time display meter MT and the button image 136a of the embodiment and the remaining time display meter MTa and the deca button image 136aL showing a gauge in which an image imitating the face of the chief is arranged. A selection effect may be performed in which the option display SL1 is displayed so that the reliability of the jackpot is different.

FIGS. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to 151 (A (4) -2). In the effect pattern in which the effect shown is scheduled to be executed, the effect to be executed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect is shown. Here, FIGS. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (3) -5) are the same as those of FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -5). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -6), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is in progress, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing. The situation is shown.

After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -7) displays the effect EF2 so as to overlap the option display SL1. It is shown that the selection effect is completed and the option display SL1 is deleted without selecting any of the button images due to the time-out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -8), when the option display SL1 is erased and the selection effect is completed, the process returns to the super reach effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -9), the button effect is started. In this effect example, as a button effect, a normal button effect in which the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed is started, and the character "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. Is done. That is, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect, the projecting button image 136aP1 is selected and the projecting button effect is scheduled to be started, but the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect. However, since none of the button images was selected, it is shown that the normal button effect, which is less reliable than the protruding button effect, is started. Even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect and no button image is selected, the effect pattern in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is selected is executed when the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect. If this is the case, the protruding button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed may be started as the second button effect as scheduled. As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect as the first button effect, the projecting button effect is not started and is more than the projecting button effect. It is shown that the button production with low jackpot reliability is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -10), the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started as shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -11). The situation is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -12) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect, the button effect with low jackpot reliability is low. It is shown that (normal button effect in which the default button image 136a is displayed) is performed as the second button effect.

FIGS. 152 (C (1) -1) to 153 (C (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 152 (C (1) -1) to 153 (C (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to 151 (A (4) -2). In the effect pattern in which the effect shown is scheduled to be executed, another effect example to be executed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect is shown. Here, FIGS. 152 (C (1) -1) to FIG. (C (3) -8) are the same as those of FIGS. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (3) -8). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

After the option display SL1 is erased, the selection effect ends, and the super reach effect is restored, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -9) does not start the button effect and makes a strong cut-in. The image CI1a is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a with high jackpot reliability is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect, the projecting button image 136aP1 is selected and the projecting button effect is scheduled to be started, but the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect. Since none of the button images was selected, the second button effect is not started, and the cut-in image is displayed instead. Even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect and no button image is selected, the effect pattern in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is selected is executed when the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect. If this is the case, the protruding button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed may be started as the second button effect as scheduled. As described above, in this production example, if the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect as the first button effect, the button effect is not started and another notice effect ( It is shown that the display of the cut-in image) is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -10), the judge's pre-judgment fanning effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -11), the judgment effect of confirming the big hit is started.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 153 (C (3) -12) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (C (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (C (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect, the second button effect is started. Instead, it is shown that another notice effect (display of a cut-in image) is performed.

FIGS. 153 (D (1) -1) to FIG. 153 (D (4) -2) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of a continuous striking operation effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 153 (D (1) -1) to (D (3) -2) are the same as those of FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to (D (3) -2). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

After the effect explanation display MS1 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) is displayed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3), the effect lever 136V is displayed instead of the option display SL1. A meter image VC that imitates the shape of the above and the icon TDR of the face of the bancho are displayed at the foot of the image, and the characters "Raise the meter with repeated hits!" Are displayed on the right side of the display screen. Has been informed that has started. The meter image VC is composed of 10 steps of meters, three meters from the bottom are displayed in blue, three meters displayed above the blue meter are displayed in green, and above the green meter. The three meters displayed are displayed in red. Further, above the red meter, the final point formed in a hexagonal shape and represented by the letter "V" is displayed. In this continuous striking operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the bancho increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136, and the reliability of the jackpot is suggested by the position of the icon TDR of the face of the bancho when the operation valid period has elapsed. Will be done. That is, the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the Bancho's face icon TDR is on the green meter than when it is on the blue meter, and it is on the red meter than when it is on the green meter. The case is more reliable for big hits. Further, when the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho reaches the final point of the meter image VC, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the effect explanation display MS1 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) is not a display of the explanation of the selection effect but a display of the explanation of the continuous striking operation effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -4), the characters "READY" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the continuous hit operation reception has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -5), the remaining time display meter MT was displayed and the characters "GO" were displayed, and the acceptance of the repeated hitting operation was started. It has been notified. The player who sees this may try to raise the icon TDR of the face of the bancho to a more reliable meter position by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -6), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, and it is shown that the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is located on the blue meter. ing. The operation validity period is ongoing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being accepted continuously.

FIG. 153 (D (3) -7) shows how the operation valid period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed to indicate "0", and the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is shown to be located on the red meter. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -8), the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho was enlarged and displayed to notify that the position was confirmed, and the red meter in the meter image VC was supported. The words "It's intense heat!" Are displayed, suggesting that a highly reliable notice production will start.

After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -9), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous striking operation effect is completed, the process returns to the super reach effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -10), the lever image 136Va is displayed to show that the lever effect with high reliability of the jackpot is started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "super heat" are displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability is high, and the characters "pull the lever!" Are displayed on the left side of the display screen. The operation of the lever 136V is urged. In this production example, as the second button production, a lever production in which the lever image 136Va is displayed corresponding to the arrival of the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the continuous hit operation production reaching the red meter in the meter image VC is started. To. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the continuous striking operation effect as the first button effect, the lever effect is performed as the second button effect according to the position where the icon TDR of the face of the bancho has reached. It is shown that it is. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit. Further, instead of the lever effect, a button effect in which a button image is displayed (for example, a super protruding button effect, a protruding button effect, etc.) may be started.

After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -11), as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -12), the judgment effect of confirming the big hit is started. It is shown.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -13) is displayed. On the display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (4) -1), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, the continuous striking operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous striking operation in the continuous striking operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC reaches the position. It is shown that the lever effect is started as the second button effect. In other words, it can be said that the lever effect is started when the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC reaches the red meter in the continuous hit operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous striking operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. It can also be said that there is.

Next, another effect pattern of the continuous striking operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4') to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2'). The effects shown in FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4') to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2') show another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). The effects shown in FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4') to (D (3) -6') are shown in FIGS. 153 (D (3) -4) to (D (3) -6'). ) Is the same as the effect shown in), so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 154 (D (3) -7') shows how the operation valid period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed to indicate "0", and the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is shown to be located on the green meter. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -8'), the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho was enlarged and displayed to notify that the position was confirmed, and it corresponded to the green meter in the meter image VC. , "Chance" is displayed, and the jackpot reliability is higher than when the Bancho's face icon TDR is stopped on the blue meter, but the jackpot is higher than when the Bancho's face icon TDR is stopped on the red meter. It is suggested that a notice production with low reliability will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -9'), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous striking operation effect is completed, the process returns to the super reach effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -10'), the deca button image 136aL is displayed and the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed although the reliability is lower than that of the lever effect. It is shown that the big button production, which is more reliable than the button production, is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "chance" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability is high. In this effect example, as the second button effect, a deca button effect is started in which the deca button image 136aL is displayed in response to the fact that the icon TDR of the face of the bancho reaches the green meter in the meter image VC in the continuous striking operation effect. To. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the continuous hit operation production as the first button production, the big button production is performed as the second button production according to the position where the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho has reached. It is shown that it is. When this big button effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -11'), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -12') is a judge who confirms the big hit. It is shown that the production is starting.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decoration shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -13') is shown. In the symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. Then, it is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -1'), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". It is shown. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -2'), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, the continuous striking operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous striking operation in the continuous striking operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC reaches the position. It is shown that the big button effect is started as the second button effect. In other words, it can be said that the deca button effect is started when the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC reaches the green meter in the continuous hit operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous striking operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect button 136) used in the deca button effect as the second button effect are the same. In this case, the mode of the effect button 136 is different between the first button effect (normal mode) and the second button effect (protruding mode or vibrating mode). It may be different.

Next, another effect pattern of the continuous striking operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4 ″) to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ″). The effect shown in FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4'') to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2'') shows another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). .. The effects shown in FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4'') to (D (3) -6'') are shown in FIGS. 153 (D (3) -4) to (D (3)). Since it is the same as the effect shown in -6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 154 (D (3) -7 ″) shows how the operation valid period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed to indicate "0", and the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is located on the blue meter because the number of operations of the effect button is small. It is shown that it is doing. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -8''), the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is enlarged and displayed to notify that the position is confirmed, and it corresponds to the blue meter in the meter image VC. However, the characters "How are you?" Are displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that a notice production with a low jackpot reliability will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -9 ″), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous striking operation effect is completed, the process returns to the super reach effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -10 ″), the lever image 136Va is displayed to show that the lever effect with high reliability of the jackpot is started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "super heat" are displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability is high, and the characters "pull the lever!" Are displayed on the left side of the display screen. The operation of the lever 136V is urged. In this production example, as the second button production, the lever production in which the lever image 136Va is displayed is started even though the icon TDR of the face of the chief is the blue meter in the meter image VC in the continuous striking operation production. The situation is shown. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the continuous striking operation production as the first button production, the lever production, which is a production different from the production corresponding to the position where the icon TDR of the face of the bancho has reached, is the second time. It is shown that the so-called law breaking effect, which is performed as a button effect of, is being performed. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit. Further, instead of the lever effect, a button effect in which the button image is displayed (for example, a super protruding button effect, a protruding button effect, a button effect in which the default button image 136a is displayed, etc.) may be started.

After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -11''), as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -12''), a judge effect of confirming the jackpot is produced. It is shown how it will be started.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, it is shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -13''). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -1''), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". It is shown. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ″), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, the continuous striking operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous striking operation in the continuous striking operation effect, the position where the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC has reached does not correspond. It is shown that the lever effect is started as the second button effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous striking operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. It can also be said that there is. As described above, the effect of breaking the law may be performed in advance, or the effect according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be started as the second button effect, for example. When the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is a blue meter, the normal button effect in which the button image 136a of the default mode is displayed may be performed as the second button effect.

Next, another effect pattern of the continuous striking operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″). The effects shown in FIGS. 155 (D (3) -4''') to (D (4) -2''') show another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). ing. In this production example, the meter image VC shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) is provided with any pattern as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4'''). It is said that there is no plain display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″), the characters “READY” are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the continuous hit operation reception has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -5'''), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed and the character "GO" is displayed, and the acceptance of the repeated hit operation is started. It has been notified that The player who sees this may be able to improve the motivation to reach the final point of the icon TDR of the face of the chief by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -6'''), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is located at the lower position of the meter image VC. It is shown that it is. When the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is in the lower position of the meter image VC, the meter portion corresponding to the position turns blue. The operation validity period is ongoing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being accepted continuously.

At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -7'''), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the face of the chief is approaching the upper position of the meter image VC. It is shown. When the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is approaching the upper position of the meter image VC, the meter part of the middle position turns green corresponding to the position, and the meter where the icon TDR of the face of the bancho at the upper position has reached. The part turns red. The operation validity period is ongoing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being accepted continuously.

At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -8'''), the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times before the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses, and the icon TDR of the face of the chief is reached to the final point. It is shown how it was done. At this time, the meter image VC notifies that all the meter portions are colored and the continuous striking operation effect is successful.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -9 ″), the lever icon VLV is stocked in the upper right portion of the navigation character YM, and it is announced that the lever effect will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -10 ″), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous striking operation effect is completed, the process returns to the super reach effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -11 ″), the lever image 136Va is displayed to show that the lever effect with high reliability of the jackpot is started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "super heat" are displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability is high, and the characters "pull the lever!" Are displayed on the left side of the display screen. The operation of the lever 136V is urged. In this production example, as the second button production, the lever image 136Va is displayed corresponding to the fact that the icon TDR of the face of the chief is reached to the final point in the meter image VC and the lever icon VLV is stocked in the continuous striking operation production. The lever production to be performed is started. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the continuous striking operation effect as the first button effect, the lever effect is performed as the second button effect according to the position where the icon TDR of the face of the bancho has reached. It is shown that it is. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -12''), the judge who confirms the jackpot is confirmed as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -13''). It is shown that the production is starting.

Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, it is shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -13'''). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol Is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, congratulating the big hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -1'''), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ""), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this way, in this production example, the continuous striking operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous striking operation in the continuous striking operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC has reached the final point. Correspondingly, it is shown that the lever effect is started as the second button effect. In other words, it can be said that it is suggested that the lever effect is started when the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC reaches the final point in the continuous hit operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous striking operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. It can also be said that there is.

Next, another effect pattern of the continuous striking operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″). The effect shown in FIGS. 155 (D (3) -4'''') to (D (4) -2'''') is another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). Is shown. In this production example, the meter image VC shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) is provided with any pattern as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4''''). It is said to be a plain display mode. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 155 (D (3) -4'''') to (D (3) -7'''') are shown in FIGS. 155 (D (3) -4'''') to. Since it is the same as the effect shown in the figure (D (3) -7'''), the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -8''''), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the face of the chief is at the upper end of the upper position of the meter image VC. The state of approaching is shown. When the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is approaching the upper end of the upper position of the meter image VC, the meter part of the middle position turns green corresponding to the position, and the icon TDR of the face of the bancho at the upper position reaches. The meter part turns red. The operation validity period is ongoing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being accepted continuously.

After that, when the operation validity period of the effect button 136 elapses before the icon TDR of the Bancho's face reaches the final point, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The icon TDR of the face of the bancho slides down to the foot of the meter image VC, and the word "sorry" is displayed to notify that the continuous hit operation production has failed. As a result, no notice icons such as lever icons and button icons are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -10 ″ ″), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous striking operation effect is completed, the process returns to the super reach effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -11''''), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed, and the remaining time display meter is displayed below the button image 136a. MT is displayed to notify that the notice by the normal button effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. At this time, the character "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the normal button effect as the second button effect is started instead of the lever effect in response to the failure of the continuous striking operation effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -12''''), the jackpot is confirmed as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -13''''). The judge production of is not started, the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy, and the defeated screen is displayed, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol Is displayed, and it is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2". In this production example, the screen that was defeated without the start of the judge's pre-judgment fanning effect by the family crest character 224E was displayed, but the screen that was defeated after the judge's pre-judgment fanning effect was performed. It may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -1''''), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". It shows how it is being done. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -2''''), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". .. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, the continuous striking operation effect was performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous striking operation in the continuous striking operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC did not reach the final point. Accordingly, it is shown that the button effect (normal button effect) in which the button image 136a of the default mode is displayed is started as the second button effect. In other words, it can be said that the lever effect is not started because the icon TDR of the face of the chief in the meter image VC does not reach the final point in the continuous hit operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous striking operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are the same. It has become. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the lever icon and the button icon as a reward for success are not displayed because the continuous hit operation production has failed.

FIGS. 156 (E (4) -2) to FIG. 156 (E (5) -18) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of a jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), so that the electric chew is difficult to open and the special figure 2 starts. This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the mouth 232.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is held. The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -1), it is shown that the jackpot start effect is being performed. When the jackpot start production is started, the character MCK of Machiko-sensei (wedding Machiko-sensei) in a wedding dress will perform a production to celebrate the jackpot with four copandas. In addition, when the jackpot start effect starts, a right-handed display that encourages the player to hit right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 156 (E (5) -2) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this production example, a production that introduces the production during the jackpot game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "Introduction of the production from the next round" are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and the fact is notified.

FIG. 156 (E (5) -3) shows the transition to the second round. In the second round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "When appears ..." together with the Sabohani icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -4). Along with the demonstration display of the strong Sabohani group notice, the words "Expect the group notice!" Will be displayed on top of this, and the Sabohani group notice will be explained.

FIG. 156 (E (5) -5) shows the transition to the third round. In the third round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." along with the bomb icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -6). Along with the demo display of the timer notice effect, the characters "Timer notice will be activated" will be displayed to explain the timer notice effect.

FIG. 156 (E (5) -7) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this production example, when moving to the 4th round, the character KGG of the god with a cane appears, and the characters "Urgent notice!" And "Win with the button PUSH !!" are displayed, which is one of the mini games. It is shown that a certain "dice game" has started. In this dice game, by operating the effect button 136 within the operation valid period after the variable display of one dice starts, the dice rolls are displayed, and the jackpot game is performed according to the displayed dice rolls. An effect that suggests the later game state is performed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -8) displays the explanation of the dice game, and in the production example shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -8), "4". When the dice roll of "5" is displayed, it is notified that the game state after the big hit game is 100 times shorter (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), and the dice roll of "5" is displayed. Then, it is notified that the game state after the big hit game is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability, normal figure high probability), and when the dice roll of "6" is displayed, the game state after the big hit game is displayed. Is notified that is in a probabilistic state, and it is suggested that the probability setting in the pachinko machine 100 is "setting 6", which is the highest setting. In addition, other types of dice rolls may be displayed and other types of notices (for example, pre-reading notices of pending consecutive chans, etc.) may be started. In the present embodiment, for example, the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability setting switch, and the probability setting switch can be used to set six stages of setting 1 to setting 6. Each setting has a different jackpot probability and specifications, and the manager of the amusement park can select any setting. Further, the main board 156 is provided with a setting display unit, and can display the settings set by the manager of the amusement park. In the present embodiment, the fractionation rate of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is set according to the setting, and the setting may be inferred from the execution frequency of the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol determined by the fluctuation time. is there. Further, the main board 156 may be provided with an accessory ratio display unit for displaying the accessory ratio. The setting display unit and the accessory ratio display unit are composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, but are not limited thereto. In addition, it may not have a probability setting function.

FIG. 156 (E (5) -9) shows the transition to the fifth round. In this production example, when shifting to the fifth round, one dice symbol DC is stopped and displayed at "1", the characters "READY" are displayed, and it is notified that the variable display of the dice symbol DC is started. Will be done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -10), after the variable display of the dice symbol DC is started, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -11), a button is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the image 136a, and the operation valid period is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -12), as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -13), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a weak cut-in. The image CI1b is displayed, suggesting that the expectation for the result of the dice game is low.

FIG. 156 (E (5) -14) shows the transition to the sixth round. It should be noted that the variable display of the dice symbol DC is still being performed continuously.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -15), the dice symbol DC is stopped and displayed, and “4” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -16), the characters "GET time reduction 100 times" are displayed above the dice symbol DC with a "4" roll, and the dice symbol DC At the bottom, the characters "Don't give up" are displayed, notifying that the game state after the big hit game will be shortened, and showing that the player is being comforted.

FIG. 156 (E (5) -17) shows the transition to the 16th round. In the 16th round, the character of the lord appears and the character "It's the final R" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 156 (E (5) -18), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "time reduction 100 times" are displayed, and it is notified that the time reduction state is reached until the variation display of the special figure is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game.

As described above, in this production example, a button effect as a mini game is performed in the jackpot game, and a state in which the game state and settings after the jackpot game are suggested is shown according to the result. That is, it is shown that the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in the effect other than the judge effect of whether or not it is a big hit.

FIGS. 156 (F (4) -2) to 157 (F (5) -20) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 156 (F (4) -2) to 157 (F (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 156 (E (4) -2) to (E (5) -12). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -12), as shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image or a dice. The result of the symbol DC is not displayed, the replay symbol is displayed, the character "one more time" is displayed, and it is notified that the variable display of the dice symbol DC is started again.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -14), the replay symbol is reduced and displayed, and the characters "READY" are displayed, and the re-variation of the dice symbol DC is started. Be notified.

After the revariation display of the dice symbol DC is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -15) displays the remaining time display meter MT together with the super protruding button image 136aS on the right side of the display screen. , The operation validity period is started. Further, at this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, as a result of operating the production button 136 in the dice game as the first button production, the replay symbol is displayed, and the revariation display of the dice game as the second button production starts accordingly. It is shown that it is being played. Further, in this production example, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that a result advantageous to the player in the dice game is derived by displaying the super protruding button image 136aS in the revariation display of the dice game.

In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the re-variation display of the dice game is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started, but the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is performed. After the start, the revariation display of the dice game may be started, or after the revariation display of the dice game is started and the super protrusion button image 136aS is started to be displayed, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is performed. It may be started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -16), the dice symbol DC is stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -17). It is displayed and the result of "6" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -18), the characters "probability fluctuation GET" are displayed above the dice symbol DC with a "6", and below the dice symbol DC. Is displayed with the characters "may be setting 6", and it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game will be in a probabilistic state, and there is a high possibility that the setting of the pachinko machine 100 is "setting 6". Is suggested.

FIG. 157 (F (5) -19) shows the transition to the 16th round. In the 16th round, the character of the lord appears and the character "It's the final R" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 157 (F (5) -20), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle is on board, and the characters "probability fluctuation" are displayed, and it is notified that the probabilistic state will be reached after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, a question mark is displayed along with the character "6", suggesting that there is a high possibility that it is "setting 6".

As described above, in this production example, a button effect as a mini game is performed in the jackpot game, and a state in which the game state and settings after the jackpot game are suggested is shown according to the result. That is, it is shown that the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in the effect other than the judge effect of whether or not it is a big hit. Further, in this production example, a dice game is performed as the first button production, and when the production button 136 is operated in this dice game, the replay symbol is displayed, and the second button is displayed according to the display of the replay symbol. It is shown that the dice symbol DC is re-variably displayed as an effect.

FIGS. 157 (G (4) -1) to 158 (G (4) -20) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. .. Since FIGS. 157 (G (4) -1) to (G (4) -3) are the same as those in FIGS. 145 ((1) -1) to (1) -3). The explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -3), after the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, the decoration shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -4) is displayed. The symbol display device 208 shows that one of the mini games, the “dice slot game”, has started. At this time, the characters "mini game" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the start of the mini game. When the "dice slot game" is started, an explanation display of "roll the dice with the button" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the operation valid period to roll the dice. It is shown that the mission is to make the combination of (designs) a specific combination, and when the mission is completed, the advance notice production according to the combination of the dice rolls is started. In the production example shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -4), when the combination of the dice rolls of "4-5-6" is displayed, it is a notice that the super reach will be performed, and "5-5". When the combination of dice rolls of "-5" is displayed, a hold change notice is given to change the display mode of the hold icon, and when the combination of dice rolls of "1-1-1" is displayed. , It is shown that the super-holding change notice, which is more reliable than the hold-change notice executed when the combination of the dice rolls of "5-5-5" is displayed, is performed. In addition, other types of dice roll combinations may be displayed and other types of notices (for example, hidden notices) may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -5), the variation display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below each of the three dice during the variation display. Is displayed, and the characters "3 consecutive hits" are displayed at the upper part of the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "start" is displayed to notify that the mini game has started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -7) fluctuates in the left column. The displayed dice symbol is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed in the upper center of the display screen changes from "3 consecutive hits" to "2 consecutive hits", prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -9) fluctuates in the middle row. The displayed dice symbol is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed in the upper center of the display screen changes from "double hit" to "last", prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 one more time.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -11) has a strong cut-in image. CI1a is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -12), the pattern of the dice that is being displayed in a variable manner in the right column is stopped and displayed, "5" is displayed, and "5-5-5". The combination of dice rolls is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -13), the characters "hold change confirmed" are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify that the hold change is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -14), a hold change animation in which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes is started, and then in FIG. 157 (G (4)-). As shown in 15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode represented in blue. The symbol variation display executed by digesting the hold icon in the blue display mode is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol than the symbol variation display executed by digesting the hold icon in the default display mode.

After that, when the mini-game ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -16) enlarges the decorative symbol and moves and displays it in the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -18), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (G (4) -19) following FIG. 157 (G (4) -18), the third stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 158 (G (4) -20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game being performed by operating the effect button 136, a look-ahead notice in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed is shown.

FIGS. 158 (H (4) -1) to FIG. 158 (H (4) -26) are diagrams stepwise showing another effect pattern of the mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. .. It should be noted that FIGS. 158 (H (4) -1) to (H (4) -10) are the same as those of FIGS. 158 (G (4) -1) to (G (4) -10). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -10), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -11). It is not displayed, and the symbol of the dice that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the right column, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice rolls of "5-5-5" is displayed. However, in this production example, after that, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -13), the symbols of the three dice start the re-variation display, and the second button production is started. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -14), the super protruding button image 136aS and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed so as to overlap the symbols of the dice being displayed in a variable manner. At the same time, the characters "Blow!" Are displayed on the right side of the super protruding button image 136aS, and the operation valid period is restarted. At this time, the effect button 136 is also in a state of protruding upward, thereby encouraging the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, as a result of operating the production button 136 in the dice slot game as the first button production, the combination of the dice symbols is displayed, but the revariation display of the dice slot game as the second button production. Is shown to have started. Further, in this production example, it is suggested that by displaying the super protruding button image 136aS in the revariable display of the dice slot game, there is a high possibility that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the dice slot game. There is.

In the present embodiment, the protruding operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the re-variation display of the dice slot game is started and the display of the super protruding button image 136aS is started. However, the protruding operation of the effect button 136 is started. The revariation display of the dice slot game may be started after the start of the dice slot game, or after the revariation display of the dice slot game is started and the super protruding button image 136aS is started to be displayed, the effect button 136 The protrusion operation may be started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -15), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -16) has three dice symbols. Is stopped and displayed at the same time, and the combination of the dice rolls of "1-1-1" is derived. Then, the characters "super-hold change confirmed" are displayed in the center of the display screen, suggesting that the hold icon changes to a highly reliable display mode.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -17), a hold change animation in which the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes is started, and then in FIG. 158 (H (4)-). As shown in 18), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode represented in red. The symbol variation display executed by digesting the hold icon in the red display mode is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol than the symbol variation display executed by digesting the hold icon in the blue display mode.

However, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -19), the character "still more" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may be further changed. Be notified.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -20), the hold change animation is restarted at the second hold icon h12, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is further changed. It is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -21), when the hold change animation is completed, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the red display mode to the display mode of the ninja character. It is shown that the premier pre-reading notice, which is the pre-reading notice that the symbol variation display of the jackpot confirmation is performed, is being performed. In addition, in the symbol variation display executed by digesting the hold icon of the display mode of the ninja character, the out-of-design mode may be definitely displayed.

After that, when the mini-game ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -22) enlarges the decorative symbol and moves and displays it in the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -23), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -24), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -25), a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. As shown in 158 (H (4) -26), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, a mini game is performed by operating the production button 136 as the first button production, and after the combination of the dice rolls is displayed once, the dice pattern is re-variated, and the dice pattern is re-changed. The operation of the effect button 136 as the second button effect is required during the execution of the variation. As a result, it is shown that a look-ahead notice is performed in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to a display mode with high jackpot reliability. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the hold icon is raised by two steps in one hold change animation, the hold change animation is further performed for the same hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon is further ranked. It is shown that it is up.

In addition, although the above-described embodiment, that is, the effect of the two button effects is applied to the judge effect of confirming the big hit and the notice effect of the game state after the big hit game during the big hit, it is applied to other notice effects. Also, for example, it can be applied to other types of advance notice effects as a result of two button effects, and for example, it can be applied to pre-reading notices such as pending changes and other types of change notices. Is.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect button 136 and the effect lever 136V have been described as the operation means, but other devices may be used, for example, in addition to the buttons and levers, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, and an ultrasonic wave. A non-contact type and detectable sensor such as the above may be used.

Further, although the above-mentioned operation request display shows an example in which the target operation means for instructing the operation and the operation means for receiving the operation are the same, they may be different. For example, the operation of the effect button 136 is requested. Although the display is performed, the operation of the effect lever 136V may be accepted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the button effect that requires one operation of the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 may be requested a plurality of times, or the continuous striking operation may be required. Alternatively, a long press may be required.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example of the effect in which the second button effect may be performed as the operation response effect in the first button effect is shown, but further, the third time as the operation response effect in the second button effect. Button effect may be performed. In this case, the operation request mode of the effect button 136 may be changed for each button effect. For example, in the first button effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is requested once, but in the second button effect. May request the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136, and request the operation of the effect button 136 once in the third button effect. Further, a plurality of types of operation request modes of the effect button 136 may be prepared in one button effect. For example, in the first button effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is requested once and the second button is displayed. In the production, a continuous striking operation may be requested first, and for example, a single operation of the effect button 136 may be requested when the continuous striking gauge is full. Further, the fourth button effect, the fifth button effect, and the like may be performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot reliability is improved in the mode of the button image in the second button effect than in the mode of the button image in the first button effect. That is, it can be said that a step-up effect is performed in which a button image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed each time the button effect is repeated.

In the above description, "an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an effect lever 136V, etc.]"
A game table equipped with an effect means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, etc.] capable of performing a plurality of effects.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIGS. 137 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -3)].
One of the plurality of effects is shown in the second effect [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) and FIG. 140 (B (3) -5). Strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, etc.]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a super protruding button effect shown in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5)]. ,
The first effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIGS. 137 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3) is an effect button. It is a production that encourages 136 operations, etc.],
The second effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect [for example, an effect in which the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) is displayed is an effect. It is an effect that is executed according to the operation of button 136, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means.
The third effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect [for example, the super protrusion shown in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -4) to (A (3) -5)). The button effect is an effect that is executed when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect, etc.],
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means [for example, the super protruding button effect shown in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5)) is an effect. It is an effect that encourages the operation of button 136, etc.],
The execution of the first effect is started as compared with the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as "the first case"). After that, when the execution of the third effect is started (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. .. ] Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to expect whether the second effect or the third effect is started by performing the first effect.

Here, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing a method other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the production means may be capable of executing only the first production, the second production, and the third production, or the production other than the first production, the second production, and the third production. May also be feasible. Further, the production means may be one that always executes the first production, the second production, and the third production, or when the first production, the second production, and the third production are not executed. There may be one.

Further, the first effect may include only an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means, or may include an effect other than the effect that encourages the operation of the operating means. Further, the first effect may always include an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means, or may not include an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means.

Further, the second effect may include only the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may include an effect other than the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. May be good. Further, the second effect may always include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may not include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. You may.

Further, the second effect may not include only an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means, or may not include an effect other than the effect that encourages the operation of the operating means. In addition, the second effect may not always include an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means, or may include an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means.

Further, the second effect may be started only in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may be started only in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect. May also be initiated. Further, the second effect may always be started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may not be started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect. It may be.

Further, the third effect may include only the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may include an effect other than the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. May be good. Further, the third effect may always include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may not include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. You may.

Further, the third effect may include only an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means, or may include an effect other than the effect that encourages the operation of the operating means. Further, the third effect may always include an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means, or may not include an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means.

Further, the third effect may be started only in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may be started only in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect. May also be initiated. Further, the third effect may always be started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may not be started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect. It may be.

If the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the missed symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed. You may. Further, when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed, or the missed symbol may be confirmed and displayed. You may.

Further, "the execution of the first effect is more than the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as" the first case "). When the execution of the third effect is started after the start of the above (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. " The execution of the first effect is started more than the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as "the first case"). It may be that "the case where the execution of the third effect is started later (hereinafter, referred to as" the second case ") is more likely to be given an advantageous state".

Further, "one of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [for example, a judge effect for confirming a big hit shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -6)].
The fourth effect is an effect that may be started when the operation means is operated during the execution of the third effect [for example, FIGS. 137 (B (3) -5) to FIG. As shown in B (3) -6), when the effect button 136 is pushed in during the execution of the super-protruding button effect, the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the expectation when the third effect is executed.

Here, the fourth effect may be started only when the operation means is operated during the execution of the third effect, or the operation may be started during the execution of the third effect. It may be started in a case other than the case where the means is operated. Further, the fourth effect may be always started when the operation means is operated during the execution of the third effect, or the operation means may be operated during the execution of the third effect. It may not start in some cases.

Further, "The fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is executed [for example, FIGS. 140 (B (3) -5) to FIG. 140 (B (3) -5) to FIG. ) -6), the game table is characterized in that, after the cut-in image (strong cut-in image CI1a) is displayed, the judge effect of confirming the big hit is started]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, there are cases where expectations can be expected even if the second production is performed.

Here, the fourth effect may be started only after the second effect is executed, or may be started even when the second effect is not executed. It may be something that may occur. Further, the fourth effect may always start after the second effect is executed, or may not start after the second effect is executed. ..

In addition, "The fourth production is a game table characterized by being a judge production for a big hit. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to raise the expectation that the fourth effect will be executed.

Further, "If the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the second effect may be started [for example, FIGS. 140 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (As shown in (A (3) -5), a strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the normal button effect, etc.],
If the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the third effect is not started [for example, FIGS. 140 (A (3) -2) to FIG. As shown in 3) -5), the game table is characterized in that, in the normal button effect, the button effect is not started when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the motivation to perform an operation on the operating means during the execution of the first effect.

Here, if the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, only the second effect may be started, or the operating means may be operated during the execution of the first effect. If not, an effect other than the second effect may be started. Further, the second effect may always be started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the second effect may be started. The second production may not start.

Further, the second effect may be started only when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The second production may be started in cases other than the above. Further, the second effect may be started when the operation means is not operated only during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is operated other than during the execution of the first effect. If not, the second production may be started.

It should be noted that the second effect is not started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, and the third effect is not operated when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The production of may be started.

Further, "The first effect may be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIGS. 141 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (As shown in A (3) -5), the normal button effect is restarted when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the normal button effect]. .. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the first effect is restarted, which may give the player a sense of security.

Here, if the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, only the first effect may be started, or the operating means may be operated during the execution of the first effect. If not, an effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, the first effect may always be started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. One production may not be started.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The first production may be started in cases other than the above. Further, the first effect may be started when the operation means is not operated only during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is operated other than during the execution of the first effect. If not, the first production may be started.

In addition, "The operating means is a means capable of being in a plurality of states.
One of the plurality of states is a first state [for example, a mode in which the effect button 136 does not protrude].
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes].
The first aspect of the effect is an aspect of encouraging the operation of the operation means in the first state [for example, the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) is in a non-protruding state. Includes display of button image 136a that imitates production button 136],
The third aspect of the effect is an aspect of encouraging the operation of the operation means in the second state [for example, the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) is an effect in a protruding state. A game table characterized in that it includes a display of a super protruding button image 136aS that imitates a button 136]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the appearance of the operation effect of the operation means in the second state.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be in only the first state and the second state, or can be in a state other than the first state and the second state. It may be a thing. Further, the operating means may be one that can always be in the first state and the second state, or may not be in the first state and the second state. ..

The first state and the second state may be a state in which the operating means does not protrude and a state in which the operating means protrudes, and a state in which the operating means does not vibrate and a state in which the operating means vibrates. , The operating means may be in a vibrating state and a vibrating and rotating state, the operating means may be in a non-rotating state and a rotating state, and the operating means may be in a vibrating and rotating state. It may be in a non-rotating state and in a vibrating and rotating state, in a state where the operating means is not emitting light and in a state where it is emitting light, and the operating means emits light in a certain color. It may be in a state of emitting light in a certain color different from the state of being in a certain color.
In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is a fifth effect [for example, a weakly protruding button effect shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3), etc." ], And
The fifth aspect of the effect is an aspect of encouraging the operation of the operation means in the second state [for example, the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) is an effect in a protruding state. Includes display of weakly protruding button image 136aP2 that imitates button 136],
The execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started [for example, FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -4). ), After the weak protrusion button effect is started, if the effect button 136 is pushed during the execution of the weak protrusion button effect, the protrusion button effect is started, etc.],
A game table characterized in that the fifth aspect of the effect and the third aspect of the effect are different aspects. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the operation effect to be performed first.

Here, the fifth aspect of the effect may be a mode that encourages only the operation of the operating means in the second state, or a mode that encourages an operation other than the operation of the operating means in the second state. Good. Further, the fifth aspect of the effect may be an aspect that always prompts the operation of the operating means in the second state, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means in the second state. Good.

Further, there may be a case where only the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the fifth effect is started, or the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the fifth effect is started. Execution of an effect other than execution may be started. Further, the execution of the third effect may always be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started, and the execution of the third effect is not started after the execution of the fifth effect is started. There may be cases.

Further, the execution of the third effect may be started only after the execution of the fifth effect is started, and the third effect may be started even after the execution of the fifth effect is started. Execution may be started.

In addition, the fifth and third effects may be partially different or all different.

Further, "The third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, the effect button 136 shown in the" third display [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -4)). An effect [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -4) to FIG. Button production, etc.]
The fifth effect is a display that imitates the operating means in the second state (hereinafter, the effect button 136 shown in the "fifth display [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -2)) is projected. Weakly protruding button image 136aP2, etc. that imitates the aspect] ”). The effect [for example, the weakly protruding button shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3)). Directing, etc.]
In the third display and the fifth display, the third display is larger [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) than the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2). ) -4) The protruding button image 136aP1 is larger, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give expectations to the player by clarifying the development of the button display.

Here, the third effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state, or the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state. It may include. Further, the third effect may always include a display imitating the operating means in the second state, or may not include a display imitating the operating means in the second state. It may be one.

Further, the fifth effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state, or may include the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state. It may be a thing. In addition, the fifth effect may always include a display imitating the operating means in the second state, or may not include a display imitating the operating means in the second state. It may be one.

In the third display and the fifth display, the fifth display may be larger or may have the same size.

Further, "The third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, the effect button 136 shown in the" third display [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -4)). An effect [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -4) to FIG. Button production, etc.]
The fifth effect is a display that imitates the operating means in the second state (hereinafter, the effect button 136 shown in the "fifth display [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -2)) is projected. Weakly protruding button image 136aP2, etc. that imitates the aspect] ”). The effect [for example, the weakly protruding button shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3)). Directing, etc.]
At least of the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display [for example, the display of the red effect EFR added to the protruding button image 136aP1 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4)]. One display is displayed in a third color [for example, red],
Of the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display [for example, the display of the blue effect EFB added to the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2)]. At least one display is displayed in a fifth color [eg, blue, etc.]
A game table characterized in that the third color and the fifth color are different colors. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give expectations to the player by clarifying the development of the button display.

Here, the third effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state, or the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state. It may include. Further, the third effect may always include a display imitating the operating means in the second state, or may not include a display imitating the operating means in the second state. It may be one.

Further, the fifth effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state, or may include the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state. It may be a thing. In addition, the fifth effect may always include a display imitating the operating means in the second state, or may not include a display imitating the operating means in the second state. It may be one.

Further, only the third display of the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or the effect display surrounding the third display and the third display may be displayed. Only the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or both the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color. .. Further, at least a part of the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed. At least one of them may all be displayed in a third color.

Further, only the fifth display of the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed. Only the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or both the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color. .. Further, at least a part of the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed. At least one of them may all be displayed in the fifth color.

Further, the third color and the fifth color may be partially different colors or all may be different colors.

In addition, "The first state is a state in which the operating means is not vibrating.
The second state is a game table in which the operating means is vibrating. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easier to grasp the first state and the second state.

Further, "The first effect is a display imitating the operation means in the first state (hereinafter," first display [for example, button image 136a shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2), etc.) and the like. ] ”) Is an effect [for example, a normal button effect shown in FIGS. 144 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -3)].
The third effect is a display that imitates the operating means in the second state (hereinafter, "third display [for example, a protruding button image 136aP1 or the like shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -6)]". It is a production that includes the display of)
In the second case, a change animation that changes from the first display to the third display after the execution of the first effect is started and before the execution of the third effect is started. Is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 144 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -7), the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect (normal button effect). Then, when the second button effect (protruding button effect) is started, when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect, an animation in which the button image 136a changes to the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed, etc.], A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the change in the production may be easy to understand.

Here, the first effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means of the first state, or the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means of the first state. It may include. Further, the first effect may always include a display imitating the operating means in the first state, or may not include a display imitating the operating means in the first state. It may be one.

Further, the third effect may include only a display imitating the operating means in the second state, or may include a display other than the display imitating the operating means in the second state. It may be a thing. Further, the third effect may always include a display imitating the operating means in the second state, or may not include a display imitating the operating means in the second state. It may be one.

Further, "The operating means is an operating means composed of a plurality of operating means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.].
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, an effect button 136, etc.].
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means [for example, an effect lever 136V or the like].
The first effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to (A (3) -3) is , It is a production that encourages the operation of the production button 136, etc.],
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means [for example, the lever effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5)). It is a production table that encourages the operation of the production lever 136V, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to have an expectation that the second operating means can be operated.

Here, the plurality of operating means may be only the first operating means and the second operating means, or may be an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means.

Further, the first effect may include only an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means, or may include an effect other than the effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means. .. Further, the first effect may always include an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means, or may not include an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means. Good.

Further, the third effect may include only an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means, or may include an effect other than the effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means. .. Further, the third effect may always include an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means, or may not include an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means. Good.

Further, "In the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started [for example, FIG. 137 (B). (3) -2) -As shown in the figure (B (3) -4), the super protruding button effect is started after the normal button effect is started],
The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in the certain variation pattern, and then the execution of the third effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 143 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -4), the normal button effect is not started, and the super protruding button is delayed for a predetermined time. The production has started, etc.], a game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the delay in the start of the production, which may give expectations.

Here, there may be a case where only the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, or a certain variation. During the execution of the symbol variation display in the pattern, the execution of the effects other than the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started. Further, the execution of the third effect may always be started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, or the symbol variation in a certain variation pattern. During the execution of the display, the execution of the third effect may not be started after the execution of the first effect is started.

Further, the execution of the third effect may be started only after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, or the execution of the third effect may be started. The execution of the third effect may be started other than after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in. Further, the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started only during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, or the execution of the third effect may be started. The execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started even when the symbol variation display is not being executed in.

Further, during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and then only the execution of the third effect is started. In some cases, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, and then the third effect is executed. Execution of an effect other than the execution of the effect may be started. Further, during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and then the execution of the third effect is always started. Alternatively, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, and then the execution of the third effect is performed. It may not be started.

Further, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started only during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, and then the execution of the third effect is started. In some cases, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started even when the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern is not being executed, and then the first effect is executed. Execution of the third effect may be started.

Further, "the first effect is an effect including an operation request display [for example, a display including a character display of" press "shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2)"].
The third effect is an effect including an operation request display [for example, a display including a character display of "pressing" shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4)].
A game table characterized in that the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the first effect and the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the third effect are different. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to change the feeling of expectation due to the difference in the character strings.

Here, the first effect may include only the display of the operation request display, or may include a display other than the display of the operation request display. Further, the first effect may always include the display of the operation request display, or may not include the display of the operation request display.

Further, the third effect may include only the display of the operation request display, or may include a display other than the display of the operation request display. Further, the third effect may always include the display of the operation request display, or may not include the display of the operation request display.

Further, a part of the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the first effect and the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the third effect may be partially different, or all of them may be different. It may be different.

Further, "one of the plurality of effects is a sixth effect [for example, a normal button effect executed as a second button effect].
The sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect.
The execution of the sixth effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started [for example, FIGS. 151 (A (3) -3) to FIG. (A (3) -7). ), When the button image 136a is selected in the selection effect as the first button effect, the normal button effect is started as the second button effect, etc.],
The first effect is an effect that selects whether the execution of the third effect is started or the execution of the sixth effect is started as the effect after the first effect is executed. [For example, in the selection effect shown in FIGS. 151 (A (3) -3) to (A (3) -7), a button image is selected from a plurality of types of button images (button image 136a and protruding button image 136aP1). By doing so, it is possible to select whether the normal button effect or the protruding button effect is started as the second button effect]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the motivation of the player to operate by determining the content of the subsequent production by the operation means by the selection production.

Here, there may be a case where only the execution of the sixth effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, or the sixth effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started. The execution of the effect other than the execution of is may be started. Further, the execution of the sixth effect may always be started after the execution of the first effect is started, and the execution of the sixth effect is not started after the execution of the first effect is started. There may be cases.

In addition, "If the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the execution of the sixth effect may be started [for example, FIGS. 151 (B (3) -3) to FIG. 151 (3) -3). As shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -9), when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the selection effect as the first button effect, the normal button effect is performed as the second button effect. Is started, etc.], a game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the motivation to operate the operating means in order to perform the third effect.

Here, if the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, only the execution of the sixth effect may be started, or the operating means may be started during the execution of the first effect. If the operation is not performed, the execution of the effect other than the execution of the sixth effect may be started. Further, the execution of the sixth effect may always be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. In some cases, the execution of the sixth effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of the sixth effect may be started only when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is operated during the execution of the first effect. The execution of the sixth effect may be started in addition to the case where it is not performed.

Further, "The effect means is the roll of the dice of" 5-5-5 "in the dice slot game shown in the stock effect [for example, FIG. 146 ((1) -4) to FIG. (1) -12]. It is a means that can execute the effect that the button icon BTN is stocked by displaying the combination.
The stock effect is an effect that suggests an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means once or a plurality of times by the stock of icons.
In the first case, one of the icons is digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 145 ((3) -2) to ((3) -7), one button icon BTN is digested. After the normal button effect is performed, a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 136],
Even in the second case, one of the icons is digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 146 ((3) -2) to ((3) -7), one button icon BTN is digested. After the normal button effect is performed, the big button effect is started according to the operation of the effect button 136]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the production by the operation means is actually performed twice, but the consumption of the icon stock can be suppressed to one, so that the player may feel that he / she has gained.

Further, according to this game table, even if there is only one icon stock in the stock production, it may be possible to have expectations for the start of the production by the operating means.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the stock effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the stock effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the stock effect, or may not execute the stock effect.

Further, the stock effect may suggest an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means once by the stock of the icon, or suggests an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means a plurality of times by the stock of the icon. It may be a thing.

Further, in the first case, only one icon may be digested without fail, or two or more icons may be digested.

Further, in the second case, only one icon may be digested without fail, or two or more icons may be digested.

Further, "The first effect is an effect that encourages one operation of the operation means [for example, the normal button shown in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3)). The production is a game table characterized by prompting one operation by the production button 136, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is a continuous striking effect that requires a plurality of operations of the operating means [for example, shown in FIGS. 153 (D (3) -2) to (D (3) -8). The continuous striking operation effect is an effect that requires the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The operation valid period of the operating means in the first effect and the operation valid period of the operating means in the third effect are different periods [for example, FIG. 137 (B (3) -2)). -As shown in the figure (B (3) -5), the operation valid period in the normal button effect as the first button effect and the operation valid period in the super protruding button effect as the second button effect are different. The game table is characterized by the fact that it is a period of time, etc. ] Was also explained.

It should be noted that the operation validity period of the operation means in the first effect and the operation validity period of the operation means in the third effect may or may not overlap in part, and may or may not overlap. It does not have to overlap.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "a plurality of operating means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.] provided at positions that can be operated by the player]
A game table equipped with an effect means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, etc.] capable of performing a plurality of effects.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 139 (A (3) -3)].
One of the plurality of effects is shown in the second effect [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) and FIG. 140 (B (3) -5). Strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, etc.]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a lever or the like shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4)].
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, an effect button 136, etc.].
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means [for example, an effect lever 136V or the like].
The first effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to (A (3) -3) is , It is a production that encourages the operation of the production button 136, etc.],
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect [for example, an effect in which the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) is displayed. Is an effect executed in response to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means.
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect [for example, in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -4) to (A (3) -5). The lever effect shown is an effect that is executed when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect, etc.],
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means [for example, the lever effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5)). It is a production that encourages the operation of the production lever 136V, etc.],
The execution of the third effect starts after the execution of the first effect is started, as compared with the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the final case. ] Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to have an expectation that the second operating means can be operated.

Here, the plurality of operating means may be provided at a position that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at a position that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing a method other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the production means may be capable of executing only the first production, the second production, and the third production, or the production other than the first production, the second production, and the third production. May also be feasible. Further, the production means may be one that always executes the first production, the second production, and the third production, or when the first production, the second production, and the third production are not executed. There may be one.

Further, the plurality of operating means may be only the first operating means and the second operating means, or may be an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means.

Further, the first effect may include only an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means, or may include an effect other than the effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means. .. Further, the first effect may always include an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means, or may not include an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means. Good.

Further, the second effect may include only the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or an effect other than the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. May also be included. Further, the second effect may always include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or does not include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. It may be something that may occur.

Further, the second effect may not include only the effect of urging the operation of the first operating means, or may not include the effect other than the effect of urging the operation of the first operating means. May be good. Further, the second effect may not always include an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means, or may include an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means. Good.

Further, the second effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect, or the operation of the first operating means in the first effect. It may be started in cases other than the above. Further, the second effect may be always started in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect, or may be started in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect. It may not be started.

Further, the third effect may include only the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or an effect other than the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. May also be included. Further, the third effect may always include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, and does not include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. It may be something that may occur.

Further, the third effect may include only an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means, or may include an effect other than the effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means. .. Further, the third effect may always include an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means, or may not include an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means. Good.

Further, the third effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect, or the operation of the first operating means in the first effect. It may be started in cases other than the above. Further, the third effect may be always started in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect, or may be started in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect. It may not be started.

If the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the missed symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed. You may. Further, when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed, or the missed symbol may be confirmed and displayed. You may.

In addition, "the third effect is performed after the execution of the first effect is started, as compared with the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. "It is easier for the jackpot symbol mode to be finally confirmed and displayed when the execution is started" is "when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started". Rather, it is easier to give an advantageous state when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. "

FIGS. 159 to 174 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 are examples of effects executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machines 100 capable of executing the effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 are shown in other drawings. Various effects can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 159 to 174, the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N may be used instead of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the second decorative symbol display device 208L may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 159 to 174, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical idea shown in other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 159 to 174, and the technical idea thereof. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

Although the description in FIGS. 159 to 174 can be applied to any of the production examples in this specification, it is preferably applied to the production examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 158.

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing some examples in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. ..

In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to 159 (A8), first, in FIG. 159 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration”). 2 ”-“ Decoration 3 ”-“ Decoration 2 ”) is stopped and displayed. A second decorative symbol having a size smaller than that of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1).

Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The variable icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In this production example, the position of the icon display area HN1 is shown by being surrounded by a broken line for convenience, but it is actually invisible. Further, the icon display area HN1 is an area in which the variable icon can execute the standby animation, and the same applies to the icon display area HN1 in FIGS. 151 to 174. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

Further, in FIG. 159 (A1), the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 4, and the first holding icon h11, the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. ing. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each hold icon is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that.

Further, FIG. 159 (A1) is a state in which the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon is erased.

In FIG. 159 (A2), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. , The icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first variable icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variable icon h01 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified.

In FIG. 159 (A3), a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls in the vertical direction. .. The second variable icon h02 in this production example has the same size as the first variable icon h01, but is different in color and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 159 (A4) to 159 (A6), the second variable icon h02 continuously falls and overlaps with a part of the first variable icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (A6), when all of the second variable icon H02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is deleted as shown in FIG. 159 (A7). The second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and it is shown that the variable icon is changing from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 159 (A3) and ended immediately before the figure (A7), or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (the figure (A3)). ) ~ Fig. (A6)) can be regarded as an animation that is performed only. While the icon change animation is being displayed, the first decorative symbol may be erased and the variable display may be performed only in the second decorative symbol, or the second decorative symbol may be erased and the variable display may be performed only in the first decorative symbol. May be done. Further, the period during which the decorative symbol is erased may be the entire period during which the icon change animation is being displayed, or may be a part of the period.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A8). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to 159 (A8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears in addition to the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the first color. This is an example of changing with the first frequency (probability).

Next, the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (B1) to 159 (B8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8), and duplicated explanations will be omitted. There is. In the following description, the description overlapping with the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted. Is true. In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (B1) to 159 (B8), FIGS. 159 (B1) to (B4) are the same as those in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A4) described above. The appearance of the second variable icon h02 falling is shown. Subsequently, in FIG. 159 (B5), after all of the second variable icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon 01, the icon display area HN1 is further dropped in the vertical direction, and the display screen is displayed. It is shown that the frame out is started from the lower end of. After that, FIGS. 159 (B6) to 159 (B7) show that the second variable icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variable icon does not change. If the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails. In this effect example, the hold change effect fails and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to 159 (C8), first, in FIG. 159 (C1), the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration”). 2 ”-“ Decoration 3 ”-“ Decoration 2 ”) is stopped and displayed. A second decorative symbol having a size smaller than that of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1).

Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The variable icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In this production example, the position of the icon display area HN1 is shown by being surrounded by a broken line for convenience, but it is actually invisible. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

Further, in FIG. 159 (C1), the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 4, and the first holding icon h11, the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. ing. In this production example, only the second hold icon h12 out of the four hold icons is displayed in blue, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, but all the other hold icons are displayed by default (white). It is an aspect. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that.

Further, FIG. 159 (C1) is a state in which the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon is erased.

In FIG. 159 (C2), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. , The icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first variable icon h01. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, but the other hold icons h12, h13 and the first variable icon h01 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified.

In FIG. 159 (C3), a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls in the vertical direction. .. The second variable icon h02 in this production example has a size larger than that of the first variable icon h01, and has a different color, and is displayed in blue. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 159 (C4) to 159 (C6), the second variable icon h02 continuously falls and overlaps with a part of the first variable icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), when a part of the second variable icon H02 overlaps the entire first variable icon h01, the second variable icon h02 is reduced as shown in FIG. 159 (C7). When it is displayed and becomes the same size as the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is erased, the second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode. It is shown that the display mode is changing to (blue display mode). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), the second variable icon h02 is displayed in a large size and overlaps with the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the second variable icon h02 overlaps with the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the notice, and the second variable icon h02 overlaps with the notice display.

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 159 (C3) and ended immediately before the figure (C7), or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (the figure (C3)). ) ~ Figure (C6)) can be regarded as an animation that is performed only.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C8). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, a pending change effect in which the display mode of the variable icon changes is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. May be good. This also applies to the following description.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to 159 (C8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears in addition to the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the first color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Subsequently, the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to 159 (D8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), and duplicated explanations will be omitted. There is. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to 159 (C8), a part of the hold icons was set as the advance notice display mode, but in the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8), , All hold icons are the default display mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to 159 (D8), FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D4) are the same as those of FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C4) described above. It is shown that the second variable icon h02, which is larger in size than the first variable icon h01, falls. Subsequently, in FIG. 159 (D5), after a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps the entire first variable icon h01, the second variable icon h02 is reduced and displayed in the vertical direction without being animated. It is shown that the fall is further performed and the frame out is started from the lower end of the display screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 159 (D6) to (D7), the second variable icon h02 was completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variable icon did not change. There is. If the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. Further, after a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps all of the first variable icon h01, an animation is performed in which the second variable icon h02 is reduced and displayed, and then the second variable icon h02 is displayed at the lower end of the display screen. You may frame out from. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (D8), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 159 are examples in which the variable icon is targeted, but the hold icon may be targeted in some cases.

Further, as the embodiment of the second variable icon h02, blue has been described as an example, but other colors such as green and red may be used, or other patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes for expressing the player's advantage and the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is the white or unpatterned aspect (A aspect), the blue or diagonal line pattern aspect (B aspect), the green or diamond pattern aspect (C aspect), the red or the like. The pattern becomes higher in the order of the lattice pattern (D), the golden or vertical line pattern (E), and the iridescent or horizontal line pattern (F) becomes the highest. .. Although a plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the variable icon and the hold icon, each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. 159. That is, the white color in the example described with reference to FIG. 159 may be replaced with blue color. For example, the first variable icon h01, which has a white display mode, may have a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the first variable icon h01, which was a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the blue color in the example described with reference to FIG. 159 may be replaced with white or green. The modes can be broadly divided into green and diamond-shaped patterns (the first aspect) and the following aspects (the first group, which is a group of the A aspect, the B aspect, and the C aspect), and red and red. It can be divided into the above-mentioned aspect (the second group which is a group of the D aspect, the E aspect, and the F aspect) of the lattice pattern (the D aspect). Here, the mode belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the second group, and the mode belonging to the second group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the first group. On the other hand, it may be possible to switch the modes within the first group and also to switch the modes within the second group. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the difference in size and number. Further, the advantage of the player is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that the premier production is likely to be started, or that the jackpot confirmation production is started. It may be easy. It also includes the fact that it is easy to perform an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear. The matters relating to the embodiments described in this paragraph are the same in the previous examples and in the subsequent examples.

Further, the mode of each icon may be the mode of the entire icon (entire area) or the mode of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

Further, in all the examples described with reference to FIG. 159, the normal notice by the variable icon whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice. Further, even if the pending change effect in which the display mode of the variable icon changes fails, it may be a big hit, or it may be always missed.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing some other examples in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. Is. In addition, the production example shown in FIGS. 160 (A1) to (A8), the production example shown in FIGS. 160 (B1) to (B8), the production example shown in FIGS. 160 (C1) to (C8), and the production example shown in FIGS. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 160 (D1) to 160 (D8), the mode of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon display area is displayed to the player. HN2 is visible. Production examples shown in FIGS. 160 (A1) to (A8), production examples shown in FIGS. 160 (B1) to (B8), production examples shown in FIGS. 160 (C1) to (C8), and FIG. 160. The production examples shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to 159 (A8), and the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 (B1) to 159 (B1) to FIG. It is the same as the production example shown in (B8), the production example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), and the production example shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8). Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 160 (D5), if the hold change effect fails, the second variable icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing another example in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed.

First, an example of the effect shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A8) will be described. Note that the production examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A2) are shown in FIG. 159 (A1) except that the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the production icon display area DIS. ) Is the same as the production shown in). Here, the navigation characters YM shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A2) are displayed in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least part of it is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the part of the kimono) may be displayed in blue. This navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later. The navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation of repeating a certain operation).

In FIG. 161 (A3), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls out the sword, and swings it. It changes to a pose. Then, a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears above the navigation character YM, and an animation showing the state of moving toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variable icon h02 in this production example has the same size as the first variable icon h01, but is different in color and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 161 (A4) to 161 (A6), the second variable icon h02 continues to move to the icon display area HN1 and overlaps with a part of the first variable icon h01. It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (A6), when all of the second variable icon H02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is deleted as shown in FIG. 161 (A7). The second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and it is shown that the variable icon is changing from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, it is shown that the first variable icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variable icon h02, which is the same display mode (blue display mode) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigator character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon after the change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture.

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 161 (A3) and ended immediately before the figure (A7), or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (the figure (A3)). ) ~ Fig. (A6)) can be regarded as an animation that is performed only.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (A8). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears in addition to the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the first color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Subsequently, the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (B1) to 161 (B8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A8), and duplicated explanations will be omitted. There is. In the following description, the description overlapping with the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A8) may be omitted. Is true. In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (B1) to 161 (B8), FIGS. 161 (B1) to (B4) are the same as those in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A4) described above. It is shown that the second variable icon h02 moves to the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 161 (B5), after all of the second variable icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the icon display area HN1 is not limited to the icon display area HN1 and falls downward, and the frame is out from the lower end of the display screen. Is shown to start. After that, FIGS. 161 (B6) to 161 (B7) show that the second variable icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variable icon does not change. If the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (B8), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails. In this effect example, the hold change effect fails and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

Next, an example of the effect shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 161 (C8) will be described. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 161 (C2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 161 (C3), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls out the sword, and swings it. It changes to a pose. Then, a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears above the navigation character YM, and an animation showing the state of moving toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variable icon h02 in this production example has a size larger than that of the first variable icon h01, is different in color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C4) to 161 (C6), when a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps the entire first variable icon h01, as shown in FIG. 161 (C7), The second variable icon h02 is reduced and displayed to the same size as the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is deleted, the second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variable icon is the default. It is shown that the display mode of the above is changed to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, it is shown that the first variable icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variable icon h02, which is the same display mode (blue display mode) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigator character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon after the change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 161 (C6), the second variable icon h02 is displayed in a large size and overlaps with the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, when the hold icon is displayed in the notice display mode, the hold icon in this notice display mode may overlap with the second variable icon h02.

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 161 (C3) and ended immediately before the figure (C7), or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (the figure (C3)). ) ~ Figure (C6)) can be regarded as an animation that is performed only.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (C8). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, a pending change effect in which the display mode of the variable icon changes is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. May be good. This also applies to the following description.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 161 (C8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears in addition to the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the first color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Subsequently, the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (D1) to 161 (D8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8), and duplicated explanations will be omitted. There is. In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (D1) to 161 (D8), FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D4) are the same as those in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 161 (C4) described above. It is shown that the second variable icon h02, which is larger in size than the first variable icon h01, moves toward the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 161 (D5), after a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the second variable icon h02 falls downward without being reduced and displayed. , It is shown that the frame out is started from the lower end of the display screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 161 (D6) to 161 (D7), the second variable icon h02 was completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variable icon did not change. There is. If the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. Further, after a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps all of the first variable icon h01, an animation is performed in which the second variable icon h02 is reduced and displayed, and then the second variable icon h02 is displayed at the lower end of the display screen. You may frame out from. Further, in this production example, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture after the second variable icon h02 is framed out. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (D8), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 161 are examples in which the variable icon is targeted, but the hold icon may be targeted in some cases.

In each of the examples described with reference to FIG. 161, the normal notice by the variable icon whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice. Further, even if the pending change effect in which the display mode of the variable icon changes fails, it may be a big hit, or it may be always missed.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing some other examples in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. Is. In addition, the production example shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to (A8), the production example shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to (B8), the production example shown in FIGS. 162 (C1) to (C8), and the production example shown in FIGS. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 162 (D1) to 162 (D8), the mode of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon display area is displayed to the player. HN2 is visible. Examples of production shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to 162 (A8), examples of production shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to (B8), examples of production shown in FIGS. 162 (C1) to 162 (C8), and FIG. 162. The production examples shown in FIGS. 161 (D1) to FIG. 161 (D8) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A8) and FIGS. 161 (B1) to 161 (B1), except that the aspect of the icon display area is different. Since it is the same as the production example shown in (B8), the production example shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8), and the production example shown in FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D8), the description thereof will be omitted. .. Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 162 (D5), if the hold change effect fails, the second variable icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

In FIGS. 163 (A1) to 163 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A3), a frame change animation is started, a first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears, and is gradually reduced and displayed. ing. As shown in FIGS. 163 (A3) to 163 (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while gradually reducing the display. In this production example, during the period when the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is erased and the variable display is performed only in the second decorative symbol, but the second decorative symbol is erased and the first decoration is performed. Variable display may be performed only on the symbol. Further, the period during which the decorative symbol is erased may be the entire period during which the frame change animation is displayed, or may be a part of the period. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variable icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. At this time, a copy of the hold frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy change icon h01'as a copy of the first change icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the hold frame UI. At the same time, the copy hold icons h11', h12', h13' are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. The copy variable icon h01'may or may not execute the standby animation in the variable icon display area HN1. Further, the first variable icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period during which the frame change animation is displayed. Further, the first variable icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the reduced display is displayed after the frame change animation is executed. The same applies to the execution and post-execution of the frame change animations in FIGS. 159 to 174.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 163 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A7), a state in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Like the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a variable icon (second variable icon h02) and three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23). However, the second frame image FL2 includes a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1, and the display mode is also a blue display mode. .. On the other hand, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. After that, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A7) to 163 (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. To do. At this time, there is a period in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. Further, the second variable icon h02 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the reduced display is displayed. Further, the variable icon of both or one of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 may or may not perform a standby animation. The same applies to the reduced display in FIGS. 159 to 174.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A11) to 163 (A12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 is continuously moved to the left and displayed. Frame out from the screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A13) starts the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variable icon h02, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 163 (A13) to (A15). As shown, the second frame image FL2 is enlarged and displayed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy variable icon h01'and the copy hold icons h11', h12', and h13'overlap with the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h02, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the pending change notice is successful by switching the frame image.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A16). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the first frame image FL1 is translated and framed out, and the second frame image FL2 is translated and framed in. Rotating in the direction (may be right), the first frame image FL1 rotates to the left and disappears in the left depth direction, and the second frame image FL2 appears from the right depth direction and goes to the left. It may be an indication of a mode of rotating to. This also applies to the following description.

In FIGS. 163 (B1) to 163 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, after the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are displayed side by side in FIG. 163 (B9), they are moved to the left of the display screen, respectively. As shown in B10), a third frame image FL3 different from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 is framed in from the right side of the display screen so as to be adjacent to the right side of the second frame image FL2. Like the first frame image FL1, the third frame image FL3 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a variable icon (third variable icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes a third variable icon h03 different from the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2. The display mode is the same default display mode as that of the first variable icon h01. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes. After that, as shown in FIGS. 163 (B10) to 163 (B12), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the third frame image FL3 is the display screen. Move towards the center of. At this time, a period in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed occurs, and a period in which both the second variable icon h02 and the third variable icon h03 are displayed occurs. Further, the third variable icon h03 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the reduced display is displayed. Further, the variable icon of both or one of the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 may or may not perform a standby animation. The same applies to the reduced display in FIGS. 159 to 174.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 163 (B11) to 163 (B12), the movement of the third frame image FL3 to the center of the display screen is completed, while the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 continue to the left. Move in the direction and frame out from the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B13) starts the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variable icon h03, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 163 (B13) to (B15). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy variable icon h01'and the copy hold icons h11', h12', and h13'overlap with the third frame image FL3, making it difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B15), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h03, and the variable icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the third variable icon h03 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails. In this effect example, the hold change effect fails and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In FIGS. 164 (A1) to 164 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 164 (A1) to 164 (A16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to 163 (A16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 164 (B1) to 164 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 164 (B1) to (B16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to 163 (B16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 165 (A1) to 165 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to 165 (A16), the mode of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon is displayed to the player. The display area HN2 is visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A16), except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

In FIGS. 165 (B1) to 165 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to 165 (B16), the mode of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon is displayed to the player. The display area HN2 is visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B16), except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

In FIGS. 166 (A1) to 166 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 166 (A1) to 166 (A16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to 165 (A16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 166 (B1) to 166 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 166 (B1) to 166 (B16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to 165 (B16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 167 (A1) to 167 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to 167 (A2) are different from the display mode of the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, except that the display mode is a display mode wearing a white kimono. Since the effects are the same as those shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to 161 (A2), the description thereof will be omitted. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a white kimono is the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A3), it is shown that the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 167 (A3) to 167 (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while gradually reducing the display. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variable icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Will be done. At this time, a copy of the hold frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy change icon h01'as a copy of the first change icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the hold frame UI. At the same time, the copy hold icons h11', h12', h13' are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 167 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A7), a state in which a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Like the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a variable icon (second variable icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. In this production example, the display mode of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 is the default display mode (wearing a white kimono), but even if it is a display mode wearing a blue kimono. Good. After that, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A7) to 167 (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. At this time, there is a period in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 167 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, the navigation included in the first frame image FL1 which was the initial posture. The character YM and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 start the icon change animation, respectively, face the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02, and change to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. To do. Then, waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM, and at least a part of the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and at least a part of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 are generated. , Each of which is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are more difficult to see than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. The first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02, which were the default (white) display modes before being covered by the effect image Eh0, have the same display modes as the kimono of the navigation character YM, respectively. It has changed to the blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change. In this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 is the display mode of the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 after the change. Is suggested (notice).

When the effect image Eh0 is erased and the first fluctuation icon h01 and the second fluctuation icon h02 are displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image are displayed as shown in FIGS. 167 (A9) to 167 (A10). FL2 resumes moving to the left. After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (A10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to 167 (A12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 is continuously moved to the left and displayed. Frame out from the screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A13) starts the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variable icon h02, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 167 (A13) to (A15). As shown, the second frame image FL2 is enlarged and displayed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy variable icon h01'and the copy hold icons h11', h12', and h13'overlap with the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h02, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the pending change notice is successful by switching the frame image.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A16). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In FIGS. 167 (B1) to 167 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 167 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 disappears and the first variable icon h01 And the second variable icon h02 appears, but neither the first variable icon h01 nor the second variable icon h02 has changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the notice production by the icon change animation has failed. After that, when the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left as shown in FIGS. 167 (B9) to (B10). Resume the movement of. After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (B10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to 167 (B12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 is continuously moved to the left and displayed. Frame out from the screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B13) starts the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variable icon h02, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 167 (B13) to (B15). As shown, the second frame image FL2 is enlarged and displayed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy variable icon h01'and the copy hold icons h11', h12', and h13'overlap with the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h02, and the variable icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the second variable icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails. In this effect example, the hold change effect fails and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In FIGS. 168 (A1) to 168 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 168 (A1) to 168 (A16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to 167 (A16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 168 (B1) to 168 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 168 (B1) to 168 (B16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to 167 (B16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 169 (A1) to 169 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A8), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 which was the initial posture. Of the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, faces the second variable icon h02, and is a sword. It changes to a pose that you pull out and swing. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation in the initial posture. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the second The variable icon h02 is more difficult to see than before it was covered with the effect image Eh0. The second variable icon h02 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the second variable icon h02, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to the blue display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It's changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change. In this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second variable icon h02 after the change. It becomes a thing.

When the effect image Eh0 is erased and the second variable icon h02 is displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left as shown in FIGS. 169 (A9) to 169 (A10). Resume the move. After that, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (A10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A11) to 169 (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A11) to 169 (A16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A16), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 169 (B1) to 169 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B8), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 169 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variable icon h02 appears, but the second variable icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the notice production by the icon change animation has failed. After that, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 169 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume their movement to the left. After that, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (B10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B11) to 169 (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B11) to 169 (B16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to 167 (B16), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 170 (A1) to 170 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 170 (A1) to 170 (A16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 169 (A1) to 169 (A16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 170 (B1) to 170 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 170 (B1) to (B16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to 169 (B16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 171 (A1) to 171 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Since the effect shown in FIG. 171 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 167 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. , The icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first variable icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variable icon h01 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the character "Attention!" Is displayed on the timer notice display TM to notify that the timer display countdown is started. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A3), the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 171 (A3) to 171 (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while gradually reducing the display. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variable icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Will be done. At this time, a copy of the hold frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy change icon h01'as a copy of the first change icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the hold frame UI. At the same time, the copy hold icons h11', h12', h13' are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 171 (A4), the timer display is displayed on the timer notice display TM, and the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer advance notice effect, a certain advance notice effect is started after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM is "39.99", and the timer display countdown is continuously performed. Further, although the timer notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1, it may be displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 171 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A7), a state in which a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Like the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a variable icon (second variable icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. At this time, the first variable icon h01 and the hold icons h11 to h13 included in the first frame image FL1 overlap with the timer notice display TM, and are more visible than the state in which the timer notice display TM is not displayed. It is said to be difficult. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. After that, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A7) to 171 (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A9), the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "36.00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 which was the initial posture. Of the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, faces the second variable icon h02, and is a sword. It changes to a pose that you pull out and swing. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 is overlapped by the timer advance notice display TM and is difficult to see, but the icon change animation is not started in the initial posture. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the second The variable icon h02 is more difficult to see than before it was covered with the effect image Eh0. The second variable icon h02 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the second variable icon h02, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to the blue display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It's changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change. In this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second variable icon h02 after the change. It becomes a thing.

When the effect image Eh0 is erased and the second variable icon h02 is displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left as shown in FIGS. 171 (A9) to 171 (A10). Resume the move. After that, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture. Further, when the second frame image FL2 moves to the left, the second frame image FL2 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display TM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the timer notice display TM. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the hold icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the timer notice display TM, making it difficult to see. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "35.00". After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A11) to 171 (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A11) to 171 (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to 167 (A16), except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. .. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "32.00".

In FIGS. 171 (B1) to 171 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B1) to 171 (B9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A1) to 171 (A9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 171 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variable icon h02 appears, but the second variable icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the notice production by the icon change animation has failed. After that, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 171 (B9) to 171 (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume their movement to the left. After that, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (B10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B11) to 171 (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B11) to 171 (B16) are shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to 167 (B16), except that the timer display is counted down in the timer notice display TM. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 172 (A1) to 172 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Since the effect shown in FIG. 172 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 167 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. , The icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first variable icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variable icon h01 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the character "Attention!" Is displayed on the timer notice display TM to notify that the timer display countdown is started. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A3), the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 172 (A3) to 172 (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while gradually reducing the display. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variable icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Will be done. At this time, a copy of the hold frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy change icon h01'as a copy of the first change icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the hold frame UI. At the same time, the copy hold icons h11', h12', h13' are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 172 (A4), the timer display is displayed on the timer notice display TM, and the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer advance notice effect, a certain advance notice effect is started after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM is "39.99", and the timer display countdown is continuously performed. Further, although the timer notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1, it may be displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 172 (A4) to 172 (A5), it is shown that the navigation character YM overlaps with the timer notice display TM.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 172 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A7), a state in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Like the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a variable icon (second variable icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. The second variable icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 overlap with the timer notice display TM, and are considered to be more difficult to see than the state in which the timer notice display TM is not displayed. ing. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. After that, as shown in FIGS. 172 (A7) to 172 (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A9), the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "36.00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 which was the initial posture. Of the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, but it overlaps with the timer notice display TM. , The situation is said to be difficult to see. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 has not started the icon change animation in the initial posture. In this production example, the icon change animation that overlaps with the timer notice display TM and is performed in the second frame image FL2 cannot be visually recognized, but when the icon change animation is completed, the default (white) display mode is used. The second variable icon h02 changes to a blue display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 172 (A9) to 172 (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume their movement to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (A10), the second variable icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are visible. The navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, but it overlaps with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A10), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "35.00". After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A11) to 172 (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A11) to 172 (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to 167 (A16), except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. .. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A16), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows “32.00”.

In FIGS. 172 (B1) to 172 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B1) to (B9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 172 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (B9) in this production example, the icon change animation is performed in the second frame image FL2, which overlaps with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized, but the second variation. The icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the notice production by the icon change animation has failed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 172 (B9) to 172 (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume their movement to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B10), the second variable icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are visible. The navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, but it overlaps with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (B10), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "35.00". After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B11) to 172 (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B11) to 172 (B16) are shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to 167 (B16), except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. .. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (B16), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "32.00".

FIG. 173 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. .. The effects shown in FIGS. 173 (A1) to (A12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A12), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely framed out, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A13) is different from the second frame image FL2. It is shown that the third frame image FL3 of the above is framed in and moved to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Like the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL2 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a variable icon (third variable icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes a third variable icon h03 different from the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2, and the display mode is also a red display mode. .. On the other hand, the display modes of the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2. It has become. After that, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving to the left, and as shown in FIGS. 173 (A14) to (A15), the second frame image FL2 is on the left side of the display screen. While framed out from, the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, there is a period in which both the second variable icon h02 and the third variable icon h03 are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 173 (A15) to 173 (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped and displayed when it reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is on the left. Continue moving in the direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out from the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A18) starts enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variable icon h03, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 173 (A18) to (A20). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h03, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode (red display mode). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the pending change notice is successful by switching the frame image.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A21). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (third variable icon h03) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

FIG. 174 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. .. The effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A1) to (A6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A6), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed and the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 174 (A6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A7) From the right side of the display screen, a state in which a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in is shown. The second frame image FL2 in this production example includes the display of the hold frame UI including the change icon (second change icon h02) and three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and the second The second variable icon h02 and the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the frame image FL2 all have the same default display mode as the first frame image FL1. On the other hand, in the second frame image FL2 in this production example, the background color is not the default background color (for example, white) as in the first frame image FL1, but the background color of the notice (for example, blue). It functions as a big hit notice. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice production is performed by changing the elements other than the variable icon. After that, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A7) to (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. To do. At this time, there is a period in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A11) to (A12), when the second frame image FL2 completes the movement to the center of the display screen, only the first frame image FL1 continues to move to the left. Frame out from the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 174 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely out of frame, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A13) has a third frame image different from the second frame image FL2. It is shown that the FL3 is framed in and moved to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Like the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL3 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a variable icon (third variable icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). The third variable icon h03 and the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all in the default display mode. On the other hand, the third frame image FL3 in this production example has a different background color from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, and has a red background color. The red background color in the third frame image FL3 is the background color of the notice, and is a background color with higher jackpot reliability than the blue background color. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice production is performed by changing the elements other than the variable icon. After that, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving to the left, and as shown in FIGS. 174 (A14) to (A15), the second frame image FL2 is on the left side of the display screen. While framed out from, the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, there is a period in which both the second variable icon h02 and the third variable icon h03 are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A15) to 174 (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped and displayed when it reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is on the left. Continue moving in the direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out from the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A18) starts enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variable icon h03, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 174 (A18) to (A20). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third. It is shown that the variable icon h03 is changing. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the background color is changed by switching the frame image, and a notice is given by this. In this production example, the notice is given by changing the display mode other than the variable icon, but the display mode of the variable icon may be further changed.

In this production example, due to the change in the background color, a big hit notice (normal notice) in the currently performed variable display of the decorative symbol is given, but the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 174 (A21) is performed. In the device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (third variable icon h03) is deleted. In addition, when the background color is changed, when the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon may be deleted and the background color may be returned to the default display mode. In this production example, the background color is changed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed.

In the above description, it is a game table provided with "display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The display means can display an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "variation icon [for example, first variation icon h01 shown in FIG. 159 (A3), second variation icon h02, etc.]"). Means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the variable icon in a certain display area [for example, the icon display area HN1 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)] in the display area in the display means [for example, FIG. 159]. As shown in (A3), the first variable icon h0 is displayed in the icon display area HN1 etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying the two variable icons (hereinafter, referred to as "two variable icons").
One of the two variable icons is the first variable icon [for example, the first variable icon h01 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)].
One of the two variable icons is a second variable icon [for example, a second variable icon h02 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)].
The second variable icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 159 (A3), the second variable icon h02 is in an area other than the icon display area HN1. Displayed, etc.], a game console characterized by. ] Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game table, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the variable icon, or may be one that can display other than the variable icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the variable icon, or may not display the variable icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variable icon in a certain display area in the display means, or may be a display means other than the variable icon in a certain display area in the display means. It may also be displayable. Further, the display means may always display the variable icon in a certain display area in the display area of the display means, or display the variable icon in a certain display area in the display area of the display means. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying the variable icon only in a certain display area in the display area of the display means, or may be a display area other than a certain display area in the display area of the display means. It may also be capable of displaying a variable icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only two variable icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the two variable icons. Further, the display means may be one that always displays two variable icons, or may not display two variable icons.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying three or more variable icons.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first variable icon and the second variable icon, or may be capable of displaying variable icons other than the first variable icon and the second variable icon. It may be. Further, the display means may always display the first variable icon and the second variable icon, or may not display the first variable icon and the second variable icon. May be good.

Further, the second variable icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the display area different from the certain display area. It may be an icon. Further, the second variable icon may be always displayed in a display area different from a certain display area, or may not be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area. There may be.

In addition, the second variable icon may be displayed in a certain display area.

In addition, "an animation in which the second variable icon moves during the period in which the first variable icon is displayed (hereinafter," the second moving animation [for example, in FIGS. 159 (A3) to (A6)) The icon change animation shown and the movement display of the second frame image FL2 in the frame change animation shown in FIGS. 164 (A7) to (A15)] ”) may be displayed. Game table. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the movement animation of the second variable icon can be used to diversify the effect of the variable icon, and it may be possible to improve the expectation for the big hit.

Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animations other than the first moving animation may also be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

Further, "There is a case where the second variable icon is displayed in the certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as" first case ") [for example, FIG. 159. (A3) -The second variable icon h02 may be displayed in the icon display area HN1 after the icon change animation shown in the figure (A6) is displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the second variable icon in a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to further improve the expectation for the big hit.

Here, the second variation icon may be displayed only in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second variation after the second moving animation is displayed. The icon may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area. Further, the second variable icon may always be displayed in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second variable icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. It may not be displayed in the area.

Further, only the second variable icon may be displayed in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second variable icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. Variable icons other than may be displayed in a certain display area.

Also, the second variable icon may be displayed in a certain display area only after the second moving animation is displayed, and the second may be displayed other than after the second moving animation is displayed. The variable icon of may be displayed in a certain display area.

Further, "In the first case, the size of the second variable icon displayed in the certain display area is the size of the second variable icon displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. The size of the second variable icon h02 in the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 159 (C3) to 159 (C6) is different from the size of the variable icon. A game table characterized by the fact that it is larger than the size of the icon. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by making the size of the second variable icon different, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to further raise the expectation for the big hit.

The size of the second variable icon displayed in a certain display area may be smaller than the size of the second variable icon displayed during the period when the second moving animation is displayed. It may be large.

Further, "The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, FIGS. 159 (A4) to the same". As shown in FIG. (A6), the second variable icon h02 overlaps with the first variable icon h01 while the icon change animation is displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by overlapping the variable icons, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

Here, the second variable icon may overlap only with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with something other than the first variable icon during at least a part of the period being set. In addition, the second variable icon may always overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may not overlap with the first variable icon for at least a part of the period.

In addition, only the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation is displayed. A variable icon other than the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon only during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during a period other than at least a part of the period.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap the first variable icon during the entire period.

Further, "The second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), the icon. A game table characterized in that the second variable icon h02 overlaps with the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the look-ahead notice while the change animation is displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by overlapping the second variable icon and the notice display, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the variable may be a big hit.

Here, the second variable icon may overlap only with the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or during the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with a display other than the notice display during at least a part of the period. Also, the second variable icon may always overlap the notice display during at least a part of the period when the second animation is displayed, or at least a part of the period when the second animation is displayed. The second variable icon may not overlap the notice display during the period.

In addition, only the second variable icon may overlap the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period during which the second animation is displayed. A variable icon other than the second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during a part of the period.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the notice display only during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during a period other than a part of the period.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or the entire period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the notice display.

Further, "The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, FIG. 159 (C6). ), The second variable icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 and the first variable icon h01 in the pre-reading notice display mode during the display of the icon change animation]. Game table. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by overlapping the second variable icon with the first variable icon and the notice display, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit. is there.

Here, the second variable icon may overlap only with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving. The second variable icon may overlap with a display other than the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period in which the animation is displayed. Further, the second variable icon may always overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may not overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period.

Further, only the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation may be displayed. A variable icon other than the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period in which is displayed.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display only during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation may be displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during a period other than at least a part of the period in which is displayed.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during the entire period of the period.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the first decorative symbol variation display [for example, the variation display of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 164 (A2)] according to the execution of the symbol variation display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second decorative symbol variation display [for example, the variation display of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 164 (A2)] according to the execution of the symbol variation display.
The first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display are different decorative symbol variation displays.
Only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A3) to 164 (A15), during the period when the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is erased and only the variable display by the second decorative symbol is displayed. It is being done, etc.], a game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, the player can concentrate on the movement animation by displaying only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display during the movement animation of the variable icon. May be possible.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the above may also be displayable. Further, the display means may always display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or other than the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. The display of may also be displayable. Further, the display means may always display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. It may not be the one that may not be.

In addition, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed only during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases, one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display may be displayed during a period other than at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases, only the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed. In addition, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is always displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. Alternatively, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is not displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. It may be present, or only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during the entire period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases.

In addition, "an animation in which the first variable icon moves (hereinafter," moving display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in the first moving animation [for example, FIGS. 164 (A3) to A12) Etc.] ”) may be displayed.
The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A3) to (A15), the first frame. A game table characterized in that the movement display of the second frame image FL2 is started after the movement display of the image FL1 is started]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying a plurality of moving animations of the variable icons, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuations may be a big hit.

Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animations other than the first moving animation may also be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be always displayed, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

Further, only the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started. Display other than the animation display may also be started. Further, the display of the second moving animation may always be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started. It may not be started.

In addition, "an animation in which the first variable icon moves (hereinafter," moving display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in the first moving animation [for example, FIGS. 164 (A3) to A12) Etc.] ”) may be displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the movement animation of the first variable icon can be used to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the variation may be a big hit.

Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animations other than the first moving animation may also be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be always displayed, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display [for example, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168].
The certain display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 168 (A1)].
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono shown in FIG. 161 (A1)].
The moving display of the certain display of the first display mode is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the first moving animation is displayed.
A game table characterized in that the moving display of the certain display of the second display mode is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the degree of expectation of a big hit during the period of the movement animation of the variable icon, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit. is there.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a certain display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a certain display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a certain display, or may not display a certain display.

Further, a certain display may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, a certain display may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes without fail, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, a certain display may be capable of displaying only the first display mode and the second display mode, or may display a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be. Further, a certain display may always be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. You may.

In addition, the moving display of a certain display of the first display mode may be displayed during a part of the period during which the first moving animation is displayed, or the period during which the first moving animation is displayed. A moving display of a display of the first display mode may be displayed during the entire period of.

Further, the moving display of a certain display of the second display mode may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. A moving display of a display of a second display mode may be displayed during the entire period of.

Further, "after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variable icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, FIGS. 164 (A2) to FIG. As shown in A3), when the movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation is started, the first variable icon h01 is moved and displayed in a display area different from the icon display area HN1]. A game table featuring. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the first variable icon in a display area different from a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it is expected that the fluctuation may be a big hit. You may be able to do it.

Here, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variable icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. After that, the first variable icon may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area. Further, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variable icon may always be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. Later, the first variable icon may not be displayed in a display area other than one display area.

Further, the first variable icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area only after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the first moving animation is started. In addition to the latter, the first variable icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area.

In addition, "In the execution of one symbol variation display, after changing from the first state to the second state, the second state changes to the third state (hereinafter," the second case "". There is.)
The first state is a state in which only the first change icon of the two change icons is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A5), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon. Only the first variable icon h01 of the icon h02 is displayed].
The second state is a state in which both of the two variable icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A9), both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. State, etc.]
The third state is a state in which only the second change icon of the two change icons is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A12), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon. A game table characterized in that only the second variable icon h02 of the icons h02 is displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the number of variable icons, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

Here, during the execution of one symbol variation display, there may be a case where the state changes from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state, or once. During the execution of the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the state changes from the first state to the second state and then does not change from the second state to the third state. In addition, during the execution of one symbol variation display, the state may change from the second state to the third state only after the change from the first state to the second state, or once. During the execution of the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the second state is changed to the third state other than after the first state is changed to the second state. Further, only during the execution of one symbol variation display, there may be a case where the state changes from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state, or once. Even when the symbol variation display is not being executed, there may be a case where the state changes from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a third variable icon [for example, the third variable icon h03 shown in FIG. 173 (A17)].
The third variable icon is a variable icon different from the first variable icon.
The third variable icon is a variable icon different from the second variable icon.
After the second case, the third state may change to the fourth state, and then the fourth state may change to the fifth state.
The fourth state is a state in which the second change icon and the third change icon are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A14), the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03. The state where both of are displayed, etc.]
The fifth state is a state in which only the third variation icon of the second variation icon and the third variation icon is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), the fifth state. 2 A game table characterized in that only the third variable icon h03 of the variable icon h02 and the third variable icon h03 is displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the number of variable icons, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third variable icon, or may be capable of displaying variable icons other than the third variable icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the third variable icon, or may not display the third variable icon.

Further, the third variable icon may be partially different from the first variable icon, or may be completely different.

Further, the third variable icon may be partially different from the second variable icon, or may be completely different.

In addition, after the second case, the third state may change to the fourth state, and then the fourth state may change to the fifth state. After that, after changing from the third state to the fourth state, there may be a case where the fourth state does not change to the fifth state. Further, after the second case, the fourth state may change to the fifth state only after the third state changes to the fourth state, and the second case may change. In addition to after becoming, there may be a case where the state changes from the third state to the fourth state and then changes from the fourth state to the fifth state. Further, only after the second case has changed, the third state may change to the fourth state, and then the fourth state may change to the fifth state, or the second state may change. In addition to the case, there may be a case where the state changes from the third state to the fourth state and then changes from the fourth state to the fifth state.

Further, "In at least a part of the period in which the two variable icons are displayed, there is a period in which neither of the two variable icons is displayed in the certain display area [for example, FIG. 164 (A9). As shown, the game console is characterized in that none of the variable icons are displayed in the icon display area HN1 during the period in which the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the variable icon is not displayed in a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the variable may be a big hit.

Here, in a part of the period in which the two variable icons are displayed, there may be a period in which neither of the two variable icons is displayed in a certain display area, or the two variable icons are displayed. During the entire period of the period, there may be a period in which neither of the two variable icons is displayed in a certain display area.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon relating to the hold of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" hold icon [for example, hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc. shown in FIG. 164 (A2)]). Yes,
In the period during which the two variable icons are displayed [for example, the period during which the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 164 (A7) to (A10)]. The number of hold icons [for example, 6 or the like] is the number of the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 before the two variable icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A6). A game table characterized in that the number of the held icons is larger than the number of the held icons [for example, three or the like] in the period in which only the first variable icon h01 of the above is displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make various effects by changing the number of hold icons.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the hold icon, or may be one that can display a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the hold icon, or may not display the hold icon.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon relating to the hold of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" hold icon [for example, hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc. shown in FIG. 164 (A2)]). Yes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter, referred to as "numerical hold display [for example, a second hold number display shown in FIG. 164 (A2)]") for displaying the number of holds of the symbol variation display in numbers. And
The number of holds indicated by the number hold display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A7) to (A10), the second hold number during the period when the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. The number of holding icons in the special figure 1 in the display indicates "3", etc.] indicates the number of the holding icons during the period in which the two variable icons are displayed [for example, FIGS. 164 (A7) to (A10). ), The number of hold icons is less than 6 during the period when the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make various effects by changing the number of hold icons.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the hold icon, or may be one that can display a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the hold icon, or may not display the hold icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number hold display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number hold display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the number hold display, or may not display the number hold display.

In addition, "The movement display of the hold icon is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the first moving animation is displayed.
A game console characterized in that the movement display of the hold icon is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where the hold icon can be used in various ways.

Here, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed during a part of the period during which the first moving animation is displayed, or during the entire period during which the first moving animation is displayed. , The move display of the hold icon may be displayed.

In addition, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or during the entire period during which the second moving animation is displayed. A moving display of the hold icon may be displayed.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1]. ] Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the time until a certain effect is performed.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a display that may foretell that the time until the certain effect is started will change.
A game table characterized in that the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.

Here, the "certain effect" may be an effect by a display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
A game table characterized in that when the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
A game table characterized in that the second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means on which the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 5)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
A game table characterized in that the time notified by the first display is advanced even when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 6)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 5.
A game table characterized in that a display different from the second display is displayed after the timer reaches 0.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 6.
A game table characterized in that it is easier to make a big hit when the second display is displayed than when it is not displayed.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 7.
The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means.
A game table characterized in that the display of the substitute sign is an effect display.

(Appendix 9)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 7.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements.
One type of movement among the plurality of types of movements is a directing movement.
The game table is characterized in that the certain effect is an effect operation by the effect movable means.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the effect operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, the one provided on the frame (front door).

(Appendix 10)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 9.
A game table characterized in that it is easier to hit a big hit when the certain effect occurs than when it does not occur.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 10.
A game table characterized in that a hot effect display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 12)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
The game table is a game table characterized by being a slot machine.

(Appendix 14)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display that notifies the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
A game table characterized in that the period display may be erased before the first timing is reached.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to the reach, but may be fluctuating or a big hit. Further, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not in the second reach.

(Appendix 15)
The game console described in Appendix 14,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third effect display.
The timing of displaying the third effect display may not be notified by the period display.
A game table characterized in that the period display is hidden during the display of the third effect display.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating the firing position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, light emission by an LED, and an effect operation by an accessory. May be done. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed does not have to be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16)
The game console described in Appendix 15.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit symbol variation”) in which the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit.

(Appendix 17)
The game console described in Appendix 16.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed due to a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect.
A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol variation is configured so that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the lost symbol variation.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 17.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
A game table characterized in that the electric power movable means may perform the effect operation during the display of the third effect display.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 18.
A game table characterized in that after the period display is hidden, the period display becomes easily visible.

(Appendix 20)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19.
A game table characterized in that the period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach.

(Appendix 21)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19.
The game table is characterized in that the period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach.

(Appendix 22)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 21.
The game table is characterized in that the period display is a display for notifying the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timing").

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location for notifying the chance up may be fixed in response to the reach, such that when a certain reach occurs, the chance up is notified three times, and when another reach occurs, the chance up is notified twice. If this is the case, the notification may be made three times, and at other times, the notification may be made only once. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", or may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit.

(Appendix 23)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 22.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display.
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation.
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.

(Appendix 24)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 14 to 23.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 25)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display that notifies the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display before the first timing is reached.

(Appendix 26)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at the first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed.
A game table characterized in that the first speed and the second speed are different.

(Appendix 27)
The game console described in Appendix 26.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a time display.
The time display is a display in which at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period.
The display of one of the time displays is the first display.
A game table characterized in that one of the time displays is the second display.

(Appendix 28)
The game console according to Appendix 26 or 27.
A game table characterized in that the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.

(Appendix 29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 28.
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until the first time elapses.
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses.
When the first time elapses, the third display is displayed.
A game table characterized in that a fourth display is displayed when the second time elapses.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may be more reliable than the fourth display, and the fourth display may be more reliable than the third display.

(Appendix 30)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 26 to 29.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is the first type of display.
A game table characterized in that the first type of display includes the first display and the second display.

Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix 31)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The first type of display is a timer notice display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The timer notice display is a display for notifying the time until the first effect display is displayed.

(Appendix 32)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
Equipped with operating means
The first type of display is an operation validity period display.
The game table is characterized in that the operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.

(Appendix 33)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The first type of display is a period display, and is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
A game table characterized in that the first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.

(Appendix 34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 33.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 35)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display.
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of the time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "time notification") may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized in that when the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

(Appendix 36)
The game console described in Appendix 35.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the second display size.
A game table characterized in that the second display size is larger than the first display size.

(Appendix 37)
The game console according to Appendix 35 or 36.
A game table characterized in that when the display of the countdown display is started, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.

(Appendix 38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
A game table characterized in that when the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display mode is changed to the second display mode than when the display mode is displayed as the first display mode.

(Appendix 40)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 39.
A game table characterized in that the start and end of the countdown display are performed within the period of one symbol variation display.

(Appendix 41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 40.
A game table characterized in that when the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.

(Appendix 42)
The game console described in Appendix 41.
A game table characterized in that the time notification by the countdown display is continued even while the countdown display is moving.

(Appendix 43)
The game console described in Appendix 41.
A game table characterized in that the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted while the countdown display is moving.

(Appendix 44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 43.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the countdown display notifies that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0.
The game table is configured such that the countdown display is erased after the countdown display notifies that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0.

(Appendix 45)
The game console described in Appendix 44.
A game table characterized in that when the time until a certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.

(Appendix 46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 45.
A game table characterized in that it may not change to the second display mode.

(Appendix 47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 46.
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
A game table characterized in that the countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.

(Appendix 48)
The game console described in Appendix 47.
A game table characterized in that the countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means.

(Appendix 49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 48.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 48.
The game table is a game table characterized by being a slot machine.

(Appendix 51)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a notice display, and is
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing, and is a display for notifying the first timing.
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the first display may be erased after the first display is started and before the first timing is reached.

(Appendix 52)
The game console described in Appendix 51.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a third indication,
The third display is an effect display, and is
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display may be displayed before the first timing is reached.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display is started.
A game table characterized in that the first display is erased during the display of the third display.

(Appendix 53)
The game console described in Appendix 52.
The third display is a notice display, which is a game table.

(Appendix 54)
The game console described in Appendix 53.
A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the third display is displayed than when the third display is not displayed.

(Appendix 55)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 52 to 54.
Equipped with a directing movable means that can execute multiple types of movements
One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
A game table characterized in that the first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.

(Appendix 56)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 55.
A game table characterized in that the first display is configured to be displayed again after the first display is erased.

(Appendix 57)
The game console according to the appendices 51 to 55.
A game table characterized in that, after the first display is erased, the first display is not displayed until a certain period of time elapses.

(Appendix 58)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 55.
A game table characterized in that, after the first display is erased, the first display is re-displayed by the time when a certain period of time elapses.

(Appendix 59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 51 to 58.
The game table is characterized in that the certain period is the period during which the super reach is being executed.

(Appendix 60)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 59.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
The fourth display is different from the second display.
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing.
The game table is characterized in that the second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may be started to be displayed.

(Appendix 61)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 60.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 62)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a display including a countdown display.
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification, and is a display.
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at the timing when a certain effect is performed.
A game table characterized in that the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display.

(Appendix 63)
The game console described in Appendix 62.
A game table characterized in that the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.

(Appendix 64)
The game console described in Appendix 63.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the second display size.
A game table characterized in that the second display size is larger than the first display size and the second display size.

(Appendix 65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 64.
A game table characterized in that when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.

(Appendix 66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65.
A game table characterized in that the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display.

(Appendix 67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, rather than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end.

(Appendix 68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 67.
A game table characterized in that the display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display.

(Appendix 69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 68.
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.

(Appendix 70)
The game console described in Appendix 69.
A game table characterized in that when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at the first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at the second position. It may be a game table to play.

(Appendix 71)
The game console according to Appendix 69 or 70.
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
A game table characterized in that the display position of the first display is changed by the movement display.

(Appendix 72)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
A game table characterized in that the update display of the countdown display is continued even during the display of the movement display.

(Appendix 73)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
A game table characterized in that the update display of the countdown display is interrupted during the display of the movement display.

(Appendix 74)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 73.
The game table is characterized in that the countdown display is a time countdown display.

(Appendix 75)
The game console described in Appendix 74.
The game table is characterized in that the timing notification is a notification that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.

(Appendix 76)
The game console according to Appendix 74 or 75.
A game table characterized in that the countdown display is erased after a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.

(Appendix 77)
The game console described in Appendix 76.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
A game table characterized in that, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 77.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
A game table characterized in that when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.

(Appendix 79)
The game console described in Appendix 78.
A game table characterized in that the first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.

(Appendix 80)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 79.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 81)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 79.
The game table is a game table characterized by being a slot machine.

(Appendix A1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display.
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states, and one of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is the first state, and the first meter display. One of the plurality of types of states in the above is a third state, and the first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state.
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the fourth state.
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the sixth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state.
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations for big hits,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. A game table characterized by high expectations for big hits.

(Appendix A2)
In the game table described in Appendix A1
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. A game table characterized by being expensive.

(Appendix A3)
The game console described in Appendix A1 or A2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern.
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped.

(Appendix A4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A3.
The game table is characterized in that the fourth meter display is a display that is started to be displayed in the fourth state.

(Appendix A5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A4.
The state of one of the plurality of states in the first meter display is the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the first state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the second state.
A game table characterized in that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the first meter display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state.

(Appendix A6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A5.
Of the plurality of types of displays, one display is the first icon.
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by displaying the first icon the first number of times.
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by displaying the first icon a second number of times.
The game table is characterized in that the second number of times is less than the first number of times.

(Appendix A7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A6.
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display, and is a jackpot display.
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the third state is displayed.
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the sixth state is displayed. Game table.

(Appendix A8)
The game console described in Appendix A7.
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the second state is displayed.
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed.
A game table characterized in that the jackpot display is more likely to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than when the second state is displayed.

(Appendix A9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A8.
One of the plurality of types of production is a pseudo-continuous production.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The game table is characterized in that the pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.

(Appendix A10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A9.
One of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The game table is characterized in that the operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.

(Appendix A11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A10.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a certain effect.
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the certain effect is displayed.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The game table is characterized in that the certain effect is an effect in which the display may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.

(Appendix A12)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display.
The period display is a display that notifies the start of a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed.
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is being displayed.
The notice display is a display for notifying that the first timing is notified by the period display.
A game table characterized in that the notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.

(Appendix A13)
The game console described in Appendix A12.
The period display is a display including a cursor display, and is a display including a cursor display.
By moving the cursor display from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) via the first position, the start to end of the first period is notified. It is composed and
The second position is a position prior to the first position.
The first position is a position prior to the third position.
A game table characterized in that when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that the first timing is reached.

(Appendix A14)
The game console described in Appendix A13.
The period display is a display in which a chance-up display (first chance-up display) may be displayed.
The chance-up display is a display for notifying that the first effect display has been started at the first timing.
A game table characterized in that when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position.

(Appendix A15)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A14.
The period display is a display that may be moved and displayed.

(Appendix A16)
The game console described in Appendix A15.
A game table characterized in that the movement display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display.

(Appendix A17)
The game console according to Appendix A15 or A16.
A game table characterized in that when the movement display is performed, the display position of the period display changes.

(Appendix A18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A17.
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode.
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, it is finally a big hit (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) than when it is displayed in the first display mode. A game table characterized in that the design mode is easily displayed in a definite manner.

(Appendix A19)
The game console described in Appendix A18.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect display is performed when the first timing is reached, as compared with the case where the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. A game table characterized by being easy to start.

(Appendix A20)
The game console described in Appendix A18 or A19.
A game table characterized in that the notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode.

(Appendix A21)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A20.
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, a defometer).
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter).
A game characterized in that when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Stand.

(Appendix A22)
The game console described in Appendix A21.
A game table characterized in that it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the display mode of the fourth display mode depending on the display mode of the notice display.

(Appendix A23)
The game console according to Appendix A21 or A22.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A24)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A21 to A23.
When the notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the second display mode. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A25)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A24.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second notice indication,
The notice display is the first notice display, and is
A game table characterized in that the first notice display may be foretold by the second notice display.

(Appendix A26)
The game console described in Appendix A25.
A game table characterized in that the symbol variation display on which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the first notice display is not announced by the second notice display.

(Appendix A27)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A26.
When the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the notice display is not displayed before the period display is displayed. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A28)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A27.
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A27.
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is a display different from the period display.

(Appendix A30)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A29.
A game table characterized in that the period display is foretold by notifying that the reach effect display will be displayed by the notice display.

(Appendix A31)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A30.
The game table is characterized in that the notice display may be performed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.

(Appendix A32)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A31.
The game table is characterized in that the notice display may be performed in a symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the period display is performed.

(Appendix A33)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A32.
The notice display is a game table characterized in that the period during which the symbol stop display is performed is also displayed.

(Appendix A34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A32.
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is hidden during the period when the symbol stop display is being performed.

(Appendix A35)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A34.
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.

(Appendix A36)
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started.

(Appendix A37)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing when a certain effect may be started.
The display means is a means in which the display A may be displayed as a certain effect.
At the timing when the first display is started (hereinafter, referred to as "the first timing"), the first display may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display. A game table characterized by that.

Here, a certain effect may be the display of A. In addition, the display of the P-th display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
The game console described in Appendix A37.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display that notifies the timing at which the first display may be displayed in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
A game table characterized in that the timing at which the first display is started is notified during a change in at least a part of the display mode of the period display.

(Appendix A39)
The game console described in Appendix A38.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that when the display of A is displayed at the timing of A, the display of B is displayed.

(Appendix A40)
The game console described in Appendix A37.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the first display is displayed.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
A game table characterized in that the first display is displayed when at least a part of the change of the display mode of the timer display is completed.

(Appendix A41)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A37 to A40.
When the timing of the A is reached, the display of the A may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the display of the first A may not be displayed when the timing of the first A is reached.

(Appendix A42)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A37 to A40.
A game table characterized in that the display of the first A is always displayed when the timing of the first A is reached.

(Appendix A43)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A42.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The game table is characterized in that the second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.

(Appendix A44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A43.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
A game table characterized in that when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A45)
The game console described in Appendix A44.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed. ..

(Appendix A46)
The game console described in Appendix A44.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the first display is being changed.

(Appendix A47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A46.
A game table characterized in that when the first display is displayed at the first timing, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the first display.

(Appendix A48)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A47.
When the first display is displayed at the first timing, the first display is hidden and the first display overlaps at least a part of the displayed area. A game table characterized in that the display of A is displayed.

(Appendix A49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A48.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of types of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of types of image display means is the second image display means.
The second image display means is a means provided in front of the first image display means.
The first display is displayed by the first image display means.
A game table characterized in that the display A is displayed by the second image display means.

(Appendix A50)
The game console described in Appendix A49.
The second image display means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
When the first display is displayed by the first image display means and the first timing is reached, the second image display means may perform the previous stage effect operation. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A51)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A50.
Equipped with operating means
The game table is characterized in that the first display is a display related to the operating means.

(Appendix A52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A51.
The display means is a means in which a third display may be displayed as a certain effect.
A game table characterized in that the C-th display may be displayed at the timing when the C-th display is started (hereinafter, referred to as "C-th timing").

(Appendix A53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A52.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A54)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A52.
The game table is a game table characterized by being a slot machine.

(Appendix A55)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which a certain effect is started.
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

(Appendix A56)
The game console described in Appendix A55.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing") at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
A game table characterized in that the timing at which a certain effect is started is notified during a change in at least a part of the display mode of the period display.

(Appendix A57)
The game console described in Appendix A56.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A58)
The game console described in Appendix A55.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
A game table characterized in that when the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.

(Appendix A59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A58.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
A game table characterized in that the certain effect may not be started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A60)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A58.
A game table characterized in that the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A60.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The game table is characterized in that the second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.

(Appendix A62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A61.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
A game table characterized in that when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A63)
The game console described in Appendix A62.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed. ..

(Appendix A64)
The game console described in Appendix A62.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the first display is being changed.

(Appendix A65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A64.
In the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the display of the first display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
The game table is characterized in that the first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.

(Appendix A66)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period.
In the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
A game table characterized in that, in the first symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is configured not to change.

(Appendix A67)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period.
A game table characterized in that the certain period is started in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A68)
The game console described in Appendix A67.
The feature is that the display mode of the first display is not changed between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. Amusement table to play.

(Appendix A68)
The game console described in Appendix A67.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. A game table characterized by being.

(Appendix A69)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
The game table is characterized in that the second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A69.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A71)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A69.
The game table is a game table characterized by being a slot machine.

(Appendix A72)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing") in which a certain effect may be started.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may change depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A notice display may be performed by the first display before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A73)
The game console described in Appendix A72.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
A game table characterized in that a certain timing is notified during a change in at least a part of the display mode of the period display.

(Appendix A74)
The game console described in Appendix A73.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A75)
The game console described in Appendix A72.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
A game table characterized in that when the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.

(Appendix A76)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A75.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
A game table characterized in that the certain effect may not be started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A77)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A75.
A game table characterized in that the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A77.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The game table is characterized in that the second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.

(Appendix A79)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A78.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
A game table characterized in that when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A80)
The game console described in Appendix A79.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed. ..

(Appendix A81)
The game console described in Appendix A79.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the first display is being changed.

(Appendix A82)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A81.
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is a display for notifying the time until the certain effect is started, which is displayed by the first display.

(Appendix A83)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A82.
Equipped with operating means
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is a display relating to the operating means.

(Appendix A84)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A83.
A game table characterized in that, after the advance notice display is performed, the time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display.

(Appendix A85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A84.
The notice display is always performed by the first display before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. A game table featuring.

(Appendix A86)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A85.
When the first display is displayed, at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. A game table to play.

(Appendix A87)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A86.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A88)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A86.
The game table is a game table characterized by being a slot machine.

(Appendix A89)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means on which the first display may be displayed.
The first display is a display that notifies a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing") in which a certain effect may be started.
The display means is a means on which a second display may be displayed.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table characterized in that a plurality of the second displays (hereinafter, referred to as "plurality of second displays") may be displayed.

(Appendix A90)
The game console described in Appendix A89.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display that notifies the certain timing in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
A game table characterized in that a certain timing is notified during a change in at least a part of the display mode of the period display.

(Appendix A91)
The game console described in Appendix A90.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A91)
The game console described in Appendix A89.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
A game table characterized in that when the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.

(Appendix A92)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A91.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
A game table characterized in that the certain effect may not be started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A93)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A91.
A game table characterized in that the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A94)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A93.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
A game table characterized in that when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A95)
The game console described in Appendix A94.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed. ..

(Appendix A96)
The game console described in Appendix A94.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the first display is being changed.

(Appendix A97)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A96.
A game table characterized in that when the second display is displayed, the first display is always displayed.

(Appendix A98)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A96.
A game table characterized in that when the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed.

(Appendix A99)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A98.
The second display is a display in preparation.
The display of the plurality of older brothers is a display of a plurality of preparations.
The display of one of the plurality of preparing displays is the first preparing display.
The display of one of the plurality of preparing displays is the second preparing display.
The game table is characterized in that the first preparing display is a display displayed before the second preparing display.

(Appendix A100)
The game console described in Appendix A99.
After the first preparing display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is displayed.
After the second preparing display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed.
A game table characterized in that the first timer display is configured to be displayed before the second timer display.

Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation displays.

(Appendix A101)
The game console described in Appendix A99.
After the first preparing display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is displayed.
After the second preparing display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed.
A game table characterized in that the first timer display may be displayed before the second timer display.

(Appendix A102)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A101.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A103)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A101.
The game table is a game table characterized by being a slot machine.

(Appendix A104)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which a certain effect is started.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may change depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A notice may be given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
The game table is characterized in that the notice is a notice that a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started.

(Appendix A105)
The game console described in Appendix A104.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display that notifies a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing") at which the certain effect may be started in a certain period.
A game table characterized in that the timing at which a certain effect is started is notified during a change in at least a part of the display mode of the period display.

(Appendix A106)
The game console described in Appendix A105.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A107)
The game console described in Appendix A104.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing") at which the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized in that when the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.

(Appendix A108)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A107.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
A game table characterized in that the certain effect may not be started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A109)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A107.
A game table characterized in that the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A110)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A109.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The game table is characterized in that the second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.

(Appendix A111)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A110.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
A game table characterized in that when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A112)
The game console described in Appendix A111.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed. ..

(Appendix A113)
The game console described in Appendix A111.
A game table characterized in that the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the first display is being changed.

(Appendix A114)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A113.
The game table is characterized in that the notice is a notice display by the first display.

(Appendix A115)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to A114.
A false notice may be given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized in that even if the false notice is given, the change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started.

(Appendix A116)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to A115.
It is characterized in that a notice is given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until a certain effect is started. The game table.

(Appendix A117)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A116.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A118)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A116.
The game table is a game table characterized by being a slot machine.

(Appendix A119)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute timer production.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of a jackpot game.

(Appendix A120)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The game table is characterized in that the timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game.

(Appendix A121)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The game table is characterized in that the timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games.

(Appendix A122)
The game console according to Appendix A120 or A121.
The timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value.
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0.
The timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer effect") indicates the first time as the initial value.
The first timer effect may be executed over the first number of round games.
The first timer effect may be executed over a second number of round games.
The second number of times is more than the first number of times.
A game table characterized in that the first number of times is one or a plurality of times.

(Appendix A123)
The game console according to Appendix A120 or A121.
One round game is configured to end when the first time has passed.
The timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value.
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0.
The second time may be displayed as the initial value,
A game table characterized in that the second time is shorter than the first time.

(Appendix A124)
The game console according to any one of Appendix A119 to A123.
The certain effect is an effect in which the timer display may be started without being displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
The certain effect is an effect in which the timer display may be started with a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect").
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect").
A game table characterized in that the first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.

(Appendix A125)
The game console described in Appendix A124.
A game table characterized in that the timing at which the second effect can be started is likely to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started.

(Appendix A126)
The game console according to Appendix A124 or A125.
The first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case.
In the second case, the game table is characterized in that the timing at which the first effect is executed and the timing at which the second effect is executed are different.

(Appendix A127)
The game console described in Appendix A119 to A126.
The game table is characterized in that the certain effect is a definite effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is given.

(Appendix A128)
The game console according to Appendix A127, which cites any one of Appendix A124 to A126.
The final effect is an effect of notifying that the hold contains a symbol variation display that is a big hit.
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A129)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A124 to A126.
The certain effect is an effect that suggests that a player may be given an advantageous privilege.
The second effect is more likely to give the player a privilege than the first effect.
The first effect may be performed as a definite effect for notifying the player that an advantageous privilege is given (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
The first effect may not be the final effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
The second effect is a definite effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is given.
A game table characterized in that the second case is configured so that the second effect is more easily executed than the first case.

(Appendix A130)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A129.
The timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed indicating the certain time during execution of the jackpot game. A game table characterized by being played.

(Appendix A131)
The game console described in Appendix A130.
The timer effect is configured to be executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third case").
A game table characterized in that the certain effect in the third case is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed.

(Appendix A132)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The timer display is configured to be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and may be displayed to indicate the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. A game table characterized by being.

(Appendix A133)
The game console described in Appendix A132.
The timer display is configured to start a display change to indicate the certain time when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved.
It is configured so that the display may indicate the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when the certain condition is achieved.
A game table characterized in that, depending on the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game.

(Appendix A134)
The game console according to Appendix A119, A132 or A133.
As the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter, referred to as "11th effect") may be executed.
As the above-mentioned certain effect, an effect (hereinafter referred to as "twelfth effect") for notifying that a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is included in the hold may be executed.
The certain effect is configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time.
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect. A featured game console.

(Appendix A135)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute timer production.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game.
During the execution of the jackpot game, an effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player is given (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect") may be executed.
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once or more.

(Appendix A136)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A135.
The game table is characterized in that the effect means is a display means.

(Appendix A137)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A136.
The game table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A138)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A137.
The game table is characterized in that the certain time is a time indicating that the remaining time of the timer is 0.

(Appendix A139)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A138.
The game table is characterized in that the certain effect is an effect that can be executed even at intervals during execution of the jackpot game.

(Appendix A140)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute timer production.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
At least, the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the certain effect may be performed during the period when the new symbol variation display is not performed after the symbol variation display is completed. Game table to play.

(Appendix A141)
Display means and
It is a game table equipped with an operation means,
The display means is a means on which an operation display may be displayed.
The operation display is a display related to the operation means.
The display means is a means in which a timer display may be displayed.
The timer display is a display that announces the timing at which the operation display is displayed.
The timer display is a display in which at least a part of the timer display changes according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed.
A game table characterized in that the operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed.

(Appendix A142)
The game console described in Appendix A141.
As the timer display, the first timer display may be displayed.
When the first time elapses as a certain time after the change of at least a part of the display of the first timer display is started, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed.
As the timer display, a second timer display may be displayed.
When the second time elapses as a certain time after the change of at least a part of the display of the second timer display is started, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second time is longer than the first time.

(Appendix A143)
The game console according to Appendix A141 or A142.
Equipped with a second operating means
The operating means is the first operating means, and is
The operation display is the first operation display.
The display means is a display in which a second operation display may be displayed.
The second operation display is a display relating to the second operation means.
A game table characterized in that, during the display of the timer display, the second operation display may be displayed after a certain time until the operation display is displayed.

(Appendix A144)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A143.
A game table characterized in that the display mode of the timer display may change when the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display.

(Appendix A145)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A144.
The feature is that the display mode of the timer display may change when the display mode is changed according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display is displayed by the timer display. Game table to play.

(Appendix A146)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A145.
The display means is a means in which a notice display may be displayed.
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is a display for notifying that the timer notice is displayed.

(Appendix A147)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A141 to 146.
Whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed or the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed is configured to be determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol.
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to the result of a jackpot lottery using a random number acquired when the game ball enters the start port provided on the game board.
The probability of being judged as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") is predetermined.
The game table is characterized in that the jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.

(Appendix B1)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
It is a game table equipped with a production means capable of executing multiple productions.
The operating means is a means capable of being in a plurality of states.
One of the plurality of states is the first state,
One of the plurality of states is the second state,
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
One of the plurality of productions is a third production,
The first effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means in the first state.
The second effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect.
The second effect is not an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means.
The third effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means in the second state.
A certain effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns.
One of the plurality of patterns is the first pattern.
One of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern.
The first pattern is a pattern including the start of the second effect after the start of the first effect.
The second pattern is a pattern including the start of the third effect after the start of the first effect.
A game characterized in that a jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the certain effect is executed by the second pattern than when the certain effect is executed by the first pattern. Stand.

(Appendix B2)
The game console described in Appendix B1
One of the plurality of productions is the fourth production,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be an operation response effect of the operation means in the third effect.
The fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is executed.
The fourth effect is a suggestion effect regarding whether or not the symbol variation display is being executed.

(Appendix B3)
The game console described in Appendix B1 or B2.
In the first pattern, the second effect is started even when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect.
A game table characterized in that the third effect is not started if the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect in the second pattern.

(Appendix B4)
The game console described in Appendix B3.
A game table characterized in that the second effect is started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect in the second pattern.

(Appendix B5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B4.
One of the plurality of productions is the fifth production,
One of the plurality of patterns is a third pattern.
The third pattern is a pattern including the start of the third effect after the start of the fifth effect.
The fifth effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means in the second state.
A game table characterized in that the fifth aspect of the effect and the third aspect of the effect are different aspects.

(Appendix B6)
The game console described in Appendix B5.
The third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display") is displayed.
The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "fifth display") is displayed.
A game table characterized in that, in the third display and the fifth display, the fifth display is larger.

(Appendix B7)
The game console described in Appendix B5 or B6.
The third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "thirteenth display") is displayed.
The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "fifteenth display") is displayed.
At least one of the thirteenth display and the effect display surrounding the thirteenth display is displayed in the thirteenth color.
At least one of the fifteenth display and the effect display surrounding the fifteenth display is displayed in the fifteenth color.
A game table characterized in that the thirteenth color and the fifteenth color are different colors.

(Appendix B8)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B7.
One of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern.
The fourth pattern is a pattern in which the effect is not started at the timing when the first effect is started in the second pattern.
The fourth pattern is a pattern in which the third effect is started at the timing when the third effect is started in the second pattern.

(Appendix B9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B7.
One of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern.
The fourth pattern is a pattern including a pattern in which the sixth effect is started after the first effect is started.
The sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect.
The first effect is an effect of selecting whether the third effect is started or the sixth effect is started as an effect after the first effect is executed. The game table.

(Appendix B10)
The game console described in Appendix B9.
The sixth effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means in the first state.

(Appendix B11)
The game console according to Appendix B9 or B10.
A game table characterized in that, when the operating means is not operated in the first effect, the sixth effect is started after the first effect is completed (Appendix B12).
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B11.
The effect means is a means capable of executing an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "stock effect") suggesting that an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means is stocked.
The stock effect is an effect capable of stocking an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means once or a plurality of times.
The stock effect is an effect in which the stock is reduced in connection with the execution of the effect that encourages the operation of the operating means.
The first pattern is a pattern in which one stock is reduced in the stock production.
The second pattern is a game table in which one stock is reduced in the stock production.

(Appendix B13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B12.
A game table characterized in that, when the operating means is not operated in the first effect, the second effect is started after the first effect is completed.

(Appendix B14)
Multiple operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player,
It is a game table equipped with a production means capable of executing multiple productions.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
One of the plurality of productions is a third production,
The first effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means.
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect.
The second effect is not an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means.
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means.
A certain effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns.
One of the plurality of patterns is the first pattern.
One of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern.
The first pattern is a pattern including the start of the second effect after the start of the first effect.
The second pattern is a pattern including the start of the third effect after the start of the first effect.
A game characterized in that a jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the certain effect is executed by the second pattern than when the certain effect is executed by the first pattern. Stand.

(Appendix B14-1)
Multiple operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player,
It is a game table equipped with a production means capable of executing multiple productions.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
One of the plurality of productions is a third production,
One of the plurality of operating means is the first operating means, and is
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means, and is
The first effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means.
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect.
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means.
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means.
The execution of the third effect starts after the execution of the first effect is started, as compared with the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the final case.

(Appendix B15)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an icon (hereinafter, referred to as "variable icon") related to the symbol variation display being executed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the variable icon in the first display area of the display areas in the display means.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the two variable icons (hereinafter, referred to as "two variable icons").
One of the two variable icons is the first variable icon.
One of the two variable icons is the second variable icon.
The game table, wherein the second variable icon is displayed in a display area different from that of the first display area.

(Appendix B16)
The game console described in Appendix B15.
A game table characterized in that a movement animation of the second fluctuation icon (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement animation") may be displayed during the display period of the first fluctuation icon.

(Appendix B17)
The game console described in Appendix B16.
A game table characterized in that the second variable icon may be displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation.

(Appendix B18)
The game console according to Appendix B16 or B17.
The size of the second variable icon displayed in the first display area after the second moving animation is the size of the second variable icon during at least a part of the period of the moving animation. Is a different game console.

(Appendix B19)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B16 to B18.
A game table characterized in that the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B20)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B16 to B19.
A game console characterized in that the second variable icon may overlap the notice display during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B21)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B16 to B20.
A game table characterized in that the second variable icon may overlap the first variable icon and the advance notice display during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B22)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B16 to B21.
A game table characterized in that only one decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B16 to B22.
A game table characterized in that only one mini decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B24)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B16 to B23.
A game table characterized in that only one of the decorative symbol variation display and the mini decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B25)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B24.
A game console characterized in that a movement animation of the first variable icon (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation") may be displayed.

(Appendix B26)
The game console according to Appendix B25, which cites any one of Appendix B16 to B24.
A game table characterized in that the second movement animation may be started after the start of the first movement animation.

(Appendix B27)
The game console according to Appendix B25 or B26, which cites any one of Appendix B16 to B24.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display indicating the first jackpot expectation degree.
The movement display of the first display is performed during at least a part of the period of the first movement animation.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display indicating the second jackpot expectation degree.
A game table characterized in that the movement display of the second display is performed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation.

(Appendix B28)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B25 to B27, which cites any one of the appendices B16 to B24.
The movement display of the hold icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the first movement animation.
A game table characterized in that the movement display of the hold icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation.

(Appendix B29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B25 to B28.
A game table characterized in that the first variable icon may be displayed in a display area different from the first display area after the start of the first movement animation.

(Appendix B30)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B29.
A game table characterized in that the variable icon is not displayed in the first display area during at least a part of the display period of the display period of the two variable icons.

(Appendix B31)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B30.
A game table characterized in that, during the period of displaying the decorative symbol variation of 1, the number of the variation icons may increase from 1 to 2 and then decrease to 1.

(Appendix B32)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B31.
During the period of 1 decorative symbol variation display, the number of variation icons may increase from 1 to 2 and then decrease to 1, and after the decrease, increase to 2 and then decrease to 1. Game table to play.

(Appendix B33)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B32.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon.
The game table is characterized in that the number of the hold icons in the display period of the two variable icons is larger than the number of the hold icons before the display of the two variable icons.

(Appendix B34)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B33.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number hold display.
The game console is characterized in that the number of holds indicated by the number hold display is smaller than the number of hold icons during the display period of the two variable icons.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

In the above explanation, the production example during the symbol variation display before the big hit game has been mainly described. Hereinafter, an example of the effect after the big hit game is started and an example of the effect during the symbol variation display which is started after the big hit game is completed will be described.

The pachinko machine 100 described so far is provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, but may be provided with a game board of a right-handed machine. That is, since the present invention can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the so-called right-handed machine game board, the right-handed machine game board will be described below.

FIG. 175 is a schematic front view of a game board of a so-called right-handed machine as viewed from the front.

Here, the description will be centered on a configuration different from the configurations described so far, and in order to avoid duplicate explanations, the same configurations as those described so far are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be given. May be omitted. Further, even when the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 175 to 200 are given priority in the following description.

The game board 200 of the right-handed machine shown in FIG. 175 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to form a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength with which the game ball is launched by the operation of the player, the normal drawing starting port 228 and the second special drawing starting port 232, which will be described later, and the second 1 It can be separated from the special drawing start port 230. Specifically, a game in which a game nail 238 or the like is arranged with respect to the game area 124 to roll the first area (the left area in the game area) which is a route for entering the first special figure start port 230. The ball is configured to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second special figure start port 232, and conversely, a game of rolling in a second area (the right area in the game area) provided with the normal figure start port 228. The ball is configured to make it difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port 230.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 124 of the game board 200. A first movable accessory 2231 is provided above the decorative pattern display device 208, a first light emitting body 2251 in the shape of the character "Kichi" is arranged on the left side thereof, and the character "Sou" is arranged on the right side. A second light emitting means 2252 in the shape of the above is arranged. Further, a second movable accessory 2232 is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208. The first movable accessory 2231 corresponds to the Senryo box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14, and the second movable accessory 2232 corresponds to the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are provided below the decorative symbol display device 208. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 175, four general winning openings 2261 to 2264 are provided in the left region, and two general winning openings 2265 and 2266 are provided in the right region. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when the general winning opening 226 is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to obtain a predetermined number (not shown). For example, 3) balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning.

The normal drawing start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and one is provided on the right side of the game board 200. Has been done. The starting port 228 is a starting port that is expected to enter by hitting right. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Further, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 and substantially in the center of the game area 124, and a prize can be expected by hitting left. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Immediately below the first special figure starting port 230, a variable starting means called an electric tulip (electric chew) DC is provided. This electric chew DC has a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid, and the back (inside) of the pair of blade members 2321 becomes the second special drawing start port 232. The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special figure start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are opened is easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls that enter the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Since it is necessary to hit the game ball to the right-hand side to enter the normal figure start-up opening 228, it is expected that the second special figure start-up mouth 232 will also win a prize by hitting the right-hand side.

An attacker unit 2340 is provided in the area on the right between the start port 228 and the electric chew DC.

FIG. 176 is a view showing the front surface of the attacker unit 2340, and FIG. 177 is a view of the attacker unit 2340 viewed from the back surface.

The attacker unit 2340 includes a first variable winning opening 234a and a second variable winning opening 235a, and is attached to the lower right of the game area 124 on the game board 200.

The attacker unit 2340 is made of, for example, a flat plate, and includes a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a at a predetermined interval. ..

The mounting base 2340a has a rectangular opening substantially in the center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is mounted so as to cover the opening. The lower end side of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and the first door member 2341a can be opened and closed forward by driving the solenoid SOL1 shown in FIG. 177, which is mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. There is. The solenoid SOL1 shown in FIG. 177 is included in the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above.

Further, a second variable winning opening 235a, which will be described later, is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b. The configuration of the second variable winning opening 235a will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b).

FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining the internal structure of the second variable winning opening 235a, and FIG. 178 is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in the closed state, and FIG. 178 is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in the closed state. Is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in the open state. In addition, in FIG. 178 (a) and FIG. 178 (b), the decorative member 2340b is transparently shown in order to easily explain the internal structure of the second variable winning opening 235a. 179 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 176, FIG. 179 (a) is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in the closed state, and FIG. 179 (b) is a V shutter. It is a figure which shows that 2352a is in an open state. In FIG. 179, the right side of the figure is the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b), the decorative member 2340 b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, a top surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. In the decorative member 2340b, a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which the game ball can roll are formed by the wall surface, and the open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

The first rolling region SP1 is open upward, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to cover the open portion so as to be able to move forward and backward in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The shutter member 2351a is configured to be displaceable by driving the solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 177. The solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 177 is also included in the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), when the shutter member 2351a is in the state of being advanced forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is set. When the game ball is blocked from entering the first rolling region SP1 and is in a backward retracted state (open state) as shown in FIG. 179 (b), the first rolling The moving area SP1 is opened, and the game ball is allowed to enter the first rolling area SP1.

A winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged at a position connecting the first rolling region SP1 and the second rolling region SP2, and enters the first rolling region SP1. When the game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning of the second variable winning opening 235a and pays out the winning ball based on the winning. Perform the processing for.

The game ball that has passed through the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling region SP2 shown in FIG. 178. The second rolling region SP2 is configured such that a V passage 2340 g and a general passage 2340 h are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the received game ball is guided to one of the passages and discharged downward. .. A V-passage switch SW2 is arranged in the V-passage 2340g, and the game ball guided by the V-passage 2340g is configured to pass through the V-passage switch SW2. The V-passage switch SW2 is also included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the V passage switch SW2, it can be determined that the game ball has passed through the V passage 2340 g. Further, a plate-shaped V shutter 2352a is provided so as to cover the upper part of the V passage 2340g so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The V-shutter 23521a is configured to be displaceable by driving the solenoid SOL3 shown in FIG. 177. The solenoid SOL3 shown in FIG. 177 is also included in the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 179 (a), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of advancing forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a (closed state), V The entry of the game ball into the passage 2340g is blocked, and the game ball that has entered the second rolling region SP2 rolls on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a and is guided to the general passage 2340h. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 178 (b) and 179 (b), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of being retracted rearward (open state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, a game to the V passage 2340 g is performed. The ball is allowed to enter, and the game ball that has entered the second rolling region SP2 is guided to the V passage 2340 g. Further, as shown in FIG. 178, the discharge ball detection switch SW3 is arranged in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW. ing. The discharge ball detection switch SW3 is also included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of passages of the game ball of the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passages of the V passage switch SW2 and the discharge ball detection switch SW3 are the second variable of the game ball. By monitoring the in / out of the winning opening 235a, it is possible to monitor the illegal passage of the game ball into the V passage 2340g. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using a ball with a thread or a game ball (so-called deca ball) having a size larger than the regulation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 178, a partition wall 2340i is erected between the V passage 2340g and the general passage 2340h. The partition wall 2340i is provided with an inclined surface so that when a ball bite occurs, it can be easily guided to either the V passage 2340 g or the general passage 2340 h. Further, the inclined surface on the V passage 2340g side is steeper than the inclined surface on the general passage 2340h side. This is because the V shutter 2352a is provided above the V passage 2340g, so that by making the inclined surface on the V passage 2340g side steep, the game ball is less likely to stay on the inclined surface, and the game ball is moved to the V passage 2340g. You can be guided immediately to.

Further, FIGS. 176 to 179 show the general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 175. Unlike other general winning openings 2261 to 2265, this general winning opening 2266 is the only general winning opening provided in the attacker unit 2340, and is the first of the six general winning openings 2261 to 2266 shown in FIG. 175. It is the general winning opening 2266 closest to the first variable winning opening 234a, the general winning opening 2266 closest to the second variable winning opening 235a, and the general winning opening 2266 closest to the V passage 2340g. Hereinafter, this general winning opening 2266 will be referred to as a unit general winning opening 2266 in order to distinguish it from other general winning openings 2261 to 2265. Even if you miss the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a, if you win the unit general winning opening 2266, the prize ball will be paid out, and the prize ball here is in the big hit game. It corresponds to the prize ball added as a bonus.

Subsequently, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second) from the start to the end of one round of the jackpot game of the pachinko machine equipped with the above-mentioned attacker unit 2340. Each operation timing of the attacker) and the V shutter 2352a will be described.

The jackpot game starts when the final display of the jackpot symbol is completed. In this jackpot game, a jackpot game start effect may be performed, and when the jackpot game start effect is completed, one round is started. Further, in the big hit game, when the final round is finished, the big hit game end effect may be performed, and when the big hit game end effect is finished, the big hit game is finished. Alternatively, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, it can be seen that the jackpot game is completed.

In the round in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) opens and closes, when the round starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on and the first door member 2341a changes from the closed state to the open state. After that, when the round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned off and the first door member 2341a changes from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the closing time after the round (first closing time: for example, 1.5 seconds) is set, and the round ends when the closing time after the round elapses. Since the first variable winning opening 234a is not provided with the V shutter, the operation related to the V shutter is not performed.

Next, a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) opens and closes, and the second variable winning opening 235a is opened for a long time (for example, open for a maximum of 25 seconds: long open) ( For example, each operation timing of the second variable winning opening 235a and the V shutter 2352a in the 8th round of the 16R special jackpot will be described. When this round starts, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on and the shutter member 2351a changes from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on and the V shutter 2352a also changes from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set. Then, when the first V opening time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned off and the V shutter 2352a changes from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. Then, when the first V closing time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned on again and the V shutter 2352a changes from the closed state to the open state. After that, when the round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned off and the shutter member 2351a changes from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and the post-round closing time (first closing time) is set. Then, when the first V opening time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned off and the V shutter 2352a changes from the open state to the closed state. After that, the round ends when the closing time elapses after the round. The opening / closing operation of the V shutter 2352a described above is performed based on, for example, the first opening pattern data stored in the ROM 406 of the main control unit 300.

Next, in a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) opens and closes, the second variable winning opening 235a opens for a short time (for example, opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds: short opening). Each operation timing of the second variable winning opening 235a and the V shutter 2352a in the round (for example, the eighth round in the 16R jackpot described above) will be described. When this round starts, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on and the shutter member 2351a changes from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on and the V shutter 2352a changes from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the first V opening time is set. Then, when the first V opening time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned off and the V shutter 2352a changes from the open state to the closed state, but the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a is also 0.1 seconds. The solenoid SOL2 is also turned off, and the shutter member 2351a also changes from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the closing time after the round (first closing time) is set, and when the closing time after the round elapses, the round ends. Also in this case, the opening / closing operation of the V shutter 2352a is performed based on the first opening pattern data. However, since the round ends before the V shutter 2352a is opened again, the chance of the game ball passing through the V passage 2340g is only a very short period of the first V opening time immediately after the start of the round. In this way, even if the game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235a in the round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is short-opened, the game ball to the V passage 2340g as described above. It makes it difficult to pass through and suppresses the transition to an unintended control state. On the other hand, even when the second variable winning opening 235a is shortly opened, the V shutter 2352a is opened, so that the opportunity for the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g is secured. Further, since the same opening pattern data is used as the data for determining the opening / closing pattern of the V shutter 2352a regardless of whether the second variable winning opening 235a is a long opening round or a short opening round. For example, the control load such as switching the data to be used depending on whether or not it is a special jackpot is reduced.

An example of application to a pachinko machine provided with two variable winning openings has been described. For example, in a pachinko machine provided with only one variable winning opening having a V passage such as the second variable winning opening 235a. There may be.

Hereinafter, in FIGS. 180 to 200, an example of the effect including the effect during the big hit game will be described. The liquid crystal display device shown in each figure is the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 14 (b). Alternatively, it may be the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175. That is, even if the configuration of the game board 200 is different, the present invention can be applied as long as it has the configuration of a current general pachinko machine such as a liquid crystal display device, an attacker, a general winning opening, and an electric chew. .. Therefore, in FIGS. 180 to 200, an example in which the configuration of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 175 is combined with the configuration around the liquid crystal display device shown in FIG. 14B will be described. That is, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 14B are provided. Instead of the first movable accessory 2231 shown in FIG. 175, the Senryo box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 is provided, and in place of the second movable accessory 2232 shown in FIG. 175, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14 is provided. Has been done. Although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown in FIGS. 180 to 200, each effect example shown in FIGS. 180 to 200 is a second decorative symbol display device. It may be an effect example executed by the 208M and / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or in the pachinko machine 100 not provided with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be a production example. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Further, the branch number in each of the figures of FIGS. 180 to 200 is "(4)" indicating the period from the derivation of the result of the reach effect to the fixed stop shown in FIG. 31 (b), or the fixed stop. "(5)" representing the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game, or "(1)" representing the period from the start of the symbol variation display started after the end of the jackpot game to the formation of the reach state. Or something like that.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of production after hitting a probabilistic jackpot.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (4) -2, a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”) that is a big hit with 16R probability variation is confirmed and displayed. There is. The combination of decorative symbols here is different from the combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 5 (c). Further, the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display confirmed and displayed in FIG. 180 (4) -2 is the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

In addition, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Is displayed as 0). Further, the second decorative pattern may be displayed in the upper left corner. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (4) -2, since the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed on the central pedestal hs0. On the other hand, two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Both of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

When the final display of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol (the final display of the combination of the jackpot of the decorative symbol) is completed, the jackpot game is started. In FIG. 180 (5) -1, the big hit game is started, and the display of the big hit game start effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -1, the navigation character YM of the first UI unit 280 disappears, the central pedestal hs0 also disappears, and the two special figure 1 hold icons of the second UI unit 281 disappear. H11 and h12 have also disappeared, and the character MCK of Machiko-sensei (wedding Machiko-sensei) in a wedding dress is displayed with four copandas, and the big hit is celebrated. In addition, since the jackpot this time is a jackpot with a probability variation that shifts to a probabilistic state (special figure high probability state) after the jackpot game ends, the player has a jackpot that does not shift to a probability variation state after the jackpot game ends. Since it is an advantageous jackpot, the characters "super jackpot" are also displayed, and it is also notified that there is a probability variation. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, one of the decorative symbols (“decoration 7”) that has been confirmed and displayed by the combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols is displayed.

Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen, the second hold number display is continuously displayed without disappearing. Further, when the jackpot game start effect is started, the character display of "right-handed" prompting the player to hit right is first displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, that is, below the second hold number display. The character display of "right-handed" is continuously displayed during the big hit game, but may disappear once.

Further, in FIGS. 180 (5) -1 and later, the first variable winning opening 234a provided in the attacker unit 2340 and the unit general winning opening 2266 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. There is.

Although the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is omitted in the description of the examples after FIG. 180, the control state may change (for example, the control state may change between the probabilistic state and the non-probable change state). , The control state changes between the electric support state and the non-electric support state), the game state changes (the game state changes between the big hit game state and the non-big hit game state), the mode change, etc. When done, the background screen is changed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 180 (5) -2, the right-handed notification 1 is started, and the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display 2341ah imitating the first door member 2341a in the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2 remains in the fully closed state and imitates the first variable winning opening 234. A game ball heading toward display 234ah is displayed with an arrow, prompting the player to win a prize in the first variable winning opening 234a. Further, on the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340, a display 2266h imitating the unit general winning opening 2266 is also displayed. At the stage of FIG. 180 (5) -2, the first round has not yet started.

In FIG. 180 (5) -3, the right-handed notification 2 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first door member 2341ah in the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 changes to the fully open state, and the character MCK The text "Aim for the attacker with a right-handed hit" is displayed below, and the first variable winning opening 234a is urged to win a prize. Even at the stage of FIG. 180 (5) -3, the first round has not yet started.

In FIG. 180 (5) -4, the first round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the actual first variable winning opening 234a finishes the change from the fully closed state to the fully opened state, and is fully opened. It is in a state. Here, it can be considered that the round is started at the timing when the accessory operation signal is output from the main control unit 300. In this case, when the round is started, the attacker (here, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a) starts to open. Alternatively, the round can be seen as starting when the attacker begins to open. In this case, contrary to the previous case, when the attacker begins to open, the round will start.

When the first round is started, the right-handed notification 2 display disappears. However, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character display of "right-handed" continues to be displayed. Further, when the first round is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the number of rounds (here, "1R") and the cumulative number of prize balls (here, 0000000Get) in the upper center. Will be done. The cumulative number of prize balls referred to here may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the big hit game this time, or may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the big hit game during the big hit consecutive villas. However, it may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the entire period including the period between the big hit game and the big hit game (design variation display period) during the big hit consecutive villas (the same applies thereafter).

In FIG. 180 (5) -5, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 180 (5) -6, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The value of the number of prize balls (15 balls in this case) for winning one ball to the first variable winning opening 234a is added to the display of, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 0000015Get.

In FIG. 180 (5) -7, one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 180 (5) -8, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In addition, the number of prize balls (3 balls in this case) for winning one ball to the unit general prize opening 2266 is added, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 000018Get.

In one round, the first door member 2341a remains fully open for a certain opening period (eg, 29 seconds), during which opening is at the first variable winning opening 234a. If the number of prizes (for example, 10 balls) is won, the first door member 2341a will be closed even before the opening period has elapsed. Hereinafter, a certain number is referred to as an upper limit number. In this example, the number of winnings reaches the upper limit before the opening period elapses, and in FIG. 180 (5) -9, the first round is completed and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is , The change from the fully open state to the fully closed state is completed, and the fully closed state is reached. The period of FIG. 180 (5) -9 is the period of the inter-round interval. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 000156Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -9, and 10 balls are displayed in the first variable winning opening 234a during one round. There was a prize, 150 prize balls were paid out, 2 balls were won in the unit general prize opening 2266, and 6 prize balls were paid out.

In FIG. 180 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has finished changing from the fully closed state to the fully open state, and is in the fully open state. .. In FIG. 180 (5) -11, one ball is awarded to each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, it is a simultaneous prize. In addition, even if it is called simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where one winning opening has a winning first and the other winning opening has a winning before the addition display is displayed on the cumulative number of winning balls. .. In FIG. 180 (5) -12, priority is given to winning the first variable winning opening 234a, which has a relatively large number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 180 (5) -12 is 000171 Get. In the following FIG. 180 (5) -13, the number of prize balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 180 (5) -13 is 000174 Get. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning the unit general winning opening 2266, which has a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both prize ball numbers may be added and displayed at once, and the cumulative prize ball number display shown in FIG. 180 (5) -12 may be 000174 Get.

In FIG. 180 (5) -14, the first variable winning opening 234a has the tenth winning ball, and in FIG. 180 (5) -15, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls changes from 000294 Get to 000309 Get, and FIG. 180 In (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. Along the way, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a, and the eleventh winning ball (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for the over-winning portion is additionally displayed, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 00324Get. The first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a shown in FIG. 180 (5) -17 has finished the change from the fully open state to the fully closed state and is in the fully closed state. Subsequently, in FIG. 180 (5) -18, the sound A is output from the speaker 120. This sound A is an over-winning sound that notifies that there has been an over-winning. Although the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, it may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

In FIGS. 180 (5) -19, the third round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has finished changing from the fully closed state to the fully open state, and is in the fully open state. .. After that, round digestion proceeds. In the round digestion here, each round will be won up to the maximum number, but no over-winning will occur.

In FIGS. 180 (5) -20, the 16th round, which is the final round, is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a finishes changing from the fully closed state to the fully open state, and is in the fully open state. It has become. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -20 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 002331 Get, and 22 in the unit general winning opening 2266 between the 1st round and the 15th round. There was a prize for the ball, and 66 balls were paid out as the prize balls for the unit general prize opening 2266. In FIG. 180 (5) -21, the final 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in a fully closed state. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 00240Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -21, and even in 16 rounds, the maximum number of prizes is won, and the unit general prize opening 2266 is 3 There was a prize for the ball, and 159 balls were paid out as the prize balls for the 16th round.

When the final round is completed, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 180 (5) to 22 displays the cumulative number of prize balls of 00240Get and is called the next probability change. The character display is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 180 (5) -23, in which the ending effect still continues, a winning sound (blessing sound) corresponding to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is sound B, but may be the same sound A as the over winning sound. The pitch of the sound B may be lower than that of the sound A, or may be higher than that of the sound A. However, the sound A has a larger number of prize balls than the sound B, and the player The sound A may be higher than the sound B because it may make the person feel profitable. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -23, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by adding according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed. The display is 002493 Get.

Even if the speaker 120 outputs a winning sound (blessing sound) every time the first variable winning opening 234a is won and / or every time the unit general winning opening 2266 is won. Good. Alternatively, the winning sound (blessing sound) may be output from the speaker 120 each time there is a winning in which the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed.

In FIG. 180 (4) -1, the jackpot game end effect is finished, and it is just before the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols that has been confirmed and displayed immediately before the start of the jackpot game that has been performed so far ("Decoration 7"-" "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed on the upper left of the display. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls here is not 002493 Get, but 002493 is being acquired. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls is continuously displayed even during the probability change state, but during the probability change state, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed. In addition, the addition display according to the winning of other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 is not performed. Therefore, in the next big hit game, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls starts from 002493. In the example shown in FIG. 180, the period in which the cumulative number of prize balls is added and displayed is the jackpot game period in which an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation) is won and executed. Even in the probabilistic state, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed, or the addition display according to the winning of other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be performed. Good. In this case, the period in which the cumulative number of prize balls is added and displayed is a period including a jackpot game period in which an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation) is won and executed, and is in the probability variation state. It will include the period. Alternatively, when a jackpot game executed by winning an advantageous jackpot is held in a row, the period during which the cumulative prize balls are additionally displayed is between the period of the jackpot game and the period of the jackpot game. It may be a period including a period.

In addition, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed from the period of the jackpot start production, and during the period of adding and displaying the cumulative prize balls, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening is the period of the jackpot start production. May be included (same up to the example shown in FIG. 180). Furthermore, the period for displaying the cumulative number of prize balls includes the period of the interval between rounds and the period of the jackpot end effect, but only one of these periods may be excluded, or both may be excluded. It may be excluded (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 180). In addition, the period for adding and displaying the cumulative number of prize balls also includes the period of the interval between rounds and the period of the jackpot end effect, but only one of these periods may be excluded, or both. May be excluded (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 180).

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example of production after hitting a big hit without probability change. In the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 181, the description overlapping with the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 can be applied to the omitted description. ..

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (4) -2, a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) that is a 16R jackpot is confirmed and displayed. This combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" may be confirmed and displayed in the case of a jackpot with probability variation, and may be confirmed and displayed in the case of a jackpot without probability variation. It is different from the combination of decorative patterns shown in 5 (c). In the example shown in FIG. 181, it is a 16R jackpot without probability change. In addition, it may be a combination of decorative symbols (for example, a combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") that is confirmed and displayed only in the case of a big hit without probability change. Further, the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display confirmed and displayed in FIG. 181 (4) -2 is also a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

In FIG. 181 (5) -1, the big hit game is started, and the display of the big hit game start effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This jackpot is a jackpot without probability change that does not shift to the probability change state (special figure high probability state) after the jackpot game ends and remains in the non-probability change state (special figure low probability state), and is displayed at the time of the jackpot with probability change. Instead of the character display of "super big hit", the character display of mere "big hit" is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, one of the decorative symbols (“decoration 2”) that has been confirmed and displayed by the combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols is displayed.

Even in FIGS. 181 (5) -1 and later, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. There is.

Subsequently, in FIG. 181 (5) -2, the right-handed notification 1 is started, and the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed. The first door member 2341ah remains fully closed, and a game ball heading for the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed with an arrow.

In FIG. 181 (5) -3, the right-handed notification 2 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first door member 2341ah of the first variable winning opening in the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 , It changes to the fully open state, and the character display "Aim at the attacker by hitting right" is displayed below the character MCK.

In FIG. 181 (5) -4, the first round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the actual first variable winning opening 234a has been completely opened. When the first round is started, the display of the right-handed notification 2 disappears, and the number of rounds is displayed (here, "1R") and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed (here, 0000000Get). The cumulative number of prize balls referred to here may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the big hit game this time, or may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the big hit game during the big hit consecutive villas. , It may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the whole period including the period between the big hit game and the big hit game (design variation display period) during the big hit consecutive villa.

In FIG. 181 (5) -5, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 181 (5) -6, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The value of the number of prize balls (15 balls in this case) for winning one ball to the first variable winning opening 234a is added to the display of, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 0000015Get.

In FIG. 181 (5) -7, one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266, but as shown in FIG. 181 (5) -8 that follows, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls remains 0000015Get. That is, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added during the game of the big hit (here, the big hit without probability change) which is relatively disadvantageous to the game among the big hits. In addition to whether or not there is a probability variation, whether it is relatively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may be whether or not it has an electric support, or even if the probability variation is advantageous and the electric support is disadvantageous. It may be good, the number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds is advantageous and 2 rounds are disadvantageous), and it depends on whether it is a big hit with a ball (the attacker opening time is long) or a big hit without a ball (the attacker opening time is short). There may be. Further, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 can obtain a relatively large number of winning balls and a relatively small number of winning balls for one winning. It can be regarded as a non-winning opening, and the number of prize balls for winning not only the unit general winning opening 2266 but also other winning openings 2261 to 2265 is not added. Alternatively, conversely, of the six general winning openings 2261 to 2266, only the unit general winning opening 2266 may be a general winning opening in which the number of prize balls is not added.

Eventually, the number of winnings reached the upper limit before the opening period elapsed, and in FIGS. 181 (5) -9, the first round was completed and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a was fully closed. The transition to the state has been completed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 181 (5) -9 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 00150 Get, and during one round, 10 balls are displayed in the first variable winning opening 234a. There was a prize, and 150 prize balls were paid out.

In FIG. 181 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has finished shifting to the fully opened state. In FIG. 181 (5) -11, one ball is won for each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266, but only the number of winning balls for the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a is added. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed and shown in FIG. 181 (5) -12 is 000165 Get. That is, the addition display of the number of prize balls to the prize in the unit general prize opening 2266 is not performed here either.

In FIG. 181 (5) -14, the first variable winning opening 234a has the tenth winning ball, and in FIG. 181 (5) -15, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls has changed from 00285 Get to 000300 Get, and FIG. In (5) -16, while the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the fully closed state, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a and 11 balls. Eye winning (over winning) has occurred. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 181 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for the over-winning portion is additionally displayed, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 00315Get. Subsequently, in FIGS. 181 (5) -18, the over-winning sound A is output from the speaker 120. However, the over winning sound may not be output during the jackpot game, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Alternatively, during the jackpot game, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the number of prize balls for the over prize is not added and displayed, the over prize sound is not output, and the fact that there is an over prize is not notified. You may do it. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the over prize is not added and displayed, the over prize sound may be output, and the display indicates that there is an over prize (for example, the character display "Over" is displayed). You may keep in mind.

In FIGS. 181 (5) -19, the third round has started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has finished shifting to the fully open state. After that, round digestion proceeds. In the round digestion here, each round will win up to the maximum number.

In FIGS. 181 (5) -20, the 16th round, which is the final round, has started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has been completely opened. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (5) -20 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 002295 Get, and three over prizes (45) are displayed between the first round and the 15th round. Sphere) has occurred. In FIG. 181 (5) -21, the final 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in a fully closed state. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 00245Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (5) -21, which means that even in 16 rounds, the maximum number of prizes has been won.

In FIGS. 181 (5) -22, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the jackpot game ends with the display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 00245Get on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure. The text display "End" is displayed to notify that. During this ending effect, the game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266, but the addition display of the number of winning balls for the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed here either, and FIG. 181 (5) -23. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in (1) remains 002445 Get.

In FIG. 181 (4) -1, the jackpot game end effect is finished, and it is just before the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (4) -1 displays a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”), and is a cumulative prize ball. The number display has disappeared. In addition, the character display of "right-handed" displayed below the second hold number display in the upper right corner of the display screen has also disappeared. In this example, after the jackpot game ends, the probabilistic state (special figure high probability state) does not shift and remains in the non-probability state (special figure low probability state). A character display prompting the player to strike left is displayed, such as "Please return to", and the player aims at the first special figure starting port 230.

In the example shown in FIG. 181 described above, the period in which the cumulative number of prize balls is added and displayed is the jackpot game period in which a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot without probability change) is won and executed.

In addition, even after the big hit game is finished, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls may be continuously displayed, or when the big hit game is finished, the addition display according to the winning to the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed. , Not limited to the unit general winning opening 2266, addition display according to the winning to other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be performed.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a timer advance notice effect is performed during a jackpot game and the player is promoted to a jackpot with probability variation. In the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 182, the description overlapping with the description of the effect example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 may be omitted, but the omitted description includes the effect example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181. The description is applicable.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (4) -2, the combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of decorative symbols that is a 16R jackpot, is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, the player cannot tell whether the combination of the decorative patterns has a probability change or no probability change just by looking at the combination of the decorative patterns. In the case of a big hit with no probability change, the promotion effect is not performed as in the example described with reference to FIG. 181. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with a probability change, a promotion effect is performed, and the player knows that the big hit with a probability change is seen by seeing this promotion effect. Even if it is a big hit with no probability change, the promotion effect may be started and the promotion effect may fail. Further, the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display confirmed and displayed in FIG. 181 (4) -2 is also a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

From Fig. (4) -2 in the upper left of FIG. 182 to Fig. (5) -13 in the center of the figure, it is the same as in Fig. 181. ) -14, the eighth round has started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has finished shifting to the fully open state. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (5) -14 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 0001275 Get, and a maximum number of prizes is won in each round from the 1st round to the 7th round. Between the round and the start of the 8th round, 15 over-prize (225 balls) have occurred. After the 8th round is started, the timer advance notice effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the remaining time is 3 seconds on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 182 (5) -15. A timer notice display j indicating that is displayed.

In FIG. 182 (5) -16, the countdown of the timer notice display j is started, and in FIG. 182 (5) -17, the remaining time of the timer notice display j is 0 seconds. Between FIG. 182 (5) -16 and FIG. 182 (5) -17, there are three prizes in the first variable winning opening 234a, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00335Get. In the timer advance notice effect, when the timer advance notice display j reaches 0 seconds in the countdown, a certain effect is started. In FIG. 182 (5) -18, a promotion effect is started as a certain effect. That is, first, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14 rises from the initial position to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A part of the display of the cumulative prize balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, and the display of the cumulative prize balls is overlapped by the player. It is more difficult to see after being done than before. The entire display of the cumulative number of prize balls may be overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E. Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (5) -19, the characters "promotion" are displayed on the raised family crest accessory 224E, and it is notified that the jackpot has a probability change.

Even if the timer notice display j reaches 0 seconds in the countdown, the family crest accessory 224E may not rise. In this case, the promotion fails and the player is a big hit with no probability change. You will know. In addition, even if the family crest character 224E rises, the characters "sorry" may be displayed instead of the characters "promotion". In this case as well, the promotion fails and the player has no probability change. You will know that it was a big hit. Alternatively, when the timer notice display j is started, the characters "promotion" may always be displayed after the family crest accessory 224E rises, or the family crest accessory 224E may not rise, but the family crest role. When the object 224E rises, the word "promotion" may always be displayed.

In FIG. 182 (5) -20, the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the family crest display k is displayed under one of the decorative symbols (“decoration 2”) that has been confirmed and displayed by the combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols. The display k of this family crest is a display indicating that it has been promoted, that is, it is a big hit with a probability variation, and continues to be displayed until the end of the big hit game. Further, during the promotion effect in which the family crest accessory 224E was rising, the first variable winning opening 234a received a prize up to the maximum number, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 182 (5) -20, The display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00425 Get.

In the above explanation, the promotion effect is from the start of the rise of the family crest character 224E to the display of the characters "promotion", but the promotion effect is from the start of the rise of the family crest character 224E to the return of the family crest character 224E to the initial position. Alternatively, the promotion effect may be from the start of the timer advance notice effect to the display of the characters "promotion", or the promotion effect may be from the start of the timer advance notice effect to the return of the family crest accessory 224E to the initial position.

In FIG. 182 (5) -21, the ninth round has started. When the promotion effect is performed and the promotion is successful, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general prize opening 2266 will be added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. That is, until the promotion is successful, as shown in FIG. 182 (5) -7, even if there is a prize in the unit general prize opening 2266, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed and the number of prize balls for the prize is displayed. It was not added. In terms of control (internal), it is determined whether or not there is a probability change at the stage where the jackpot type is determined before the start of the symbol change (the stage of the special figure-related lottery process (steps S229, S231) shown in FIG. 7). It has been done, and promotion is just for production.

In FIG. 182 (5) -22, one ball was won in the unit general winning opening 2266 during the execution of 9 rounds, and in the following FIG. 182 (5) -23, it was displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The number of prize balls (3 balls in this case) for the winning is added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00214Get. Further, in FIGS. 182 (5) to 24, a winning sound (blessing sound) corresponding to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is sound B, but may be the same sound A as the over winning sound.

In FIG. 182 (5) -25, the final 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully closed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (5) -25 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 00246Get.

In FIGS. 182 (5) and 26, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure displays the cumulative number of prize balls of 00245Get and the character display of the next probability change. Is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a continuation of the production example shown in FIG. 182, and further showing the first half of the production example when the V prize is successfully won during the big hit game.

In FIG. 183 (5) -27, which continues from FIG. 182 (5) -26, the ending effect is still continued, and the winning sound (blessing sound) corresponding to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. ing. Here, the output sound may be the same sound B as the output sound output by the timing of FIGS. 182 (5) -24, or may be a different output sound (sound B'). That is, as the output sound corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening, the same type of sound may be used during the round and during the ending effect, or different types of sound may be used. This is the same not only in the production example shown in FIG. 182 but also in the production example shown in other drawings. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 183 (5) -27, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by adding according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed. The display is 00246Get. It should be noted that the addition display according to the winning of the general winning opening may not be performed during the ending effect, and conversely, it may be performed only during the ending effect without being performed during the round. This is also the same not only in the production example shown in FIG. 182 but also in the production example shown in other drawings.

In FIG. 183 (4) -1, the jackpot game end effect is finished, and it is just before the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols that has been confirmed and displayed immediately before the start of the jackpot game that has been performed so far ("Decoration 2"-" "Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed on the upper left of the display. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls here is not 00246Get, but 00246 is being acquired. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls is continuously displayed even during the probability change state, but during the probability change state, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed. In addition, the addition display according to the winning of other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 is not performed. Therefore, in the next big hit game, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls starts from 00246.

In the example shown from FIG. 182 to FIG. 183, the period in which the cumulative prize balls are added and displayed is the jackpot game period in which an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation) is won and executed. However, the player does not know that there is a probability change until the promotion is successful, and after the promotion is successful, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 will be performed. That is, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the notification of promotion to the probabilistic change, only the addition display according to the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a is performed, and from the probabilistic promotion to the end of the jackpot game. During the period of, both the addition display according to the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a and the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 are performed. Looking at the number of rounds, until the 8th round in which the promotion was performed is completed, the addition display according to the winning in the first variable winning opening 234a is not performed, and the 8th and 9th rounds are not displayed. Addition display may be performed according to the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a from the interval between the intervals or from the start of the ninth round. In addition, after the character display of "promotion" is displayed, the addition display according to the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a may be performed. In this case, the unit general winning opening is displayed from the middle of the 8th round. Addition display will be performed according to the winning of 2266. Furthermore, from the start or middle of the 8th round, or from the 1st round, additional display may be performed according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 as a notice of successful promotion.

Next, an example of the production when the V prize is successfully won during the big hit game will be described.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (4) -2, a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”) that is a 16R jackpot is confirmed and displayed. In this combination of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", in a certain round (here, 8 rounds), the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) shown in FIG. 175 or the like opens and closes. It operates, and the V shutter 2352a shown in FIG. 178 also opens and closes, and when the game ball passes through the V passage 2340 g, it is a combination of jackpot decorative symbols that shift to a probable change state after the jackpot game, and is shown in FIG. It is different from the combination of decorative patterns. The fact that the game ball passes through the V passage 2340 g is called "V winning". The control state (game state) during the symbol variation display confirmed and displayed in FIG. 183 (4) -2 is the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

In FIG. 183 (5) -1, the big hit game is started, and the display of the big hit game start effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this stage, since the game ball has not passed through the V passage 2340 g, the character display of "super jackpot" is displayed instead of the character display of "super jackpot" displayed at the time of the jackpot with probability variation. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, one of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4”) that has been confirmed and displayed by the combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols is displayed.

Even in FIGS. 183 (5) -1 and later, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. There is.

Subsequently, in FIG. 183 (5) -2, the right-handed notification 1 is started. In the right-handed notification 1 here, a display 234ah imitating the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed, and the first door member 2341ah remains in the fully closed state, and the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed. The heading game ball is displayed with an arrow. Since the jackpot with probability variation has not been achieved yet, the first variable prize that becomes a part of the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 displayed in the right-handed notification 1 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2, which is the jackpot with probability variation. Only the display 234ah that imitates the mouth 234a is displayed, and the size of the display is relatively small and is a plain display. In addition, the unit general winning opening 2266 is not displayed. This is because, at this stage, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 displayed in the right-handed notification 1 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2 may be displayed. In this case, the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 functions as a suggestion (notice) that it is a jackpot (a kind of advantageous jackpot) that can be expected to obtain a probability change by winning a V.

In FIG. 183 (5) -3, the right-handed notification 2 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first of the first variable winning openings in the display 234ah imitating the first variable winning opening 234a. The door member 2341ah is changed to the fully open state, and the character display "Aim at the attacker by hitting right" is displayed below the character MCK.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 183 (5) -4 to (5) -17 shows FIG. 182 (5) -4 except for the difference in the display of the decorative symbol on the upper left side of the display screen. It is the same as the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. (5) to 17 and a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but in FIG. 5 (5) -15, a timer advance notice effect is started. Further, up to FIGS. 183 (5) -13, the first variable winning opening 234a provided in the attacker unit 2340 and the unit general winning opening 2266 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, during the eight rounds shown in FIGS. 183 (5) -14 to 184 (5) -22, the second decorative symbol display device 208L provided on the attacker unit 2340 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A variable winning opening 235a and a unit general winning opening 2266 are shown. In the second variable winning opening 235a, the shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction, but here, the shutter member 2351a is schematically shown as a rotating type. When the 8th round is started, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a remains fully closed, but as shown in FIG. 183 (5) -14, the second variable winning opening The shutter member 2351a of 235a shifts from the fully closed state to the fully open state. On the other hand, the V shutter 2352a that opens and closes the entrance of the V passage 2340g remains in the fully closed state. In FIGS. 183 (5) -15 to 15 to (5) -17, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is increasing, which is due to the second variable winning opening 235a. This is the result of adding the number of prize balls to the prize.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing the latter half of the production example when the V winning is successful during the big hit game, and further shows an example of notifying the winning every time there is a winning in the general winning opening during the big hit game. ..

FIG. 184 (5) -18 following FIG. 183 (5) -17 is the same as FIG. 182 (5) -18 except for the difference in the display of the decorative symbol on the upper left side of the display screen, and the timer notice display j. A certain production has been started in response to the fact that the countdown has reached 0 seconds. In FIGS. 184 (5) -18, a V winning effect is started as a certain effect. First, in FIGS. 184 (5) -18, as in the promotion effect shown in FIG. 182 (5) -18, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14 rises from the initial position to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, a part of the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is overlapped by this family crest accessory 224E. Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (5) -19, the characters "Aim for the right V" are displayed on the raised family crest accessory 224E to encourage the V prize. Subsequently, in FIG. 184 (5) -20, the V shutter 2352a provided at the back of the second variable winning opening 235a in the fully open state also changes from the fully closed state to the fully open state, and the V passage 2340 g indicated by “V” is formed. The opening is made, and a game ball wins a prize in the V passage 2340 g. By winning the game ball in the V passage 2340 g (V prize), it is confirmed that the state shifts to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed. If there is no V prize, the non-probability state remains even after the jackpot game is completed. Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (5) -21, the letter "V" is displayed next to the raised family crest accessory 224E, and it is notified that there was a V prize, that is, the probability change acquisition.

Here, when the V prize production is started, the V prize is easy, and if the game ball is launched aiming at the attacker unit 2340, the V prize can be almost won, but the V prize production starts. Even if it is done, it may be difficult or impossible to win a V prize. For example, if the V shutter 2352a opens only for a moment or does not open at all, or if the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens only for a moment, V winning becomes difficult or impossible. Further, even if the timer notice display j reaches 0 seconds in the countdown, the family crest accessory 224E may not rise. In this case, the V winning effect is not started and the V shutter 2352a is not opened. , The probability change acquisition fails, and the player knows that there is no probability change. In addition, even if the family crest accessory 224E rises, the character "Sorry" may be displayed instead of the character "Aim for the right V". The player will know that there is no probability change. Alternatively, when the timer notice display j is started, after the family crest accessory 224E rises, the characters "Aim at the right V" may always be displayed, or the family crest accessory 224E may not rise. When the family crest accessory 224E rises inside, the characters "Aim at the right V" may be displayed without fail.

In FIG. 184 (5) -22, the family crest accessory 224E is lowered to the initial position, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the family crest display k is displayed under one of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4”) that has been confirmed and displayed by the combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols. The display k of this family crest is a display indicating that the V winning effect has been performed, and continues to be displayed until the end of the big hit game. In addition, in FIG. 184 (5) -22, the letter "V" displayed in FIG. 184 (5) -21 overlaps with the family crest display k. Further, during the V prize production in which the family crest accessory 224E was rising, the second variable winning opening 235a received a prize up to the maximum number, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 184 (5) -22. , The display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00425 Get.

In the above explanation, the process from the start of the rise of the family crest character 224E to the display of the letter "V" was the V prize production, but the period from the start of the rise of the family crest character 224E to the return of the family crest character 224E to the initial position is the V prize. It may be an effect, a V prize effect may be produced from the start of the timer advance notice effect to the display of the character "V", or a promotion effect may be performed from the start of the timer advance notice effect to the return of the family crest accessory 224E to the initial position.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 184 (5) -23 to FIG. 184 (4) -1 shows FIG. 182 (5) -21, except for the difference in the display of the decorative symbol on the upper left side of the display screen. It is the same as the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 183 (4) -1, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, up to FIGS. 184 (5) -22, a second variable winning opening 235a provided in the attacker unit 2340 and a unit general winning opening 2266 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, during the big hit game after the ninth round shown in FIGS. 184 (5) -23 to 184 (5) -29, the attacker unit 2340 was provided on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , The first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 are shown. In FIGS. 184 (5) -23 to (5) -29, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is increasing, which is due to the first variable winning opening 234a. This is the result of adding the number of prize balls for winning and the number of prize balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the 8th round, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 was not added, but it is later than the round that won the probability change (8 rounds in this case). , From the interval between the 8th and 9th rounds, or from the start of the 9th round to the end of the jackpot game, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general prize opening 2266 is also added and the cumulative prize balls A display of numbers is displayed. After the V prize is won, the number of prize balls for the prize in the unit general prize opening 2266 may be added and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed. In this case, the unit starts from the middle of the 8th round. The number of prize balls for winning the general prize opening 2266 will also be added. Further, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed as a notice that the V winning effect is started from the start or the middle of the eighth round, or from the first round.

Next, an example will be described in which the winning is notified each time there is a winning in the general winning opening during the big hit game. This example has many similarities to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, and the duplicate description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 can be applied.

FIGS. 184 (4) -2 to (5) -3 are the same as those of FIGS. 180 (4) -2 to (5) -3. Has been done.

In FIG. 184 (5) -4, the first round is started, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened, and the display of the right-handed notification 2 disappears. However, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character display of "right-handed" continues to be displayed. Further, when the first round is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the number of rounds (here, "1R") and the cumulative number of prize balls (here, 0000000Get) in the upper center. Will be done. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 184 (5) -4, the remaining number of times that the first variable winning opening 234a can be won is indicated by the number of display of the icon BI of the face of the chief. .. That is, it is indicated by the icon BI of the face of the ten chiefs that there are 10 balls left until the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a reaches the upper limit, and at this timing, even one ball It means that you have not won a prize. At the time of round disclosure, no icon BI of Bancho's face is displayed, and every time there is a prize in the first variable winning opening 234a, the icon BI of Bancho's face increases by one. There may be.

In FIG. 184 (5) -5, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 184 (5) -6, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The value of the number of prize balls (15 balls in this case) for winning one ball in the first variable winning opening 234a is added to the display of The BI has been reduced by one, and the icon BI of the face of the nine chiefs is displayed.

In FIG. 184 (5) -7, one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 184 (5) -8, "+3" is added to the background color of a certain color on the character MCK of Mr. Machiko. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification with the characters "" is displayed, and one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266 is displayed on the display of the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The number of prize balls (3 balls in this case) is added to the prize, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 000018Get. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification may be displayed at the same time as the addition display of the cumulative prize ball number display, may be displayed before the addition display, or may be displayed after the addition display. Good. Further, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification may disappear in an instant, may disappear when the addition is displayed, or may continue to be displayed until the next winning of the unit general winning opening 2266. However, it may continue to be displayed until one of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 wins a prize.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 184, and further showing an example in which the winning is notified each time the attacker wins a prize during the jackpot game.

In the first round, the first variable winning opening 234a was awarded up to the maximum number, all the icon BI of the face of the bancho disappeared, and the unit general winning opening 2266 was awarded a total of two balls. In FIG. 185 (5) -9 showing the state of the interval between the first round and the second round, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 000156 Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 185 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In addition, 10 Bancho face icons BI are displayed. In FIG. 185 (5) -11, one ball is awarded to each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, it is a simultaneous prize. In addition, even if it is called simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where one winning opening has a winning first and the other winning opening has a winning before the addition display is displayed on the cumulative number of winning balls. .. In FIG. 185 (5) -12, priority is given to winning the first variable winning opening 234a, which has a relatively large number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12 is 000171 Get, the icon BI of the face of the bancho is reduced by one, and the icon BI of the face of the bancho is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12, a display INH of a general prize opening prize notification in which the characters "+3" are displayed on a background color of a certain color is also displayed. Later, it is suggested that the number of prize balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 will also be added. Further, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B notifies that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, but since the addition display of the number of prize balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is delayed, the sound output goes first. It has been broken. However, the sound B is output at the same timing as the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification, or at a timing that is not so different. In the following FIG. 185 (5) -13, the number of prize balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 185 (5) -13 is 000174 Get. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification disappears according to the addition display. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning the unit general winning opening 2266, which has a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both prize balls may be added and displayed at once, and the cumulative prize balls shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12 may be displayed as 000174 Get.

In FIG. 185 (5) -14, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a with only one icon BI of the face of the bancho being displayed, and this winning is the tenth ball, which is the upper limit. Will be a prize. In FIG. 185 (5) -15, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is changed from 000294 Get to 000309 Get, and in FIG. 185 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the fully open state. It is in the process of changing from to fully closed state. Along the way, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a, and the eleventh winning ball (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for over winning is additionally displayed, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 00324Get, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. In the center of the device 208L, the display ONH of the over-prize notification in which the characters "celebration +15" are displayed on the background color of a certain color together with the character of the princess is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 185 (5) -18, the sound A is output from the speaker 120. This sound A is an over-winning sound that notifies that there has been an over-winning. Although the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, it may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

In FIGS. 185 (5) -19, the third round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In addition, 10 Bancho face icons BI are displayed. After that, round digestion proceeds. In the round digestion here, each round will be won up to the maximum number, but no over-winning will occur.

In FIG. 185 (5) -20, the 16th round, which is the final round, is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -20 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 002331 Get, and 22 from the 1st round to the 15th round at the unit general winning opening 2266. There was a prize for the ball, and 66 balls were paid out as the prize balls for the unit general prize opening 2266. In addition, 10 Bancho face icons BI are displayed. In FIG. 185 (5) -21, the final 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in a fully closed state. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -21 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 00240Get, and even in 16 rounds, the maximum number of prizes is won, and the unit general prize opening 2266 is 3 There was a prize for the ball, and 159 balls were paid out as the prize balls for the 16th round.

When the final round is completed, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 185 (5) to 22 displays the cumulative number of prize balls of 00240Get and is called the next probability change. The character display is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 185 (5) -23, in which the ending effect is still continued, the winning sound (blessing sound) corresponding to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is sound B, but may be the same sound A as the over winning sound. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -23, a general winning opening winning notification in which the character "+3" is displayed on the background color of a certain color on the character display of the next probability change. INH is displayed, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as an addition according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 002493 Get.

Since FIG. 185 (4) -1 is the same as FIG. 180 (4) -1, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, the unit general winning opening 2266 is notified every time there is a winning. In addition to the unit general winning opening 2266, when there is a prize in other general winning openings 2261 to 2265, an additional display is added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls and the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is displayed. You may. Alternatively, only the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification may be displayed without performing the addition display. Further, in this example, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is displayed a plurality of times, but the display positions are different for each. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification may have different display modes such as different background colors, different shapes, and different characters appearing at the same time. Further, in this example, in addition to the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification, the display ONH of the over winning notification is also displayed. The display modes of the general winning opening winning notification display INH and the over winning notification display ONH differ depending on the presence or absence of a character. That is, the display ONH of the over winning notification is a special display as compared with the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification because the character is also displayed.

Next, an example of notifying the winning of the attacker each time during the jackpot game will be described. This example also has many similarities to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, and the duplicate description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 can be applied.

FIGS. 185 (4) -2 to (5) -5 are the same as those of FIGS. 180 (4) -2 to (5) -5, and although detailed description is omitted, the first round of the jackpot game Is started, and one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a.

In FIG. 185 (5) -6, the cumulative number of prize balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed as the number of prize balls for winning one ball in the first variable winning opening 234a (15 in this case). The value of the ball) is added, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 0000015Get, and one icon BI of the face of the chief is displayed. Further, the sound C is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound C notifies that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. In this example, for the winning of one ball to the first variable winning opening 234a, three types of notifications such as addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, additional display of the icon BI of the face of the bancho, and output of sound C are performed. However, these three types of notifications may be performed simultaneously or separately. For example, the cumulative number of prize balls may be added and displayed, the icon BI of the face of the bancho may be added, and the sound C may be output, or the cumulative number of prize balls may be added, the output of the sound C, and the face of the bancho. It may be performed in the order of additional display of the icon BI of the bancho, or it may be performed in the order of output of sound C, addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls, and additional display of the icon BI of the face of the bancho. The additional display of the face icon BI, the addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls, and the output of the sound C may be performed in this order, or the additional display of the face icon BI of the Bancho, the output of the sound C, and the cumulative number of prize balls. It may be performed in the order of addition display, output of sound C, additional display of the icon BI of the face of the bancho, and addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls. Further, the cumulative number of prize balls may be added and the icon BI of the chief's face may be additionally displayed at the same time, and the sound C may be output before or after that, or the cumulative number of prize balls may be added and displayed. The sound C may be output at the same time, and the additional display of the Bancho's face icon BI may be performed before or after that, or the additional display of the Bancho's face icon BI and the output of the sound C may be performed at the same time. The cumulative number of winning balls may be added and displayed before or after. Alternatively, among the three types of additional display of the cumulative number of prize balls, additional display of the icon BI of the face of the bancho, and output of the sound C, there may be one that is not performed.

In FIG. 185 (5) -7, one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 185 (5) -8, "+3" is added to the background color of a certain color on the character MCK of Mr. Machiko. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification with the characters "" is displayed, and one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266 is displayed on the display of the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The number of prize balls (3 balls in this case) is added to the prize, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 000018Get. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification may be displayed at the same time as the addition display of the cumulative prize ball number display, may be displayed before the addition display, or may be displayed after the addition display. Good. Further, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification may disappear in an instant, may disappear when the addition is displayed, or may continue to be displayed until the next winning of the unit general winning opening 2266. However, it may continue to be displayed until one of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 wins a prize. Further, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B notifies that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize. In this example, for the winning of one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266, two types of notifications such as addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls and output of sound B are performed, and these two types of notifications are performed at the same time. It may be done or it may be done separately. For example, the cumulative prize balls may be added and displayed first and the sound B may be output later, or conversely, the sound B may be output first and the cumulative prize balls may be added and displayed. It may be done later. Alternatively, either the addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls or the output of the sound B may not be performed. In this example, there are more types of notifications for the first variable winning opening 234a, which has a relatively large number of prize balls, than for the unit general winning opening 2266, which has a relatively small number of winning balls. It has become.

FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 185, and further showing an production example in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus.

In the first round, the first variable winning opening 234a was awarded up to the maximum number, 10 icons BI of the face of the chief were displayed, and the unit general winning opening 2266 was awarded a total of 2 balls. In FIG. 186 (5) -9 showing the state of the interval between the first round and the second round, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 000156 Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The 10 icons of the Bancho's face, BI, disappeared at the end of the first round.

In FIG. 186 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In FIG. 186 (5) -11, one ball is awarded to each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, it is a simultaneous prize. In addition, even if it is called simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where one winning opening has a winning first and the other winning opening has a winning before the addition display is displayed on the cumulative number of winning balls. .. In FIG. 186 (5) -12, priority is given to winning the first variable winning opening 234a, which has a relatively large number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 186 (5) -12 is 000171 Get, and one icon BI of the face of the chief is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko shown in FIG. 186 (5) -12, a display INH of the general prize opening prize notification in which the characters "+3" are displayed on the background color of a certain color is also displayed. Later, it is suggested that the number of prize balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 will also be added. Further, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B notifies that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, but since the addition display of the number of prize balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is delayed, the sound output of the sound output is compared with the addition display. The one has been done first. However, the sound B is output at the same timing as the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification, or at a timing that is not so different. In this example, since the addition display of the number of prize balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is delayed, the sound B notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize is emitted to the first variable winning opening 234a. Although the sound C is prioritized and output over the sound C that notifies that, the sound B may be output after the sound C is output, the sound C and the sound B may be output at the same time, or the sound output. Then, the sound B may be output first, and then the sound C may be output.

In the following FIG. 186 (5) -13, the number of prize balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 186 (5) -13 is 000174 Get. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification disappears according to the addition display. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning the unit general winning opening 2266, which has a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both prize balls may be added and displayed at once, and the cumulative prize balls shown in FIG. 186 (5) -12 may be displayed as 000174 Get.

In FIG. 186 (5) -14, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a in a state where up to nine icons BI of the face of the chief are displayed, and this winning is the tenth ball, which is the upper limit. Will be a prize. In FIG. 186 (5) -15, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is changed from 000294 Get to 000309 Get, and 10 icons BI of the face of the chief are displayed. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize.

In FIGS. 186 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. Along the way, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a, and the eleventh winning ball (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for over winning is additionally displayed, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 00324Get, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. In the center of the device 208L, the display ONH of the over-prize notification in which the characters "celebration +15" are displayed on the background color of a certain color together with the character of the princess is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 185 (5) -18, the sound A is output from the speaker 120. This sound A is an over-winning sound that notifies that there has been an over-winning. Although the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, it may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

In FIGS. 186 (5) -19, the third round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. After that, round digestion proceeds. In the round digestion here, each round will be won up to the maximum number, but no over-winning will occur.

In FIG. 186 (5) -20, the 16th round, which is the final round, is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (5) -20 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 002331 Get, and 22 from the 1st round to the 15th round at the unit general winning opening 2266. There was a prize for the ball, and 66 balls were paid out as the prize balls for the unit general prize opening 2266. In FIG. 186 (5) -21, the final 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in a fully closed state. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (5) -21 displays 10 icons BI of the face of the bancho, and even in 16 rounds, the maximum number of prizes is reached, and the cumulative number of prize balls of 00290Get. The display is displayed. In the 16th round, 3 balls were won in the unit general prize opening 2266, and 159 balls were paid out as the 16th round prize balls.

When the final round is completed, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The character display is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 186 (5) -23, in which the ending effect is still continued, the winning sound (blessing sound) corresponding to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is sound B, but may be the same sound A as the over winning sound. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -23, the character "+3" is displayed on the character display of the next probability change and the character "+3" on the background color of a certain color together with the character of the princess. Winning opening Winning notification display INH'is displayed. Since the general winning opening winning notification display INH'here is displayed together with the princess character, the display mode is different from the conventional general winning opening winning notification display INH, and FIG. 186 (5)-. It is similar to the display mode of the display ONH of the over-winning notification shown in 17. As described above, in this example, the winning of the general winning opening is displayed in a different display mode only during the jackpot game end effect (ending effect). Note that the winning sound (blessing sound) corresponding to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 may be changed from sound B to sound D only during the jackpot game end effect (ending effect).

Since FIG. 185 (4) -1 is the same as FIG. 180 (4) -1, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an example of production in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus will be described. This example also has many similarities to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, and the duplicate description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 can be applied.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (4) -2 has an 8R-rank-up bonus decorative symbol that is an 8R jackpot and can be expected to win balls in all of the eight rounds. The combination ("decoration 7"-"RUNK UP"-"decoration 7") is confirmed and displayed. This combination of "decoration 7"-"RUNK UP"-"decoration 7" is a big hit with probability variation. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 4 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 8th round is reached. Therefore, the player does not know how many rounds the jackpot will last just by looking at "Decoration 7"-"RUNK UP"-"Decoration 7". Therefore, it is not known that it is an 8R jackpot. The control state (game state) during the symbol variation display, which is confirmed and displayed in FIG. 186 (4) -2, is also a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

In FIG. 186 (5) -1, the big hit game is started, and the display of the big hit game start effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this jackpot game start production, it is notified that the jackpot of the rank-up bonus has been won.

Subsequently, in FIG. 186 (5) -2, the right-handed notification 1 is started, but the display of "decoration 7" displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is replaced with the display of "RUNK UP". ing. The display of "RUNK UP" continues to be displayed until the end of the big hit game. In FIG. 186 (5) -3, the right-handed notification 2 is started.

Then, in FIG. 186 (5) -4, the first round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the actual first variable winning opening 234a has finished shifting to the fully opened state. When the first round is started, the display of the right-handed notification 2 disappears, and the number of rounds is displayed (here, "1R") and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed (here, 0000000Get). The cumulative number of prize balls referred to here may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the big hit game this time, or may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the big hit game during the big hit consecutive villas. , It may be the cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the whole period including the period between the big hit game and the big hit game (design variation display period) during the big hit consecutive villa.

In FIG. 186 (5) -5, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 181 (5) -6, the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a background color of a certain color. The display ANH of the attacker winning notification with the characters "+15" displayed is displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as the number of winning balls for the winning of one ball to the first variable winning opening 234a (15 in this case). Balls) are added, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 0000015Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. In this example, for the winning of one ball to the first variable winning opening 234a, three types of notifications such as addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, display of attacker winning notification ANH display, and output of sound C are performed. However, these three types of notifications may be performed simultaneously or separately. For example, the cumulative winning ball number addition display, the attacker winning notification display ANH display, and the sound C output may be performed in this order, or the cumulative winning ball number addition display, the sound C output, and the attacker winning notification. Display ANH may be displayed in this order, sound C may be output, cumulative number of winning balls may be added, and attacker winning notification may be displayed. Attacker winning notification may be displayed in that order. ANH display, cumulative prize ball number addition display, and sound C output may be performed in this order, or attacker winning notification display ANH display, sound C output, and cumulative prize ball number addition display may be performed in this order. It may be performed in the order of sound C output, attacker winning notification display ANH display, and cumulative prize ball number addition display. Furthermore, the cumulative prize ball number addition display and the attacker winning notification display ANH may be displayed at the same time, and the sound C may be output before or after that, or the cumulative prize ball number addition display and sound. The output of C may be performed at the same time, and the display of the attacker winning notification ANH may be performed before or after that, or the display of the attacker winning notification ANH and the output of the sound C may be performed at the same time, and the cumulative prize ball. The addition display of numbers may occur before or after. Alternatively, among the three types of the cumulative prize ball number addition display, the attacker winning notification display ANH display, and the sound C output, there may be one that is not performed. Further, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification may disappear in an instant, may disappear when the addition is displayed, or may continue to be displayed until the next winning of the first variable winning opening 234a. However, it may continue to be displayed until one of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 wins a prize.

In FIG. 186 (5) -7, one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 186 (5) -8, "+3" is added to the background color of a certain color on the character MCK of Mr. Machiko. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification with the characters "" is displayed, and one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266 is displayed on the display of the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The number of prize balls (3 balls in this case) is added to the prize, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 000018Get. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is smaller than the display ANH of the attacker winning notification. Further, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B notifies that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize. In this example, for the winning of one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266, three types of notifications such as addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, display of attacker winning notification ANH, and output of sound B are performed. These three types of notifications may be performed simultaneously or separately. For example, the cumulative winning ball number addition display, the general winning opening winning notification display INH display, and the sound B output may be performed in this order, or the cumulative winning ball number addition display, sound B output, and general winning. The display of the mouth winning notification may be performed in the order of the display of the INH, the output of the sound B, the addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, and the display of the general winning mouth winning notification INH. , General winning opening winning notification display INH display, cumulative winning ball number addition display, sound B output may be performed in this order, general winning opening winning notification display INH display, sound B output, It may be performed in the order of the addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls, or may be performed in the order of the output of the sound B, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification, and the addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls. Further, the cumulative prize ball number addition display and the general prize opening prize notification display INH may be displayed at the same time, and the sound B may be output before or after that, or the cumulative prize ball number addition display may be performed. And sound B are output at the same time, and the display INH of the general winning opening prize notification may be performed before or after that, or the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification and the output of sound B may be performed at the same time. It is performed, and the addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls may be performed before or after. Alternatively, among the three types of the cumulative number of winning balls addition display, the general winning opening winning notification display INH display, and the sound B output, there may be one that is not performed. In addition, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification may disappear in an instant, or may disappear when the addition is displayed, and is displayed until the next winning of the first variable winning opening 234a. It may continue, or it may continue to be displayed until one of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 has a prize.

FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 186.

In the first round, the first variable winning opening 234a was awarded up to the maximum number, and the unit general winning opening 2266 was awarded a total of two balls. In FIG. 187 (5) -9 showing the state of the interval between the first round and the second round, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 000156 Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 187 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In FIG. 187 (5) -11, one ball is awarded to each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, it is a simultaneous prize. In addition, even if it is called simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where one winning opening has a winning first and the other winning opening has a winning before the addition display is displayed on the cumulative number of winning balls. .. In FIG. 187 (5) -12, priority is given to winning the first variable winning opening 234a, which has a relatively large number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -12 is 000171 Get, but the display ANH of the attacker winning notification in which the characters "+15" are displayed on the background color of a certain color, or The display INH of the general prize opening prize notification in which the characters "+3" are displayed on the background color of the color is displayed. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, and the right speaker 120 indicates that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. The sound C to be notified is output. That is, in this example, only the addition display gives priority to winning the first variable winning opening 234a, but both the winning notification display and the sound output are performed at the same time. It is not necessary to start both at the same time, but it is sufficient if there is a period in which both are executed in duplicate. In the following FIG. 187 (5) -13, the number of prize balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -13 is 000174 Get. In FIG. 187 (5) -13, both the attacker winning notification display ANH and the general winning opening winning notification display INH have disappeared. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning the unit general winning opening 2266, which has a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both prize balls may be added and displayed at once, and the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -12 may be displayed as 000174 Get.

In FIG. 187 (5) -14, there is a winning of one ball in the first variable winning opening 234a, and this winning is the winning of the tenth ball, which is the upper limit. In FIG. 187 (5) -15, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification in which the character "+15" is displayed on the background color of a certain color is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls changes from 000294 Get to 000309 Get. .. The display position of the attacker winning notification ANH is different from the display position at the time of the previous winning of the first variable winning opening 234a. In FIG. 187 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. Along the way, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a, and the eleventh winning ball (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for over winning is additionally displayed, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 00324Get, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. In the center of the device 208L, the display ONH of the over-prize notification in which the characters "celebration +15" are displayed on the background color of a certain color together with the character of the princess is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 187 (5) -18, the sound A is output from the speaker 120. This sound A is an over-winning sound that notifies that there has been an over-winning. Although the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, it may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

In FIG. 187 (5) -19, the fourth round has started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the fully open state. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -19 is 00489Get. In FIG. 187 (5) -19, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 187 (5) -20, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00504Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. Furthermore, in the fourth round, a round continuation judge production is started as a production of a rank-up bonus. In this round continuation judge production, the character BCH of the Bancho appears in place of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko that was displayed until then, and a character display such as "Awaken with button PUSH" is displayed to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. To. This character display overlaps with the display ANH of the attacker winning notification. At the timing when the round continuous judge production is started, simultaneous winning of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 occurs again. As a result, in FIG. 187 (5) -21, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed first, and both the attacker winning notification display ANH and the general winning opening winning notification display INH are displayed. Is also displayed. The display position of both the attacker winning notification display ANH and the general winning opening winning notification display INH is different from the display position at the time of the previous winning. In addition, a part of the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification overlaps with a part of the character BCH of the Bancho. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, and the right speaker 120 indicates that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. The sound C to be notified is output. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (5) -21, the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are shown as the round continuation judge effect. The remaining time display meter MT and the character display of "press" are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 187 (5) -21, the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. A part of the remaining time display meter MT overlaps with a part of the display ANH of the attacker winning notification. Further, a part of the display ANH of the attacker winning notification overlaps with a part of the display of the cumulative number of prize balls, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. It should be noted that the relationship between the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification and the character BCH of the chief, as described here, or the relationship between the remaining time display meter MT and the display ANH of the attacker winning notification may be related. Even if the relationship between the display of the attacker winning notification ANH and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls overlaps, not only a part but all of them may overlap or overlap, and the side to be overlapped may be the side to be overlapped. The relationship may be reversed. In addition to this, all of the overlapping relationships described herein may overlap, not all, or may overlap, and only some, not all, may overlap. , The overlapping side may be overlapped, and further, the relationship between the overlapping side and the overlapping side may be reversed. Further, even at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (5) -21, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a.

In FIG. 187 (5) -22, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00537Get. .. Display of attacker winning notification A part of ANH overlaps with a part of the character BCH of the chief. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. At the timing of FIG. 187 (5) -22, the operation valid period has started, the remaining time display meter MT has decreased by about 1/5, and the chance button 136 is operated. In the round continuation judge production, if it succeeds, the round continues, but if it fails, the big hit game ends in this fourth round. The player operates the chance button 136 in the hope of success, not knowing whether to succeed or fail. In FIG. 187 (5) -24, the operation response effect is performed, the awakening change occurs in the character BCH of the Bancho, and the character display of "I did it" is displayed. Even at the timing of FIG. 187 (5) -24, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a.

In FIG. 187 (5) -24, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 000552Get. .. In addition, a round continuation notification indicating success is being performed. That is, when the judge result display including the characters "continue" is displayed, but the attacker winning notification display ANH overlaps with a part of this judge result display, and the judge result display does not overlap. It is more difficult to see than. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the operation response effect is not performed, but the judge result display is displayed. Even while the judge result display is displayed, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a.

Eventually, by winning the first variable winning opening 234a up to the maximum number, the fourth round is completed and the round digestion proceeds. From the 5th round, the Bancho character BCH disappeared and returned to Machiko-sensei's character MCK. In the round digestion here, each round will win up to the maximum number.

In FIG. 187 (5) -25, the eighth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -25 is 00299 Get. In FIG. 187 (5) -25, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 187 (5) -26, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00314Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. Furthermore, in the 8th round, the second round continuation judge production was started as a production of the rank-up bonus, and here again, the chief character BCH appeared and "Awaken with the button PUSH" to encourage the operation of the chance button 136. Character display is displayed. This character display also overlaps with the display ANH of the attacker winning notification.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 187 (5) to 27, a button image 136a, a remaining time display meter MT, and a character display of "press" are displayed as a round continuation judge effect. At the timing shown in FIGS. 187 (5) to 27, the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. Further, at this timing, two balls (two balls at almost the same time) are won in succession to the first variable winning opening 234a. That is, there are a plurality of prizes within a certain period.

In FIG. 187 (5) -28, two display ANHs of the attacker winning notification are displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by adding 30 at a stretch to reach 00344Get. In addition, 15 may be continuously added and displayed. A part of the display ANH of one attacker winning notification overlaps with a part of the character BCH of the chief, and a part of the display ANH of the other attacker winning notification is a part of the remaining time display meter MT. It overlaps. At the timing of FIG. 187 (5) -28, the operation valid period has started and the remaining time display meter MT has decreased, but the remaining time display meter MT has decreased due to the overlapping attacker winning notification display ANH. The condition is difficult to see. Further, the sound C for two times is output from the speaker 120 in duplicate, and the volume is louder than the output of the sound C for one time. Note that the sound C for two times may be output continuously. Alternatively, if a plurality of prizes are won within a certain period, a special sound different from the sound C may be output. The chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 187 (5) -28. Even in these 8 rounds, if the round continuation judge production is successful, the round will continue further, but if it fails, the big hit game will end in this 8th round. Again, the player does not know whether to succeed or fail, and operates the chance button 136 in the hope of success. In terms of control (internal), it is determined that the jackpot is 8R jackpot at the stage where the jackpot type is determined before the start of symbol fluctuation (the stage of the special figure-related lottery process (steps S229, S231) shown in FIG. 7). Has been done. In FIG. 187 (5) -29, the operation response effect was performed, the awakening change did not occur in the character BCH of the bancho, the character display of "sorry" was displayed, and the second round continuous judge effect failed. Then, these 8 rounds will be the final round. Even at the timing of FIG. 187 (5) -29, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and the winning in the first variable winning opening 234a continues thereafter. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (5) -30, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 001434Get, and the first variable winning opening 234a in the eighth round is the ninth ball. It will be a prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (5) -30, the first variable winning opening 234a has a maximum number of 10th winning balls, and in the following FIG. 187 (5) -31, the attacker winning notification display ANH However, it is displayed so as to overlap the face of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 001449 Get. Further, the sound C is output from the speaker 120.

When the eighth round, which is the final round, is completed, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 187 (5) -32 displays the cumulative number of prize balls of 001449 Get. At the same time, the character display of the next probability change is displayed.

In FIG. 187 (4) -1, the jackpot game end effect is finished, and it is just before the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols that has been confirmed and displayed immediately before the start of the jackpot game that has been performed so far ("Decoration 7"-" "RUNK UP"-"Decoration 7") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed on the upper left of the display. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls here is not 001449 Get, but 001449 is being acquired. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls is continuously displayed even during the probability change state, but during the probability change state, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed. In addition, the addition display according to the winning of other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 is not performed. Therefore, in the next big hit game, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls starts from 001449. In the example shown in FIG. 187, the period in which the cumulative number of prize balls is added and displayed is the jackpot game period in which an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation) is won and executed. Even in the probabilistic state, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed, or the addition display according to the winning of other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be performed. Good. In this case, the period in which the cumulative number of prize balls is added and displayed is a period including a jackpot game period in which an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation) is won and executed, and is in the probability variation state. It will include the period. Alternatively, when a jackpot game executed by winning an advantageous jackpot is held in a row, the period during which the cumulative prize balls are additionally displayed is between the period of the jackpot game and the period of the jackpot game. It may be a period including a period.

The example shown from FIG. 186 to FIG. 187 is an example of a jackpot game relating to a rank-up bonus among a plurality of jackpot games. As mentioned above, this rank-up bonus is a big hit where it is difficult to guess how much a player can win a game ball at the start of the big hit, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266). It may be possible to excite by displaying the addition. Even if it is a big hit without probability change, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) may be added and displayed in the big hit of the rank-up bonus. Further, in this example, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed for each winning of the attacker (here, the first variable winning opening 234a), and the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) is displayed for each winning. The display INH of the prize opening notification is displayed, and the feeling of winning the prize ball is enhanced. As mentioned above, the jackpot game related to the rank-up bonus is a jackpot in which the number of prize balls of the attacker (here, the first variable winning opening 234a) and the number of winning balls of the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) are additionally displayed. The jackpot game (for example, the jackpot game with 2R probability variation or the jackpot game without 2R probability variation) other than the jackpot game related to the rank-up bonus is the number of prize balls of the attacker (here, the first variable winning opening 234a). And, among the number of prize balls of the general prize opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266), only the number of prize balls of the attacker is added and displayed, which is a big hit game.

Furthermore, another production example in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus will be described. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing another production example in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 is executed, the example described below may also be executed. Hereinafter, the differences from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 will be mainly described, and the duplicated description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 may be applied. it can.

FIGS. 188 (4) -2 to (5) -7 are the same as FIGS. 186 (4) -2 to (5) -7, and although detailed description is omitted, the first round of the jackpot game Is started, and one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 188 (5) -8, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general prize opening 2266 is not added before the success in the round continuous judge production, and the cumulative number of prize balls is calculated. The display remains 000015 Get. In addition, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is not displayed. Further, the winning sound (sound B) is not output from the speaker 120 either.

In the first round, the first variable winning opening 234a has a maximum number of prizes, and in FIG. 188 (5) -9 showing the state of the interval between the first and second rounds, the first decorative symbol display device. On 208L, a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 001050 Get is displayed.

In FIG. 188 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In FIG. 188 (5) -11, one ball is awarded to each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, it is a simultaneous prize. In addition, even if it is called simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where one winning opening has a winning first and the other winning opening has a winning before the addition display is displayed on the cumulative number of winning balls. .. As shown in FIGS. 188 (5) -12 and (5) -13, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added, and only the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 000165 Get. In addition, the general winning opening winning notification display INH is not displayed, and in FIG. 188 (5) -12, the attacker winning notification display ANH in which the characters "+15" are displayed on the background color of a certain color is displayed. There is. Further, the sound B is not output from the speaker 120, and the sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has been won is output in FIGS. 188 (5) -12. In FIG. 188 (5) -14, there is a winning of one ball in the first variable winning opening 234a, and this winning is the winning of the tenth ball, which is the upper limit. In FIG. 188 (5) -15, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification in which the character "+15" is displayed on the background color of a certain color is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls changes from 00285Get to 000300Get. .. The display position of the attacker winning notification ANH is different from the display position at the time of the previous winning of the first variable winning opening 234a. In FIG. 188 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. Along the way, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a, and the eleventh winning ball (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 188 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for over winning is additionally displayed, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 00315Get, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. In the center of the device 208L, the display ONH of the over-prize notification in which the characters "celebration +15" are displayed on the background color of a certain color together with the character of the princess is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 187 (5) -18, the sound A, which is an over-winning sound for notifying that there was an over-winning, is output from the speaker 120. Although the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, it may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

In FIG. 188 (5) -19, the fourth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 188 (5) -19 is 00480 Get. In FIG. 188 (5) -19, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 187 (5) -20, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00495Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. Furthermore, in the fourth round, a round continuation judge production is started as a production of a rank-up bonus. In this round continuation judge production, the character BCH of the Bancho appears in place of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko that was displayed until then, and a character display such as "Awaken with button PUSH" is displayed to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. To. This character display overlaps with the display ANH of the attacker winning notification. At the timing when the round continuous judge production is started, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 will be simultaneously won again. Again, as shown in FIG. 188 (5) -21. , General prize opening The display INH of the prize notification is not displayed, and only the display ANH of the attacker prize notification is displayed. Further, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added, only the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00510 Get. The display ANH of the attacker winning notification overlaps with the display of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in addition, making it difficult to visually recognize the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. Further, the sound B is not output from the speaker 120, and the sound C for notifying that a prize has been won is output to the first variable winning opening 234a. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 188 (5) -21, a button image 136a, a remaining time display meter MT, and a character display of "press" are displayed as a round continuation judge effect. .. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (5) -21, the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. A part of the remaining time display meter MT overlaps with a part of the display ANH of the attacker winning notification. Further, even at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (5) -21, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a.

In FIG. 188 (5) -22, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 000525 Get. .. Display of attacker winning notification A part of ANH overlaps with a part of the character BCH of the chief. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. At the timing of FIG. 188 (5) -22, the operation valid period has started, the remaining time display meter MT has decreased by about 1/5, and the chance button 136 is operated. In the round continuation judge production, if it succeeds, the round continues, but if it fails, the big hit game ends in this fourth round. In FIG. 188 (5) -24, the operation response effect is performed, the awakening change occurs in the character BCH of the Bancho, and the character display of "I did it" is displayed. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (5) -24, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a.

In FIG. 188 (5) -24, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00540 Get. .. In addition, a round continuation notification indicating success is performed, and a judge result display including the characters "continue" is displayed, but the display ANH of the attacker winning notification overlaps with a part of this judge result display. , The judge result display is more difficult to see than if it were not overlapped. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the operation response effect is not performed, but the judge result display is displayed. Even while the judge result display is displayed, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a.

Eventually, by winning the first variable winning opening 234a up to the maximum number, the fourth round is completed and the round digestion proceeds. From the 5th round, the Bancho character BCH disappeared and returned to Machiko-sensei's character MCK. In FIG. 188 (5) -25, the fifth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 188 (5) -25 is 000630 Get. Also in FIG. 188 (5) -25, one ball is simultaneously won in each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 188 (5) -26, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification in which the character "+15" is displayed on the background color of a certain color, and the general character "+3" is displayed on the background color of a certain color. Winning opening Winning notification display Both INH are displayed. Further, the number of prize balls in the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 are added and displayed at the same time, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000648Get. The display of the notification overlaps with the ANH, making it difficult to visually display the cumulative number of prize balls. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, and the right speaker 120 indicates that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. The sound C to be notified is output. After the 5th round, which was successful in the round continuation judge production, the number of prize balls will be added to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 in addition to the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a. It will be held and the prize will be announced. In this example, the addition display, the winning notification display, and the sound output are performed at the same time. It is not necessary that the three are started at the same time, but it is sufficient if there is a period in which the three are executed in duplicate. Further, also in FIG. 188 (5) -26, one ball is simultaneously won in each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266.

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 188, and further showing another production example in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus.

FIG. 189 (5) -27 shows the state of the interval between the fifth and sixth rounds, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 00765 Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. During this inter-round interval, one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 189 (5) -28, the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is additionally displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed. , 00768Get. In addition, at the lower left of Machiko-sensei's character MCK, a general winning opening winning notification display INH in which the characters "+3" are displayed on a background color of a certain color is also displayed, and sound D is output from the speaker 120. To. The output of the sound D notifies that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, but is a special sound different from the sound B. In this way, if there is a prize during the inter-round interval, a special notification may be given.

In FIGS. 189 (5) -29, the eighth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIGS. 189 (5) -29 is 00248Get. In FIG. 189 (5) -29, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 189 (5) -30, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 001263 Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. Furthermore, in the 8th round, the second round continuation judge production was started as a production of the rank-up bonus, and here again, the chief character BCH appeared and "Awaken with the button PUSH" to encourage the operation of the chance button 136. Character display is displayed. This character display also overlaps with the display ANH of the attacker winning notification.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 189 (5) -31, a button image 136a, a remaining time display meter MT, and a character display of "press" are displayed as a round continuation judge effect. At the timing shown in FIGS. 189 (5) -31, the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. Further, at this timing, two balls (two balls at almost the same time) are won in succession to the first variable winning opening 234a. That is, there are a plurality of prizes within a certain period.

In FIG. 189 (5) -32, the attacker winning notification display ANH'in which the character "+30" is displayed on the background color of a certain color is displayed. The display ANH'of this attacker winning notification is a display for two balls, which is the same size as the display for one ball, but may be larger than the display for one ball, and the color, shape, etc. are displayed. The mode may be different. Further, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by adding 30 at a stretch, and is 001293 Get. In addition, 15 may be continuously added and displayed. Further, the sound C for two times is output from the speaker 120 in duplicate, and the volume is louder than the output of the sound C for one time. Note that the sound C for two times may be output continuously. Alternatively, if a plurality of prizes are won within a certain period, a special sound different from the sound C may be output. At the timing of FIG. 189 (5) -32, the operation valid period has started, the remaining time display meter MT has decreased by about 1/5, and the chance button 136 is operated. Even in these 8 rounds, if the round continuation judge production is successful, the round will continue further, but if it fails, the big hit game will end in this 8th round. In terms of control (internal), it is determined that the jackpot is 8R jackpot at the stage where the jackpot type is determined before the start of symbol fluctuation (the stage of the special figure-related lottery process (steps S229, S231) shown in FIG. 7). Has been done. In FIG. 189 (5) -33, the operation response effect was performed, the awakening change did not occur in the character BCH of the Bancho, the character display of "sorry" was displayed, and the second round continuous judge effect failed. Then, these 8 rounds will be the final round. Even at the timing of FIG. 189 (5) -33, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and the winning in the first variable winning opening 234a continues thereafter. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 189 (5) -34, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 001383 Get, and the first variable winning opening 234a in the eighth round is the ninth ball. It will be a prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (5) -34, the first variable winning opening 234a has a maximum number of 10th winning balls, and in the following FIG. 189 (5) -35, the attacker winning notification display ANH However, it is displayed so as to overlap the face of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 001398 Get. Further, the sound C is output from the speaker 120.

When the eighth round, which is the final round, is completed, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 189 (5) -32 displays the cumulative number of prize balls of 001398 Get. At the same time, the character display of the next probability change is displayed.

In FIG. 189 (4) -1, the jackpot game end effect is finished, and it is just before the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols that has been confirmed and displayed immediately before the start of the jackpot game that has been performed so far ("Decoration 7"-" "RUNK UP"-"Decoration 7") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed on the upper left of the display. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls here is not 001398 Get, but 001398 is being acquired. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls is continuously displayed even during the probability change state, but during the probability change state, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed. In addition, the addition display according to the winning of other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 is not performed. Therefore, in the next big hit game, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls starts from 001398. In the production example shown from FIG. 188 to FIG. 189, the period in which the cumulative prize balls are added and displayed is the jackpot game period in which an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation) is won and executed. Even in the probabilistic state, the addition display according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed, or the addition display according to the winning of other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be performed. Good. In this case, the period in which the cumulative number of prize balls is added and displayed is a period including a jackpot game period in which an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation) is won and executed, and is in the probability variation state. It will include the period. Alternatively, when a jackpot game executed by winning an advantageous jackpot is held in a row, the period during which the cumulative prize balls are additionally displayed is between the period of the jackpot game and the period of the jackpot game. It may be a period including a period.

The example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189 is also an example of the jackpot game relating to the rank-up bonus among the plurality of jackpot games, as in the example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187. It is divided into two stages. That is, it is divided into a period before the continuation of the round in which the number of prize balls of the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) is not added, and a period after the round is added. In both periods, the number of prize balls of the attacker (here, the first variable winning opening 234a) is added.

Next, another production example in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus will be described. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 is executed, the example described below may also be executed. Further, the example described below may also be executed in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189 is executed. Hereinafter, the differences from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 188 to 189 will be mainly described, and the duplicated description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189 may be applied. it can.

FIGS. 189 (4) -2 to (5) -8 are the same as those of FIGS. 188 (4) -2 to (5) -8, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Before succeeding in the judge production, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is not displayed, and the winning sound (sound) is also emitted from the speaker 120. B) is not output.

FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 189.

FIGS. 190 (5) -9 to (5) -16 are the same as those of FIGS. 188 (5) -9 to (5) -16, and although detailed description is omitted, the second round ends. At that time, over-winning has occurred. However, in this example, although the prize ball for the over prize is paid out, the additional display of the prize ball is not performed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (5) -17, the same figure (5)-. 000300 Get, which is the same as the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in 16, is still displayed. Further, the display ONH of the over-winning notification in which the characters "celebration +15" are displayed on the background color of a certain color together with the princess character shown in FIG. 188 (5) -17 is not displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (5) -18, the sound A, which is an over-winning sound for notifying that there was an over-winning, is output from the speaker 120.

After this, in the 4th round, a round continuation judge production will be performed as a production of the rank-up bonus. The appearance of these four rounds is shown in FIGS. 190 (5) -19 to (5) -24, except for the numbers displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls, which are shown in FIGS. Since it is the same as FIG. (5) -24, the description thereof will be omitted. The number displayed for the cumulative number of prize balls is smaller than the number displayed for the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 188 because there is no addition of prize balls due to over-winning.

Round continuation as a production of rank-up bonus As a result of succeeding in producing a judge and continuing the round, 5 rounds have been started in Fig. 190 (5) -25, and the first of the first variable winning doors 234a. The door member 2341a is in the fully open state. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 190 (5) -25 is 000,600 Get. Also in FIG. 190 (5) -25, one ball is simultaneously won in each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266.

In this example, the number of prize balls is also the number of prize balls for the unit general prize opening 2266 in addition to the first variable winning opening 234a after the 5th round in which the round continuation judge production is successful. Is displayed and the prize is notified. In addition, if there is a prize in the first variable winning opening 234a or the unit general winning opening 2266 for the first time after the round is continued, the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) is won by the time the round is continued. The number of prize balls for each minute and the number of prize balls for over-winning are added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls at once, and the prize revival notification is also given. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 190 (5) to 26, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification for winning the first variable winning opening 234a in the 5th round and the unit general winning opening 2266 in the 5th round are displayed. In addition to the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification for the winning of the above, the revival display ONH2 of the over winning notification for the over winning in FIG. 190 (5) -16 is also displayed. In addition, the revival display INH2 of the general winning opening winning notification for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 for a total of five times in FIGS. 190 (5) -11, 5-20 and the like is also displayed. Although the display mode of the general winning opening winning notification display INH and the general winning opening winning notification revival display INH2 are the same, they may be different, and the display mode of the over winning opening revival display ONH2 is also shown in FIG. 5) The display mode of the over-winning notification shown in -17 is the same as that of ONH, but may be different. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 190 (5) -26, the display of the cumulative prize balls is overlapped by some of the displays ANH, INH, ONH2, and INH2, and the cumulative prizes are displayed. Although the display of the number of balls is difficult to see, it is 000648 Get at the timing of FIGS. 190 (5) -26. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B for 6 times to notify that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, and the right speaker 120 has won a prize to the first variable winning opening 234a. The sound C for notifying that is output twice. As a method of outputting sounds for a plurality of times, the volume is increased according to the number of times, or the sound is continuously output according to the number of times. Also in FIG. 190 (5) -26, one ball is simultaneously won in each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266.

FIGS. 190 (5) -27 to (5) -35 are the same as those of FIGS. 189 (5) -27 to (5) -35, and although detailed description is omitted, the second round of the eighth round. The round continuation judge production ended in failure, and these 8 rounds will be the final round.

FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 190, and further showing an example of the effect during the big hit game to an example of the effect during the symbol variation display during the ST period.

FIGS. 190 (5) -36 and FIG. (4) -1 following FIGS. 190 (5) -35 are the same as those of FIG. 189 (5) -36 and FIG. However, when the eighth round, which is the final round, is completed, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and then the jackpot game ends.

In the example shown from FIG. 190 to FIG. 191, when the first variable winning opening 234a or the unit general winning opening 2266 is won after the round is continued, the general winning opening is won before the round is continued. The number of prize balls for the minute and the number of prize balls for over-winning are added at once to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls, and the prize revival notification is also given, but the round was continued and a new round was started. It may be triggered by the fact that the continuation of the round has been confirmed (timing of Fig. 190 (5) -24), or the round in which the round continuation judge production was performed (here, 4 rounds). It may be triggered by the end. In this way, after a certain condition is satisfied, the notifications regarding the winnings up to that point may be collectively performed.

Next, an example of the effect during the big hit game to an example of the effect during the symbol variation display during the ST period will be described.

This example is in a big hit consecutive villa, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (4) -2 displays that 004482 is being acquired as a display of the cumulative number of prize balls acquired so far. ing. In addition, the combination of decorative patterns (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”) that is a big hit with 16R probability variation is confirmed and displayed. The control state (game state) during the symbol variation display confirmed and displayed in FIG. 191 (4) -2 is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 191 (5) -1 to (5) -16 shows the same figures (5) -1 to 180 (5) -1 except for the numbers indicating the cumulative number of prize balls. 5) Since it is the same as -16, detailed explanation is omitted, but when the big hit game is started and the second round is finished, an over prize is generated. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 191 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for over winning is additionally displayed, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 004671 Get, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. In the center of the device 208L, the display ONH of the over-prize notification in which the characters "celebration +15" are displayed on the background color of a certain color together with the character of the princess is displayed. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound A, which is an over-winning sound that notifies that there has been an over-winning. The output of the over winning sound may be after the addition display, before the addition display, or at the same time as the addition display.

FIG. 192 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 191.

After that, round digestion progressed, and in FIGS. 192 (5) -18, the fifth round was started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a was fully opened. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (5) -18, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 004971 Get. In the following FIG. 192 (5) -19, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 192 (5) -20, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 004986 Get. Further, even at the timing shown in FIG. 192 (5) -20, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches 5,000 balls, and further exceeds 5,000 balls. In FIG. 192 (5) -21, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00501 Get, and the number of drills celebrating that the cumulative number of prize balls has exceeded 5000 by overlapping with the upper body of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko. Breakthrough display KTH is displayed. The display mode of the drill number breakthrough display KTH is a display mode in which the characters "5000 breakthrough" are shown together with the panda character. In addition, instead of the character "5000 breakthrough", "5000 reached" may be used to indicate the number of drills reached (the same applies to the following example). The KTH number breakthrough display and the cumulative prize ball number display (display of "005001Get) do not overlap. Again, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a. After that, the round digestion proceeds further.

In FIG. 192 (5) -22, the 16th round, which is the final round, is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (5) -22 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 006051 Get. In FIG. 192 (5) -23, the final 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in a fully closed state. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (5) -23, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 006171 Get. In this final round, the first variable winning opening 234a could not win up to the maximum number.

When the final round is completed, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The character display is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 192 (5) -25, in which the ending effect is still continued, the winning sound (blessing sound) corresponding to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is sound B, but may be the same sound A as the over winning sound. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (5) -25, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by adding according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed. The display is 006174 Get. Further, the character display of the next probability change is changed to the character display of 100 times of the probability change, and the number of STs is notified. The 100 probabilistic changes notified here means that the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change electric support state) is maintained from the end of the big hit game until the end of the 100th special figure symbol variation display. Means to be done.

In FIG. 192 (1) -1, the jackpot game end effect is finished, and it is just before the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (1) -1, a combination of decorative symbols that has been confirmed and displayed immediately before the start of the jackpot game that has been performed so far ("Decoration 7"-" "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed on the upper left of the display. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls here is not 006174 Get, but 006174 is being acquired. Further, the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the remaining number of STs (100 remaining) together with the navigation character YM, and is in an electric support state after the big hit game is completed. , The second UI unit 281 displays four hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2.

In FIG. 192 (1) -2, the symbol variation display of the special symbol, which is the first time after the jackpot game is completed, is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. The remaining number of STs displayed on the first UI unit 280 is 99. In addition, since it is also in the electric support state and aims at from the normal drawing start port 228 to the second special figure start port 232, the character display of "right hit" that urges the player to hit right is also displayed. During the ST period shown in FIGS. 192 (1) -2 to (1) -15, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 are located on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Instead, the electric chew DC of the second special figure start port 232 is shown. The electric chew DC shown in FIG. 192 (1) -2 is in a closed state.

From Fig. 192 (1) -3 during the variable display of the decorative symbol to Fig. (1) -4 during the final display of the decorative symbol, the electric chew DC is open, but to the second special symbol start port 232. There is no prize.

In FIG. 192 (1) -5, the symbol variation display of the special symbol, which is the second time after the jackpot game is completed, is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Even in FIGS. 192 (1) -6 to (1) -7 during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the electric chew DC is open and two balls are won in succession. In this example, in a part of the ST period, the number of prize balls (here, 3 balls) for winning one ball to the second special figure start port 232 is added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. A part of the period during the ST period referred to here is a period in which the symbol variation display of the first 20 special figures is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (1) -7, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as the number of prize balls for winning the second special figure start port 232 at the timing of FIG. 192 (1) -6. The number has increased by the amount, and 006177 is being acquired. In addition, the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 is additionally displayed. In the following FIG. 192 (1) -8, the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 at the timing of FIG. 192 (1) -7. The number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls, and 006180 is being acquired. Further, the hold icon h24 of the fourth special figure 2 is additionally displayed.

In this way, the symbol variation display during the ST period is repeatedly performed without winning the jackpot, and in FIGS. 192 (1) -9, the remaining number of STs is 80 times. In addition, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 006234.

In FIGS. 192 (1) -10, the symbol variation display of the special symbol, which is the 21st time since the jackpot game is completed, is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. From Fig. 192 (1) -10, when the variable display of the decorative symbol was started, to Fig. (1) -11, which is displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol, the electric chew DC is open, and one ball wins here. is there. However, since the symbol variation display of the special symbol here is the 21st symbol variation display after the jackpot game is completed, a part of the above period during the ST period has passed, and the second special symbol FIG. The number of prize balls for winning a prize at the starting port 232 is not additionally displayed. Therefore, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 192 (1) -12 remains that 006234 has been acquired. On the other hand, the hold icon h24 of the fourth special figure 2 is additionally displayed in the second UI unit 281 shown in FIGS. 192 (1) -12. Eventually, in FIG. 192 (1) -13, the 21st symbol variation display of the special figure ends.

Even after that, the symbol variation display during the ST period is repeated without winning the jackpot, and in FIGS. 192 (1) -14, the 100th special figure after the jackpot game, which is the end of the ST period, is completed. The symbol variation display of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 192 (1) -14, the remaining number of STs displayed on the first UI unit 280 is the character display of "last". The 100th special symbol symbol variation display did not make a big hit, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (1) 15, "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-which is a combination of lost decorative symbols. "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, along with the character display "BONUS x 3" indicating that the number of jackpots was 3 times, and the title display (Shogun-like) according to the number of consecutive villas, 006234 The display of the cumulative number of prize balls, such as being acquired, is also displayed. In FIGS. 192 (1) -16, "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, the ST period ends, and the electric support state also ends. Therefore, from the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 192 (1) -16, the character display of "right-handed" disappears, and the 101st special symbol symbol variation display is started after the jackpot game is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (1) -17, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a display for returning to left-handed. It should be noted that this state is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and although not shown, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been switched.

In the example shown from FIG. 191 to FIG. 192, the general winning opening prize is added during the big hit game, and the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change and electric support state) is maintained during 100 ST periods. In this case, the electric chew prize was added in a part of the period, and the electric chew prize was not added in the remaining period during the ST period. Even after the jackpot game is over, the prize balls acquired during the jackpot game may continue to be paid out. Part of the above period is a period shortly after the jackpot game is completed, and in addition to the payout of the prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, the winning amount of the electric chew is added to excite the game. May be possible. As a period shortly after the jackpot game is completed, in this example, since the symbol variation for a short period of time is likely to be repeated, the symbol variation display of the first 20 special symbols is performed. ..

Next, an example of the effect during the big hit game to an example of the effect during the symbol variation display during another ST period will be described. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a part of the production example during the symbol variation display during another ST period from the production example during the big hit game. The ST period here is the period from the end of the jackpot game to the end of the 10th symbol variation display of the special figure, but the electric support state is maintained 90 times thereafter. That is, after the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change and electric support state) is maintained 10 times, the probability change falls and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (non-probability change and electric support state) 90 times. Be maintained.

In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 191 to 192 is executed, the example described below may also be executed. Hereinafter, the differences from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 192 will be mainly described, and the duplicated description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIGS. 191 to 192 may be applied. it can.

FIGS. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -3 are the same as those of FIGS. 191 (4) -2 to (5) -3. Has been done.

This example is also an example of a big hit consecutive villa, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (5) -4, in which the first round is started, has the cumulative number of prize balls acquired so far. As a display, it is displayed as 004479 GET. In FIG. 193 (5) -5, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 193 (5) -6, the attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls, the number of prize balls for winning one ball in the first variable winning opening 234a is added, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004494 Get. Note that the speaker 120 does not output the sound C notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. The display of the attacker winning notification ANH and the addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls may be performed at the same time, the display of the attacker winning notification ANH may be performed first, or the cumulative prize balls may be displayed. The addition display of numbers may be performed first.

In FIG. 193 (5) -7, one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in the following FIG. 193 (5) -8, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. The number of prize balls for winning one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266 is added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed on the display device 208L, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004497 Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound B notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize. In this example, for the winning of one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266, three types of notifications such as addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, display of attacker winning notification ANH, and output of sound B are performed. These three types of notifications may be performed simultaneously or separately, as described with reference to FIG. 186.

In FIG. 193 (5) -9, which shows the state of the interval between the first and second rounds without any more prizes in the first round, the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a cumulative prize ball of 004497 Get. The number display is displayed.

In FIG. 193 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In FIG. 193 (5) -11, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 each have one ball at a time, and the first variable winning opening 234a has a relatively large number of winning balls. Priority is given to the winning of the attacker, and the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed. In the following FIG. 193 (5) -12, the attacker winning notification display ANH disappears, and the general winning opening winning notification display INH is displayed. Further, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed first, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIGS. 193 (5) -12 is 004512Get, but the displayed general winning opening The display INH of the prize notification overlaps, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is difficult to visually recognize. Further, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B notifies that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, but since the addition display of the number of prize balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is delayed, the sound output goes first. It has been broken. In the following FIG. 193 (5) -13, the number of prize balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 193 (5) -13 is 004515 Get. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification disappears according to the addition display. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning the unit general winning opening 2266, which has a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both prize balls may be added and displayed at once, and the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 193 (5) -12 may be displayed as 004515 Get.

In FIG. 193 (5) -14, there is a winning of one ball in the first variable winning opening 234a, and this winning is the winning of the tenth ball, which is the maximum number. In FIG. 193 (5) -15, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is changed from 004641 Get to 004656 Get.

In FIG. 193 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. Along the way, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a, and the eleventh winning ball (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (5) -17, the display ONH of the over prize notification is displayed, the number of prize balls for the over prize is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed. However, it is 004671 Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound A, which is an over-winning sound that notifies that there has been an over-winning. The output of the over winning sound may be after the addition display, before the addition display, or at the same time as the addition display.

FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 193.

After that, round digestion progressed, and in FIGS. 194 (5) -18, the fifth round was started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a was fully opened. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (5) -18, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004983 Get. In the following FIG. 194 (5) -19, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. (5) -20, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed. Is displayed as 004998 Get. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (5) -20, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches 5,000 balls, and further exceeds 5,000 balls. In FIG. 194 (5) -21, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is displayed. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 00501 Get, and the number breakthrough display KTH is also displayed so as to overlap from the character MCK of Mr. Machiko to the display INH of the general prize opening prize notification. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the character MCK of Mr. Machiko and the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification. As described above, the overlap relationship may be reversed. In addition, the KTH number breakthrough display and the cumulative prize ball number display (display of "005001Get) do not overlap. Furthermore, the speaker 120 emits a sound B notifying the unit general winning opening 2266 that a prize has been won. It is output. A special sound D congratulating that the cumulative number of prize balls has exceeded 5000 balls may be output together with the sound B, or this sound D may be output instead of the sound B. After that. As explained here, even if the number of balls reaches 5,000 by winning the general winning opening instead of winning the attacker, and even if the number of balls exceeds 5,000, the number of hits is displayed. KTH may be displayed and a special sound D may be output.

In FIG. 194 (5) -22, the 16th round, which is the final round, is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (5) -22 displays a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 006051 Get. In FIG. 194 (5) -23, the electric chew DC is displayed along with the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the electric chew DC is in a non-electric support state during the big hit game, it is difficult to open the electric chew DC, but in FIG. 194 (5) -23, it is open and one ball is won in the second special figure start opening 232. In this example, even during the big hit game, if there is an electric chew prize, the number of prize balls of the electric chew prize is additionally displayed. Therefore, during the big hit game, both the prize ball of the general prize opening (here, the unit general prize opening 2266) and the prize ball of the electric chew DC are additionally displayed. In FIG. 194 (5) -24, the display DNH of the electric chew winning notification in which the character "+3" is displayed on the background color of a certain color is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 006054 Get. .. The display mode of the electric chew winning notification display DNH is the same as the display mode of the general winning opening winning notification display INH, but may be different. Further, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. This sound B is a winning sound for notifying that the second special figure start opening 232 has been won, but is the same as the winning sound for notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has been won. However, the winning sound for notifying that the second special figure starting port 232 has been won may be changed to a special sound different from the sound B.

In FIG. 194 (5) -25, 16 rounds, which are the final rounds, are completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in a fully closed state. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (5) -25, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 006174 Get. In this final round, the first variable winning opening 234a could not win up to the maximum number.

When the final round is completed, the jackpot game end effect (ending effect) is started, and during this ending effect, one game ball wins a prize in the unit general winning opening 2266. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 194 (5) -26, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by adding according to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed. It is already 006177 Get. In addition, the character display of the next probability change is displayed.

In the following FIG. 194 (5) -27, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is displayed, and the sound B notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize is output from the speaker 120. Here, the addition display is performed before the winning notification. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 194 (5) to 27, the character display of the next probability change is changed to the character display of 10 times of probability change and 90 times of time reduction. The 10 times of probability change notified here means that the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change and electric support state) is from the end of the big hit game to the end of the symbol variation display of the special figure which is the 10th time. It means that it is maintained and corresponds to the ST period. On the other hand, 90 times of time reduction means a low-probability, high-probability state of the special figure from the 11th time of the special figure variation display to the 100th time of the special figure change display after the big hit game is completed. It means that (non-probability change and electric support state) is maintained, and it becomes the electric support period. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls remains as 006177Get.

In FIG. 194 (1) -1, the jackpot game end effect is finished, and it is just before the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (1) -1, a combination of decorative symbols that has been confirmed and displayed immediately before the start of the jackpot game that has been performed so far ("Decoration 7"-" "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed on the upper left of the display. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls here is not 0061777 Get, but 006177 is being acquired. Further, "remaining 100" is displayed together with the navigation character YM on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second UI unit 281 displays the four holding icons of the special figure 2. h21 to h24 are displayed. The display of "remaining 100" displayed on the first UI unit 280 is the remaining number of times until the end of the electric support state.

In FIG. 194 (1) -2, the symbol variation display of the special symbol, which is the first time after the jackpot game is completed, is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. The remaining number of times until the end of the electric support state displayed on the first UI unit 280 is 99 times. In addition, since it is also in the electric support state and aims at from the normal drawing start port 228 to the second special figure start port 232, the character display of "right hit" that urges the player to hit right is also displayed. In FIGS. 194 (1) -2 to (1) -15, the first variable winning opening 234a is shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the unit general winning opening 2266 is used. Instead, the electric chew DC of the second special figure start port 232 is shown. The electric chew DC shown in FIG. 194 (1) -2 is in a closed state.

From Fig. 194 (1) -3 during the variable display of the decorative design to Fig. (1) -4 during the final display of the decorative design, the electric chew DC is open, but to the second special symbol start port 232. There is no prize.

In FIG. 194 (1) -5, the symbol variation display of the special symbol, which is the second time after the jackpot game is completed, is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Even from Fig. 194 (1) -6 to Fig. (1) -7 during the variable display of the decorative design, the electric chew DC is open, and one ball is provided for each of the general winning opening and the second special drawing starting opening 232. There is a prize. The general winning opening here is the unit general winning opening 2266, but other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be used.

In this example, the number of prize balls (here, 3 balls) for winning one ball to the second special figure start port 232 is added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls during the entire ST period. In addition, the number of prize balls (here, 3 balls) for winning one ball to the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) is also added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls. In addition, only one of them may be added. It should be noted that the addition display may be performed only for a part of the period instead of the entire period during the ST period.

In the following FIG. 194 (1) -7, the display DNH of the electric chew winning notification and the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification are displayed, and the display DNH of the electric chew winning notification is variablely displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The display INH of the general winning opening winning notification overlaps with the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the right symbol display area 208c and the character display of "right-handed". Further, from the speaker 120, the sound B which is the electric chew winning sound and the sound B which is the general winning opening winning sound are output in an overlapping manner, and the volume is louder than the output of the sound B for one time. The sound B may be continuously output, or the winning sound from the speaker 120 may not be output during the ST period. Further, the number of prize balls of the electric chew DC and the number of prize balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 are added and displayed at once, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -7 is 006183 Get. In addition, the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 is additionally displayed. Further, even at this timing, one ball is won at the second special figure starting port 232.

In the following FIG. 194 (1) -8, the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 at the timing of FIG. 194 (1) -7. The number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls, and 006186 is being acquired. Further, the hold icon h24 of the fourth special figure 2 is additionally displayed.

In this way, the symbol variation display is repeatedly performed during the ST period without winning the jackpot, and in FIGS. 194 (1) -9, the remaining number of times until the end of the electric support state is 90 times. That is, in FIGS. 194 (1) -9, the definite display of the lost symbol is performed, the symbol variation display of the special symbol, which is the 10th time since the jackpot game is completed, has been completed, and the ST period has ended. It will be. When the ST period ends, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched, although not shown. Further, in FIG. 194 (1) -9, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is being acquired in 006203.

In FIGS. 194 (1) -10, the eleventh symbol variation display of the special symbol is started after the jackpot game is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. From Fig. 194 (1) -10, when the variable display of the decorative symbol was started, to Fig. (1) -11, which is displaying the variable display of the decorative design, the electric chew DC is open, and one ball wins here. is there. However, since the symbol variation display of the special symbol here is the 11th symbol variation display after the jackpot game is completed, the ST period in this example has passed, and the second special symbol start port has passed. The number of prize balls for winning 232 is not added and displayed. Therefore, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 194 (1) -12 remains that 006203 has been acquired. On the other hand, the hold icon h24 of the fourth special figure 2 is additionally displayed in the second UI unit 281 shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -12. Eventually, in FIG. 194 (1) -13, the eleventh symbol variation display of the special figure ends.

Even after that, the symbol variation display during the electric support period is repeated without winning the big hit, and in FIGS. 194 (1) -14, the 100th time since the big hit game, which is the end of the electric support period, is completed. The symbol variation display of the special figure is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -14, the remaining number of STs displayed on the first UI unit 280 is the character display of "last". The 100th special symbol symbol variation display did not make a big hit, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (1) 15, "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-which is a combination of lost decorative symbols. "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, along with the character display "BONUS x 3" indicating that the number of jackpots was 3 times, and the title display (Shogun-like) according to the number of consecutive villas, 006203 The display of the cumulative number of prize balls, such as during acquisition, is also displayed. In FIG. 194 (1) -16, "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and the electric support period ends. Therefore, from the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -16, the character display of "right-handed" disappears, and the 101st special symbol symbol variation display is started after the jackpot game is completed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -17, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a display for returning to left-handed. It should be noted that this state is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and although not shown, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been switched.

In the example shown from FIG. 193 to FIG. 194, both the electric chew winning and the general winning opening prize are added during the big hit game, and both the electric chew winning and the general winning opening winning are added during the entire ST period, and the ST period In the electric support period after the end of, both the electric chew prize and the general prize opening prize were not added. Here, during the big hit game, only one of the electric chew prize and the general prize opening prize may be added. Further, even in the ST period, only one of them may be added. Alternatively, in the ST period, only the other may be added. Further, in the electric support period, the one added in the ST period may not be added, and the other may be added.

The ST period was a probabilistic state that starts when the jackpot game ends, but as a period that is advantageous to the player, it is a probabilistic state that has nothing to do with the end of the jackpot game (special figure high probability normal). It may be a period of high probability of figure, high probability of special figure, low probability of normal figure (for example, a period of a certain effect mode), or a period of electric support state.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of a production when a general winning opening different from the unit general winning opening 2266 is won during a big hit game, and further, an example showing an example when an irregular general winning opening is won. Is.

First, an example of production when a prize is won in a general winning opening different from the unit general winning opening 2266 during the big hit game will be described. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 is executed, the example described below may also be executed. Hereinafter, the differences from the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and the overlapping description may be omitted, but the description of the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

FIGS. 195 (4) -2 to (5) -10 are the same as those in FIGS. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -10, and although detailed description is omitted, the second round is started. ing.

In FIGS. 195 (5) -11, the first variable winning opening 234a provided in the attacker unit 2340 and the unit general winning opening 2266 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , A general winning opening different from the unit general winning opening 2266 is also shown. The different general winning openings may be any one of the four general winning openings 2261 to 2264 provided in the left area shown in FIG. 175, or the general winning openings provided in the right area. It may be mouth 2265. Here, it will be described as a general winning opening 2265 provided in the right area.

As shown in FIGS. 195 (5) -7 and (5) -8, when there is a prize in the unit general winning opening 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340, the number of winning balls is additionally displayed. The prize notification is also displayed (display INH of the general prize opening notification) and sound (sound B), but there is a prize in the general winning opening 2265 provided in the right area separate from the attacker unit 2340. In that case, the number of winning balls will not be added and displayed, and the winning notification will not be given at all.

In FIG. 195 (5) -12, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004512 acquisition. ing. There is no output of the winning sound (sound C) from the speaker 120. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 195 (5) -12 and (5) -13, the number of prize balls is not added to the prizes in the general prize opening 2265, and the notification of the prizes is displayed. There is no sound notification.

In this example, while hitting right and aiming at the first variable winning opening 234a of the attacker unit 2340, the first variable winning opening 2266 is the unit general winning opening 2266 closest to the first variable winning opening 234a. When a game ball that is out of aim at the mouth 234a wins a prize, the number of prize balls is added and the winning notification is given. That is, if you hit right and aim at the first variable winning opening 234a, you may naturally win a prize. Of the six general winning openings 2261 to 2266, only the unit general winning opening 2266, which has the highest winning frequency. The number of prize balls is added and displayed and the prize is notified.

FIG. 195 (5) -13'is another example following FIG. 195 (5) -12. In this example, contrary to the explanation so far, the display INH of the general winning opening prize notification is also displayed for the winning of the general winning opening 2265 provided in the right area different from the attacker unit 2340. The number of prize balls in the general winning opening 2265 is also displayed in addition. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 195 (5) -13'is from 004512 GET to 004515 GET. Further, the speaker 120 also outputs a sound B notifying that the general winning opening 2265 has won a prize. Note that, unlike the sound B, this sound B may be replaced with a sound (sound *) dedicated to the general winning opening 2265. In this example, irregular winnings such as winning a general winning opening away from the first variable winning opening 234a (attacker) while aiming for the first variable winning opening 234a (attacker) Also, the addition display of the number of prize balls and the winning notification are performed.

Next, an example will be described in which a left-handed hit is performed instead of a right-handed hit during a big hit game. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 is executed, the example described below may also be executed. Hereinafter, the differences from the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and the overlapping description may be omitted, but the description of the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

FIGS. 195 (4) -2 to (5) -8 shown at the right end are the same as those in FIGS. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -8. Has been started.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 195, and further showing a part of an example when a door opening error occurs during the jackpot game.

FIGS. 196 (5) -9 to (5) -13 following FIGS. 195 (5) -8 are the same as those of FIGS. 193 (5) -9 to (5) -13, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the second round, one ball is won for each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 004515Get.

On the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 196 (5) -14, a first variable winning opening 234a provided in the attacker unit 2340 and a unit general winning opening 2266 are shown. On the left side on the opposite side, one of the four general winning openings 2261 to 2264 (here, the general winning opening 2261) provided in the left region shown in FIG. 175 is shown. In FIG. 196 (5) -14, a left-handed hit is performed where a right-handed hit should be made, and one ball is won in the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area.

In this example, if there is a prize in the general prize opening 2261 provided in the left area during the period when it should be right-handed, the number of prize balls of the prize is not additionally displayed and the prize notification is given. Is not done at all. In FIG. 196 (5) -15, the addition display of the number of prize balls for the prizes to the general prize opening 2261 provided in the left area is not performed, and the notification of the prizes is displayed and the notification is performed by sound. Not. On the other hand, in FIGS. 196 (5) -15, an error notification (warning) such as "Please hit right" is displayed.

FIG. 196 (5) -14'is another example continuing from FIG. 196 (5) -13, and in this example as well, the left-handed hit is performed where the right-handed hit should be made, and the left-handed area is provided. There is one ball in the general winning opening 2261. In FIG. 196 (5) -15', which continues from FIG. 196 (5) -14', contrary to the explanation so far, the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left region is also a general winning opening. The display INH of the prize notification is displayed, and the number of prize balls of the general prize opening 2261 is also additionally displayed. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 196 (5) -15'is from 004515 GET to 004518 GET. It should be noted that the speaker 120 does not output a sound notifying that the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left region has won a prize. However, the winning sound of the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left region may be output. In this case, the winning sound may be the sound B, or may be a sound dedicated to the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left region unlike the sound B. Further, in FIG. 196 (5) -15', an error notification (warning) such as "Right-handed Dakoraa" is suddenly displayed from the character MCK of Mr. Machiko instead of the character BCH of the Bancho. While giving a warning), the addition display of the number of winning balls to the winning in the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area and the notification of the winning are also performed. It should be noted that the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification, which is the winning notification display to the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area, does not overlap with this error notification (warning), and is not overlapped. , Overlap, or may overlap.

Here, for example, the general winning opening 2262 to 2264 may be a general winning opening in which information on the number of prize balls acquired by the winning is not notified at all even if there is a winning. .. Alternatively, of the plurality of general winning openings 2261 to 2262, only the unit general winning opening 2266 may be the target of notification of information regarding the number of prize balls. That is, only the unit general winning opening 2266 may be a general winning opening in which the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed, and may be a general winning opening in which the winning notification is performed.

Next, an example in which a door opening error occurs during the jackpot game will be described. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 is executed, the example described below may also be executed. Hereinafter, the differences from the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and the overlapping description may be omitted, but the description of the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

FIGS. 196 (4) -2 to (5) -8 shown at the right end are the same as those in FIGS. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -8. Has been started.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 196.

FIGS. 197 (5) -9 to (5) -16 following FIGS. 196 (5) -8 are the same as those of FIGS. 193 (5) -9 to (5) -16, and detailed description thereof is omitted. However, at the end of the second round, an over prize has occurred. Further, a door opening error occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (5) -17. That is, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 1 is opened, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 197 (5) to 17 receives an error notification (warning) that "the door is open". The display is displayed in the center of the screen, and a door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (5) -17, the addition display of the number of prize balls for the over winning is performed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004671 Get. Further, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an over-winning notification display ONH'in which the characters "celebration +15" are displayed together with the princess character is displayed. The display ONH'of the over winning notification is displayed in a special mode because it overlaps with the occurrence of the door opening error. That is, the normal display mode is a background color of a certain color shown in FIG. 193 (5) -17, whereas in this special mode, it is a transparent background. At least part of the over-winning notification display ONH'and at least part of the "door is open" error notification (warning) display overlap, but the over-winning notification display ONH'is transparent in a special mode. Since they are the background, they are not difficult to see each other. However, the display of the over-winning notification may be in a normal display mode. It should be noted that at least a part of the over-winning notification display ONH'may overlap with at least a part of the error notification (warning) display that "the door is open", or conversely, "the door is open". At least a part of the error notification (warning) display "Masu" may overlap with at least a part of the over-winning notification display ONH'. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound A, which is an over-winning sound that notifies that there has been an over-winning. This sound A is output from the speaker 120 on the left side, and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120 on the right side. The sound A, which is an over-winning sound, and the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output together or continuously from the left and right speakers 120. Alternatively, the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output with priority in terms of volume or output time over the over winning sound (sound A).

After that, round digestion progressed, and in FIGS. 197 (5) -18, the fifth round was started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a was fully opened. Even when the 5th round is started, the door opening error has not been resolved, and the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" is still displayed in the center of the screen. Further, the door opening sound (warning sound) is still output from the speaker 120. In the following FIG. 197 (5) -19, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a. Further, at this timing, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is closed, and the door opening error is resolved. As a result, the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" disappears, and the output of the door opening sound (warning sound) is finished.

In FIG. 197 (5) -20, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004998 Get. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (5) -20, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches 5,000 balls, and further exceeds 5,000 balls. In addition, the door opening error occurs again, and in FIG. 197 (5) -20, the door opening sound (warning sound) is first output from the speaker 120.

Then, with a slight delay, as shown in FIG. 197 (5) -21, an error notification (warning) message "The door is open" is displayed in the center of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The error notification (warning) may be displayed at the same time as the output of the door opening sound (warning sound), or may be displayed before the output of the door opening sound (warning sound). Further, in FIG. 197 (5) -21, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is displayed. Furthermore, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00501 Get, and the number breakthrough display KTH'is also displayed so as to overlap the face part of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko. This drill number breakthrough display KTH'is displayed in a special mode due to the occurrence of the door opening error and the display timing overlapping. That is, while the normal display mode is the display mode in which the panda character shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21 is shown, the panda character is not shown in this special mode, and "5000 breakthrough". The character display of "" is also somewhat small. The display of the number of holes exceeded is displayed by changing the display mode so as not to overlap with the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" and changing the display position. However, the drill number breakthrough display may be displayed in a normal display mode or at a normal display position. In addition, at least a part of the drill number breakthrough display KTH'may overlap with at least a part of the error notification (warning) display that "the door is open", or conversely, "the door is open". At least a part of the error notification (warning) display may overlap with at least a part of the drill number breakthrough display KTH'. In addition, the display of the number of drilled balls KTH'and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls (display of "005001Get)) do not overlap. Also, from the speaker 120, a special sound congratulating that the cumulative number of prize balls has exceeded 5000 balls. D is output. This special sound D is output from the left speaker 120, and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the right speaker 120. The special sound D is output from the left and right speakers 120. , The door opening sound (warning sound) may be output together, or may be output alternately. Further, only one of the special sound D and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output. The other may not be output, or the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output with priority over the special sound D in terms of volume or output time. A sound B for notifying that a prize has been won may also be output to the unit general prize opening 2266.

Eventually, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is closed, and the door opening error is resolved. As a result, the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" disappears, and the output of the door opening sound (warning sound) ends.

FIG. 197 (5) -22 to FIG. (1) -8 is the same as FIG. 194 (5) -22 to FIG. The symbol variation display is performed during the period during which the symbol variation display of the special figure for the first 10 times is performed, and the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change and electric support state) is performed.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 197, and further showing a part of an example in the case where a plate full tank error occurs during the jackpot game.

FIGS. 198 (1) -9 to (1) -17 following FIGS. 197 (1) -8 are the same as those of FIGS. 194 (1) -9 to (1) -17, and detailed description thereof is omitted. However, the ST period has ended, and the electric support period has also ended.

Next, an example in which a plate full tank error occurs during the jackpot game will be described. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 is executed, the example described below may also be executed. Hereinafter, the differences from the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and the overlapping description may be omitted, but the description of the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

FIGS. 198 (4) -2 to (5) -7 are the same as those of FIGS. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -7, and although detailed description is omitted, the first round is started. , There is one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266.

A dish full tank error occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (5) -8. That is, the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with the game ball, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (5) -8 is notified with an error "Please pull out the ball" (warning). Is displayed, and a ball removal sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (5) -8, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is displayed, and the cumulative number of prize balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The number of prize balls for winning one ball to the unit general prize opening 2266 is added to the display of, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004497 Get. The display of the error notification (warning) "Please pull out the ball", the display INH of the general prize opening prize notification, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls do not overlap, and the three types of displays are difficult to see. Not. Only a part of the error notification (warning) display "Please pull out the ball" overlaps with the face part of Machiko's character MCK. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound B notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize. This sound B is output from the speaker 120 on the left side, and the ball removal sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120 on the right side. The winning sound B and the ball removal sound (warning sound) may be output together or continuously from the left and right speakers 120. Before the end of the first round, the ball is pulled out from the lower plate 128 and the plate full tank error is resolved.

198 (5) -9 shows the state of the interval between the first and second rounds, and FIGS. 198 (5) -9 to 198 (5) -16 show the interval between the first and second rounds. -It is the same as Fig. (5) -16, and although detailed explanation is omitted, an over-winning occurs at the end of the second round. Further, at the timing of FIG. 198 (5) -17, the above-mentioned two errors, the door opening error and the dish full tank error, occur. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 198 (5) -17 displays an error notification (warning) that "the door is open" in the center of the screen, and the speaker 120 emits a door opening sound (warning). Sound) is being output. In addition, an error notification (warning) message "Please pull out the ball" is also displayed. Although the ball removal sound (warning sound) is not output from the speaker 120, the ball removal sound (warning sound) may also be output. For example, the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output and then the ball pulling sound (warning sound) may be output, or the door opening sound (warning sound) and the ball pulling sound (warning sound) may be continuously output. You may. Alternatively, the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output with priority in terms of volume or output time over the ball pulling sound (warning sound). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 198 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for the over-winning portion is additionally displayed, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 004671 Get. Further, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an over-winning notification display ONH'in which the characters "celebration +15" are displayed together with the princess character is displayed. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound A, which is an over-winning sound that notifies that there has been an over-winning. This sound A is output from the speaker 120 on the left side, and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120 on the right side. The sound A, which is an over-winning sound, and the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output together or continuously from the left and right speakers 120. The display of the over-winning notification ONH'overlaps the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open", and the display of the error notification (warning) that "please pull out the ball" also overlaps. ing. For this reason, the display ONH'of the over-winning notification is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped even with a transparent background of a special aspect. Therefore, the display position of the over-winning notification display ONH'may be changed to a position that does not overlap with the error display, or the over-winning notification display ONH' may not be displayed. On the other hand, the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" and the display of the error notification (warning) that "please pull out the ball" do not overlap each other, and the visibility is good. However, the display of both error notifications (warnings) may overlap at least partly, and the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" says "please pull out the ball". The display of the error notification (warning) may overlap, or vice versa.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 198.

After that, round digestion progressed, and in FIGS. 199 (5) -18, the fifth round was started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a was fully opened. Even if the 5th round is started, the door opening error and the plate full tank error have not been resolved, and the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" and the error notification that "please pull out the ball" (please pull out the ball) Warning) is still displayed. The display ONH'of the over-winning notification disappears, and these two types of error displays only overlap with the character MCK of Dr. Machiko, and the visibility is good. Further, the door opening sound (warning sound) is still output from the speaker 120. As described above, the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output and then the ball pulling sound (warning sound) may be output, or the door opening sound (warning sound) and the ball pulling sound (warning sound) may be output. You may continue to output alternately.

In the following FIG. 199 (5) -19, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a. Further, at this timing, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is closed, and the door opening error is resolved. As a result, the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" disappears, and the output of the door opening sound (warning sound) is finished. However, even at this timing, the dish full tank error has not been resolved, and the error notification (warning) message "Please pull out the ball" is still displayed. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a ball pulling sound (warning sound) this time.

In FIG. 199 (5) -20, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004998 Get. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (5) -20, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches 5,000 balls, and further exceeds 5,000 balls. In addition, at this timing, the ball is pulled out from the lower plate 128 and the plate full tank error is resolved, the error notification (warning) display "Please pull out the ball" disappears, and the output of the ball pulling sound (warning sound) ends. ing. However, this time, the door opening error occurs again, and in FIG. 199 (5) -20, the door opening sound (warning sound) is first output from the speaker 120.

Then, with a slight delay, as shown in FIG. 199 (5) -21, an error notification (warning) message "The door is open" is displayed in the center of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The error notification (warning) may be displayed at the same time as the output of the door opening sound (warning sound), or may be displayed before the output of the door opening sound (warning sound). Further, in FIG. 199 (5) -21, the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification is displayed. Furthermore, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 00501 Get, and a special mode of the number breakthrough display KTH'is also displayed so as to overlap the face portion of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko. The display mode of this drill number breakthrough display KTH'is changed so as not to overlap with the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open". The display position may also be changed. However, the drill number breakthrough display may be in a normal display mode. In addition, at least a part of the drill number breakthrough display KTH'may overlap with at least a part of the error notification (warning) display that "the door is open", or conversely, "the door is open". At least a part of the error notification (warning) display may overlap with at least a part of the drill number breakthrough display KTH'. On the other hand, the drill number breakthrough display KTH'and the cumulative prize ball number display (display of "005001Get) do not overlap each other. In addition, the cumulative prize ball number exceeded 5000 balls from the speaker 120. A special sound D is output to congratulate the fact. This special sound D is output from the speaker 120 on the left side, and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120 on the right side. From 120, the special sound D and the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output together or alternately. Also, any one of the special sound D and the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output. Only one may be output and the other may not be output. Alternatively, the door opening sound (warning sound) is output in preference to the special sound D in terms of volume or output time. Further, a sound B for notifying that a prize has been won may be output to the unit general prize opening 2266.

If an error notification (warning) message "Please pull out the ball" is displayed, change the display position from the normal display position (see Fig. 199 (5) -19) and display the number of holes. It may be avoided that it overlaps with KTH', or it may overlap with the drill number breakthrough display KTH' without changing the display position. In this case, the display of the error notification (warning) "Please pull out the ball" may overlap with the drill number breakthrough display KTH', or vice versa.

Eventually, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is closed, and the door opening error is resolved. As a result, the display of the error notification (warning) that "the door is open" disappears, and the output of the door opening sound (warning sound) ends.

FIG. 199 (5) -22 to FIG. (1) -8 is the same as FIG. 194 (5) -22 to FIG. The symbol variation display is performed during the period during which the symbol variation display of the special figure for the first 10 times is performed, and the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change and electric support state).

The examples of the door opening error and the dish full tank error have been described above, but the door opening error is more likely to be related to fraudulent activity and is a serious error in the door opening error and the dish full tank error. Further, as an example of a serious error treated in the same manner as the door opening error shown in FIGS. 196 to 199, for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, a clerk It is possible to enumerate errors that cannot be resolved without calling, errors that do not automatically hide (do not disappear) even if the error is resolved. Further, as an example of an error handled in the same manner as the dish full tank error shown in FIGS. 198 to 199, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the error being resolved only by the player. It is possible to list the errors that can be made, the errors that the error display is automatically hidden (disappeared) when the error is resolved, and the like.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example when a power interruption / recovery occurs during a big hit game.

In the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 is executed, the example described below may also be executed. Hereinafter, the differences from the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and the overlapping description may be omitted, but the description of the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

FIGS. 200 (4) -2 to (5) -8 are the same as those in FIGS. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -8, and although detailed description is omitted, the first round is started. ing.

Although a power failure occurs in FIG. 200 (5) -9, the power is immediately turned on and the power is restored as shown in FIG. 200 (5) -10. The first door member 2341ah of the first variable winning opening 234a, which was in the fully open state at the time of power failure, is also in the fully open state at the time of power recovery, until the main control unit 300 sends an attacker closing command after power recovery. , Remains fully open. In FIGS. 200 (5) -10, a display is displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, such as "The power has been turned on, please wait for a while" to notify that the power has been restored and to inform that preparations are being made (hereinafter, Only (called "preparing display") is displayed. In this preparation display, a power recovery command or a normal return command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 to the sub control unit side (first sub control unit 400 and second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. 4). This is the display that was displayed in response to this. Further, as shown in FIG. 200 (5) -10, one ball is won in the unit general winning opening 2266 in the state where the preparation display is displayed.

In FIG. (5) -11, which continues from FIG. 200 (5) -10, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The power recovery command or normal return command transmitted from the main control unit 300 includes information on the number of reserved balls, and the second held number display is a display displayed according to the information on the number of reserved balls. is there. Further, on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 200 (5) -11, a display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, such as "Please hit right", and further, the second The character display "Right-handed" is also displayed below the hold number display. These right-handed displays are displayed according to the launch position command that specifies whether to right-handed or left-handed, which is transmitted from the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. The firing position information may be included in the power recovery command or the normal recovery command.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (5) -12, the character MCK of Mr. Machiko, the start display of the cumulative number of prize balls (000000Get), and the characters "BONUS" are used as the default screen for the jackpot game. The display is displayed, but the number of rounds is not displayed. The power recovery command or the normal return command transmitted from the main control unit 300 includes information on the jackpot game, and the default screen of the jackpot game is a display displayed according to the information on the jackpot game. The character display of "BONUS" is a substitute for the display of the decorative design when a big hit is made (for example, "decoration 7" in FIGS. 200 (5) -8). The information on the jackpot game includes information indicating that the jackpot game was in the state at the time of power failure (before power recovery), but includes information on the jackpot stop symbol, the number of prize balls, and the number of rounds. Therefore, immediately after the power is restored, the start display (000000Get) of the cumulative number of prize balls and the character display of "BONUS" are displayed, and the number of rounds is not displayed. Here, a winning command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to add the number of prize balls to the winning of the unit general winning opening 2266 in the state where the preparation display shown in FIG. 200 (5) -10 is displayed. It comes, but the addition is not displayed at this timing. Even if there is no launch position command, if it can be grasped from the information about the jackpot game that the sub-control unit side 400,500 was in the jackpot game state at the time of power failure (before power recovery), a display prompting right-handed is displayed. It is also possible to display. Even if the power recovery command or normal recovery command does not include various information, the main control unit 300 sent the launch position command when the power was turned on, and the game was in a big hit game state when the power was cut off (before power recovery). If the jackpot command indicating the above and the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of reserved balls at the time of power failure (before power recovery) are transmitted, it is possible to display the display screen shown in FIGS. 200 (5) -11. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 200 (5) -12, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a in a state where the default screen of the big hit game is displayed.

In FIGS. 200 (5) -13, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed according to the winning command of the first variable winning opening 234a from the main control unit 300, and further, the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed. The number of prize balls for is added to the start display of the cumulative number of prize balls, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIGS. 200 (5) to 13 is 0000015Get. However, the winning sound of sound C is not output from the speaker 120. In addition, when the default screen of the jackpot game is displayed and there is a prize in the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266), the cumulative number of winning balls is not added and displayed, and the winning is displayed. Neither notification nor prize notification by sound output is performed.

After that, winning the first variable winning opening 234a continues, and in FIGS. 200 (5) -14, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000120 Get. Further, also in FIG. 200 (5) -14, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a. The prize here is the 10th ball from before the power failure / recovery. That is, one ball is won at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (5) -5 before the power is cut off and restored, and the ninth ball is won after the power is cut off and restored. The main control unit 300 saves the number of winnings in the first round as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption, and in the power recovery processing in step S111 shown in FIG. 6, the recovery data is read out. After that, in the special figure state update process (steps S225 and S227) shown in FIG. 7, when the number of winnings reaches the upper limit before the lapse of a certain opening period, the first door member 2341ah is closed.

In FIG. 200 (5) -15, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is displayed, and further, the number of prize balls for winning the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed, and FIG. 200 (5) -15 shows. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown is 000135 Get. That is, the number of prize balls for winning the first variable winning opening 234a at the timing of FIG. 200 (5) -5 before the power interruption / recovery is not included. In addition, the number of prize balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 before power interruption / recovery is not included. Again, the winning sound of sound C is not output from the speaker 120.

In FIGS. 200 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. Along the way, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a, and the eleventh winning ball (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 200 (5) -17, the number of prize balls for the over-winning amount is additionally displayed, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as 70150 Get. The display ONH of the over-winning notification shown in FIG. 193 (5) -17 is not displayed. Further, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a shown in FIG. 200 (5) -17 has finished the change from the fully open state to the fully closed state and is in the fully closed state. Note that the over-winning sound A is not output from the speaker 120.

In FIGS. 200 (5) -18, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. When the second round is started, the round designation command and the symbol command are transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 200 (5) to 18, the display of 2R and the “decorative diagram 7” which is the stop symbol of the big hit are displayed. However, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls does not include the number of prize balls won before the power failure / recovery, and only the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a acquired after the power failure / recovery. It remains at 001050 Get.

After that, winning of the first variable winning opening 234a continues, and in FIG. 200 (5) -19, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 00285Get. Further, also in FIG. 200 (5) -19, one ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a. The prize here is the 10th ball in the second round. In addition, the unit general winning opening 2266 also has one ball. In FIGS. 200 (5) -20, both the attacker winning notification display ANH and the general winning opening winning notification display INH are displayed. Further, the number of prize balls in the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 are added and displayed at the same time, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00303Get. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has won a prize, and the right speaker 120 indicates that the first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. The sound C to be notified is output.

Over-prize also occurs in FIG. 200 (5) -21 at the end of the second round, but for the over-prize here, as shown in FIG. 200 (5) -22, the over-prize notification Display ONH is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 200 (5) -22 is 000318 Get by adding and displaying the number of prize balls for the over-winning amount. In addition, the over-winning sound A is output from the speaker 120.

In the above-described example, in the round in which the power is cut off or restored, the number of prize balls is added to the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a, but the winning sound is not notified, and the general winning opening (here, here). The addition display of the number of prize balls and the prize notification are not performed for the prizes in the unit general prize opening 2266), and the addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls and the prize notification are turned off from the next round of the round in which the power is cut off or restored.・ Do the same as before the power was restored. This is because the jackpot game (round production) itself has returned to normal after receiving the round designation command and symbol command from the round following the round that was cut off and restored, so the cumulative number of prize balls is added and displayed. And the prize notification is also restored to normal.

In addition, the prize notification (display ONH of the over prize notification and output of the over prize sound) is not performed at least when the over prize is won in the round in which the power is cut off or restored. It is unfortunate for the player that the first door member 2341a closes after a certain opening period elapses before the number of winnings in one round reaches the upper limit. The phenomenon of over-winning is that the game ball tries to win when the attacker tries to close, and the game ball wins when the first door member 2341a tries to close after a certain opening period has passed. It seems like I did. Here, if the cumulative number of prize balls for one round is displayed, the player can determine whether the closing of the first door member 2341a is the closing when the number of winnings reaches the upper limit, or a certain opening period. It is possible to distinguish whether it is closed after the lapse of time, but in the rounds where the power was cut off and restored, the cumulative number of prize balls in one round is not displayed accurately and it is difficult to distinguish, which is unfortunate for the player. For over-prize that may seem, we dare to refrain from notifying the prize.

It should be noted that the winning sound of the general winning opening and the over winning sound may not be output from the round of power interruption / recovery to the end of the big hit game. That is, the sound output may not be restored even after the round following the power cut / restored round. Alternatively, conversely, the sound output may be output regardless of power interruption or power recovery. For example, the sound C may be output, the sound B may be output, and the sound A may be output from the round of power interruption / recovery. In particular, by outputting sound A, which is an over-winning sound, even if the closing of the first door member 2341a looks like a closing after a certain opening period has passed, the over-winning sound In some cases, the profit can be reliably notified.

In addition, the winning notification may not be displayed from the round of power interruption / recovery to the end of the big hit game. For example, the attacker winning notification display ANH, the general winning opening winning notification display INH, and the over winning notification display ONH may not be displayed.

Further, from the round of power interruption / recovery to the end of the big hit game, the winning notification sound may be displayed while the winning notification sound may not be output, or conversely, the winning notification sound may be output while the winning notification sound is output. The winning notification display may not be displayed.

Further, in this example, the general winning opening is the unit general winning opening 2266, but other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be used. Further, in place of the general winning opening, or in addition to the general winning opening, for winning the electric chew DC (second special figure start opening 232), the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. May be done.

Further, in this example, the cumulative number of prize balls after power recovery does not include the number of prize balls acquired before power failure / recovery, but the number of prize balls acquired at the time of power failure is 400,500 on the sub-control unit side. The number is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM, and when the power is restored, the recovery data is read out and the number of prize balls won before the power failure / recovery is included in the cumulative number of prize balls after the power recovery. You may. Alternatively, the main control unit 300 saves the cumulative number of prize balls as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM at the time of power failure, reads the recovery data at the time of power recovery, and acquires the value before power failure / recovery. The number of prize balls may be included in the cumulative number of prize balls after the power is restored. In these cases, from the round of power failure / recovery, the number of prize balls won before power failure / recovery may be included in the cumulative number of prize balls after power recovery, or after the round of power failure / recovery. From the round of, the number of prize balls won before power failure / recovery may be included in the cumulative number of prize balls after power recovery.

The examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 200 described above are examples of one pachinko machine 100, and even in one pachinko machine 100 capable of executing each of the examples shown in FIGS. 15 to 174, FIG. 180 ~ The example shown in FIG. 200 is feasible.

Further, as the notification means, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the speaker 120, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, various lamps (LEDs) 442,452, and various effect movable bodies. 224, 224E, 224H, 224Ga to Gd may be used, and these may be used alone or in combination. In addition, as the winning means, there are other attackers (first variable winning opening 234a and / and second variable winning opening 235a), general winning opening 2261 to 2266, and electric chew DC (second special drawing starting opening 232). In addition, the first special figure start port 230 and the normal figure start port 228 may be used. Here, if the winning means is divided into two, a set of attackers (first variable winning opening 234a and / and second variable winning opening 235a), general winning openings 2261 to 2266, and electric chew DC (second variable winning opening DC). It is divided into a group of a special figure start port 232), a first special figure start port 230, and a normal figure start port 228.

Further, in the present invention, in addition to the 1-2 type machines, ST machines, probabilistic machines, and right-handed machines, a small hit lottery is performed if there is no big hit, and a small hit is won with a high probability, and the number of balls is increased by the small hit. It can also be applied to type pachinko machines.

In addition, when the normal drawing start port 228 (gate) is passed a certain number of times (for example, 10 times), prize balls are paid out and a premier production may be performed, but the cumulative number of prize balls is added and displayed. Not done.

In the above description,
"Notification means [for example, any one or two of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or all of them, the speaker 120, etc.] ,
With multiple winning means
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means [for example, an attacker (first variable winning opening 234a and / and a second variable winning opening 235a)].
One of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2266, electric chew DC (second special drawing starting opening 232)].
The notification means is in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as "a certain state") [for example, a big hit game state, a state during the ST period, an electric support (special figure low probability, high probability) state, a big hit. It is a means that can notify information about the number of prize balls acquired in a probability change (high probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure, low probability of special figure) different from that after the end of the game.
The notification means provides information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the first prize means (hereinafter referred to as "first information") [for example, information on the number of prize balls acquired by the attacker]. It is a means that may be notified,
The notification means is information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second prize means (hereinafter, referred to as "second information") [for example, general prize opening acquisition number of prize balls information. ] Is a means that may be notified,
The notification means is the first case in the certain state [for example, when the jackpot game with probability variation shown in FIG. 180 is executed (period), FIGS. 182 (5) -21 to 183 (5). In the case from the round following the round in which the promotion notification is performed to the end of the jackpot game (period) shown in −27, the probability changes due to the V prize shown in FIGS. 184 (5) -23 to FIG. When the jackpot game from the round following the winning round to the end of the jackpot game (period), and when the jackpot game related to the rank-up bonus shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 is executed (period), FIG. 188 (5)-. When the big hit game (5R to 8R to the big hit game end effect) after the continuation of the round shown in FIGS. 25 to 189 (5) -36 is executed (period), FIGS. 191 (5) -2 to 192 (1). The big hit game shown in -9 to the case where the symbol variation display of the first 20 special figures is performed after the big hit game is completed (period), or Fig. 192 (1) -2 to Fig. 192 (1)- When the symbol variation display of the first 20 special figures shown in 9 is performed (a part of the ST period), FIGS. 193 (5) -2 to 194 (1). ) -9 When the symbol variation display of the first 10 special figures is performed after the jackpot game-big hit game is completed (period), or FIGS. 194 (1) -2 to 192 (1). When the probabilistic state in which the symbol variation display of the first 10 special figures is performed after the end of the jackpot game shown in -9 is maintained (ST period), etc.], the first information and the first information are given. It is a means for performing the second information notification (hereinafter referred to as "second notification") [for example, notification by displaying "0000018Get" shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -8].
The notification means is used in the second case in the certain state [for example, when the jackpot game of the jackpot without probability change shown in FIG. 181 is executed, FIGS. 182 (5) -4 to 182 (5) -20. In the case from the start of the 1st round shown to the round in which the probabilistic promotion notification was given (period), from the start of the 1st round shown in FIGS. In the case of (period), when a jackpot game other than the jackpot game related to the rank-up bonus shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 is executed (period), it is shown in FIGS. 188 (5) -4 to (5) -24. When the jackpot game (1R-4R) before the continuation of the round is executed (period), the 21st special feature after the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIGS. 192 (1) -10 to 192 (1) -16. In the case from the start of the symbol variation display in the figure to the end of the ST period (the remaining period of the ST period), the jackpot game shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -10 to 192 (1) -16 is completed. In the case from the start of the 11th special symbol symbol variation display to the end of the 100th special symbol symbol variation display (electric support period), etc.], the second information is not notified. It is a means for performing the notification of the first information (hereinafter, referred to as "first notification") [for example, notification by displaying "0000015Get" shown in FIGS. 181 (5) -8].
The first case and the second case are different cases.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notification means. In addition, the player may easily recognize that it is the first case in the certain state by the second notification. Further, the first case may be conspicuous.

A certain state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. Alternatively, the player may be in an advantageous state (high probability state) after the jackpot game is completed. More specifically, it may be a state of the ST period (a probabilistic state in which the number of games is determined), a probabilistic state, or a time saving state. Furthermore, it may be the state of the ST period + the time saving state.

The first case may be a case where a jackpot game with a probability variation is performed, whereas a second case may be a case where a jackpot game without a probability variation is being performed. Further, the first case is the case after it is suggested that there is a probability variation in one big hit game, whereas the second case is a case after it is suggested that there is a probability variation in one big hit game. It may be the case before it is suggested. In addition, the first case is after the probabilistic promotion is suggested in one big hit game, while the second case is before the probable change promotion is suggested in one big hit game. It may be the case of. Further, the first case may be a case of a big hit game related to a so-called rank-up bonus, whereas the second case may be a case of a big hit game other than the rank-up bonus. In addition, the first case is the case after successful continuous production in the big hit game related to the one rank-up bonus, while the second case is the case after the big hit game related to the one rank-up bonus. It may be the case before the continuous production is successful. Further, the first case is up to a certain number of games (for example, the first 20 times) in the ST period (for example, 100 times in total), whereas the second case is the case in the ST period. It may be after the number of games (for example, the remaining 80 games). Further, the first case may be the case of the ST period, and the second case may be the case of the time saving state after the end of the ST period. Further, the first case may be the case of the ST period, and the second case may be the case of the time saving state after the end of the ST period.

The first winning means may be an attacker, and the second winning means may be a general winning opening. The first winning means may be an attacker, and the second winning means may be a general winning opening provided at a position closest to the attacker among a plurality of general winning openings. The first winning means may be an attacker, and the second winning means may be both a general winning opening and an electric chew (second special drawing starting opening). The first winning means may be an electric chew (second special drawing starting port), and the second winning means may be a general winning opening. The second winning means may be all the general winning openings of the plurality of general winning openings, or the general winning openings provided in the first region (for example, the right side region and the region near the attacker). It may be limited to the general winning opening provided in the second area (for example, the left side area, the area far away from the attacker).

The information regarding the number of acquired prize balls may be a number representing a specific number of prize balls, or a symbol or a symbol representing the number of prize balls. Further, it may be a meter indicating the number of prize balls, a bar display, or a level display. Further, it may be a number representing a number of prize balls different from a specific number of prize balls (for example, a number of prize balls larger or a smaller number than the true number of prize balls). It may be a symbol or a symbol, or it may be a meter, a bar display, or a level display.

In addition, instead of the information regarding the number of prize balls acquired, the information regarding the prize balls may be used. For example, it may be a number representing the number of prize balls, a symbol or a symbol, or a meter, a bar display, or a level display. Further, instead of the information regarding the number of prize balls acquired, the information regarding winning may be used. For example, it may be a number representing the number of winnings, a symbol or a symbol, or a meter display, a bar display, or a level display.

The first information may be notification of the number of prize balls for each prize to the first prize means (for example, +15), or notification of the cumulative total number of prize balls (for example, 2250 Get). There may be. The second information may be notification of the number of prize balls for each prize to the second prize means (for example, +3), or notification of the cumulative total number of prize balls (for example, 33 Get). There may be.

In the second notification, the first information and the second information may be separately notified, or both may be notified together. For example, notification of the cumulative total number of prize balls of the first winning means (for example, 2250 Get, red bar display) and notification of the cumulative total number of prize balls of the second winning means (for example, 33 Get). , Blue bar display) may be notified separately, or both may be notified together (for example, 2283Get, gold bar display).

The second notification, the first notification, the notification by display, the notification by sound, the notification by light, or the notification by a movable body may be used. It may be a notification by a combination of these.

Further, in the first case in the certain state, when the timing of winning the first winning means and the timing of winning the second winning means are the same, the first information The notification may be performed first and the second information may be notified later, or conversely, the second information may be notified first and the first information may be notified later. Good. Alternatively, the notification of the first information and the notification of the second information may be performed at the same time. It should be noted that the notification of the first information may be performed without the notification of the second information, or conversely, only the notification of the second information is performed without the notification of the first information. May be done.

The notifying means may be a means for always notifying information regarding the number of prize balls acquired in the certain state.

Also,
"The first winning means is a winning means whose state changes between a first state [for example, a winning difficult state (fully closed state)] and a second state [for example, a winning easy state (fully open state)]. And
The second state is a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state.
The first winning means is a winning means that repeats the second state a plurality of times [for example, a plurality of rounds] in the first case.
The notification means is a period in which the first winning means is in the first state in the first case (hereinafter, referred to as a "first period") [for example, a period of an interval between rounds, a jackpot game. The second notification may be performed during the period during which the ending effect (ending effect) is performed] [for example, FIGS. 180 (5) -17 to 18 (5) -18, 180 (Fig. 180). 5) -22 to Fig. (5) -23],
The second notification, which may be performed during the first period, is notification of information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second winning means during the first period [for example, , Cumulative prize ball number addition display] [for example, FIG. 180 (5) -23],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the second information is information on the number of prize balls obtained by winning the second prize means in the first case during the period when the first prize means is not in the easy-to-win state. In some cases, it will be.

According to this aspect, the player may not feel that the first winning means is in the period in which the winning easy state is not easy. In addition, the game ball may be launched even during the period when the first winning means is not in the easy winning state.

The notification means may not perform the second notification during the first period, or may always perform the second notification.

In addition, the second notification, which may be performed during the first period, may not be notification of information on the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the second winning means in the first period. It may be present, or the second winning means may always be notified of information on the number of prize balls acquired by winning a prize in the first period.

Also,
"The first winning means is a winning means [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a shown in FIG. 176], which facilitates the entry of the game ball by right-handed hitting.
The second winning means is a winning means [for example, the unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 176] that facilitates the entry of the game ball by hitting right.
The notification means is a means including a display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L].
The display means is a display prompting the player to hit right (hereinafter, referred to as “operation promotion display”) [for example, right-handed notification 1 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2 and FIG. 180 (5) -3. Right-handed notification 2] is a means that can be displayed.
The operation promotion display is a display imitating the first winning means [for example, a display 234ah imitating the first variable winning opening 234] and a display imitating the second winning means [for example, a unit general winning opening]. 2266h] is included in the display.
The operation promotion display prompts the entry of the game ball into the first winning means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player can be made to recognize the first winning means, and the existence of the second winning means, which is an extra winning means, may be hinted at.

The operation promotion display does not have to prompt the winning of the second winning means. The phrase "you do not have to be prompted to win" here means that a display prompting you to win (for example, an arrow indicating the winning trajectory of the ball or a character display such as "Aim for the second winning means") is displayed. There is no such thing.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the operation promotion display.

Also,
The second winning means is a plurality of general winning openings.
The plurality of general winning openings include a general winning opening (hereinafter referred to as "general winning opening for left-handed") that facilitates winning by left-handed.
The plurality of general winning openings include general winning openings that facilitate winning by hitting right.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting the player to hit right (hereinafter, referred to as "operation promotion display").
If there is a prize in the left-handed general winning opening while the display means is displaying the operation promotion display, the display means is required to change the way of hitting to right-handed. Is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
It may be.

Also,
"The first winning means is a winning means that ends the second state when a certain number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as" first number ") [for example, 10 which is the upper limit number] enters. Yes,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the third notification, and is a means capable of executing the third notification.
The notification means is a means capable of executing the fourth notification, and is a means capable of executing the fourth notification.
The third notification is a notification executed when a game ball exceeding the first number of balls enters the first winning means [for example, a sound which is an over winning sound shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -18. Output of A, display of over-winning notification shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17, display of ONH].
The fourth notification is a notification executed every time a game ball enters the second winning means [for example, the output of sound B, which is a general winning opening winning sound shown in FIGS. 185 (5) -12, etc. Display INH of general winning opening winning notification shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12 and the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, if the first winning means is normally fired, the first winning means can be awarded an upper limit number (the first number), and the first winning means can be won. In some cases, the winning means may be over-winned in excess of the first number, and only in this case, the player is pleased with a special notification (third notification), and the second winning means is one prize. It is possible to please the player by notifying each time.

The notification means may be a means for always executing the third notification, and the notification means may be a means for always executing the fourth notification.

Also,
"The third notification is a notification including a sound [for example, sound A which is an over-winning sound shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -18].
The fourth notification is a notification including a sound [for example, sound B which is a general winning opening winning sound shown in FIGS. 185 (5) -12 and the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The pitch of the third notification sound is higher than the pitch of the fourth notification sound.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give the player an uplifting feeling to the over-winning with high rare value.

Also,
"The first information is information on the cumulative total number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the first prize means.
The second information is information on the cumulative total number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second winning means.
The second notification is a notification of the total number obtained by adding the cumulative total number in the first information and the cumulative total number in the second information [for example, the display of "0000018Get" shown in FIG. 180 (5) -8. Notification by]
The fourth notification is a notification different from the notification of the second information [for example, a notification notifying that a prize has been won (output of sound B, display INH of general prize opening prize notification)]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the game table, if the fourth notification is a notification of the cumulative total number of prize balls obtained by winning the second prize means, the second prize means is won. It may be difficult to understand whether or not it is, and it may be possible to make it easy to understand that the second winning means has been won by performing another notification.

The fourth notification may be notification of information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by one winning to the second winning means (for example, notification of +3).

Also,
"The notification means is a means capable of executing the sixth notification, and is a means capable of executing the sixth notification.
The second notification is a notification including a display notification, and is a notification.
The sixth notification is a notification including a display notification, and is a notification.
The sixth notification may be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value [for example, 5000] [for example, FIG. 192 (5) -21. Notification by the display of the number breakthrough display KTH shown in FIG. 19 and notification by the output of the special sound D shown in FIG. 194 (5) -21].
While the display by the sixth notification (hereinafter, referred to as "sixth display") [for example, the drill number breakthrough display KTH shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21] is being displayed, the display by the second notification (hereinafter referred to as the second notification). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second display”) [for example, the display of “005001Get” shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21] is continuously displayed.
The second display and the sixth display do not overlap each other [for example, FIG. 192 (5) -21],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to notify the player that the total number has reached the certain value and to please the player, and at the same time, to grasp the increase in the prize balls during that period.

The first display and the sixth display may overlap. For example, the sixth display may overlap with the first display, and conversely, the first display may overlap with the sixth display. Good.

Here, the sixth notification, which may be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value, is, for example, a notification by a display such as "5000 balls reached". It may be present, or it may be a notification by a display such as "5000 ball breakthrough" that has reached and further broke through.

The notification means may be a means for always executing the sixth notification.

Further, the sixth notification may not be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value, but conversely, the notification is always executed. There may be.

Also,
"The fourth notification is a notification including a display notification [for example, a notification by displaying the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification].
The display by the fourth notification may overlap with the sixth display [for example, FIG. 194 (5) -21],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to conspicuously display that the certain value has been reached.

The display by the fourth notification may not overlap with the sixth display, but conversely, the display by the fourth notification always overlaps with the sixth display. Good.

Also,
"The sixth display is a display including the display of a certain value.
The certain value is a value larger than the value of the maximum number of prize balls obtained in one big hit game including a plurality of rounds [for example, 5000].
The sixth display may overlap with the ball removal display [for example, "please pull out the ball" shown in FIG. 199 (5) -18].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a possibility that a ball removal operation may be required when a large number of prize balls have been obtained, and the player is given a ball when the sixth display overlaps with the ball removal display. It may be possible to remind you that a pulling operation is required.

The sixth display may not overlap with the ball removal display, but conversely, the sixth display may always overlap with the ball removal display.

Also,
"The above-mentioned certain state is a state including a period during which the jackpot game state is executed.
After the power is cut off during the execution of a certain round and the power is restored during the execution of the certain round, the first winning means is applied to the first winning means before the next round of the certain round is started. Even when the number of game balls exceeding the number [for example, the upper limit of 10] has entered, the third notification [for example, the over-winning sound A shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -18] Output, display of over winning notification shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17 ONH display] is not executed [for example, FIG. 200 (5) -17],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"If the game ball enters the second winning means after the power is cut off during the execution of the certain round and the power is restored during the execution of the certain round, it is acquired by the entry of the game ball. The notification of the information regarding the number of prize balls is performed as the second notification [for example, the notification by displaying "000303Get" shown in FIG. 200 (5) -20].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

If there is a prize in the second prize-winning means after the power is cut off during the execution of the certain round and the power is restored during the execution of the certain round, the number of prize balls obtained by the prize is obtained. Information about the above is always notified as the second notification. The second notification may be given for each winning prize.

Also,
"The notification means is a means capable of executing the fifth notification, and is
The fifth notification is executed every time a game ball enters the first winning means until the first number of game balls enters the first winning means [for example, FIG. 187 (Fig. 187). 5) Output of sound C shown in -15, display of attacker winning notification shown in FIG. 187 (5) -15, display of ANH].
The aspect of the third notification [for example, the output of the sound A which is the over winning sound shown in FIG. 187 (5) -18, the display ONH of the over winning notification shown in FIG. 187 (5) -17] and the first. The fifth mode of notification is a different mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the third notification, the fourth notification, and the fifth notification may be used to excite each prize.

The notification means may be a means for always executing the fifth notification.

Also,
"The fifth notification is a notification including a sound notification [for example, the output of the sound C shown in FIGS. 187 (5) -15].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The number of prize balls when one game ball enters the first winning means [for example, 3 balls] rather than the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the second winning means [for example, 3 balls]. A game table characterized by the fact that there are more 15 balls. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to raise the sound of the notification to excite the person with the most prize balls.

Also,
"The first winning means is an attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234a and / and a second variable winning opening 235a].
The second winning means is a winning means different from the attacker [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2266, electric chew DC (second special drawing starting opening 232)].
The first notification is a notification of only the first information.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first notification may be notification of information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering only the first prize means among the plurality of prize means.

Also,
"The second winning means is an electric chew [for example, an electric chew DC].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the second winning means is a variable starting region in which the size of the winning opening changes. On the other hand, when a prize is won in a starting region where the size of the prize opening is constant, the information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the prize need not be notified.

Also,
"The second winning means is a general winning opening [for example, a unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 195, a general winning opening 2265 provided in the right region shown in FIG. 195 (5) -11, FIG. 196 (5). ) -14, the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Equipped with multiple general winning openings,
The second winning means is a general winning opening [for example, the unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 180] among the plurality of general winning openings.
When a game ball enters the certain general winning opening, information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of the game ball is notified as the second notification [for example, FIG. 180 (5) -8). Display of "0000018Get" shown in
When a game ball enters a general winning opening other than the certain general winning opening [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2265] among the plurality of general winning openings, the prize obtained by the entry of the game ball. Information about the number of balls is not notified,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The certain general winning opening may be a general winning opening of a part of a plurality of general winning openings provided in the right region, or the general winning opening provided at the position closest to the first winning means. It may be a winning opening. Alternatively, the certain general winning opening is all of a plurality of general winning openings provided in the right area, and if there is a prize in the general winning opening provided in the left area, the prize ball obtained by the winning. It is not necessary to inform the information about the number. On the contrary, the certain general winning opening is all of a plurality of general winning openings provided in the left area, and if there is a prize in the general winning opening provided in the right area, the prize obtained by the winning. Information on the number of balls does not have to be notified. Further, the certain general winning opening may be a part of the general winning opening provided in the left region.

Also,
"Multiple jackpots [for example, jackpot with probability variation, jackpot without probability variation, jackpot with V winning effect, jackpot related to rank-up bonus]
One of the plurality of jackpots is the first jackpot [for example, a jackpot with probability variation].
One of the plurality of jackpots is a second jackpot [for example, a jackpot without probability change].
The first case is a case where a jackpot game related to the first jackpot [for example, a jackpot game with a probability variation shown in FIG. 180] is executed.
The second case is a case where the big hit game related to the second big hit [for example, the big hit game without probability change shown in FIG. 181] is executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Electric support state [for example, special figure high probability normal figure high probability] is provided,
The certain state includes a period during which the jackpot game is being executed.
In the first case, the period during which the jackpot game is executed [for example, FIGS. 191 (5) -1 to 192 (5) -25] and the period during the electric support state [for example, FIG. 192 (1)-. 1 or a part of the period (hereinafter referred to as "third period") in FIGS. (1) -2 to 192 (1) -16] [For example, FIG. 192 (1) -1 or FIG. (1) -2 to FIG. 192 (1) -9], the game is being executed.
In the second case, the game is executed in a period other than the third period of the electric support state [for example, FIGS. 192 (1) -10 to 192 (1) -16]. Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the number of prize balls acquired by entering the game ball into the electric chew after the big hit game is also added to the cumulative number of prize balls and displayed, the case where the state shifts to the electric support state after the big hit game is in the non-electric support state. It is easier to add and display the cumulative number of prize balls than in the case where there is a case, and the interest of the game may be improved.

here,
With probabilistic state,
The certain state includes a period during which the jackpot game is being executed.
The first case is a case where the game is executed in a part of the period during which the jackpot game is executed and the period in the probabilistic state (hereinafter referred to as "fourth period"). ,
The second case is a case where the game is executed in a period other than the fourth period in the period of the probable change state.
A game table characterized by that.
It may be.

The probabilistic state referred to here is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. Alternatively, when the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of the game ball into the special figure 1 starting port after the big hit game is also added to the cumulative number of prize balls and displayed, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (probability change state and non-electricity state). Although it may be in the support state), it is easier to win a prize in the electric chew with the blade members open than in the special figure 1 starting port, and it is easier to add and display the cumulative number of prize balls. , It is easy to improve the fun of the game by adding and displaying the number of prize balls of the electric chew in the electric support state.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Notification means [for example, any one or two of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or all of them, the speaker 120, etc.] ,
With multiple winning means
It is a game table equipped with
It is possible to shift to the electric support state [for example, special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, etc.].
One of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means [for example, an attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a and / and a second variable winning opening 235a)].
One of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2266, electric chew DC (second special drawing starting opening 232), etc.].
The notification means is in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter, "a certain state [for example, a big hit game state, a state during the ST period, an electric support (special figure low probability normal figure high probability) state, after the big hit game is completed". Is a means capable of notifying information on the number of prize balls acquired in different probabilities (high probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure, low probability of special figure, etc.).
The notification means is information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the first prize means (hereinafter, referred to as "first information [for example, information on the number of prize balls acquired by an attacker]"). Is a means that may notify
The notification means is referred to as information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second prize means (hereinafter, "second information [for example, general prize opening acquisition prize ball number information, etc.]". .) Is a means that may be notified,
The notification means is a special feature for the first 10 times after the fourth period [for example, the jackpot game to the jackpot game shown in FIGS. 193 (5) -2 to 194 (1) -9) in the certain state is completed. Notification of the first information and the second information in [ST period, etc. in which the symbol variation display of the figure is performed] (hereinafter, "second notification [for example," 000018Get "shown in FIG. 180 (5) -8""Notification by display, etc.]").
The notification means is used for the fifth period in the certain state [for example, the symbol variation of the special figure shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -10 to 192 (1) -16, which is the eleventh time after the jackpot game is completed. This is a means for not notifying the second information during the period from the start of the display to the end of the 100th special figure variation display (electric support period, etc.).
The fourth period and the fifth period are different periods.
The fourth period is a period during which the jackpot game is executed (hereinafter, "a jackpot period [for example, a period during which the jackpot game shown in FIGS. 193 (5) -2 to 194 (5) -27" is performed, etc. ] ”) Is included in the period.
The fourth period is a period in which the electric support state and the probabilistic state [for example, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, etc.] (hereinafter, “third period [for example, FIG. 194 (1) -1). It is a period including (ST period, etc.) from the end of the jackpot game to the first 10 special symbol symbol variation displays shown in Fig. (1) -9.
The third period is a period following the jackpot period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 194 (5) -27 to (1) -9, the ST period starts following the end of the jackpot game. Period, etc.],
The fifth period is a period that does not include the jackpot period.
The fifth period is a period in which the electric support state and the non-probability change state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, etc.].
The fifth period is a period following the third period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -9 to 194 (1) -16, the ST period ends (10th special drawing). When the symbol variation display of the 100th special symbol is completed), the electric support period, which is a non-probable electric support state, will be reached until the 100th special symbol variation display is completed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "the first winning means is a winning means [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a shown in FIG. 176, the second variable winning opening 235a, etc.] that facilitates the entry of the game ball by right-handed hitting. ,
The second winning means is a winning means [for example, the unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 176] that facilitates the entry of the game ball by hitting right.
The notification means is a means including a display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.].
The display means is a display prompting the player to hit right (hereinafter, "operation promotion display [for example, right hit notification 1 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2, right hit notification 2 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -3". Etc.] ”) is a means that can be displayed.
The operation promotion display includes a display imitating the first winning means [for example, a display 234ah imitating the first variable winning opening 234] and a display imitating the second winning means [for example, Display 2266h, etc. that imitates the unit general winning opening 2266],
The operation promotion display prompts the entry of the game ball into the first winning means.
The operation promotion display does not prompt the entry of the game ball into the second winning means.
After the jackpot period is started, the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -1 to 3 (5) -3, right when the jackpot game is started. Hit notification 1 and right hit notification 2 are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first winning means changes state between a first state [for example, a winning difficult state (fully closed state)] and a second state [for example, a winning easy state (fully open state)]. It ’s a winning means,
The second state is a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state.
The first winning means is a winning means that repeats the second state a plurality of times [for example, a plurality of rounds] in the jackpot game.
The notification means is a period in which the first winning means is in the first state in the jackpot game (hereinafter, "first period [for example, a period between rounds, a jackpot game end effect (ending effect)). The second notification may be given to [for example, FIGS. 180 (5) -17 to 18 (5) -18, 180 (5)). ) -22 to the same figure (5) -23],
The second notification, which may be performed during the first period, is notification of information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second winning means during the first period [for example, , Additional display of cumulative prize balls],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first winning means ends the second state when a certain number of game balls (hereinafter, referred to as" first number [for example, 10 which is the upper limit number, etc.] ") enters. It ’s a winning means,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the third notification, and is a means capable of executing the third notification.
The notification means is a means capable of executing the fourth notification, and is a means capable of executing the fourth notification.
The third notification is a notification executed when a game ball exceeding the first number of balls enters the first winning means [for example, a sound which is an over winning sound shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -18. Output of A, display of over-winning notification shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17, display of ONH, etc.]
The fourth notification is a notification executed every time a game ball enters the second winning means [for example, the output of sound B, which is a general winning opening winning sound shown in FIGS. 185 (5) -12, etc. FIG. 185 (5) -12 and the like, the display of the general winning opening winning notification INH display, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the third notification is a notification including a sound notification [for example, sound A which is an over-winning sound shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -18].
The fourth notification is a notification including a sound notification [for example, sound B or the like which is a general winning opening winning sound shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The pitch of the third notification sound is higher than the pitch of the fourth notification sound.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first information is information on the cumulative total number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the first prize means.
The second information is information on the cumulative total number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second winning means.
The second notification is a notification of the total number obtained by adding the cumulative total number in the first information and the cumulative total number in the second information [for example, the display of "0000018Get" shown in FIG. 180 (5) -8. Notification by], etc.
The fourth notification is a notification different from the notification of the second information [for example, a notification indicating that a prize has been won (sound B output, display INH of general winning opening prize notification), etc.]. A game table characterized by being. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The notification means is a means capable of executing the sixth notification.
The second notification is a notification including a display notification, and is a notification.
The sixth notification is a notification including a display notification, and is a notification.
The sixth notification may be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value [for example, 5000 or the like] [for example, FIG. 192 (5)-. Notification by the display of the number breakthrough display KTH shown in 21 and notification by the output of the special sound D shown in FIG. 194 (5) -21].
Even during the display by the sixth notification (hereinafter, referred to as "sixth display [for example, the drill number breakthrough display KTH or the like shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21]"), the display by the second notification is displayed. (Hereinafter, "the second display [for example, the display of" 00501Get "shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21]") is continuously displayed.
The second display and the sixth display do not overlap each other [for example, FIG. 192 (5) -21],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the fourth notification is a notification including a display notification [for example, a notification by displaying the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification, etc.].
The display by the fourth notification may overlap with the sixth display [for example, FIG. 194 (5) -21],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display including the display of a certain value.
In the jackpot game, a certain number of rounds [for example, 16 etc.] are executed.
The certain value means that the first number of game balls [for example, the upper limit of 10] has entered the first winning means in each of the certain number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. Number of prize balls obtained in the case [For example, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game (16R) x the maximum number of prizes to be awarded to the attacker in one round (10) x the number of prize balls to be won in the attacker (15)) = 2400] is a value larger than the value [for example, 5000, etc.].
The sixth display may overlap with the ball removal display [for example, the display of "please pull out the ball" shown in FIGS. 199 (5) -18].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "after the power is cut off during the execution of a certain round in the jackpot game and the power is restored during the execution of the certain round, the first round is started before the next round of the certain round is started. Even when a game ball exceeding the first number [for example, the upper limit of 10] has entered the winning means of the third notification [for example, the over shown in FIG. 180 (5) -18]. Output of sound A, which is a winning sound, display of over winning notification shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17, display of ONH, etc.] is not executed [for example, FIG. 200 (5) -17],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "If a game ball enters the second winning means after the power is cut off during the execution of the certain round and the power is restored during the execution of the certain round, the game ball is acquired by the entry of the game ball. The notification of the information regarding the number of prize balls is performed as the second notification [for example, notification by displaying "000303Get" shown in FIG. 200 (5) -20].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The notification means is a means capable of executing the fifth notification, and is
The fifth notification is executed every time a game ball enters the first winning means until the first number of game balls enters the first winning means [for example, FIG. 187 (Fig. 187). 5) Output of sound C shown in -15, display of attacker winning notification shown in FIG. 187 (5) -15, display of ANH, etc.].
Aspects of the third notification [for example, output of sound A which is an over-winning sound shown in FIG. 187 (5) -18, display ONH of over-winning notification shown in FIGS. 187 (5) -17, etc.] and the above. The fifth mode of notification is a different mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the fifth notification is a notification including a sound notification [for example, the output of sound C shown in FIGS. 187 (5) -15].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the first winning means rather than the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the second winning means [for example, three balls, etc.] [For example, 15 balls] is more
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first winning means is an attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234a and / and a second variable winning opening 235a, etc.].
The second winning means is a winning means different from the attacker [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2266, electric chew DC (second special drawing starting opening 232), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The second winning means is an electric chew [for example, an electric chew DC, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second winning means is a general winning opening [for example, a unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 195, a general winning opening 2265 provided in the right region shown in FIG. 195 (5) -11, FIG. 196. (5) General winning openings 2261 provided in the left area shown in -14].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "It has multiple general winning openings,
The second winning means is a general winning opening [for example, the unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 180] among the plurality of general winning openings.
When a game ball enters the certain general winning opening, information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of the game ball is notified as the second notification [for example, FIG. 180 (5) -8). Display of "0000018Get" shown in
When a game ball enters a general winning opening other than the certain general winning opening [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2265, etc.] among the plurality of general winning openings, it is acquired by the entry of the game ball. Information on the number of prize balls is not notified,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Notification means [for example, any one or two of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or all of them, the speaker 120, etc.] ,
With multiple winning means
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means [for example, an attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a and / and a second variable winning opening 235a)].
One of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2266, electric chew DC (second special drawing starting opening 232), etc.].
The notification means is in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter, "a certain state [for example, a big hit game state, a state during the ST period, an electric support (special figure low probability normal figure high probability) state, after the big hit game is completed". Is a means capable of notifying information on the number of prize balls acquired in different probabilities (high probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure, low probability of special figure, etc.).
The notification means is information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the first prize means (hereinafter, referred to as "first information [for example, information on the number of prize balls acquired by an attacker]"). Is a means that may notify
The notification means is referred to as information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second prize means (hereinafter, "second information [for example, general prize opening acquisition prize ball number information, etc.]". .) Is a means that may be notified,
The notification means is a special feature for the first 10 times after the fourth period [for example, the jackpot game to the jackpot game shown in FIGS. 193 (5) -2 to 194 (1) -9) in the certain state is completed. Notification of the first information and the second information in [ST period, etc. in which the symbol variation display of the figure is performed] (hereinafter, "second notification [for example," 000018Get "shown in FIG. 180 (5) -8" , The display of the general winning opening winning notification shown in FIG. 187 (5) -12, the notification by INH, the display of the attacker winning notification, the notification by ANH, etc.] ”.
The fourth period is a period during which the jackpot game is executed (hereinafter, "a jackpot period [for example, a period during which the jackpot game shown in FIGS. 193 (5) -2 to 194 (5) -27" is performed, etc. ] ”) Is included in the period.
The fourth period includes a part of a certain gaming state [for example, a high probability state in a normal figure] which is started after the jackpot period ends (hereinafter, “first period [for example, FIG. 194]”. (1) -1 to the ST period shown in Fig. (1) -9 from the end of the jackpot game to the display of the symbol variation of the first 10 special figures] ".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "The notification means is used after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 194 (1) -10 to FIG. 192 (1) -16 is completed, except for the first period in the certain gaming state. During the period from the start of the 11th special symbol symbol variation display to the end of the 100th special symbol symbol variation display (electric support period), etc.], the second notification is not performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the first winning means is a winning means [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a shown in FIG. 176, the second variable winning opening 235a, etc.] that facilitates the entry of the game ball by right-handed hitting. ,
The second winning means is a winning means [for example, the unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 176] that facilitates the entry of the game ball by hitting right.
Display prompting the player to hit right (hereinafter, "right-handed promotion display [for example, right-handed notification 1 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2, right-handed notification 2 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -3, etc.]" .) Can be displayed,
The right-handed promotion display is a display imitating the first winning means [for example, a display 234ah imitating the first variable winning opening 234] and a display imitating the second winning means [for example, a unit in general. It is a display including the display 2266h etc. that imitates the winning opening 2266.
The right-handed promotion display encourages the entry of the game ball into the first winning means.
The right-handed promotion display does not encourage the entry of the game ball into the second winning means.
After the jackpot period is started, the display of the right-handed promotion display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -1 to (5) -3, when the jackpot game is started. Right-handed notification 1 and right-handed notification 2 are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "an operating means [for example, an effect button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
In the jackpot period, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, "operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 187 (5) -21 and an operation valid period of the chance button 136" The display of the remaining time display meter MT, which indicates the remaining time of, and the display of the round continuation judge effect including the character display of "press", etc.] "may be started.
One of a plurality of aspects [for example, shown in FIG. 187 (5) -23, indicating success, depending on the operation of the operation means after the display of the operation promotion display is started. It can be displayed in the display of the operation response effect, the display of the operation response effect indicating the failure, etc. shown in FIGS. 187 (5) -29].
The second notification includes a display indicating the first information [for example, an attacker winning notification display ANH and the like shown in FIG. 187 (5) -12] and the second information [for example, FIG. 187 (5)-. It is a notification including a display (hereinafter, referred to as "information display") indicating [Display INH, etc. of the general winning opening winning notification shown in 12].
The operation promotion display and the information display may be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, as shown in FIG. 187 (5) -21 and FIG. The display overlaps with the button image 136a of the round continuation judge effect display and the remaining time display meter MT, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it is possible to shift to the "electric support state [for example, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, etc.].
The certain gaming state is the electric support state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first winning means changes state between a first state [for example, a winning difficult state (fully closed state)] and a second state [for example, a winning easy state (fully open state)]. It ’s a winning means,
The second state is a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state.
The first winning means is a winning means that repeats the second state a plurality of times [for example, a plurality of rounds] in the jackpot game.
The notification means is a period in which the first winning means is in the first state in the jackpot game (hereinafter, "second period [for example, a period between rounds, a jackpot game end effect (ending effect)). The second notification may be given to [for example, FIGS. 180 (5) -17 to 18 (5) -18, 180 (5)). ) -22 to the same figure (5) -23],
The second notification, which may be performed during the second period, is notification of information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second winning means during the second period [for example, , Additional display of cumulative prize balls],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the first winning means rather than the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the second winning means [for example, three balls, etc.] [For example, 15 balls, etc.] are more
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first winning means is an attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234a and / and a second variable winning opening 235a, etc.].
The second winning means is a winning means different from the attacker [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2266, electric chew DC (second special drawing starting opening 232), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The second winning means is an electric chew [for example, an electric chew DC, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second winning means is a general winning opening [for example, a unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 195, a general winning opening 2265 provided in the right region shown in FIG. 195 (5) -11, FIG. 196. (5) General winning openings 2261 provided in the left area shown in -14].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "Equipped with multiple general winning openings,
The second winning means is a general winning opening [for example, the unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 180] among the plurality of general winning openings.
When a game ball enters the certain general winning opening, information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of the game ball is notified as the second notification [for example, FIG. 180 (5) -8). Display of "0000018Get" shown in
When a game ball enters a general winning opening other than the certain general winning opening [for example, general winning opening 2261 to 2265, etc.] among the plurality of general winning openings, it is acquired by the entry of the game ball. Information on the number of prize balls is not notified,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
One of the plurality of displays is a mini-game [for example, a mini-game of the "dice slot game" shown in FIGS. 148 (1) -4 to (1) -13].
The mini-game may be started before the reach is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 148 (1) -4 to (2) -1], "Dice slot". The "game" was started before it reached reach, etc.],
An effect according to the result of the certain mini-game [for example, the result of the mini-game shown in FIGS. 148 (1) -4 to (1) -14]] 3) -5 to the super protruding button effect shown in (3) -10 of the same figure] ”) is the decorative symbol that is being executed or is started after the decorative symbol that is being executed. Started in the variable display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 148 (3) -5 to (3) -10, the super protruding button effect starts during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display in which the dice slot game is executed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "The certain effect is an effect that is started after the reach effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 148 (1) -1 to (3) -5, the reach effect is started. After that, the super protruding button production has started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "an operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided.
The certain mini-game is a mini-game using the operation means [for example, the super-protruding button effect shown in FIGS. 148 (3) -5 to (3) -10 uses the effect button 136. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the start of the certain effect is reserved until the result of the certain mini-game is displayed and the certain effect corresponding to the result of the certain mini-game is started. The stock display to be notified is displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (1) -12 to FIG. (3) -5, the dice roll of the dice slot game result "1-1-1" is displayed. The protruding button icon BTP is displayed from the time it is played until the super protruding button effect is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed while the stock display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 148 (4) -2, the jackpot decorative symbol is displayed while the button icon BTN is displayed. May be confirmed by the combination of],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

(Appendix R1-1)
Notification means and
With multiple winning means
It is a game table equipped with
It is possible to shift to the electric support state,
One of the plurality of winning means is the first winning means,
One of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means,
The notifying means is a means capable of notifying information on the number of prize balls acquired in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain state").
The notifying means is a means for notifying information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the first winning means (hereinafter, referred to as "first information").
The notifying means is a means for notifying information on the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second winning means (hereinafter, referred to as "second information").
The notification means is a means for notifying the first information and the second information (hereinafter, referred to as "second notification") during the fourth period in the certain state.
The notification means is a means that does not notify the second information during the fifth period in the certain state.
The fourth period and the fifth period are different periods.
The fourth period is a period including a period during which the jackpot game is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit period").
The fourth period is a period including a period in which the electric support state and the probable change state (hereinafter, referred to as "third period").
The third period is a period following the jackpot period.
The fifth period is a period that does not include the jackpot period.
The fifth period is a period in which the electric support state and the non-probability change state are present.
The fifth period is a period following the third period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-2)
The game console described in Appendix R1-1.
The first winning means is a winning means that facilitates the entry of a game ball by hitting right.
The second winning means is a winning means that facilitates the entry of a game ball by hitting right.
The notification means is a means including a display means, and is a means including a display means.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting the player to hit right (hereinafter, referred to as "operation promotion display").
The operation promotion display is a display including a display imitating the first winning means and a display imitating the second winning means.
The operation promotion display prompts the entry of the game ball into the first winning means.
The operation promotion display does not prompt the entry of the game ball into the second winning means.
After the jackpot period is started, the display of the operation promotion display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-3)
The game console described in Appendix R1-1 or R1-2.
The first winning means is a winning means that changes state between the first state and the second state.
The second state is a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state.
The first winning means is a winning means that repeats the second state a plurality of times in the jackpot game.
The notification means may perform the second notification during the period in which the first winning means is in the first state (hereinafter, referred to as "first period") in the jackpot game. And
The second notification, which may be performed during the first period, is notification of information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second winning means during the first period. In some cases,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-4)
The game console described in Appendix R1-3.
The first winning means is a winning means that ends the second state when a certain number of game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "first number") enters.
The notification means is a means capable of executing the third notification, and is a means capable of executing the third notification.
The notification means is a means capable of executing the fourth notification, and is a means capable of executing the fourth notification.
The third notification is a notification executed when a game ball exceeding the first number of balls enters the first winning means.
The fourth notification is a notification executed every time a game ball enters the second winning means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-5)
The game console described in Appendix R1-4.
The third notification is a notification including a sound notification, and is a notification including a sound notification.
The fourth notification is a notification including a sound notification.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-6)
The game console described in Appendix R1-5.
Of the pitch of the third notification sound and the pitch of the fourth notification sound, the pitch of the third notification sound is higher.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-7)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R1-4 to R1-6.
The first information is information on the cumulative total number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the first prize means.
The second information is information on the cumulative total number of prize balls acquired by the game ball entering the second winning means.
The second notification is a notification of the total number obtained by adding the cumulative total number in the first information and the cumulative total number in the second information.
The fourth notification is different from the notification of the second information.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-8)
The game console described in Appendix R1-7.
The notification means is a means capable of executing the sixth notification, and is a means capable of executing the sixth notification.
The second notification is a notification including a display notification, and is a notification.
The sixth notification is a notification including a display notification, and is a notification.
The sixth notification is a notification that may be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value.
While the display by the sixth notification (hereinafter, referred to as "sixth display") is being displayed, the display by the second notification (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") is continuously displayed.
The second display and the sixth display do not overlap each other.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-9)
The game console described in Appendix R1-8.
The fourth notification is a notification including a display notification, and is a notification.
The display by the fourth notification may overlap with the sixth display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-10)
The game console according to Appendix R1-8 or R1-9.
The sixth display is a display including the display of a certain value.
In the jackpot game, a certain number of rounds are executed,
The certain value is based on the value of the number of prize balls obtained when the first number of game balls enter the first winning means in each of the certain number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. Is also a large value,
The sixth display may overlap with the ball-less display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R1-4 to R1-10.
The first winning means after the power is cut off during the execution of a certain round in the jackpot game and the power is restored during the execution of the certain round, before the next round of the certain round is started. Even if more than the first number of game balls enter the game, the third notification is not executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-12)
The game console described in Appendix R1-11.
If the game ball enters the second winning means after the power is cut off during the execution of the certain round and the power is restored during the execution of the certain round, the prize obtained by the entry of the game ball Notification of information on the number of balls is performed as the second notification.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-13)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R1-4 to R1-12.
The notification means is a means capable of executing the fifth notification, and is a means capable of executing the fifth notification.
The fifth notification is a notification executed every time a game ball enters the first winning means until the first number of game balls enters the first winning means.
The third mode of notification and the fifth mode of notification are different modes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-14)
The game console described in Appendix R1-13.
The fifth notification is a notification including a sound notification.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-15)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R1-1 to R1-14.
The number of prize balls when one game ball enters the first winning means is larger than the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the second winning means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-16)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R1-1 to R1-15.
The first winning means is an attacker,
The second winning means is a winning means different from the attacker.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-17)
The game console described in Appendix R1-16.
The second winning means is an electric chew.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-18)
The game console described in Appendix R1-16.
The second winning means is a general winning opening.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-19)
The game console described in Appendix R1-16.
Equipped with multiple general winning openings
The second winning means is a general winning opening among the plurality of general winning openings.
When a game ball enters the certain general winning opening, information regarding the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of the game ball is notified as the second notification.
When a game ball enters a general winning opening other than the certain general winning opening among the plurality of general winning openings, information on the number of winning balls acquired by the entry of the game ball is not notified. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-20)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R1-1 to R1-19.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

FIG. 201 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 201, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

In addition, the mode in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and further, the mode in which the touch panel is provided on the display means 903. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operating means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous stroke operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured so that there are many effects to be activated, or may be configured so that there are few effects. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be small in number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 201 encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine to use the enclosed ball as a launching ball and pays out the ball. May be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary barrel game machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 202. Here, FIG. 202 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 202 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 202), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the inserted medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 203 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 3B has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements contained only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance button 208L 1st decorative symbol display device 208M 2nd decorative symbol display device 208N 3rd decorative symbol display device 212 1st special symbol display device 214 2nd special symbol display device 224 Directing movable body 224E Family crest Object 2261 to 2266 General winning opening 2266 Unit general winning opening 230 1st special drawing starting port 232 2nd special drawing starting port 2340 Attacker unit 234a 1st variable winning opening 235a 2nd variable winning opening 2340g V passage 246 Shielding device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Game board lamp 542 Game table frame lamp KTH Number breakthrough display INH General winning opening winning notification display INH2 General winning opening winning notification revival display ANH Attacker winning notification display ONH Over winning notification display ONH2 Over winning notification Display revival display

Claims (6)

It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple displays.
One of the plurality of displays is a mini-game.
The mini-game may start before the reach is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display.
The effect according to the result of the certain mini-game (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect") is the decorative symbol variation display that is being executed or the decorative symbol variation display that is started after the execution decorative symbol variation display. Started at,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The certain effect is an effect that is started after the reach effect is started.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The certain mini-game is a mini-game using the operating means.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
Stock notifying that the start of the certain effect is reserved in the period until the result of the certain mini-game is displayed and the certain effect according to the result of the certain mini-game is started. The display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 4.
The jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed while the stock display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Images